Configuration Guide(V100R006C001 02)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800V100R006C01

Configuration Guide

Issue 02

Date 2011-10-31

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 8800 V100R006C01



iManager U2000 V100R005C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R005C00

Intended AudienceThis document describes how to configure optical network elements, WDM services, andEthernet services.

This document is intended for:

l Installation and commissioning engineers

l Data configuration engineers

l System maintenance engineers

Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide About This Document


ii

Symbol Description

WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.

TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

GUI ConventionsThe GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product VersionV100R006C01

This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01.Compared with the issue 01, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

2 ConfiguringWDM Services(Manually byStation)

l 2.1.3 Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) ismodified.

l 2.1.4 ODUflex is modified.



iii

Update Description

5.7 ApplicationScenario 5:ODUflex Non-ConvergenceMode

l 5.7.3 Configuration Process is modified.

6.6 ApplicationScenario 4:ConversionBetween Two3G-SDI Servicesand One OTU2Optical Signals

l 6.6.3 Configuration Process is modified.


This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01. Comparedwith the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00, the manual of this issue provides thefollowing updates.

Update Description

Whole manual l Structure is adjusted.l The title of some charpters are changed.l 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This

Manual is added.l 6 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station) is added.l 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package) is

added.l The charpter Managing NE Power Consumption removes to

Commissioning Guide.


l 2.1.3 Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) isadded.

l 2.1.4 ODUflex is added.l The charpter Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and

Line Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is deleted.

5 Configuringthe THA/TOABoard(Manually byStation)

l 5.2 Configuration Procedures is added.l 5.7 Application Scenario 5: ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode is

added.



iv

Update Description

11 Modifying theConfigurationData

"Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service" and"Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service" are deleted.

12ConfigurationTasks

12.1 Configuring Working Modes is added.


This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Comparedwith the issue 02, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual l Structure is adjusted.l The charpter Managing NE Power Consumption removes to

Commissioning Guide.


l The charpter Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards andLine Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is deleted.

5 Configuringthe THA/TOABoard(Manually byStation)

l 5.2 Configuration Procedures is added.

11 Modifying theConfigurationData

"Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service" and"Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service" are deleted.

12ConfigurationTasks

12.1 Configuring Working Modes is added.





v

Update Description

Whole manual Add the chapter 5 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually byStation).


This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Comparedwith the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00, the manual of this issue provides thefollowing updates.

Update Description

Whole manual l Delete the "WDM Network Management Process".l Delete the "Quick Guide".l Delete the "Creating a Network".l Delete the "Performance Management".l Delete the "Configuring Wavelength Grooming".l Delete the "Configuring Broadcast Data Port Services".l Delete the "Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data".


The name of the chapter is changed from "Configuring WDM Services"to "Configuring WDM Services (By Station)".

8 ConfiguringWDM Services(by Trail)

Make configuring WDM Services by trail as an independent chapter.


This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00.Compared with the issue 03, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.



vi

Update Description

Whole manual l Delete the "WDM Network Management Process".l Delete the "Quick Guide".l Delete the "Creating a Network".l Delete the "Performance Management".l Delete the "Configuring Wavelength Grooming".l Delete the "Configuring Broadcast Data Port Services".l Delete the "Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data".


The name of the chapter is changed from "Configuring WDM Services"to "Configuring WDM Services (By Station)".

8 ConfiguringWDM Services(by Trail)

Make configuring WDM Services by trail as an independent chapter.


Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.



Update Description

ConfiguringWDM Servicesfor TributaryBoards and LineBoards (withODUK SNCPProtection)

Modify the "service signal flow".



vii

Update Description

8.3ConfigurationExample

Modify the "configuration process".

10.6ConfigurationExample:ConfiguringEPL Services

Modify the "configuration process".


This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In thisrelease, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04,and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.

Update Description

Whole manual This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiXOSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800A, and OptiX OSN 3800A. Any differencebetween the products is described in the manual.

Enabling the PortBlockingFunction

Enabling the Port Blocking Function is added.

8.2 CreatingOCh Trails byTrail Search

8.2 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search is added.



viii

Update Description

2.3 ConfiguringWDM Servicesfor OTU BoardsWithout Cross-ConnectCapability2.4 ConfiguringWDM Servicesfor OTU Boardswith Cross-ConnectCapability2.5 ConfiguringWDM Servicesfor TributaryBoards and LineBoards2.6 ConfiguringWDM Servicesfor Boards withthe Layer 2SwitchingFunction

2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without Cross-Connect Capability, 2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boardswith Cross-Connect Capability, 2.5 Configuring WDM Services forTributary Boards and Line Boards, and 2.6 Configuring WDMServices for Boards with the Layer 2 Switching Function are added.

8.4 Parameters:End to EndServiceConfiguration

8.4 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration is added.

ConfiguringWDM Servicesfor TributaryBoards and LineBoards (withODUK SNCPProtection)

Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards (withODUK SNCP Protection) is added.

8.3ConfigurationExample

The name of the section is changed from "Configuring End-to-End GEServices" to "Configuring GE Services (By Trail)".



ix

Update Description

Configuring theTransparentTransmission ofthe GE ServiceConfiguring theTransparentTransmission ofthe SAN ServicesConfiguring theTransparentTransmission ofthe OTN ServiceConfiguring theTransparentTransmission ofthe SDH Services

Sections "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service","Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services","Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service", and"Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services" aredeleted.



x

Update Description

10.8ConfigurationExample:ConfiguringEPLAN Services(IEEE 802.1dBridge) on aWDM Network10.9ConfigurationExample:ConfiguringEVPLANServices (IEEE802.1q Bridge)on a WDMNetwork10.10ConfigurationExample:ConfiguringEVPLANServices (IEEE802.1 ad Bridge)on a WDMNetwork10.11ConfigurationExample:ConfiguringEVPL andEVPLANServices (IEEE802.1q Bridge)on a WDMNetwork

10.8 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE802.1d Bridge) on a WDM Network, 10.9 Configuration Example:Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDMNetwork, 10.10 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLANServices (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge) on a WDM Network, and 10.11Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services(IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network are added.

Configuring theReceiveWavelength ofBoards

Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards is added.



xi

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This Manual..............................1

2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)...............................................................42.1 Basic Concepts...................................................................................................................................................5

2.1.1 Electrical Cross-Connections....................................................................................................................52.1.2 Service Types............................................................................................................................................92.1.3 Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode)...........................................................................182.1.4 ODUflex..................................................................................................................................................24

2.2 WDM Service Configuration Flow..................................................................................................................272.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without Cross-Connect Capability.........................................31

2.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................312.3.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................322.3.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................32

2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with Cross-Connect Capability...............................................332.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................332.4.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................342.4.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................34

2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards...............................................................372.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................382.5.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................382.5.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................39

2.6 Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2 Switching Function...............................................442.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................442.6.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................452.6.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................45

2.7 Configuring 10GE LAN Services by Using the TDX and NS2 Boards...........................................................492.7.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................502.7.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................502.7.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................52

2.8 Parameters........................................................................................................................................................552.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration..................................................................................................552.8.2 WDM Timeslot Configuration................................................................................................................57

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide Contents


xii

3 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station)..................................................593.1 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals..........61


3.2 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals................................................................................................................................................................................65


3.3 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Four Any Services and Four OTU1 Optical Signals...............693.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................693.3.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................703.3.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................71

3.4 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Seven Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal...............733.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................733.4.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................743.4.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................75

3.5 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal and Dual Feedingand Selective Receiving on the WDM Side...........................................................................................................78


4 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (Manually by Station)..................................................854.1 Overview of the Working Modes.....................................................................................................................884.2 Configuration Principles...................................................................................................................................894.3 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Two ODU0 or One ODU1 ElectricalSignals....................................................................................................................................................................90


4.4 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal (with ODU0Mapping)................................................................................................................................................................96


4.5 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and One ODU1 Electrical Signal..........1014.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................1014.5.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................1024.5.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................103

4.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal (with ODU1Mapping)..............................................................................................................................................................105

4.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................105



xiii

4.6.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................1064.6.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................107

4.7 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Eight ODU0 or Four ODU1 ElectricalSignals..................................................................................................................................................................110

4.7.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................1104.7.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................1114.7.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................112

4.8 Application Scenario 6: Conversion Between Four Any Services and Two OTU1 Optical Signals.............1164.8.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................1164.8.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................1174.8.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................118

4.9 Application Scenario 7: Conversion Between Eight Any or Four OTU1 Services and Four ODU1 ElectricalSignals..................................................................................................................................................................121


4.10 Application Scenario 8: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Services and Eight ODU0 Electrical Signals..............................................................................................................................................................................126

4.10.1 Configuration Networking Diagram....................................................................................................1264.10.2 Service Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................1274.10.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................127

4.11 Application Scenario 9: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Eight ODU0 Electrical Signals(Through Any Re-Encapsulation)........................................................................................................................129


4.12 Application Scenario 10: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals(Through Any Re-Encapsulation)........................................................................................................................134


4.13 Application Scenario 11: Conversion Between Two OTU1 Optical Signals and Two OTU1 Optical Signals(Through Any Re-Encapsulation)........................................................................................................................138


4.14 Application Scenario 12: Regeneration of Four OTU1 Optical Signals......................................................1434.14.1 Configuration Networking Diagram....................................................................................................1434.14.2 Service Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................1444.14.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................145

5 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)................................................1485.1 Overview of the Working Mode.....................................................................................................................1505.2 Configuration Procedures...............................................................................................................................1505.3 Application Scenario 1: ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode..............................................................................162



xiv

5.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................1625.3.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................1635.3.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................164

5.4 Application Scenario 2: ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode..............................................................................1645.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................1645.4.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................1655.4.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................166

5.5 Application Scenario 3: ODU1 Convergence Mode......................................................................................1665.5.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................1675.5.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................1675.5.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................168

5.6 Application Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 Mode................................................................................................1695.6.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................1695.6.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................1705.6.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................170

5.7 Application Scenario 5: ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode..........................................................................1715.7.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................1715.7.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................1725.7.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................172

6 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)...........................................................1746.1 Overview of the Working Mode.....................................................................................................................1766.2 Configuration Procedures...............................................................................................................................1766.3 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals (with ODU0Mapping)..............................................................................................................................................................187


6.4 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Four Any Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals..............1916.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................1916.4.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................1926.4.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................193

6.5 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals (with ODU0Mapping)..............................................................................................................................................................194


6.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Two 3G-SDI Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals........1976.6.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................1976.6.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................1986.6.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................199

6.7 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between One FC800 Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals...........2006.7.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................2016.7.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................201



xv

6.7.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................202

7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)...............................................2047.1 Overview of the Service Packages.................................................................................................................205

7.1.1 Service Packages for the TN52TOM Board..........................................................................................2057.1.2 Service Packages for the THA/TOA Board...........................................................................................2117.1.3 Service Packages for the LOA Board....................................................................................................212

7.2 Configuring Service Packages........................................................................................................................213

8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)..................................................................................2188.1 WDM Trail.....................................................................................................................................................2198.2 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search..............................................................................................................2238.3 Configuration Example...................................................................................................................................225


8.4 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration..............................................................................................230

9 Configuring SDH Services......................................................................................................2349.1 SDH Service Configuration Process...............................................................................................................2369.2 SDH Service Overhead...................................................................................................................................236

9.2.1 Trace Byte..............................................................................................................................................2379.2.2 Signal Label Byte..................................................................................................................................237

9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring.........................................................................................2379.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................2379.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................2389.3.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................239

9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services..........................................................................................................2439.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................2439.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................2439.4.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................245

9.5 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Services......................................................................2529.5.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................2539.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................2539.5.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................254

9.6 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring Services..............................................................................................2599.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................2609.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.......................................................................................2619.6.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................262

9.7 Parameter........................................................................................................................................................2679.7.1 SDH Service Configuration...................................................................................................................2679.7.2 SNCP Service Control...........................................................................................................................2689.7.3 VC4 Path Overhead...............................................................................................................................270

10 Configuring Ethernet Services..............................................................................................275



xvi

10.1 Ethernet Service Types.................................................................................................................................27810.1.1 Ethernet Private Line Service..............................................................................................................27810.1.2 Ethernet LAN Service.........................................................................................................................279

10.2 Basic Concepts.............................................................................................................................................28210.2.1 Tag Attributes......................................................................................................................................28210.2.2 VLAN Group.......................................................................................................................................28310.2.3 QinQ....................................................................................................................................................28410.2.4 MAC Address Filtering.......................................................................................................................28510.2.5 IGMP Snooping...................................................................................................................................28610.2.6 STP/RSTP/MSTP................................................................................................................................289

10.3 Configuration Process of Ethernet Services.................................................................................................29210.3.1 EPL Service Configuration Process....................................................................................................29210.3.2 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process.....................................................................................29310.3.3 EPLAN Service Configuration Process...............................................................................................294

10.4 Configuring Ethernet Services in an OTN System.......................................................................................29510.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections on an Ethernet Board.............................................................................29510.4.2 Creating EPL Services.........................................................................................................................29710.4.3 Creating EPLAN Services...................................................................................................................29910.4.4 Creating VLANs Filtering...................................................................................................................30110.4.5 Creating VLAN Unicast......................................................................................................................30210.4.6 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses..............................................................................30310.4.7 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services.........................................................................................................304

10.5 Configuring Ethernet Services in an OCS System.......................................................................................30610.5.1 Creating Cross-Connections Between an Ethernet Board and a Line Board......................................30610.5.2 Creating EPL Services.........................................................................................................................30710.5.3 Creating EPLAN Services...................................................................................................................30810.5.4 Creating VLANs Filtering...................................................................................................................30910.5.5 Creating VLAN Unicast......................................................................................................................31010.5.6 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses..............................................................................31110.5.7 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services.........................................................................................................31210.5.8 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services.........................................................................................................314

10.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services....................................................................................31510.6.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................31510.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation................................................................................31610.6.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................318

10.7 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM Network...................................32310.7.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................32310.7.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation................................................................................32410.7.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................326

10.8 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a WDM Network........32910.8.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................32910.8.2 Service Signals Flow and Wavelength Allocation..............................................................................330



xvii

10.8.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................33210.9 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network..............................................................................................................................................................................337

10.9.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................33710.9.2 Service Signals Flow...........................................................................................................................33810.9.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................340

10.10 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge) on a WDM Network..............................................................................................................................................................................346

10.10.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................34610.10.2 Service Signals Flow and Wavelength Allocation............................................................................34710.10.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................349

10.11 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDMNetwork................................................................................................................................................................355

10.11.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................35510.11.2 Service Signals Flow.........................................................................................................................35610.11.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................359

10.12 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services on a SDH Network..................................................36010.12.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................36010.12.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................36110.12.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................363

10.13 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a SDH Network...................................37210.13.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................37210.13.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................37410.13.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................376

10.14 Configuration Example: Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services on a SDH Network.........38310.14.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................38310.14.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................38410.14.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................386

10.15 Configuration Example: Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services on a SDH Network...............39610.15.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................39610.15.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................39710.15.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................399

10.16 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a SDH Network..............................................................................................................................................................................407

10.16.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................40710.16.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................40810.16.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................410

10.17 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH Network..............................................................................................................................................................................419


10.18 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge) on a SDH Network..............................................................................................................................................................................436



xviii


10.19 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDHNetwork................................................................................................................................................................451


10.20 Parameters..................................................................................................................................................45610.20.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Port).....................................................................................45710.20.2 Parameters: Basic Attributes (Internal Port)......................................................................................45810.20.3 Parameters: Flow Control (External Port).........................................................................................45910.20.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Port).............................................................................45910.20.5 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (Internal Port)..............................................................................46010.20.6 Parameters: TAG Attributes..............................................................................................................46010.20.7 Parameters: Network Attributes........................................................................................................46210.20.8 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.....................................................................................................46210.20.9 Parameters: VLAN Group.................................................................................................................46610.20.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service..................................................................................................46710.20.11 Parameters: Aging Time..................................................................................................................47310.20.12 Parameters: VLAN Unicast.............................................................................................................47410.20.13 Parameters: Port Mirroring..............................................................................................................47410.20.14 Parameters: Ethernet Test................................................................................................................47410.20.15 Parameters: Protocol Fault Management.........................................................................................47710.20.16 Parameters: Port MAC Address Filtering........................................................................................477

11 Modifying the Configuration Data......................................................................................47911.1 Modifying Port.............................................................................................................................................48011.2 Modifying the Services Configuration.........................................................................................................481

11.2.1 Deactivating Cross-Connection Service..............................................................................................48111.2.2 Deleting Cross-Connections................................................................................................................48211.2.3 Modifying SDH Services.....................................................................................................................48311.2.4 Deleting SDH Services........................................................................................................................48411.2.5 Converting a Non-Protection Service to an SNCP Service.................................................................48511.2.6 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection Service.................................................................486

11.3 Conversion Between EPL Ethernet Services and VLAN SNCP Services...................................................48711.3.1 Converting an EPL Ethernet Service to a VLAN SNCP Service........................................................48711.3.2 Converting a VLAN SNCP Service to an EPL Ethernet Service........................................................48911.3.3 Deleting EPL Services.........................................................................................................................49011.3.4 Deleting EVPL (QinQ) Services.........................................................................................................49111.3.5 Deleting EPLAN Services...................................................................................................................49111.3.6 Modifying a VLAN Group..................................................................................................................49211.3.7 Deleting a VLAN Group.....................................................................................................................493



xix

12 Configuration Tasks...............................................................................................................49512.1 Configuring Working Modes........................................................................................................................49712.2 Configuring the Service Type.......................................................................................................................49712.3 Configuring the Service Mode.....................................................................................................................49912.4 Configuring Common Cross-Connections...................................................................................................499

12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections................................................................................................................50012.4.2 Activating Cross-Connections.............................................................................................................502

12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.....................................................................................................................50312.6 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections..........................................................................................................504

12.6.1 Querying the Lower Order Cross-Connection Capacity.....................................................................50412.6.2 Creating SDH Cross-Connections.......................................................................................................505

12.7 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services.............................................................................................50612.7.1 Configuring Trace Byte.......................................................................................................................50612.7.2 Configuring C2 Byte...........................................................................................................................507

12.8 Configuring the Board Mode........................................................................................................................50812.9 Creating a VLAN Group..............................................................................................................................50912.10 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses.....................................................................................51012.11 Configuring MAC Address Filtering..........................................................................................................511

12.11.1 Adding the MAC Address of the Opposite Router............................................................................51112.11.2 Deleting the MAC Address of the Opposite Router..........................................................................513

12.12 Configuring Port Mirroring........................................................................................................................51412.13 Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults..........................................................................................................51512.14 Configuring Non-Intrusive Monitoring......................................................................................................515

A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................517A.1 Enabled/Disabled ..........................................................................................................................................519A.2 Max. Frame Length ......................................................................................................................................519A.3 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode ...................................................................................................520A.4 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode ............................................................................................................521A.5 MAC Loopback ............................................................................................................................................522A.6 PHY Loopback .............................................................................................................................................523A.7 QinQ Type Area............................................................................................................................................524A.8 Port (Ethernet Port Attribute) .......................................................................................................................525A.9 Port Physical Parameters (Ethernet Port Attribute).......................................................................................525A.10 Working Mode.............................................................................................................................................528A.11 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold....................................................................................................529A.12 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression .....................................................................................................531A.13 Default VLAN ID .......................................................................................................................................532A.14 VLAN Priority ............................................................................................................................................532A.15 Entry Detection ...........................................................................................................................................533A.16 Tag Identifier...............................................................................................................................................533A.17 Source Channel (WDM Cross-Connection)................................................................................................534A.18 Sink Channel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)............................................................................535



xx

A.19 Activation Status (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)......................................................................536A.20 Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration).........................................................................................537A.21 Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)...................................................................................539A.22 Service Timeslot (WDM Services)..............................................................................................................540A.23 Service Mode (WDM Interface)..................................................................................................................542A.24 Board Mode (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................................543A.25 Explicit Link................................................................................................................................................545A.26 Explicit Node...............................................................................................................................................546A.27 Excluded Node.............................................................................................................................................547A.28 Auto-Calculation..........................................................................................................................................547A.29 Copy after Creation......................................................................................................................................548A.30 Level (WDM Trail Creation).......................................................................................................................549A.31 Direction (WDM Trail Creation).................................................................................................................550A.32 Rate (WDM Trail Creation).........................................................................................................................550A.33 Source (WDM Trail Creation).....................................................................................................................551A.34 Sink (WDM Trail Creation).........................................................................................................................552A.35 OVPN Customer (ASON Trail Management).............................................................................................554A.36 Non-Intrusive Monitoring............................................................................................................................555

B Glossary......................................................................................................................................556



xxi

1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment byReferring to This Manual

This manual describes how to configure services on the NMS and other NMS operationsinvolved in service configuration. This section provides guidelines to use this manual and obtainreference information.

l See Table 1-1 to obtain the service configuration guidelines.l See Table 1-2 to obtain reference information, such as NMS configurations, NE and

network configurations, and feature configurations.

Table 1-1 Guidelines for Service Configuration

To... Then...

Configure WDMservices

Select the Manually by Station, by Station Service Package, orby Trail mode to configure WDM services as required.For boards that support multiple application scenarios, guidelinesare provided for configuring services manually by station in eachapplication scenario. For details, see:l 3 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station)l 4 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (Manually by Station)l 5 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)l 6 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configure Ethernetservices

See Configuring Ethernet Services to understand Ethernet BasicConcepts and complete Ethernet service configurations byreferring to Configuration Process of Ethernet Services.

NOTE

l To configure services with ODUk SNCP protection, see ODUk SNCP Protection in the FeatureDescription.

l To configure PID boards, see PID in the Feature Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide

1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to ThisManual


1

Table 1-2 Guidelines for Reference Information

To... Then...

Quickly understandNMS operations

See the Commissioning Guide:l Connecting the NMS Computer

– Connecting the U2000 Server Directly– Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN

l U2000 Quick Guide– Logging In to the U2000 Client– Exiting a U2000 Client

l Web LCT Quick Guide– Connecting the Web LCT to NEs– Starting the Web LCT– Logging In to the Web LCT– Shutting Down the Web LCT

l Entering the Common Views– Opening the Main Topology on the U2000– NE List on the Web LCT– Opening the NE Explorer– Opening the NE Panel

l Using Online Help

Configure NEs andnetworks

See Configuring NE and Network in the Commissioning Guide.Configure each functional part of a network according to thenetwork creation process so that services can be created on thenetwork topology.

Monitor performanceusing the NMS

See Performance Management in the Commissioning Guide toquery and set performance monitoring.

Understand detailedinformation aboutboards

See the description of each board in the Hardware Description:l Physical and Logical Ports: Describes physical ports displayed

on the NMS and logical ports of each board.l Configuration of Cross-connection: Describes cross-

connection configurations of each board.l Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS: Describes

parameters that can be set or queried on the NMS for eachboard, default values of the parameters, and parameterconfiguration principles.

Complete optical-layerconfigurations or servicegrooming

See Configuring Wavelength Grooming in the CommissioningGuide. Complete wavelength grooming by referring toWavelength Grooming Configuration Flow.




2

To... Then...

Configure features See the Feature Description to understand features, such as:l Optical Line Protectionl Intra-Board 1+1 Protectionl Intelligent Power Adjustment (IPA)l Clock Feature(OTN)l OTN Overheadsl QoS (OTN)l DCNl Master-Slave Subrackl 40G Transmission SystemTo understand more features, see Mapping Relationship BetweenProducts and Features in the Feature Description.

Back up NE data See Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board, ManuallyBacking Up the NE Database to a CF Card, and Backing UpDevice Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client in theCommissioning Guide.




3

2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually byStation)

About This Chapter

When manually configuring WDM services by station, you need to perform various operationssuch as configuring board service types and creating cross-connections. Configuring WDMservices in this mode involves multiple NMS GUIs and the configuration process is complex.However, the mode is applicable to various scenarios and very flexible.

2.1 Basic ConceptsThe basic concepts involved in WDM service configuration include electrical cross-connections,WDM service types, and board models. Understanding the basic concepts helps you successfullyconfigure services.

2.2 WDM Service Configuration FlowThis section describes the configuration process of boards and services. Before configuringWDM services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic configuration of NEsaccording to the configuration flow of creating a network.

2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without Cross-Connect CapabilityThis section describes how to configure the GE services by using the LDM board, which is atype of OTU board that does not require cross-connection configuration.

2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with Cross-Connect CapabilityThis section describes how to configure GE services by using the LQMS board.

2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line BoardsThis section describes how to configure GE services by using the TQM and NQ2 boards.

2.6 Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2 Switching FunctionThis section describes how to configure GE services by using the boards with Layer 2 processingfunctions (the TBE and L4G boards in this example).

2.7 Configuring 10GE LAN Services by Using the TDX and NS2 BoardsThis section describes how to configure 10GE LAN services by using the TDX and NS2 boards.

2.8 ParametersDescribes the parameters involved in the WDM services configuration.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)


4

2.1 Basic ConceptsThe basic concepts involved in WDM service configuration include electrical cross-connections,WDM service types, and board models. Understanding the basic concepts helps you successfullyconfigure services.

2.1.1 Electrical Cross-ConnectionsCross-connections on WDM equipment can be classified into two types: optical cross-connections and electrical cross-connections. Optical cross-connections cross-connect opticalsignals and are not related to the types of carried services; electrical cross-connections cross-connect electrical signals and are closely related to the types of carried services. Beforeconfiguring WDM services, you need to be familiar with basic types of cross-connections.

Overview of Cross-ConnectionsThe grooming function of electrical cross-connections of WDM equipment helps WDMnetworks to change from static networks to dynamic networks. The MUX/DMUX of thetraditional WDM equipment supports only the point-to-point multiplexing scheme, whereas theMUX/DMUX of the NG WDM equipment supports the end-to-end management capability. Inaddition, the NG WDM equipment supports cross-connections such as GE and ODUk cross-connections.

Electrical cross-connections are classified as follows:

l According to the cross-connection level and granularity, electrical cross-connections areclassified into, for example, GE, 10GE, Any, and ODUk cross-connections.

l According to the cross-connection mode, cross-connections are classified into centralizedcross-connections, distributed cross-connections, and mesh-group cross-connections.– Centralized cross-connections: Cross-connections are implemented using cross-

connect boards. The board where a cross-connect service is created can be housed inany slot that supports the board.

– Distributed cross-connections: Cross-connections are implemented using boards thatare housed in paired slots.

– Mesh-group cross-connections: Cross-connections are implemented using boards thatare housed in mesh-group slots.

l Electrical cross-connections can be also classified into intra-board cross-connections andinter-board cross-connections according to their positions.– Intra-board cross-connections: Services signals are still on a board after they are

processed by a cross-connect unit in the board. As shown in Figure 2-1, cross-connections between channel 1 of client-side port 5 (RX3/TX3) on a board and channel1 of WDM-side port 201 (LP1/LP1) on the same board are referred to as intra-boardcross-connections.

Figure 2-1 Intra-board cross-connections3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-15(RX3/TX3)-16(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-4201(LP1/LP1)-3

1(IN1/OUT1)-1



5

When ports or channels at the two ends of cross-connections are corresponded accordingto the arrangement sequence, the cross-connections are also referred to as direct cross-connections. See Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Direct cross-connections

A3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-15(RX3/TX3)-16(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-4201(LP1/LP1)-3

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

– Inter-board cross-connections: Service signals are transmitted to the cross-connect unit

on another board after they are processed by the cross-connect unit on a board. SeeFigure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Inter-board cross-connections

A

B

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-15(RX3/TX3)-16(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-4201(LP1/LP1)-3

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-15(RX3/TX3)-16(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-4201(LP1/LP1)-3

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

Signal Flow of Electrical Cross-ConnectionsFor WDM equipment, the OTU board, tributary board, and line board work together to completeservice grooming. Client services are transmitted from the client side of the WDM equipment,and then modulated to the WDM system for transmission after service grooming andconvergence. Figure 2-4 considers the OTU board with the GE/Any and ODUk cross-connection function as a module to describe the signal flow of the electrical cross-connections.Figure 2-4 describes the signal flow of the SDH electrical cross-connection service of the OptiXOSN 8800.



6

Figure 2-4 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections for the OptiX OSN 6800/3800

Tributary boardLine board

OTU board (tributary-and-line-joint board)

GE/Anycross-

connection

ODUkcross-

connection

L2processing

Backplanebus

Backplanebus

Opticalmodule

L2RX1/TX1

RXn/TXnIN/OUTOTN

VCTRUNK

APn

AP1 LP1.1

LP1.X

LP1Opticalmodule

NOTE

The boards that support the grooming of electrical cross-connections have both external ports and internalports. These ports are classified into the following types:

l TX/RX port: client-side optical port of the board that receives and transmits signals.

l IP port: internal port that corresponds to the RX/TX port. It can be regarded as a RX/TX port.

l AP port: convergence port that represents the internal port of the L2 module. In this case, thecorresponding IP port is an external port.

l LP: logical port that functions as the connection point of cross-connections.

l OP port: internal port that corresponds to the IN/OUT port. It can be regarded as an IN/OUT port.

l IN/OUT port: line-side optical port of the board that receives and transmits signals.

The signals are cross-connected in the following process:

1. The optical signals are transmitted to the OTU board through the RX/TX port and becomeelectrical signals. After the possible L2 processing, the electrical signals are transmitted tothe GE/Any cross-connect module through the AP port and work with the possible cross-connect signals from the backplane, to implement the GE/Any cross-connections.

2. The electrical signals are transmitted to the ODUk cross-connect module through the LPport and work with the possible ODUk signals from the backplane, to implement the ODUkcross-connections. Then, the signals are transmitted to the optical module through an OPport and added to the WDM line for transmission.

NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the electrical signals that are transmitted to the ODUk cross-connect modulethrough the LP port and work with the possible ODUk signals from the backplane, to implement the ODUkcross-connections. Then, the signals are transmitted to the optical module through an OP port and addedto the WDM line for transmission.



7

Figure 2-5 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections for the OptiX OSN 8800 SDH


Backplanebus

Opticalmodule

SDH

RX1/TX1

RXn/TXn

IN/OUTLP1

Opticalmodule

VC4/VC3/VC12cross-

connection

NOTE

The boards that support the grooming of electrical cross-connections have both external ports and internalports. These ports are classified into the following types:

l TX/RX port: client-side optical port of the board that receives and transmits signals.

l LP: logical port that functions as the connection point of cross-connections.

l OP port: internal port that corresponds to the IN/OUT port. It can be regarded as an IN/OUT port.

l IN/OUT port: line-side optical port of the board that receives and transmits signals.

The signals are cross-connected in the following process:

Signals are transmitted to an SDH board through the RX/TX port and become electrical signals.Then, the electrical signals are transmitted to the VC4/VC3/VC12 cross-connect module, andwork with the cross-connect signals that may come from the backplane to implement VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 cross-connections. After being transmitted to the SDH processing module on theSDH board, the electrical signals are transmitted to a WDM-side optical module and becomethe optical signals that have the DWDM standard wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.

For details on how to choose ports of a board for cross-connections, see service configurationdescriptions of the board in the Hardware Description.

Restrictions on Cross-Connection Configurationl The slots that support cross-connections vary according to different types of equipment and

boards.

– The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only centralized cross-connections with the granularityof ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU3.

– The OptiX OSN 6800 supports both centralized cross-connections and distributed cross-connections. When both types of cross-connections are configured, the system usesdistributed cross-connections with preference.



8

– The granularity of centralized cross-connections can be GE, 10GE, ODU1, orODU2.

– The granularity of distributed cross-connections can be GE, ODU1, OTU1, or Any.Cross-connections can be implemented using boards that are housed in seven groupsof paired slots: IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 andIU12, IU13 and IU14, and IU15 and IU16.

– The OptiX OSN 3800 supports both distributed cross-connections and mesh-groupcross-connections.– The granularity of distributed cross-connections is GE. Cross-connections can be

implemented using boards that are housed in two groups of paired slots: IU2 andIU3, and IU4 and IU5. For the OptiX OSN 3800, only the 52TOM board supportsdistributed cross-connections.

– The granularity of mesh-group cross-connections can be GE, ODU1, or Any. Cross-connections can be implemented using boards that are housed in four slots in themesh group: IU2, IU3, IU4, and IU5.

l If you configure a cross-connection between the two optical ports on the OTU board, thesource of a normal cross-connection can also serve as the source of other normal cross-connections, but its sink cannot be the sink of other cross-connections. The two sources ofan SNCP cross-connection cannot be the source of other cross-connections, and its sinkscannot be the sink of other cross-connections.

l When configuring the electrical cross-connection for a service on the OptiX OSN 3800,OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 8800, you must make sure that the WDM-side opticalchannel numbers at the transmit and receive ends of the service in a direction must be thesame. Otherwise, the service fails.

2.1.2 Service TypesThis topic describes the service types that are supported in the WDM service configuration.

Table 2-1 lists the services that can be accessed by the OptiX OSN 8800.

Table 2-1 Service access types (OTN)

Service Category Service Type Reference Standard

SDH/POS/ATM STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64,STM-256

ITU-T G.707ITU-T G.691ITU-T G.957ITU-T G.693ITU-T G.783ITU-T G.825

SONET OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192,OC-768

GR-253-COREGR-1377-COREANSI T1.105

Ethernet service FE, GE, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN IEEE 802.3uIEEE 802.3zIEEE 802.3ae



9


SAN service ESCONFICON, FICON Express, FC100,FC200, FC400, FC800, FICON 8G,FC1200, FICON 4GISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLOInfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G

ANSI X3.296ANSI X3.230ANSI X3.303InfiniBandTM ArchitectureRelease 1.2.1

OTN service OTU1, OTU2, OTU2e, OTU3 ITU-T G.709ITU-T G.959.1

Video service andothers

HD-SDI SMPTE 292M

DVB-ASI EN 50083-9

SDI SMPTE 259M

FDDI ISO 9314

3G-SDI SMPTE 424M

FE: fast EthernetGE: gigabit EthernetESCON: enterprise systems connectionFICON: fiber connectionFC: fiber channelHD-SDI: bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systemsDVB-ASI: digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interfaceSDI: serial digital interfaceFDDI: fiber distributed data interface3G-SDI: 3G-serial digital interfaceNOTE

As specified in the SMPTE-259M, SDI is also called SD-SDI.


Table 2-2 Service access types


SDH/POS/ATM STM-1, STM-4, STM-16,STM-64, STM-256

ITU-T G.707ITU-T G.691ITU-T G.957ITU-T G.693ITU-T G.783ITU-T G.825



10


SONET OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192,OC-768

GR-253-COREGR-1377-COREANSI T1.105

Ethernet service FEGE10GE WAN, 10GE LAN

IEEE 802.3uIEEE 802.3zIEEE 802.3ae

SAN service ESCONFICON, FICON Express, FICON4GFC100, FC200, FC400, FC800,FICON 8G, FC1200ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLOInfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G


OTN service OTU1, OTU2, OTU2e, OTU3 ITU-T G.709ITU-T G.959.1


HD-SDI SMPTE 292M

DVB-ASI EN 50083-9

SDI SMPTE 259M

FDDI ISO 9314

3G-SDI SMPTE 424M

FE: fast EthernetGE: gigabit EthernetESCON: enterprise systems connectionFICON: fiber connectionFC: fiber channelHD-SDI: bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television SystemsDVB-ASI: digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interfaceSDI: serial digital interfaceFDDI: fiber distributed data interface3G-SDI: 3G-serial digital interfaceNOTE





11

Table 2-3 Service access types


SDH/POS/ATM STM-1, STM-4, STM-16,STM-64

ITU-T G.707ITU-T G.691ITU-T G.957ITU-T G.783ITU-T G.825

SONET OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192 GR-253-COREGR-1377-COREANSI T1.105

Ethernet service FEGE10GE WAN, 10GE LAN

IEEE 802.3uIEEE 802.3zIEEE 802.3ae

SAN service ESCONFICON, FICON Express, FICON4GFC100, FC200, FC400, FC800,FICON 8G, FC1200ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLOInfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G


OTN service OTU1, OTU2, OTU2e ITU-T G.709ITU-T G.959.1


HD-SDI SMPTE 292M

DVB-ASI EN 50083-9

SDI SMPTE 259M

FDDI ISO 9314

3G-SDI SMPTE 424M



12


FE: fast EthernetGE: gigabit EthernetESCON: enterprise systems connectionFICON: fiber connectionFC: fiber channelHD-SDI: bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television SystemsDVB-ASI: digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interfaceSDI: serial digital interfaceFDDI: fiber distributed data interfaceNOTE


Table 2-4 lists the rates of the services that can be accessed by the OptiX OSN 8800.

Table 2-4 Service type and service rate

ServiceCategory

ServiceType

Service Rate Legend

SDH/POS/ATM

STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s

STM-16/OC-48FICON Express/FC200

OTU1

OTU2OTU2e

3G-SDI

1G

2G

4G

10G

40G

STM-1/OC-3

STM-4/OC-12

STM-256/OC-768

0.1G

GE

FC400/FICON4G

STM-64/OC-192/10GE WANFC800/FICON8G

10GE LAN

FE

ESCON

FICON/FC100

FC1200

OTU3

HD-SDI

SDI/DVB-ASI

STM-4 622.08 Mbit/s

STM-16 2.5 Gbit/s

STM-64 9.95 Gbit/s

STM-256 39.81 Gbit/s

SONET OC-3 155.52 Mbit/s

OC-12 622.08 Mbit/s

OC-48 2.5 Gbit/s

OC-192 9.95 Gbit/s

OC-768 39.81 Gbit/s

Ethernet service FE 125 Mbit/s

GE 1.25 Gbit/s

10GEWAN

9.95 Gbit/s

10GE LAN 10.31 Gbit/s

SAN service ESCON 200 Mbit/s

FICON 1.06 Gbit/s



13

ServiceCategory

ServiceType

Service Rate Legend

FICONExpress

2.12 Gbit/s

FC100 1.06 Gbit/s

FC200 2.12 Gbit/s

FC400 4.25 Gbit/s

FC800 8.5 Gbit/s

FC1200 10.51 Gbit/s

FICON4G 4.25 Gbit/s

FICON8G 8.5 Gbit/s

ISC 1G 1.06 Gbit/s

ISC 2G 2.12 Gbit/s

ETR 16 Mbit/s

CLO 16 Mbit/s

InfiniBand2.5G

2.5 Gbit/s

InfiniBand5G

5 Gbit/s

OTN service OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s

OTU2 10.71 Gbit/s

OTU2e 11.10 Gbit/s

OTU3 43.02 Gbit/s

Video serviceand others

HD-SDI 1.485 Gbit/s

DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s

SDI 270 Mbit/s

FDDI 125 Mbit/s

3G-SDI 2.97 Gbit/s




14


ServiceCategory

ServiceType

Service Rate Legend

SDH/POS/ATM

STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s


OTU1

OTU2OTU2e

3G-SDI

1G

2G

4G

10G

40G

STM-1/OC-3

STM-4/OC-12

STM-256/OC-768

0.1G

GE

FC400/FICON4G


10GE LAN

FE

ESCON

FICON/FC100

FC1200

OTU3

HD-SDI

SDI/DVB-ASI

STM-4 622.08 Mbit/s

STM-16 2.5 Gbit/s

STM-64 9.95 Gbit/s



OC-12 622.08 Mbit/s

OC-48 2.5 Gbit/s

OC-192 9.95 Gbit/s

OC-768 39.81 Gbit/s


GE 1.25 Gbit/s

10GEWAN

9.95 Gbit/s



FICON 1.06 Gbit/s

FICONExpress

2.12 Gbit/s

FC100 1.06 Gbit/s

FC200 2.12 Gbit/s

FC400 4.25 Gbit/s

FC800 8.5 Gbit/s

FC1200 10.51 Gbit/s

FICON4G 4.25 Gbit/s

FICON8G 8.5 Gbit/s

ISC 1G 1.06 Gbit/s

ISC 2G 2.12 Gbit/s

ETR 16 Mbit/s



15

ServiceCategory

ServiceType

Service Rate Legend

CLO 16 Mbit/s

InfiniBand2.5G

2.5 Gbit/s

InfiniBand5G

5 Gbit/s


OTU2 10.71 Gbit/s

OTU2e 11.10 Gbit/s

OTU3 43.02 Gbit/s


HD-SDI 1.485 Gbit/s

DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s

SDI 270 Mbit/s

FDDI 125 Mbit/s

3G-SDI 2.97 Gbit/s



ServiceCategory

ServiceType

Service Rate Legend

SDH/POS/ATM

STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s


OTU1

OTU2OTU2e

3G-SDI

1G

2G

4G

10G

40G

STM-1/OC-3

STM-4/OC-12

STM-256/OC-768

0.1G

GE

FC400/FICON4G


10GE LAN

FE

ESCON

FICON/FC100

FC1200

OTU3

HD-SDI

SDI/DVB-ASI

STM-4 622.08 Mbit/s

STM-16 2.5 Gbit/s

STM-64 9.95 Gbit/s



OC-12 622.08 Mbit/s

OC-48 2.5 Gbit/s

OC-192 9.95 Gbit/s

OC-768 39.81 Gbit/s




16

ServiceCategory

ServiceType

Service Rate Legend

GE 1.25 Gbit/s

10GEWAN

9.95 Gbit/s



FICON 1.06 Gbit/s

FICONExpress

2.12 Gbit/s

FC100 1.06 Gbit/s

FC200 2.12 Gbit/s

FC400 4.25 Gbit/s

FC800 8.5 Gbit/s

FC1200 10.51 Gbit/s

FICON4G 4.25 Gbit/s

FICON8G 8.5 Gbit/s

ISC 1G 1.06 Gbit/s

ISC 2G 2.12 Gbit/s

ETR 16 Mbit/s

CLO 16 Mbit/s

InfiniBand2.5G

2.5 Gbit/s

InfiniBand5G

5 Gbit/s


OTU2 10.71 Gbit/s

OTU2e 11.10 Gbit/s

OTU3 43.02 Gbit/s


HD-SDI 1.485 Gbit/s

DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s

SDI 270 Mbit/s

FDDI 125 Mbit/s



17

ServiceCategory

ServiceType

Service Rate Legend

3G-SDI 2.97 Gbit/s

2.1.3 Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode)Starting from V100R006C01, some boards support new board models. To distinguish newmodels from existing models, the new board models are marked as standard mode and theexisting board models are marked as compatible mode. Compared with the compatible mode,the standard mode facilitates operations and reduces maintenance costs. Service configurationson the NMS vary according to board models.

Boards Supporting Standard ModeTable 2-7 lists the boards that support standard mode, the names of the boards in different modes,and the availability of the boards on different types of equipment.

Table 2-7 Names displayed on the NMS and availability on different types of equipment

Name inStandardMode(StandardMode,addinglogicalboard)

Name inCompatible Mode(Compatible Mode,addinglogicalboard)

Name inCompatible Mode (NEPanel)

OptiX OSN8800

OptiX OSN6800

OptiX OSN3800

53ND2 53ND2(COMP)

53ND2 Y Y N

53NQ2 53NQ2(COMP)

53ND2 Y Y N

53NS2 53NS2(COMP)

53ND2 Y Y Y

11LOA - 11LOA Y Y Y

54ENQ2(STND)

54ENQ2 54ENQ2 Y N N

55NPO2(STND)

55NPO2 55NPO2 Y N N

55NPO2E - 55NPO2E Y N N



18

NOTE

l The LOA and NPO2E boards support only the standard mode.

l Y indicates that a board is available on the equipment and N indicates that a board is unavailable onthe equipment.

l The standard mode is applicable only to the boards listed in the table above. The boards not listed inthe table support only the compatible mode.

Available Channels in Different ModesThe following uses the TN53NS2 board as an example to illustrate available channels on theboard in different modes. For the board models of other boards in different modes, see theHardware Description.

l Compatible modeFigure 2-6 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode.

Figure 2-6 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

1 x ODU2/ODU2e8 x ODU0 4 x ODU1

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1




51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4ODU1

ODU1

ODU2


(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2

Other tributary/line/PID board



Backplane

Cross-connectmodule

ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path

Serviceprocessingmodule

Automatic cross-connection, which does not need tobe configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0signals are required, users only need to configurecross-connections from other boards to theODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. Theboard's internal structure enables transmission of themultiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users donot need to configure a cross-connection fortransmitting the multiplexed signal.

ODU0mappingpath

Cross-connection that must be configured on theNMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards

l Standard mode



19

Figure 2-7 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode.

Figure 2-7 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode

8 xODU0

4 xODU1

1 xODU2/1xODU2e

ODU1:1

ODU1:4

ODU1:4

ODU0:2

ODU 0:2

ODU0:1

ODU0:1

OCH:12XODUflex

IN/OUT

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)ODUflex:1

ODUflex:2

IN/OUT-OCH:1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)ODU1:1

ODU2:1

ODU0: 8

ODU0:1IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

ODU2:18 xODU0

Backplane

ODU2:1

ODU2:1

OCH :1

OCH 1:

OCH:1

OCH :1

Oth

er tr

ibut

ary/

line/

PID

boa

rd

Cross-connectmodule

ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexingmodule

ODU2 mapping path

Serviceprocessingmodule

ODUflex mapping path

ODU0 mappingpath (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)

Cross-connection that must be configured on theNMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards

ODU0 mappingpath (ODU0->ODU2)



20

Table 2-8 Comparison of the two modes

Item Compatible Mode Standard Mode

Internal logicalports

Internal logical ports arereserved.

Internal logical ports are removed.Instead, all ODU-level internal logicalports are configured as channels foreach physical port and they can beignored during configuration.

Number oftimeslots

The number of timeslotsallocated to each serviceis fixed.

Services can be transmitted if there aresufficient timeslots and timeslotcontinuity is not required. For example,the maximum permitted bandwidth ofa TN53NS2 board is 10 Gbit/s. Afterthe board receives one channel ofODU1 services, it can still receiveODU0, ODUflex, or ODU1 services onthe remaining bandwidth.

Comparison of NMS GUIs for Different ModesService creation operations on the NMS vary according to board models. Table 2-9 uses theTN53NS2 board as an example to illustrate the differences in the board operation GUIs.

Table 2-9 GUIs on the NMS

GUI on theNMS

Navigation Path CompatibleMode

Standard Mode

Path View In the NE panel, select aboard, double-click the boardicon or right-click and choosePath View from the shortcutmenu.

See Figure 2-8. See Figure 2-9.

WDMInterface

In the NE Explorer, select therequired board and chooseConfiguration > WDMInterface from the FunctionTree. tab.


Create Cross-ConnectionService

In the NE Explorer, select therequired NE and chooseConfiguration > WDMService Management fromthe Function Tree.




21

Figure 2-8 Path View (compatible mode)

Figure 2-9 Path View (standard mode)



22

Figure 2-10 WDM Interface (compatible mode)

Figure 2-11 WDM Interface (standard mode)



23

Figure 2-12 Create Cross-Connection Service (compatible mode)

Figure 2-13 Create Cross-Connection Service (standard mode)

2.1.4 ODUflexStarting from V100R006C01, the equipment supports the ODUflex (ODUk with variablebandwidth) technology, which enables users to flexibly configure the container capacity basedon service sizes, leveraging line bandwidth.

Applicable BoardsOnly OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODUflex that is applicable to the following boards:



24

l Tributary boards: TN55TQX, TN53TDX and TN54TOAl Line boards: TN53NQ2, TN53ND2, and TN53NS2l Tributary-line integrated board: LOA

NOTE

The TN11LOA, TN53NQ2, TN53ND2, and TN53NS2 boards support ODUflex only when they work inStandard Mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random.

ODUflex Involved OperationsThe following describes the GUIs for creating services involving ODUflex on the NMS and thenavigation paths.

Table 2-10 GUIs and navigation paths

GUI on the NMS Description Navigation Path

WDM Interface When the board where you want tocreate services is a line board or theLOA board and the services need tobe encapsulated into ODUflexservices, set ODU TimeslotConfiguration Mode to Assignrandom.

In the NE Explorer, select therequired board and chooseConfiguration > WDMInterface > AdvancedAttributes from the FunctionTree.

Create Cross-Connection Service

When Level is set to ODUflex, youmust set Service Type.

In the NE Explorer, select therequired NE and chooseConfiguration > WDMService Management fromthe Function Tree. In thedisplayed window, clickNew.

NOTE

l The value of Occupied ODUTUk Slot Count is in the range of 3-7, which indicates that the servicerate supported by ODUflex is in the range of 3.75 Gbit/s (3 x 1.25 Gbit/s) to 8.75 Gbit/s (7 x 1.25 Gbit/s).

ODUflex Configuration ProcedureFigure 2-14 shows the ODUflex configuration flowchart.



25

Figure 2-14 ODUflex configuration flowchart

Configure cross-connections

Configure the port working mode

Configure the timeslot

configuration mode

Configure the service type

1

2

3

4(Optional)

Configure ODUflex Tolerance

5

Table 2-11 describes the ODUflex configuration procedure.

Table 2-11 Configuration procedure

No. Action Involved Board Description

1 Configure theport workingmode.

Tributary board ortributary-lineintegrated board

l Parameter settings: Set Port WorkingMode to ODUflex non-convergencemode.

l Operation description: In the NE Explorer,select the required board and chooseConfiguration > Working Mode from theFunction Tree. In the displayed window.

2 Configure thetimeslotconfigurationmode.

Line board ortributary-lineintegrated board

l Parameter settings: Set ODU TimeslotConfiguration Mode to Assign randomfor the required ports.

l Operation description: In the NE Explorer,select the required board and chooseConfiguration > WDM Interface >Advanced Attributes from the FunctionTree.

3 Configure theservice type.

Tributary board ortributary-lineintegrated board

l Parameter settings: Set the service typebased on the service plan.

l Operation description: ChooseConfiguration > WDM Interface from theFunction Tree.



26

No. Action Involved Board Description

4 (Optional)ConfigureODUflextolerance

Line board ortributary-lineintegrated board

l Parameter settings: Specifies the toleranceof deviation between the actual client-sideservice rate and the specified rate when theclient-side service type is ODUflex. Whenthe tributary board that connects to the ND2board receives 3G-SDI services from clientequipment, set this parameter to 10. If thetributary board receives other services, setit to 100.

l Operation description: ChooseConfiguration > WDM Interface >Advanced Attributes from the FunctionTree.

5 Configurecross-connections.

l Tributaryboard or lineboard: inter-board cross-connectionsbetweentributary andline boards

l Tributary-lineintegratedboard: cross-connectionsfrom LP portsto the WDMside

l Parameter settings:– Set Level to ODUflex and select the

source slot, sink slot, source optical port,sink optical port, source optical channel,and sink optical channel.

– Set Service Type to the actual client-side signals.

l Operation description: In the NE Explorer,select the required NE and chooseConfiguration > WDM ServiceManagement from the Function Tree. Inthe displayed window, click New.

2.2 WDM Service Configuration FlowThis section describes the configuration process of boards and services. Before configuringWDM services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic configuration of NEsaccording to the configuration flow of creating a network.

Before configuring a WDM service, ensure that you have finished checking board parameters.To learn the information about the signal flow of each board, see the Hardware Description.

No. OTU BoardsWithoutGroomingFunctions

OTU BoardsWithGroomingFunctions

Line BoardsandTributaryBoards

Boards withLayer 2ProcessingFunctions

TaskDescription

1 - 12.8Configuringthe BoardMode

12.8Configuringthe BoardMode

12.8Configuringthe BoardMode

Optional



27





TaskDescription

2 - 12.3Configuringthe ServiceMode

12.3Configuringthe ServiceMode

12.3Configuringthe ServiceMode

Optional

3 12.2Configuringthe ServiceType

12.2Configuringthe ServiceType



MandatoryThe type ofclient-sideservices onboards needs tobe setaccording tothe type ofservicestransmittedover thenetwork.Differentboards accessdifferent typesof services. Fordetails, see theclient-sidespecificationsof the OTUboard andtributary boardin theHardwareDescription.

4 - - - 10.4.2Creating EPLServicesFor details oncreatingEthernetservices, see 10ConfiguringEthernetServices.

OptionalIn addition tocross-connections,theconnectionsbetweenVCTRUNKports andPORT ports ofthe boards withLayer 2processingfunctions needto beestablished.



28





TaskDescription

5 - Creatingcross-connectservices(intra-board)

Creatingcross-connectservices(intra-board)

Creatingcross-connectionson anEthernetboard (intra-board)

OptionalThere is noneed toconfigurecross-connections forthe OTU boardwithoutgroomingfunctions.Cross-connectionsmust beconfigured fortributaryboards andother OTUboards. Fordetails on howto choose portsof a board forcross-connections,see serviceconfigurationdescriptions ofthe board in theHardwareDescription.



29





TaskDescription

6 - - Creatingcross-connectservices(inter-board)

Creatingcross-connectionson anEthernetboard (inter-board)

OptionalWhen tributaryboards workwith lineboards, theinter-boardcross-connectionsmust beconfigured. Fordetails on howto choose portsof a board forcross-connections,see serviceconfigurationdescriptions ofthe board in theHardwareDescription.

7 12.5ConfiguringServiceTimeslots

12.5ConfiguringServiceTimeslots

12.5ConfiguringServiceTimeslots

- OptionalWhen thetimeslotconfigurationmode is set tomanual, SendTimeslots andReceiveTimeslotsneed to be setfor certainboards.



30





TaskDescription

8 - CreatingWDM trailsby using thetrail searchfunction

CreatingWDM trailsby using thetrail searchfunction

CreatingWDM trailsby using thetrail searchfunction

OptionalCreate WDMtrails by usingthe trail searchfunction andcheck whetherserviceconfigurationsare correct. Ifthe end-to-endservices on theclient side arecorrectlyconfigured, theclient trails ofthecorrespondinglevel can besearched out.

- 2.3ConfiguringWDMServices forOTU BoardsWithoutCross-ConnectCapability isprovided.

2.4ConfiguringWDMServices forOTU Boardswith Cross-ConnectCapability isprovided.

2.5ConfiguringWDMServices forTributaryBoards andLine Boards isprovided.

2.6ConfiguringWDMServices forBoards withthe Layer 2SwitchingFunction isprovided.

-

NOTEIf a board supports electrical ports, you must configure electrical ports on the U2000 before the boardreceives electrical signals. See "Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board" in the Commissioning Guide .

2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards WithoutCross-Connect Capability

This section describes how to configure the GE services by using the LDM board, which is atype of OTU board that does not require cross-connection configuration.

2.3.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThis section describes how to configure a GE service on a ring network.



31

Service RequirementSee Figure 2-15. Optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs functionas OADM stations.

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional GE service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the LDM board accesses one GE service. Atstation B, the LDM board accesses one GE service.

Figure 2-15 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service

B

A

C

D

NMS

User1

User2

:OADM

East 12LDM

West 12LDM

East

East

East

East

West

West

West

West

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, a 12LDM board must be configured at station A and station B.

2.3.2 Service Signal FlowThis section describes how to configure the transparent transmission signal flow of a GE service.

There is one bidirectional GE service between stations A and B.

NOTE

You do not need to configure cross-connections on the LDM board.

2.3.3 Configuration ProcessThis section describes how to configure a bidirectional GE service at stations A and B.

PrerequisiteFibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can besearched out. For details, see Searching for WDM Trails.)

Check parameters of the OTU board and ensure that no error is found.



32

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT

Step 1 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TN12LDM boards at stations A and B to GE.For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 2 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LDM board at station A.For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

Step 3 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LDM board at station B.For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

----End

Verifying ConfigurationsCheck whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client sideare correctly configured, the client trails of GE levels can be searched out. For details, seeSearching for WDM Trails.

2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with Cross-Connect Capability

This section describes how to configure GE services by using the LQMS board.


Service RequirementOn the network shown in Figure 2-16, ONEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEsfunction as OADM stations. The service requirement is as follows:

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional GE service is availablebetween station A and station B.



33


BA

C

D

NMS

User1

User2

:OADM

East 12LQMS

West 12LQMS

East

East

East

East

West

West

West

West

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, two 12LQMS boards must be configured at each station.


One bidirectional GE service is available between station A and station B.

Figure 2-17 shows the service signal flow between station A and station B.

Figure 2-17 Unidirectional service at each station

Client side WDM side201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-11(IN1/OUT1)-14(RX2/TX2)-1

5(RX3/TX3)-16(RX4/TX4)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

WDM-sideoptical module

Cross-connectmodule

Serviceprocessing

module

NOTE

ClientLP is a logical port. Cross-connections between client-side RX/TX ports and ClientLP ports need tobe configured. There are connections between ClientLP ports and WDM-side IN/OUT ports, and thereforecross-connections do not need to be configured.




34

Prerequisite

Fibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can besearched out. For details, see Searching for Trails.)

Check parameters of the OTU board and ensure that no error is found. .


Tools, Equipment, and Materials

U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Background Information

Different boards have different cross-connection capacities. For details, see the functions andfeatures of each board in the Hardware Description. If the capacity of the configured servicesis greater than the available cross-connection capacity, the service configuration fails.


Step 1 Set Board Mode of the TN12LQMS boards at stations A and B to LQM Mode. For details, see12.8 Configuring the Board Mode.

NOTE

After Board Mode is set to LQM Mode, the TN12LQMS board can serve as a tributary and line board andconvert four Any services into one OTU1 service.

Step 2 Set Service Mode of the client-side ports on the TN12LQMS boards at stations A and B toClient Mode. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode.

NOTE

After Service Mode is set to Client Mode, the TN12LQMS board can access services other than OTN services.

Step 3 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TN12LQMS boards at stations A and B toGE. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 4 Configure the service to be added or dropped at station A.1. Configure a GE service from the RX/TX port of the LQMS board to the ClientLP port. For

details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

The following table lists the values of the parameters for station A.

Field Value

LevelNOTE

On the Web LCT, this parameter is ServiceLevel.

GE

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS



35

Field Value

Source Optical PortNOTE

On the Web LCT, this parameter is SourcePort.

3(RX1/TX1)

Source Optical ChannelNOTE

On the Web LCT, this parameter is SourceOptical Path.

1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS

Sink Optical PortNOTE

On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)

Sink Optical ChannelNOTE

On the Web LCT, this parameter is SinkOptical Path.

1

Activate ImmediatelyNOTE

This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It isnot applicable to the Web LCT.

Active

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.4.2 Service SignalFlow.

Step 5 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.

Step 6 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LQMS board at station A.For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

Step 7 Configure the service to be added or dropped at station B.

1. Configure a GE service from the ClientLP port of the LQMS board to the RX/TX port. Fordetails, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

The following table lists the values of the parameters for station B.

Field Value

LevelNOTE


GE

Service Type -




36

Field Value

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS



3(RX1/TX1)



1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS






1



Active

NOTE



Step 9 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LQMS board at station B.For details on how to configure service timeslots, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

----End

Verifying Configurations

Check whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client sideare correctly configured, the client trails of GE levels can be searched out. For details, seeSearching for Trails.

2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards andLine Boards

This section describes how to configure GE services by using the TQM and NQ2 boards.



37


Service Requirement

See Figure 2-18. ONEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADMstations.

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional GE service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN12TQM board accesses one GE serviceand multiplexes the GE service into one channel of ODU1 electrical signals, that is, one ODU1service. Then, the ODU1 service is sent to the TN52NQ2 board and is multiplexed with otherservices into one OTU2 service. At station B, the TN12TQM board accesses one GE serviceand multiplexes the GE service into one channel of ODU1 electrical signals, that is, one ODU1service. Then, the ODU1 service is sent to the TN52NQ2 board and is multiplexed with otherservices into one OTU2 service.


BA

C

D

NMS

User1

User2

:OADM

East 12TQM52NQ2

12TQM52NQ2

WestWest

East

East

East

East

East

West

West

West

West

Board Configuration Information

In this example, a 12TQM board and a 52NQ2 board must be configured at station A and stationB.






38


WDM side

Servive processing module

1(IN/OUT)-1

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-151(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-251(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-351(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4

NQ2Client side

Fixed cross-connection

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

4(RX2/TX2)-15(RX3/TX3)-16(RX4/TX4)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

TQM

NOTE

ClientLP and ODU1LP are logical ports. Cross-connections between client-side RX/TX ports and ClientLPports need to be configured. ODU1 cross-connections between the ClientLP ports of the TQM board andthe ODU1LP ports of the NQ2 board need to be configured. There are connections between the ODU1LPports of the NQ2 board and WDM-side IN/OUT ports, and therefore cross-connections do not need to beconfigured.


PrerequisiteFibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can besearched out. For details, see Searching for WDM Trails.)

Check parameters of the OTU board and ensure that no error is found.



Background InformationDue to the limitations of cross-connections over the backplane, the boards configured with inter-board cross-connections must be installed in cross-connection slots. For the limitations of cross-connection slots, see the limitations on cross-connections in 2.1.1 Electrical Cross-Connections.

The available cross-connection capacity of a board depends on the slot where the board isinstalled. For the OptiX OSN 6800, the available cross-connection capacity of the slots 1, 4, 11,or 14 is 40 Gbit/s; the available cross-connection capacity of any other slots is 20 Gbit/s. Forthe OptiX OSN 8800, the available cross-connection capacity of all any slots is 40 Gbit/s.Different boards have different cross-connection capacities. For details, see the functions andfeatures of each board in the Hardware Description. If the capacity of the configured servicesis greater than the available cross-connection capacity, the service configuration fails.


Step 1 Set Service Mode of the client-side ports on the TN12TQM boards at stations A and B to ClientMode. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode.



39

NOTE

After Service Mode is set to Client Mode, the TN12TQM board can access services other than OTNservices.

Step 2 Set Service Mode of the client-side ports on the TN52NQ2 boards at stations A and B toODU1. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode.

NOTE

After Service Mode is set to ODU1, the TN52NQ2 board can access ODU1 services.

Step 3 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TN12TQM boards at stations A and B to GE.For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 4 Configure the internal cross-connections for the wavelengths that are added or dropped from theTN12TQM board at station A.1. Configure a GE service from the RX/TX port of the TN12TQM board to the ClientLP port.

For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.


Field Value

LevelNOTE


GE

Service Type -


Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM



3(RX1/TX1)



1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM






1



40

Field Value



Active

NOTE



Step 6 Configure ODU1 services between the TN52NQ2 board and the TN12TQM board at station A.1. Configure an ODU1 service from the ClientLP port of the TN12TQM board to the ODU1LP

port of the TN52NQ2 board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.


Field Value

LevelNOTE


ODU1

Service Type -








1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NQ2



51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)



1



41

Field Value



Active

NOTE



Step 8 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12TQM board at station A.For details on how to configure service timeslots, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

Step 9 Configure the internal cross-connections for the wavelengths that are added or dropped from theTN12TQM board at station B.1. Configure a GE service from the RX/TX port of the TN12TQM board to the ClientLP port.



Field Value

LevelNOTE


GE

Service Type -




On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source Port.

3(RX1/TX1)



1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM






42

Field Value


On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink OpticalPath.

1


This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It is notapplicable to the Web LCT.

Active

NOTE



Step 11 Configure ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52NQ2 board and the TN12TQM board atstation B.

1. Configure an ODU1 service from the ClientLP port of the TN12TQM board to the ODU1LPport of the TN52NQ2 board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.


Field Value

LevelNOTE


ODU1

Service Type -








1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NQ2



51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)



43

Field Value



1



Active

NOTE



Step 13 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12TQM board at NE B. Fordetails, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

----End

Verifying ConfigurationsCheck whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client sideare correctly configured, the client trails of GE levels can be searched out. For details, seeSearching for WDM Trails.

2.6 Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2Switching Function

This section describes how to configure GE services by using the boards with Layer 2 processingfunctions (the TBE and L4G boards in this example).


Service RequirementSee Figure 2-20. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEsfunction as OADM stations.

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional GE service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TBE board accesses one GE service andconverts the GE service into one channel of GE electrical signals. Then, the GE electrical signalsare sent to the L4G board and are multiplexed with other services into one OTU 5G service. Atstation B, the TBE board accesses one GE service and converts the GE service into one channelof GE electrical signals. Then, the GE electrical signals are sent to the L4G board and aremultiplexed with other services into one OTU 5G service.



44


B

A

C

D

NMS

User1

User2

:OADMEAST

WEST

TBEL4G

TBEL4G

EASTEAST

EAST

WEST

WEST

EAST

EAST

WESTWESTWEST

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, a TBE board and a L4G board must be configured at station A and station B.





VCTRUNK1 101(AP1/AP1)-1

VCTRUNK16

PORT4

116(AP16/AP16)-1

PORT3

PORT11

VCTRUNK2 102(AP2/AP2)-1

L2 switchingmodule

1(IN/OUT)-1201(LP/LP)-1

WDM-sideoptical module

201(LP/LP)-1201(LP/LP)-2201(LP/LP)-3201(LP/LP)-4

TBEL4GClient side WDM side

Servive processingmodule

NOTE

LP and AP are logical ports. Cross-connections between client-side PORT ports and VCTRUNK portsneed to be configured. AP ports and VCTRUNK ports of the TBE board are bound to each otherautomatically, and therefore no configuration is required. Cross-connections between AP ports of the TBEboard and LP ports of the L4G board need to be configured.




45

PrerequisiteFibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can besearched out. For details, see Searching for Trails.)

You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.


Background InformationDifferent boards have different cross-connection capacities. Fore details, see the functions andfeatures of each board in the Hardware Description. If the capacity of the configured servicesis greater than the available cross-connection capacity, the service configuration fails.


Step 1 Set Service Mode of the line-side ports on the L4G boards at stations A and B to OTN. Fordetails, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode.

NOTE

The mode of line-side services of the L4G boards on an NE at the local end must be the same as that at theopposite end.

Step 2 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TBE boards at stations A and B to GE. Fordetails, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 3 Configure the internal cross-connections for the wavelengths that are added or dropped from theTBE board at station A.1. Configure EPL services from the VCTRUNK to the PORT of the TBE board. For details,

see 10.4.2 Creating EPL Services.


Field Value

Board Shelf0(subrack)-13-TBE

Service Type EPL


Source Port PORT3

Source C-VLAN 1

Sink Port VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN 1

NOTE

For details on how to select a service port, see 2.6.2 Service Signal Flow.



46

NOTE

l The services can be unidirectional or bidirectional.

l The Enabled/Disabled and TAG fields in Port Type can be set in the Create Ethernet LineService dialog box or Ethernet Interface.

l Values of certain fields in Port Type can be changed. If port attribute settings are complete,retain the default values.


Step 5 Configure GE services between the L4G board and the TBE board at station A.1. Configure a GE service from the AP port of the TBE board to the LP port of the L4G board.



Field Value

LevelNOTE


GE

Service Type -


Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-TBE



101(AP1/AP1)



1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-L4G



201(LP/LP)



1



Active



47

NOTE



Step 7 Configure the internal cross-connections for the wavelengths that are added or dropped from theTBE board at station B.1. Configure EPL services from the VCTRUNK port to the PORT port of the TBE board. For

details, see 10.4.2 Creating EPL Services.


Field Value

Board Shelf0(subrack)-13-TBE

Service Type EPL


Source Port PORT3

Source C-VLAN 1

Sink Port VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN 1

NOTE


NOTE

l The services can be unidirectional or bidirectional.

l The Enabled/Disabled and TAG fields in Port Type can be set in the Create Ethernet LineService dialog box or Ethernet Interface.

l Values of certain fields in Port Type can be changed. If port attribute settings are complete,retain the default values.


Step 9 Configure GE services between the L4G board and the TBE board at station B.1. Configure a GE service from the AP port of the TBE board to the LP port of the L4G board.



Field Value

LevelNOTE


GE

Service Type -



48

Field Value


Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-TBE



101(AP1/AP1)



1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-L4G



201(LP/LP)



1



Active

NOTE



----End

Verifying ConfigurationsCheck whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client sideare correctly configured, the client trails of GE levels can be searched out. For details, seeSearching for Trails.

2.7 Configuring 10GE LAN Services by Using the TDX andNS2 Boards

This section describes how to configure 10GE LAN services by using the TDX and NS2 boards.



49

2.7.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThis section describes how to configure a 10GE LAN service on a ring network.


User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional 10GE LAN service is availablebetween station A and station C. At station A, the TN52TDX board accesses one 10GE LANservice and encapsulates the 10GE LAN service into one channel of ODU2 electrical signals,that is, one ODU2 service. The TN52NS2 board accesses the ODU2 service and then outputsone OTU2 service. Station B transparently transmits the OTU2 service. At station C, theTN52NS2 board accesses the OTU2 service and converts the OTU2 service into ODU2 electricalsignals, which are groomed to the TN52TDX board and then output as one 10GE LAN service.


B

A

C

D

NMS

User1

User2

:OADM

52TDX52NS2

52NS252NS2

:REG

52TDX52NS2

West East

West

East

WestEast

East

West

EastEast

EastWest

WestWest

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, the TN52TDX board and TN52NS2 boards must be configured at stations Aand C. Two TN52NS2 boards must be configured at station B.

2.7.2 Service Signal FlowThis topic describes how to configure the transmission signal flow of a 10GE LAN service.

One bidirectional GE service is available among stations A, B, and C.



50

Figure 2-23 shows the service signal flow among stations A, B, and C.

Figure 2-23 Service at each station

WDM side

Client side

4(RX2/TX2)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

1(IN/OUT)-1

71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1

NS2

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

TDX


1(IN/OUT)-171(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1

NS2

1(IN/OUT)-1

71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1

NS2

1(IN/OUT)-171(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1

NS2


TDX

202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-14(RX2/TX2)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

backplane side

A

B

C

Cross-connection

Servive processing

module

backplane side

WDM sidebackplane

sidebackplane

side

Servive processing

module

Servive processing

module

Servive processing

module

WDM side

WDM sidebackplane

sidebackplane

side

NOTE

ClientLP and ODU2LP are logical ports. There are cross-connections between client-side RX/TX portsand ClientLP ports and therefore cross-connections do not need to be configured. ODU2 cross-connectionsbetween the ClientLP ports of the TDX board and the ODU2LP ports of the NS2 board need to beconfigured. There are connections between the ODU2LP ports of the NS2 board and WDM-side IN/OUTports and therefore cross-connections do not need to be configured.



51

CAUTIONl When 10GE LAN signals are received on the client side of the TDX board and Port

Mapping of the TDX board is set to Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), Line Rate of the 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1 port on the backplane side of the TN52NS2 board that services passthrough must be set to Speedup Mode.

l When 10GE LAN signals are received on the client side of the TDX board and PortMapping of the TDX board is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Line Rate ofthe 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1 port on the backplane side of the TN52NS2 board that servicespass through must be set to Standard Mode.

l The Service Mode must be set to ODU2 or Automatic.

2.7.3 Configuration ProcessThis section describes how to configure a bidirectional 10GE LAN service at stations A, B, andC.

PrerequisiteYou are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.


Background Informationl The port mapping mode of 10GE LAN services can be configured as Bit Transparent

Mapping (11.1 G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). Users can select a propermapping mode according to the service transmission requirements.

l Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) meets customer requirement for transparent bittransport of 10GE LAN signals. In the Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) mode,transmission of signals are achieved by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensuresthe encoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In this mode, however, the bit rate ishigher than the standard bit rate of OTU2 signals.

l MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) is specific to transparent transmission of 10GEMAC frames as required by customers. In this port mapping mode, a 10GE LAN signal isencapsulated in the GFP-F format and then mapped into a standard OTU frame. This modesupports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode, thesignals are in standard OTU2 frames. In addition, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is applicableto 10GE LAN services in this mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intendedfor 10G SDH services.

l The port mapping modes of the upstream and downstream board must be the same.


Step 1 Configure attributes of client-side ports on the TN52TDX board of station A.



52

1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN52TDX board that you want to configure, and then chooseConfiguration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Click By Board/Port (Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.

3. Select the Basic Attributes tab.

4. Select the ClientLP port, the service type that needs to be set, and then double-click thecorresponding parameter domain to set the following parameters.

l Service Type: 10GE LAN

l Port Mapping: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

5. Select the board, click State and choose IS to set Primary, Secondary State.

6. Click Apply. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

7. Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.

Step 2 Configure attributes of client-side ports on the TN52NS2 board of station A.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN52NS2 board and choose Configuration > WDMInterface from the Function Tree.

2. Click By Board/Port (Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list.

3. Select the Basic Attributes tab.

4. Select the ODU2LP port. Double-click the Service Type parameter and then selectODU2.

NOTE

Set Service Type to ODU2 or Automatic and then the NS2 board can access ODU2 services.

5. On the Advanced Attributes tab, select the ODU2LP port and then double-click the LineRate parameter and select Speedup Mode.

NOTE

l When Port Mapping of the ClientLP port on the TDX board is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1 G), Line Rate of the ODU2LP port on the NS2 board must be set to Speedup Mode.

l When Port Mapping is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) , Line Rate must be setto Standard Mode.

CAUTIONPort Mapping and Line Rate of the boards that services pass must be consistent; otherwise,service interruption occurs.

6. Select the board, click State and choose IS to set Primary, Secondary State.

Step 3 Repeat step 2 to configure attributes of ports on the TN52NS2 board at station B.

Step 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to configure attributes of ports on the TN52TDX and TN52NS2 boards ofstation C.

Step 5 Configure ODU2 services between the TN52NS2 board and the TN52TDX board at station A.

1. Configure ODU2 services from the ClientLP port of the TN52TDX board to the ODU2LPport of the TN52NS2 board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

The following table lists the values of the parameters.



53

Field Value

Level ODU2

Service Type -


Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-52TDX

Source Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)

Source Optical Channel 1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NS2

Sink Optical Port 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

Sink Optical Channel 1

Activate Immediately Active

NOTE



Step 7 Configure ODU2 services between the TN52NS2 boards at station B.


Field Value

Level ODU2

Service Type -


Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-07-52NS2

Source Optical Port 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)








54

NOTE



Step 9 Configure ODU2 services between the TN52NS2 board and the TN52TDX board at station C.1. Configure ODU2 services from the ClientLP port of the TN52TDX board to the ODU2LP

port of the TN52NS2 board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.


Field Value

Level ODU2

Service Type -



Source Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)






NOTE



----End

2.8 ParametersDescribes the parameters involved in the WDM services configuration.

2.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection ConfigurationIn this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.



55

Table 2-12 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration

Field Value Description

Level Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.

The Level parameter is usedto differentiate the servicetypes configured whenelectrical cross-connectionsare configured.Click A.20 Level (WDMCross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Service Type For example, FE, STM-1,FICON

When Level of a new serviceis set to Any, you can selecta specific service type.

Direction Unidirectional,Bidirectional.Default: Unidirectional

The Direction parameterindicates the servicedirection mode when theservice cross-connection isconfigured. It can be set toeither Unidirectional orBidirectional.Click A.21 Direction(WDM Cross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Source Channel Slot ID-Board Name-OpticalInterface ID-Optical ChannelIDDefault: Null

The Source Channelparameter is used to query thetransmit channel of a certainelectrical cross-connectservice (unidirectionalservice flow).Click A.17 Source Channel(WDM Cross-Connection)for more information.

Sink Channel Slot ID - Board Name -Optical Interface ID - OpticalChannel IDDefault: Null

The Sink Channel parameteris used to query the receivechannel of a certain electricalcross-connect service(unidirectional service flow).Click A.18 Sink Channel(WDM Cross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.



56


Occupied ODUTUk SlotCount

l When ODUflex ServiceType is set to Custom:1-8Default: 8

l When ODUflex ServiceType is set to FC400: thispatameter is 4

l When ODUflex ServiceType is set to FC800: thispatameter is 7

l When ODUflex ServiceType is set to 3GSDI orInfiniBand 2.5G: thispatameter is 3

Specifies the number ofODUflex timeslots forreceived services. Thisparameter is set based on thetype and rate of the servicereceived by the port. Theparameter value ranges from1 to 8.NOTE

The OptiX OSN 3800/6800doesn't support this parameter.

Service Rate(bit/s) 1249245570-9993964557 The parameter value variesaccording to the value ofOccupied ODUTUk SlotCount in the range of1249245570 to 9993964557.It cannot be set manually.NOTE

The OptiX OSN 3800/6800doesn't support this parameter.

Activation Status Active, InactiveDefault: Active

The Activation Statusparameter is used to displaywhether the service cross-connection configuration isactivated.Click A.19 ActivationStatus (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)for more information.

Service Origin Create Manually,Intelligently Generate

Displays the mode ofcreating WDM cross-connections.

2.8.2 WDM Timeslot ConfigurationIn this user interface, you can configure WDM services. You can specify ports and timeslots fortransmitting and receiving services, and set the client-side service protocol.



57

Table 2-13 Parameters of WDM services

Parameters Value Description

Port NE-Slot-Board-OpticalInterface-Channel

The Port parameter indicatesthe location of the servicetimeslots, including thechannel, optical interface,board, slot, and NE where thetimeslots reside.

Service Type For example: FE, STM-1,FICON

The Service Type parameteris used to set the type of theservices at an optical portwhen the cross-connectionsof any services areconfigured, to match the typeof the actual services.

Transmit Timeslot 1 to 32 The Transmit Timeslotparameter is used to select theservice timeslots in thetransmit direction.The Send Timeslotparameter is used to select theservice timeslots in thetransmit direction.Click A.22 Service Timeslot(WDM Services) for moreinformation.

Receive Timeslot 1 to 32 The Receive Timeslotparameter is used to select theservice timeslots on thereceive direction.Click A.22 Service Timeslot(WDM Services) for moreinformation.



58

3 Configuring the TN11TOM Board(Manually by Station)

About This Chapter

A TN11TOM board can work in cascading or non-cascading mode and be configured withdifferent port working modes. Based on different working modes, the TN11TOM board isapplicable to five scenarios. You need to manually configure the TN11TOM board by stationon the NMS for the five application scenarios.

NOTEWhen a TN11TOM board is used to configure ODU1 cross-connections, the TN11TOM board workingwith the TN12NS2 or the TN52NS2 board in the OptiX OSN 3800 must be installed in the following slots:

l IU2 and IU4

l IU2 and IU5

l IU3 and IU4

l IU3 and IU5

3.1 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Four ODU1 ElectricalSignalsThis configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implementconversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.

3.2 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1Electrical SignalsThis configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implementconversion between four channels of OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electricalsignals.

3.3 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Four Any Services and Four OTU1 OpticalSignalsThis configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implementconversion between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand four channels of OTU1 optical signals.

3.4 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Seven Any Services and One OTU1 OpticalSignal

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide 3 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station)


59

This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implementconversion between seven channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand one channel of OTU1 optical signals.

3.5 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 OpticalSignal and Dual Feeding and Selective Receiving on the WDM SideThis configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to implement conversionbetween six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channelof OTU1 optical signals, and how to implement the function of dual feeding and selectivereceiving on the WDM side.



60

3.1 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight AnyServices and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implementconversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.

3.1.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThis section describes how to configure services on a ring network.

Service Requirement

See Figure 3-1. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network. All the ONEsfunction as OADM stations.

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN11TOM board accesses eight Any services(100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into four ODU1 services. The ODU1 servicesare then sent to the 12NS2 board at station A, where they are converted into one OTU2 service.

Figure 3-1 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary board in non-cascading mode) inapplication scenario 1

B

A

C

D

User1

User2

EASTNMS

WEST

WEST

EAST

WEST EAST

:OADM

WEST

EAST

12NS211TOM

SLOT 12SLOT 15

12NS211TOM

SLOT 12SLOT 15



61

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, a TN11TOM board and a 12NS2 board must be configured at stations A and Beach.

3.1.2 Service Signal FlowThis section provides the signal flow diagram of station A.

One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B.

Figure 3-2 shows the service signal flow at station A.

Figure 3-2 Bidirectional service at station A12NS2

1(IN/OUT)

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3

11TOM

3(RX1/TX1)4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)

9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)




: Client-side services

: WDM-side services

: Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

: Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS

3.1.3 Configuration ProcessThis section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of theTN11TOM board.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.


PrecautionsNOTE

The value of Board Mode is Non-cascading mode by default. In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)and 203 (ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) ports can access a maximum of four services, and the 202 (ClientLP2/ClientLP2) and 204 (ClientLP4/ ClientLP4) ports can access a maximum of two services.



62

NOTE

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can beconfigured in only the first channel of the ClientLP port.

The total rate of services accessed by a ClientLP port must be equal to or lower than 2.5 Gbit/s.

The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.

The client-side ports can be grouped as required.


Step 1 Set Board Mode to Non-cascading.1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN11TOM board and choose Configuration > WDM

Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list.3. Click the Board Mode and select Non-cascading from the drop-down list.

NOTE

If a cross-connection is configured on the board, delete the cross-connection on the board before settingBoard Mode.

NOTE

If the Board Mode of the board is changed, the default port configuration data and serviceconfiguration data will be restored, and as a result the services will be interrupted.

4. Select the board, click State and choose IS to set Primary, Secondary State.5. Click Apply.

Step 2 Configure Service Type at the WDM-side port of the TN11TOM board according to the serviceplanning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 3 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TN11TOM board.1. Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the

TN11TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board. For details, see 12.4.1Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN11TOMboard.



63

2. Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.3. Repeat Step 3.1 to configure the remaining seven Any services.4. Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port. For details on how to configure

service timeslots, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the TN11TOM and 12NS2boards.1. Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the TN11TOM and

12NS2 boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.



64

2. Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.

3. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining cross-connect services between the TN11TOMand 12NS2 boards.

4. Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port. For details on how to configureservice timeslots, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

----End

3.2 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Four OTU1Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implementconversion between four channels of OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electricalsignals.




65

Service Requirement

See Figure 3-3. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEsfunction as OADM stations.

User1, User2, and User3 communicate with each other through one OTU2 service each. Atstation A, the TN11TOM board accesses four OTU1 services and then converts them into fourODU1 services. The four ODU1 services are then sent to two 12NS2 boards at station Aaccording to the actual service requirement. Each 12NS2 board converges the received ODU1services and other accessed services into one OTU2 service.

Figure 3-3 Networking diagram for the TN11TOM board (tributary board in non-cascadingmode) in application scenario 2

B

A

C

D

User2

EASTNMS

WEST

WEST

EAST

WEST EAST

:OADM

WEST

EAST

SLOT 13SLOT 15

12NS211TOM

SLOT 13SLOT 15

SLOT 1212NS211TOM

12NS2

SLOT 13SLOT 15

12NS211TOM

User1

User3


In this example, a TN11TOM board and two 12NS2 boards must be configured at station A, anda TN11TOM board and a 12NS2 board must be configured at stations B and C each.


One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Another OTU2 service isavailable between station A and station C.




66

Figure 3-4 Bidirectional service at station A


Prerequisite




PrecautionsNOTE

The client-side optical ports can be selected as required.

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can beconfigured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port.


Step 1 Set Service Mode of the TN11TOM board to OTN Mode. For details, see 12.3 Configuringthe Service Mode.



67

NOTE

When the TN11TOM board accesses OTU1 services on the client side, you first need to set the ServiceMode of the TN11TOM board to OTN Mode.

Step 2 Configure Service Type at the WDM side port of the TN11TOM board as OTU1. For details,see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 3 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of OTU1 services for the TN11TOMboard.

1. Configure an OTU1 cross-connection between the 3(RX1/TX1) port and the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) port on the TN11TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 CreatingCross-Connections.

NOTE



3. Repeat Step 3.1 to configure the remaining three OTU1 services.


Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the TN11TOM and 12NS2boards.

1. Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the TN11TOM and12NS2 boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.



68


3. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining cross-connect services between the TN11TOMand 12NS2 boards.


----End

3.3 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Four AnyServices and Four OTU1 Optical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implementconversion between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand four channels of OTU1 optical signals.


Service Requirement




69

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN11TOM board accesses four GE servicesand then converts them into four OTU1 services.

Figure 3-5 Networking diagram for the TN11TOM board (tributary-line board in non-cascadingmode) in application scenario 3

B

A

C

D

User1

User2

WESTEASTNMS

EAST

EAST

EASTWEST

WEST

WEST

:OADM

11TOMSLOT 14

11TOMSLOT 14

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, a TN11TOM board must be configured at station A and station B each.


Four OTU1 services are available between station A and station B.




70


11TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)

9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)






: WDM-side services




Prerequisite




PrecautionsNOTE

The client-side optical ports and WDM-side optical ports can be selected as required.


NOTE

When the service type on both the client side and the WDM side of the TOM board is OTU1, the TOMboard also can regenerate the OTU1 service.

l In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal.Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.

l In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1signals. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical ports.


Step 1 Set the type of ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7), and 10 (RX8/TX8) to LineSide Color Optical Port. For details, see 11.1 Modifying Port.



71

NOTE

When the TOM board is used as a tributary-line board, a corresponding WDM-side optical module mustbe inserted in the WDM-side optical port, and the Type of this optical port must be changed to Line SideColor Optical Port.


Step 3 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TN11TOM board.

1. Configure the Any cross-connection between the 3(RX1/TX1) port and the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) port on TN11TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE



3. Repeat Step 3.1 to configure the remaining three Any services.


Step 4 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections for the OTU1 services on the TN11TOMboard.

1. Configure electrical cross-connections for the OTU1 service on the TN11TOM board. Fordetails, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.



72


3. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining three OTU1 services.


----End

3.4 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Seven AnyServices and One OTU1 Optical Signal

This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implementconversion between seven channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand one channel of OTU1 optical signals.


Service Requirement

See Figure 3-7. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network. All the ONEsfunction as OADM stations.



73

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN11TOM board accesses seven Any services(100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one OTU1 service.

Figure 3-7 Networking diagram for the TN11TOM board (tributary-line board in cascadingmode) in application scenario 4

B

A

C

D

User1

User2

WESTEASTNMS

EAST

EAST

EASTWEST

WEST

WEST

:OADM

11TOMSLOT 15

11TOMSLOT 15







74



11TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 10(RX8/TX8)





7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)

9(RX7/TX7)





: WDM-side services






PrecautionsNOTE

For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express,HD-SDI), the client-side ports can access up to only one channel. And this service can be configured inthe first optical channel at the ClientLP port.

The client-side seven pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

NOTE

In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.



75

NOTE

When the service type on both the client side and the WDM side of the TOM board is OTU1, the TOMboard also can regenerate the OTU1 service.

l In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal.Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.

l In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1signals. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical ports.


Step 1 Set Board Mode to Cascading mode.1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN11TOM board and choose Configuration > WDM

Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list.3. Click the Board Mode and select Cascading mode from the drop-down list.

NOTE


NOTE



Step 2 Set the type of ports 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, see 11.1Modifying Port.

NOTE



Step 4 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TN11TOM board1. Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections as the figure below.



76

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TOMboard.

2. Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.3. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining six Any services.4. Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port. For details on how to configure


Step 5 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of OTU1 services for the TN11TOMboard1. Configure electrical cross-connections for the OTU1 service on the TN11TOM board. For

details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.



77

2. Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.3. Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port. For details on how to configure


----End

3.5 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between Six AnyServices and One OTU1 Optical Signal and Dual Feedingand Selective Receiving on the WDM Side

This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to implement conversionbetween six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channelof OTU1 optical signals, and how to implement the function of dual feeding and selectivereceiving on the WDM side.


Service Requirement




78

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN11TOM board accesses six Any services(100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one OTU1 service. On the WDM side,the TN11TOM board performs dual feeding and selective receiving.

Figure 3-9 Networking diagram for the TN11TOM board (tributary-line board in cascadingmode) in application scenario 5

B

A

C

D

User1

User2

WESTEASTNMS

EAST

EAST

EASTWEST

WEST

WEST

:OADM

11TOMSLOT 14

11TOMSLOT 14

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, a TN11TOM board must be configured at station A and station B.






79



11TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

10(RX8/TX8)





7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)

9(RX7/TX7)




: WDM-side services






PrecautionsNOTE

For the client services at a rate greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express,HD-SDI), the client-side ports can access up to only one channel. And this service can be configured inthe first optical channel at the ClientLP port.

The client-side six pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

NOTE

In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.


Step 1 Set Board Mode to Cascading mode.1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN11TOM board and choose Configuration > WDM

Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list.



80

3. Click the Board Mode and select Cascading mode from the drop-down list.

NOTE


NOTE



Step 2 Set the type of ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. Fordetails, see 11.1 Modifying Port.

NOTE



Step 4 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TN11TOM board.1. Configure the Any cross-connection between the 3(RX1/TX1) port and the 201(ClientLP1/

ClientLP1) port on TN11TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TOMboard.



81

2. Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.3. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining five Any services.4. Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port. For details on how to configure


Step 5 Configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/TX7)and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TN11TOM board to achieve dual feeding.1. Configure the OTU1 cross-connection between the ODU1LP port and the RX/TX port on

TN11TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports for dual feeding. Theservice on the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channelmust be set as unidirectional. In this example, port 9 (RX7/TX7) is the working channel port, andport 10 (RX8/TX8) is the protection channel port.



82



83

2. Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.3. Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port. For details on how to configure


Step 6 Configure selective receiving on the WDM side of the TN11TOM board.1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Port Protection from the

Function Tree.2. In the Port Protection window, click New. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click

OK. The Create Protection Group dialog box displayed. Select Intra-Board 1+1Protection from Protection Type. Enter the other parameters of the protection group. Fordetails of parameters, see the Feature Description.

3. Click OK. In the window that is displayed, click Close. The created protection group isdisplayed in the window.

4. Confirm that the values of the parameters for the protection group are the same as the valuesthat are set.

----End



84

4 Configuring the TN52TOM Board(Manually by Station)

About This Chapter

A TN52TOM board can work in cascading or non-cascading mode and be configured withdifferent port working modes. Based on different working modes, the TN52TOM board isapplicable to 12 scenarios. You need to manually configure the TN52TOM board by station onthe NMS for the 12 application scenarios.

4.1 Overview of the Working ModesThis section describes the board working mode and port working mode. A specific service signalflow of a board is available when the board working mode and port working mode are set tospecific values.

4.2 Configuration PrinciplesThis section describes the principles for configuring the TN52TOM board.

4.3 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Two ODU0 or OneODU1 Electrical SignalsThis configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand two ODU0 or one ODU1 (with ODU0 mapping) electrical signals.

4.4 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 OpticalSignal (with ODU0 Mapping)This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s andone channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU0 mapping), and how to implement the functionof dual feeding and selective receiving on the WDM side. If only one of optical ports 9 (RX7/TX7) or 10 (RX8/TX8) is used as the WDM-side optical port, the TN52TOM board canimplement conversion between seven Any services and one channel of OTU1 optical signals(with ODU0 mapping). Perform the configurations by referring to the following steps.

4.5 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and One ODU1 ElectricalSignal



85

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand one ODU1 electrical signal.

4.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 OpticalSignal (with ODU1 Mapping)This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s andone channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU1 mapping), and how to implement the functionof dual feeding and selective receiving at the WDM side. If only one of optical ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) is used as the WDM-side optical port, the TN52TOM board canimplement conversion between seven Any services and one channel of OTU1 optical signals(with ODU0 mapping). Perform the configurations by referring to the following steps.

4.7 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Eight ODU0 or FourODU1 Electrical SignalsThis configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals or four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.

4.8 Application Scenario 6: Conversion Between Four Any Services and Two OTU1 OpticalSignalsThis configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand two channels of OTU1 optical signals, and how to implement the function of dual feedingand selective receiving at the WDM side. If only two of optical ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7), or 10 (RX8/TX8) are used as the WDM-side optical ports, the TN52TOMcan implement conversion between six Any services and two channels of OTU1 optical signals.Perform the configurations by referring to the following steps.

4.9 Application Scenario 7: Conversion Between Eight Any or Four OTU1 Services and FourODU1 Electrical SignalsThis configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between eight channels of Any or four channels of OTU1 services and four channelsODU1 electrical signals.

4.10 Application Scenario 8: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Services and Eight ODU0Electrical SignalsThis configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between four channels of OTU1 services and eight channels of ODU0 electricalsignals.

4.11 Application Scenario 9: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Eight ODU0Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between four channels OTU1 optical signals and eight channels of ODU0 electricalsignals through Any re-encapsulation.

4.12 Application Scenario 10: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between four channels OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electricalsignals through Any re-encapsulation.

4.13 Application Scenario 11: Conversion Between Two OTU1 Optical Signals and Two OTU1Optical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)



86

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between two channels OTU1 optical signals and two channels OTU1 optical signalsthrough Any re-encapsulation.

4.14 Application Scenario 12: Regeneration of Four OTU1 Optical SignalsThis configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementelectrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. If you set only two of the 7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7), and 10(RX8/TX8) optical ports as WDM-side optical ports, theTN52TOM board can implement conversion between six Any services and two channels ofOTU1 optical signals. If the 7(RX5/TX5) and 8(RX6/TX6) optical ports are configured as oneprotection group and the 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) optical ports are configured are anotherprotection group, the TN52TOM board can implement conversion between four Any servicesand two channels of OTU1 optical signals and implement the function of dual feeding andselective receiving at the WDM side.



87

4.1 Overview of the Working ModesThis section describes the board working mode and port working mode. A specific service signalflow of a board is available when the board working mode and port working mode are set tospecific values.

Board Working mode

The TN11TOM and TN52TOM boards support the cascading and non-cascading modes.

l In cascading mode, a maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) Any services can be inputto the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board through the SFP module on the client side. Theservices are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one or two ODU0 services or oneODU1 service. Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 ports, can access a maximum of eight Any services.

l In non-cascading mode, a maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) Any services can beinput to the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board through the SFP module on the client side.The services are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one to eight ODU0 servicesor one to four ODU1 services. Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 ports, can access a maximum of four Anyservices.

NOTE

l The navigation path for setting the TN11TOM board is Configuration > WDM Interface > By Board/Port(Channel) > Board.

l The navigation path for setting the TN52TOM board is Configuration > Working Mode. A specificservice signal flow of the TN52TOM board is available only when both the board working mode andport working mode are set to specific values.

Port Working Mode

The TN52TOM board should be set to the cascading or non-cascading mode. In addition,application scenarios such as the ODU0 or ODU1 mapping mode and tributary-line mode of theports on the board should be set. As shown in Table 4-1, the TN52TOM board supports 14working modes.

Table 4-1 Mapping between the working modes and signal flows of the TN52TOM board

Board Workingmode

Port WorkingMode

Signal Flow Flow Chart

Cascading

ODU0 mode Any->ODU0[->ODU1]

4.3.2 Service SignalFlow

ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode

Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1


ODU1 Mode Any->ODU1 4.5.2 Service SignalFlow


Any->ODU1->OTU1




88

Board Workingmode

Port WorkingMode

Signal Flow Flow Chart

None (not for ports) - -

Non-Cascading

ODU0 mode Any->ODU0[->ODU1]



Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1


ODU1 Mode OTU1/Any->ODU1 4.9.2 Service SignalFlow

ODU1_ODU0 mode OTU1->ODU1->ODU0

4.10.2 ServiceSignal Flow

ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulationmode

OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0


ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode

OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1


ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulationtributary-line mode

OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1


ODU1 tributary-linemode

OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1


None (not for ports) - -

NOTE

l [->ODU1]: indicates that "ODU1" is optional. For example, in non-cascading ODU0 tributary mode,there are two service signal flows: Any->ODU0 and Any->ODU0->ODU1.

l None (not for ports): indicates that the resources at this port are not used and are released to other ports.

4.2 Configuration PrinciplesThis section describes the principles for configuring the TN52TOM board.

The rules for configuring the TN52TOM board are as follows:

l The OptiX OSN 8800 does not support distributed cross-connection.

l For the OptiX OSN 6800,

– The TN52TOM board can groom a maximum of six Any services through the backplane.

– The TN52TOM board can groom Any services on the opposite board.

l For the OptiX OSN 3800,



89

– The TN52TOM board can groom a maximum of six Any services through the backplane.

– The TN52TOM board cannot groom Any services throughout the full-mesh network.

– Inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards, ifrequired, should be configured in such a manner that the ClientLP3-1 port on theTN52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-3 port on the TN52NS2 board,the ClientLP5-1 port on the TN52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-2port on the TN52NS2 board.

– When a TN52TOM board is used to configure GE service and Any service cross-connections, the TN52TOM board working with another board must be installed in thefollowing slots:

– IU2 and IU3

– IU4 and IU5

– When a TN52TOM board is used to configure ODU1 cross-connections, the TN52TOMboard working with another board must be installed in the following slots:

– IU2 and IU4

– IU2 and IU5

– IU3 and IU4

– IU3 and IU5

l When the board works in any mode, the source and sink channel IDs for services must beconsistent. For example, if a client-side service is configured at ClientLPX.1, the servicemust be also configured at ClientLPY.1 on the interconnected board. If a client-side serviceis configured at ClientLPX.2, the service must be also configured at ClientLPY.2 on theinterconnected board. That is, service interconnection must be implemented at channelswith the same ID (port numbers may be different). This is due to hardware limitations.

l In non-cascading board working mode, the ports on the board can be set to different portworking modes.

l In tributary-line mode, the ODU1 service does not support centralized cross-connection.

l When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the ODU0 scheduling is not supportedand thus the following port working mode application scenarios are not supported:

– Application Scenario 8: Non-cascading ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

– Application Scenario 9: Non-cascading ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)

l When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the following port working modeapplication scenario is not supported:

– Application Scenario 10: Non-cascading ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1)

4.3 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight AnyServices and Two ODU0 or One ODU1 Electrical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand two ODU0 or one ODU1 (with ODU0 mapping) electrical signals.



90

4.3.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThis section describes how to configure the TN52TOM board on a ring network.

Service Requirement


User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses eight Any services(100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service.The two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service is accessed by the TN52NS2 board at station A,and is then converged with other accessed services as one OTU2 service.

Figure 4-1 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU0 mode in cascading mode) inapplication scenario 1

B

A

C

D

User1

EASTNMS

WEST

:OADM

User2

SLOT 12SLOT 15

52NS252TOM

SLOT 12SLOT 15

52NS252TOM

WEST

WEST

WESTEAST

EAST

EAST


In this example, a TN52TOM board and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station A andstation B each.

4.3.2 Service Signal FlowThis section describes the service signal flow at station A.




91

When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the signal flow at station A is as shownin Figure 4-2. When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the signal flow at station A isas shown in Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-2 Signal flow at station A when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board

52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)

A


202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-17(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)





10(RX8/TX8)

A52NS2

1(IN/OUT)














: WDM-side services

: Virtual channel

: Working service direction

Figure 4-3 Signal flow at station A when the cross-connect board is the XCS board52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)



8(RX6/TX6)



10(RX8/TX8)


52NS2

1(IN/OUT)





161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1




: WDM-side services

: Virtual channel



Prerequisite






92

PrecautionsNOTE

l When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the TN52TOM board cannot groom theODU1 service in cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).

l When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the TN52TOM board cannot groom the ODU0 servicein cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).

NOTE

The client-side optical port cannot be set to Line Side Color Optical Port or Line Side Colorless OpticalPort.

NOTE

Services can be input at each client-side optical port at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s.

NOTE

Services can be input at the eight pairs of client-side optical ports at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

NOTE

l The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-8, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.

l Only one GE service can be input at each group of ClientLP ports.

NOTE

If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same number,these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1channel is configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 channel.


Step 1 Set the Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Cascading andthen set Port Working Mode to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). For details, see 12.1Configuring Working Modes.

Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TN52TOM according to the serviceplanning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOMboard for the Any services of the board.1. Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the


NOTE

In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set ServiceType to only FE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, or FDDI.




93

2. Repeat Step 3.1 to configure the remaining Any services.

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the two ODU0 services between the TN52TOM andTN52NS2 boards.

NOTE

In cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]), this configuration is supported only when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board.

1. Configure a cross-connection for one ODU0 service between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.



94

2. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure a cross-connection for the other ODU0 service between theTN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.

Step 5 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM andTN52NS2 boards.For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE

In cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]), this configuration is supported only when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board.

When ODU1 cross-connections are created, ODU0 cross-connections from the ClientLP port to ODU0LPon the TN52TOM board are automatically created.



95

----End

4.4 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Six AnyServices and One OTU1 Optical Signal (with ODU0Mapping)

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s andone channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU0 mapping), and how to implement the functionof dual feeding and selective receiving on the WDM side. If only one of optical ports 9 (RX7/TX7) or 10 (RX8/TX8) is used as the WDM-side optical port, the TN52TOM board canimplement conversion between seven Any services and one channel of OTU1 optical signals(with ODU0 mapping). Perform the configurations by referring to the following steps.



User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses six Any services



96

(100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one OTU1 service. On the WDM side,the TN52TOM board performs dual feeding and selective receiving.

Figure 4-4 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU0 tributary-line mode incascading mode) in application scenario 2

B

A

C

D

User1

EASTNMS

WEST

:OADM

User2

SLOT 15 52TOM

SLOT 15 52TOM

WEST

WEST

WESTEAST

EAST

EAST


In this example, a TN52TOM board must be configured at station A and station B each.






: WDM-side services



52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)



7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)




161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1


161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

10(RX8/TX8)

9(RX7/TX7)







97


Prerequisite




PrecautionsNOTE

l Two channels with the same type of services at the ClientLP1 and ClientLP2 ports each cannot beused at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured,the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type cannot be configured.

l The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-8, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.

l Only one GE service can be input through each group of ClientLP ports.

l Services can be input at the six pairs of client-side optical ports at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

l Services can be input at each client-side optical port at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s.

l In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.


Step 1 Set the Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Cascading andthen set Port Working Mode to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes.


NOTE

When the TN52TOM board is used as a tributary-line board, Type of this optical port used as the WDMside port must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.

Step 3 Configure Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board according tothe service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOMboard for the Any services of the board.

1. Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on theTN52TOM board for the Any services of the board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.



98

NOTE




Step 5 Configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/TX7)and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TN52TOM board to achieve dual feeding.1. Configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/

TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TN52TOM board to achieve dual feeding. For details, see12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports for dual feeding. The serviceon the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be setas unidirectional. In this example, port 9 (RX7/TX7) is the working channel port, and port 10 (RX8/TX8)is the protection channel port.



99



100

Step 6 Configure selective receiving at the WDM side of the TN52TOM board.1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Port Protection.2. In the Port Protection window, click New. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click



----End

4.5 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Eight AnyServices and One ODU1 Electrical Signal

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand one ODU1 electrical signal.



User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses eight Any services



101

(100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one ODU1 service. The ODU1 serviceis accessed by the TN52NS2 board at station A, and is then converged with other accessedservices as one OTU2 service.

Figure 4-6 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1 mode in cascading mode) inapplication scenario 3

B

A

C

D

User1

EASTNMS

WEST

:OADM

User2

SLOT 12SLOT 15

52NS252TOM

SLOT 12SLOT 15

52NS252TOM

WEST

WEST

WESTEAST

EAST

EAST

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, a TN52TOM board and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station A andstation B each.






102

Figure 4-7 Bidirectional service at station A52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)



9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)

52NS2

1(IN/OUT)






: WDM-side services








PrecautionsNOTE

The client-side optical port cannot be set to Line Side Color Optical Port or Line Side Colorless OpticalPort.

NOTE


NOTE

Services can be input at the eight pairs of client-side optical ports at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCTStep 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Cascading and then

set Port Working Mode to ODU1 mode (Any->ODU1). For details, see 12.1 ConfiguringWorking Modes.


Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOMboard for the Any services of the board.



103

1. Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on theTN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board. For details, see 12.4.1Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE

In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set ServiceType to only FE,STM-1,.STM-4,.STM-16,.OC-3,.OC-12,.OC-48,.FC100,.FC200,.FICON,.FICONExpress,.HD-SDI,.DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, or FDDI.



Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM andTN52NS2 boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.



104

----End

4.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Six AnyServices and One OTU1 Optical Signal (with ODU1Mapping)

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s andone channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU1 mapping), and how to implement the functionof dual feeding and selective receiving at the WDM side. If only one of optical ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) is used as the WDM-side optical port, the TN52TOM board canimplement conversion between seven Any services and one channel of OTU1 optical signals(with ODU0 mapping). Perform the configurations by referring to the following steps.



User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses six Any services



105

(100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one OTU1 service. On the WDM side,the TN52TOM board performs dual feeding and selective receiving.

Figure 4-8 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1 tributary-line mode incascading mode) in application scenario 4

B

A

C

D

User1

EASTNMS

WEST

:OADM

User2

SLOT 15 52TOM

SLOT 15 52TOM

WEST

WEST

WESTEAST

EAST

EAST







106



: WDM-side services



52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)



9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)






PrecautionsNOTE

The client-side six pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, the client-side ports can access up to only onechannel. This service can be configured at only the first ClientLP port.

In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.


Step 1 Set the Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Cascading andthen set Port Working Mode to ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU1->OTU1). Fordetails, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes.


NOTE

When the TN52TOM board is used as a tributary-line board, Type of this optical port used as the WDMside port must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.

Step 3 Configure Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board according tothe service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.



107

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOMboard for the Any services of the board.1. Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the

TN52TOM board for the Any services of the board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE

In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set ServiceType to only FE,STM-1,.STM-4,.STM-16,.OC-3,.OC-12,.OC-48,.FC100,.FC200,.FICON,.FICONExpress,.HD-SDI,.DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, or FDDI.



Step 5 Configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/TX7)and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TN52TOM board to achieve dual feeding. For details, see 12.4.1Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports for dual feeding. The service on theworking channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be set asunidirectional. In this example, port 9 (RX7/TX7) is the working channel port, and port 10 (RX8/TX8) is theprotection channel port.



108



109

Step 6 Configure selective receiving at the WDM side of the TN52TOM board.1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Port Protection.2. In the Port Protection window, click New. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click




----End

4.7 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between Eight AnyServices and Eight ODU0 or Four ODU1 Electrical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals or four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.





110

User1, User2, and User3 communicate with each other through one OTU2 service each. Atstation A, the TN52TOM board accesses eight Any services and then converts them into eightODU0 or four ODU1 services. The eight ODU0 or four ODU1 services are then sent to twoTN52NS2 boards at station A based on the actual service requirement. Each TN52NS2 boardconverges the received ODU0 or ODU1 services and other accessed services into one OTU2service.

Figure 4-10 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU0 mode in non-cascadingmode) in application scenario 5

B

A

C

D

User1

EASTNMS

WEST

:OADM

User2

SLOT 12SLOT 15

52NS252TOM

SLOT 12SLOT 15

52NS252TOM

WEST

WEST

WESTEAST

EAST

EAST

SLOT 13 52NS2

52NS252TOM

SLOT 12SLOT 15

User3

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, a TN52TOM board and two TN52NS2 boards must be configured at station A.A TN52TOM board and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station B and station D each.



When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the signal flow at station A is as shownin Figure 4-11. When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the signal flow at station A isas shown in Figure 4-12.



111

Figure 4-11 Signal flow at station A when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)

52NS2

1(IN/OUT)















203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1









: WDM-side services



Figure 4-12 Signal flow at station A when the cross-connect board is the XCS board52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)


9(RX7/TX7)

52NS2

1(IN/OUT)



























: WDM-side services



10(RX8/TX8)


Prerequisite






112

PrecautionsNOTE

When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the TN52TOM board cannot groom the ODU1service in non-cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the TN52TOM board cannot groom the ODU0 servicein non-cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).

NOTE

The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-4, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.

Only one GE service can be input at each group of ClientLP ports.


If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same number,these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1channel is configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 channel. Service configurations at the ClentLP3 and ClientLP4, ClientLP5 and ClientLP6,and ClientLP7 and ClientLP8 ports must also comply with this restriction.


Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascadingand then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP ports to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes.


Step 3 Configure the cross-connections for the eight Any services that are input to the TN52TOM board.1. Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the


NOTE





113


Step 4 Configure cross-connections for the eight ODU0 services between the TN52TOM andTN52NS2 boards.

NOTE

In non-cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]), this configuration is supported only when thecross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board.

1. Configure a cross-connection for one ODU0 service between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.



114

2. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure a cross-connection for the other ODU0 service between theTN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.

Step 5 Configure cross-connections for the four ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE

In non-cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]), this configuration is supported only for OptiXOSN 6800 and 3800.

When an ODU1 cross-connection is created, an intra-board ODU0 cross-connection is createdautomatically from the ClientIP port to the ODU0LP port on the TN52TOM board.



115

----End

4.8 Application Scenario 6: Conversion Between Four AnyServices and Two OTU1 Optical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/sand two channels of OTU1 optical signals, and how to implement the function of dual feedingand selective receiving at the WDM side. If only two of optical ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7), or 10 (RX8/TX8) are used as the WDM-side optical ports, the TN52TOMcan implement conversion between six Any services and two channels of OTU1 optical signals.Perform the configurations by referring to the following steps.



User1 and User2 communicate with each other. Two bidirectional OTU1 services are availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses four Any servicesand then converts them into two OTU2 services.



116

Figure 4-13 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU0 tributary-line mode in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 6

B

A

C

D

User1

EASTNMS

WEST

:OADM

User2

SLOT 15 52TOM

SLOT 15 52TOM

WEST

WEST

WESTEAST

EAST

EAST


In this example, a TN52TOM board must be configured at station A and station B each.


Two OTU1 services are available between station A and station B.



3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)


8(RX6/TX6)


9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)














: WDM-side services





117




PrecautionsNOTE

The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-4, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.Only one GE service can be input at each group of ClientLP ports.The client-side optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 or ClientLP3 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2or ClientLP4 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. Forexample, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1service type cannot be configured.

NOTE


NOTE

l The ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 do not support the non-cascading ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) mode.

l Before the working modes of the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 ports are set to ODU0 Tributary-LineMode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1), the working modes of the ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports mustbe set to NONE Mode(Not for Port).


Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascadingand then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP ports to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes.

Step 2 Set the type of ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line SideColor Optical Port. For details, see 11.1 Modifying Port.

NOTE

When the TN52TOM board is used as a tributary-line board, Type of the optical port used as the WDMside port must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.


Step 4 Configure the cross-connections for the four Any services that are input to the TN52TOM board.1. Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the




118

NOTE




Step 5 Configure two separate cross-connections from the ODU1LP port to WDM side ports on theTN52TOM board to achieve dual feeding.1. Configure two separate cross-connections from the ODU1LP port to ports 7 (RX5/TX5)

and 8 (RX6/TX6) for the TN52TOM board to achieve dual feeding. For details, see 12.4.1Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports for dual feeding. Theservice on the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channelmust be set as unidirectional. In this example, port 7 (RX5/TX5) is the working channel port, andport 8 (RX6/TX6) is the protection channel port.



119

2. Repeat Step 5.1 to configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical portto ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TN52TOM board to achieve dual feeding.

Step 6 Configure selective receiving at the WDM side of the TN52TOM board.1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Port Protection.2. In the Port Protection user port, click New. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click

OK. The Create Protection Group dialog box displayed. Select Intra-Board 1+1Protection from Protection Type. Enter the other parameters of the protection group. Fordetails on the parameters, see the Feature Description.



120



5. Repeat Step 6.2 and Step 6.3 to configure the selective receiving feature of the ports 9(RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TN52TOM board.

----End

4.9 Application Scenario 7: Conversion Between Eight Anyor Four OTU1 Services and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between eight channels of Any or four channels of OTU1 services and four channelsODU1 electrical signals.



User1, User2, and User3 communicate with each other through one OTU2 service each. Atstation A, the TN52TOM board accesses eight Any services (100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s) or fourOTU1 services and then converts them into four ODU1 services. The four ODU1 services are



121

then sent to two TN52NS2 boards at station A based on the actual services requirement. EachTN52NS2 board converges the received ODU1 services and other accessed services into oneOTU2 service.

Figure 4-15 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1 mode in non-cascadingmode) in application scenario 7

B

A

C

D

User1

EASTNMS

WEST

:OADM

User2

SLOT 12SLOT 15

52NS252TOM

SLOT 12SLOT 15

52NS252TOM

WEST

WEST

WESTEAST

EAST

EAST

SLOT 13 52NS2

52NS252TOM

SLOT 12SLOT 15

User3

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, a TN52TOM board and two TN52NS2 boards must be configured at station A.A TN52TOM board and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station B and station D each.






122



: WDM-side services

: Virtual channel


52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)



9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)

52NS2

1(IN/OUT)













52NS2

1(IN/OUT)






Prerequisite




PrecautionsNOTE




Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascadingand then set Port Working Mode to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). For details, see 12.1Configuring Working Modes.




123

Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOMboard for the Any services of the board.1. Configure the cross-connections from the 3(RX1/TX1) ports to the 201(ClientLP1/

ClientLP1) ports on the TN52TOM board for the Any or OTU1 services of the board. Fordetails, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE

In this configuration, you can set Level to GE, OTU1 or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you canset Service Type to only FE,STM-1,.STM-4,.STM-16,.OC-3,.OC-12,.OC-48,.FC100,.FC200,.FICON,.FICONExpress,.HD-SDI,.DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, or FDDI.





124

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM andTN52NS2 boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

Step 5 See the steps above to configure the station B, C, and D.

Inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the 52TOM and 52NS2 boards must beconfigured in the manner below.

Product 52TOM board 52NS2 board

OptiX OSN 3800 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1

205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2



OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 8800





----End



125

4.10 Application Scenario 8: Conversion Between FourOTU1 Services and Eight ODU0 Electrical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between four channels of OTU1 services and eight channels of ODU0 electricalsignals.


Service Requirement


User1, User2, and User3 communicate with each other through one OTU2 service each. Atstation A, the TN52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services and then converts them into eightODU0 services. The eight ODU0 services are then sent to two TN52NS2 boards at station Abased on the actual services requirement. Each TN52NS2 board converges the received ODU0services and other accessed services into one OTU2 service.

Figure 4-17 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1_ODU0 mode in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 8

B

A

C

D

User1

EASTNMS

WEST

:OADM

User2

SLOT 12SLOT 15

52NS252TOM

SLOT 12SLOT 15

52NS252TOM

WEST

WEST

WESTEAST

EAST

EAST

SLOT 13 52NS2

52NS252TOM

SLOT 12SLOT 15

User3



126


In this example, a TN52TOM board and two TN52NS2 boards must be configured at station A.A TN52TOM board and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station B and station D each.




Figure 4-18 Bidirectional service at station A when the cross-connect board is the XCM orXCH board

52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

7(RX5/TX5)


9(RX7/TX7)

52NS2

1(IN/OUT)





























: WDM-side services




Prerequisite




PrecautionsNOTE

When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the TN52TOM board does not support ODU1_ODU0mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) in non-cascading mode.



127

NOTE

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can beconfigured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port.The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.

NOTE

The client-side optical ports can be selected as required.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCTStep 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascading

and then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP ports to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes.

Step 2 Set Service Mode of the client-side port of TN52TOM as OTN Mode. For details, see 12.3Configuring the Service Mode.

NOTE


Step 3 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TN52TOM as OTU1 according tothe service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 4 Configure the OTU1 cross-connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports on the TN52TOMboard.1. Configure an OTU1 cross-connection between the 3(RX1/TX1) port and the 201

(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) port on TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

2. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining OTU1 services

Step 5 Configure ODU0 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.1. Configure an ODU0 cross-connection between the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) port on

TN52TOM board and the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) port on TN52NS2 board. For details,see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.



128

2. Repeat Step 5.1 to configure ODU0 cross-connections between other TN52TOM andTN52NS2 boards.

----End

4.11 Application Scenario 9: Conversion Between FourOTU1 Optical Signals and Eight ODU0 Electrical Signals(Through Any Re-Encapsulation)

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between four channels OTU1 optical signals and eight channels of ODU0 electricalsignals through Any re-encapsulation.



User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses four OTU1 servicesand then converts them into eight ODU0 services through Any re-encapsulation. The ODU0services are then sent to the TN52NS2 board at station A, where they are converted into oneOTU2 service.



129

Figure 4-19 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 9

B

A

C

D

User1

EASTNMS

WEST

:OADM

User2

SLOT 12SLOT 15

52NS252TOM

SLOT 12SLOT 14

52NS252TOM

WEST

WEST

WESTEAST

EAST

EAST

SLOT 15 52TOM

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, two TN52TOM boards and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station A.A TN52TOM board and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station B.






130


3(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

7(RX5/TX5)

9(RX7/TX7)





233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1
































52NS2

1(IN/OUT)














: WDM-side services






PrecautionsNOTE

When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the TN52TOM board does not supportODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode.

NOTE

Each optical port supports access of services at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s.


NOTE

When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TN52TOM board supports de-encapsulationand then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.


Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascadingand then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP ports to ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-



131

encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0). For details, see 12.1 ConfiguringWorking Modes.


NOTE


Step 3 Set Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board to OTU1. For details,see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.



2. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

Step 5 Set Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.2Configuring the Service Type.

NOTE

When configuring internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board. set the servicetype to the same as the type of services, which are encapsulated into the OTU1 services received on theclient side of the TN52TOM board. For example, if FE services are encapsulated into OTU1 services onthe upstream board of the TN52TOM board, set the service type to FE when configuring the internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.

Step 6 Configure internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TN52TOM board.1. Configure an Any cross-connection on the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1

Creating Cross-Connections.



132

NOTE

Services of the AnyLP1 port can only be configured at the AnyLP5 and AnyLP6 ports. Services ofthe AnyLP2 port can only be configured at the AnyLP7 and AnyLP8 ports, and so on.


Step 7 Configure ODU0 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.

1. Configure an ODU0 cross-connection between the 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5) port onTN52TOM board and the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) port on TN52NS2 board. For details,see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.


----End



133

4.12 Application Scenario 10: Conversion Between FourOTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals(Through Any Re-Encapsulation)

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between four channels OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electricalsignals through Any re-encapsulation.


Service Requirement


User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses four OTU1 servicesand then converts them into four ODU1 services through Any re-encapsulation. The ODU1services are then sent to the TN52NS2 board at station A, where they are converted into oneOTU2 service.

Figure 4-21 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 10

B

A

C

D

User1

EASTNMS

WEST

:OADM

User2

SLOT 12SLOT 15

52NS252TOM

SLOT 12SLOT 14

52NS252TOM

WEST

WEST

WESTEAST

EAST

EAST

SLOT 15 52TOM



134


In this example, two TN52TOM boards and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station A.A TN52TOM board and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station B.





3(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

7(RX5/TX5)

9(RX7/TX7)


52NS2

1(IN/OUT)





















































: WDM-side services




Prerequisite




PrecautionsNOTE

When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the TN52TOM board does not supportODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1) in non-cascading mode.



135

NOTE


NOTE


NOTE


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCTStep 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascading

and then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP ports to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1).


NOTE









136

NOTE


Step 6 Configure internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TN52TOM board.1. Configure an Any cross-connection on the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1


NOTE



Step 7 Configure ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.1. Configure an ODU1 cross-connection between the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) port on

TN52TOM board and the 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP) port on TN52NS2 board. For details,see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.



137


----End

4.13 Application Scenario 11: Conversion Between TwoOTU1 Optical Signals and Two OTU1 Optical Signals(Through Any Re-Encapsulation)

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementconversion between two channels OTU1 optical signals and two channels OTU1 optical signalsthrough Any re-encapsulation.



User1 and User2 communicate with each other. Two bidirectional OTU1 services are availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses two OTU1 servicesand then converts them into two OTU1 services through Any re-encapsulation.



138

Figure 4-23 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 11

B

A

C

D

User1

EASTNMS

WEST

:OADM

User2

SLOT 15 52TOM

SLOT 15 52TOM

WEST

WEST

WESTEAST

EAST

EAST


In this example, a TN52TOM board must be configured at station A and station B.


Two OTU1 services are available between station A and station B.



3(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)




























: WDM-side services



7(RX5/TX5)

9(RX7/TX7)

8(RX6/TX6)

10(RX8/TX8)



139


Prerequisite




PrecautionsNOTE

The client-side optical ports only can access two OTU1 services, and the OTU1 service can be configuredon only the first channel of the ClientLP port.


NOTE



Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascadingand then set Port Working Mode of ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1).

NOTE

l The ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports do not support the Non-Cascading ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1) mode

l Before the working mode of the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 are set to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1), the working modes of theClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports must be set to NONE Mode (Not for Port).


NOTE

When the TN52TOM board is used as a tributary & line board, a corresponding WDM-side optical modulemust be inserted in the WDM-side optical port, and the Type of this optical port must be changed to LineSide Color Optical Port.


NOTE





140

Step 5 Configure OTU1 cross-connections between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports on the TN52TOMboard.1. Configure an OTU1 cross-connection between the 3(RX1/TX1) port and the 201




NOTE


Step 7 Configure internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.1. Configure an Any cross-connection on the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1




141

NOTE



Step 8 Configure OTU1 cross-connections between the ODU1LP and RX/TX ports on the TN52TOMboard.1. Configure an OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 9(RX7/

TX7) ports on the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE




142


----End

4.14 Application Scenario 12: Regeneration of Four OTU1Optical Signals

This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implementelectrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. If you set only two of the 7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7), and 10(RX8/TX8) optical ports as WDM-side optical ports, theTN52TOM board can implement conversion between six Any services and two channels ofOTU1 optical signals. If the 7(RX5/TX5) and 8(RX6/TX6) optical ports are configured as oneprotection group and the 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) optical ports are configured are anotherprotection group, the TN52TOM board can implement conversion between four Any servicesand two channels of OTU1 optical signals and implement the function of dual feeding andselective receiving at the WDM side.



User1 and User2 communicate with each other. Four bidirectional OTU1 services are availablebetween station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services,decapsulates them into four ODU1 electrical signals, and then converts them into four OTU1services. In this manner, the electrical regeneration is implemented.



143

Figure 4-25 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1 tributary-line mode in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 12

B

A

C

D

User1

EASTNMS

WEST

:OADM

User2

SLOT 15 52TOM

SLOT 15 52TOM

WEST

WEST

WESTEAST

EAST

EAST



Four OTU1 services are available between station A and station B.



TOM

5(RX3/TX3) 9(RX7/TX7)205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)-1





: WDM-side services





144

4.14.3 Configuration ProcessThis section considers station A at which the TN52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services asan example to describe the configuration process of the TN52TOM board.



PrecautionsNOTE



Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascadingand then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP ports to ODU1 tributary-line mode(OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes.

Step 2 Set the type of ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line SideColor Optical Port. For details, see 11.1 Modifying Port.

NOTE

When the TN52TOM board is used as a tributary-line board, a corresponding WDM-side optical modulemust be inserted in the WDM-side optical port, and the Type of this optical port must be changed to LineSide Color Optical Port.

Step 3 Set Service Mode of the TN52TOM board to OTN Mode. For details, see 12.3 Configuringthe Service Mode.

NOTE


Step 4 Configure Service Type at the WDM-side port of the TN52TOM board as OTU1 according tothe service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOMboard for the OTU1 services of the board.1. Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports for the OTU1

services that are input to the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.



145

NOTE


2. Repeat Step 5.1 to configure cross-connections for the other OTU1 services.

Step 6 Configure the OTU1 cross-connections between the ODU1LP and RX/TX port on theTN52TOM board.1. Configure an OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and the 7

(RX5/TX5) on the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTE




146


----End



147

5 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manuallyby Station)

About This Chapter

The THA/TOA board can be configured with different port working modes and is applicable tovarious scenarios accordingly. You need to manually configure the board by station on the NMSfor the application scenarios.

The THA and TOA boards are almost the same except for the number of optical ports. The THAboard provides 16 optical ports while the TOA board provides 8 optical ports. This chapter usesthe TOA board as an example for illustration. The descriptions and configuration of the THAboard are similar to those of the TOA board.

The THA board differs from the TOA board in the following aspects:l The first eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections

only to the first eight LP ports; the last eight client-side ports on the THA board can beconfigured with cross-connections only to the last eight LP ports.

l The THA board cannot receive SDI and HD-SDI services on the client side.l The THA board does not support ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex).

Therefore, all configurations related to this port working mode are applicable only to theTOA board.

5.1 Overview of the Working ModeEach port on the TOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed ondifferent paths.

5.2 Configuration ProceduresSix port working modes are available for the TOA board on the NMS. The port for the None(not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes requireconfigurations.

5.3 Application Scenario 1: ODU0 Non-Convergence ModeWhen using the ODU0 non-convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion betweeneight channels of optical signals with arbitrary bit rates (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s) and eightchannels of ODU0 electrical signals.

5.4 Application Scenario 2: ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)


148

When using the ODU1 non-convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion betweeneight channels of optical signals with arbitrary bit rates (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s) and eightchannels of ODU1 electrical signals.

5.5 Application Scenario 3: ODU1 Convergence ModeWhen using the ODU1 convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion between eightchannels of optical signals with arbitrary bit rates (125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and eight channelsof ODU1 electrical signals.

5.6 Application Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 ModeIn ODU1_ODU0 mode, the TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of OTU1optical signals and 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals.

5.7 Application Scenario 5: ODUflex Non-Convergence ModeWhen using the ODUflex non-convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion betweenfour channels of FC400 optical signals and four channels of ODUflex electrical signals orconversion between five channels of 3G-SDI optical signals and five channels of ODUflexelectrical signals.



149

5.1 Overview of the Working ModeEach port on the TOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed ondifferent paths.

The TOA board supports six port working modes listed in Table 5-1. You can set the portworking modes on the NMS.

Table 5-1 Port working modes on the TOA board

Port Working Mode Signal Flow

ODU0 non-convergence mode Any->ODU0

ODU1 non-convergence mode OTU1/Any->ODU1

ODU1 convergence mode n x Any->ODU1 (1 ≤ n ≤ 8)

ODU1_ODU0 mode OTU1->ODU1->ODU0

ODUflex non-convergence mode Any->ODUflex

None (not for ports) -

NOTE

None (not for ports): indicates that the resources at the port in this mode are not used and are released toother ports.

5.2 Configuration ProceduresSix port working modes are available for the TOA board on the NMS. The port for the None(not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes requireconfigurations.

General Configuration ProcedureFigure 5-1 shows the general configuration procedure for the port working modes on the TOAboard.



150

Figure 5-1 General configuration procedure

Configure the port working mode

Configure the service type

Configure theport type

Configure inter-board cross-connections

Configure the service mode

Configure cross-connections from the client side to LP ports

Configure the timeslot configuration mode for

the line board

Mandatory

Optional

In the flowchart, the mandatory actions are required for each port working mode and optionalactions vary according to port working modes.

The optional actions must be configured in the following scenarios:

l Configure the port type: Port Type must be set to Client Side Color Optical Port whencolored optical signals are received on the client side.

l Configure the timeslot configuration mode: ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must beset for the line board that is interconnected with the TOA board.

– When the port working mode of the TOA board is ODUflex, ODU TimeslotConfiguration Mode must be set to Assign random for the line board that isinterconnected with the TOA board.

– In other port working modes, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the line boardto the same as the value that is set on the interconnected line board. The recommendedvalue is Assign random.

l Configure the service mode: When Service Type is set to OTU1, Service Mode must beset to OTN Mode.

l Configure cross-connections from the client side to LP ports: This action is required onlyfor the ODU0 non-convergence mode and ODU1 convergence mode.

The following describes the configuration procedure and involved parameter settings for eachmode.



151

l Table 5-2 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU0 non-convergence mode.l Table 5-3 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1 non-convergence mode.l Table 5-4 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1 convergence mode.l Table 5-5 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 mode.l Table 5-6 describes the configuration procedure for the ODUflex non-convergence mode.

Configuration Procedure for the ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode


No. Action Description

1 Configure the portworking mode.

Optionall Parameter settings: The default value of Port Working

Mode is ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0). If the default value is used, skip this step.

l Operation description: For details about the configurationprocedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

2 Configure the porttype.

Optionall Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is

Client Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical signalsare received on the client side, set Port Type to ClientSide Color Optical Port.

l Operation description: For details about the configurationprocedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the servicetype.

Mandatoryl Parameter settings: The available values for Service

Type are FE, FDDI, GE(GFP-T), GE(TTT-AGMP),STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON, and SDI.

l Operation description: Configure the service type basedon the service plan. For details about the configurationprocedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

NOTETwo channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each LPport. Set the service type for only one of the two channels. When theTOA board is interconnected with a TN52TOM board, the channelwhere you set the service type must be the same as the channel wherethe service type is set on the TN52TOM board. When the TOA boardis interconnected with another board, set the service type for channel1.



152


4 Configure cross-connections from theclient side to LP portson the TOA board.

Mandatoryl Parameter settings:

– Level and Service Type:– If you set Service Type to GE(GFP-T) or GE

(TTT-AGMP) in step 3, retain the default value(GE) for Level.

– If you set Service Type to a value other than GEin step 3, set Level to Any and then set ServiceType to the same value that you set in step 3.

– Direction: Set it to Bidirectional.– Source Slot/Sink Slot: Set the two parameters to the

ID of the slot where the TOA board is housed.– Source Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of 3

(RX1/TX1) to 10(RX8/TX8).– Source Optical Channel: Set it to 1.– Sink Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of 201

(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8).Ensure that the client-side port matches an LP port.That is, if you set the source optical port to RXi/TXi,set the sink optical port to ClientLPi.

– Sink Optical Channel: 1 or 2. Set it to the channelfor which you configure the service type in step 3.

l Operation description: Configure cross-connections fromthe client side to each LP port. For details about theconfiguration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTESet Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) for each sink optical port.

5 Configure inter-boardcross-connections.

Mandatoryl Parameter settings: See Table 5-7.l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from

each LP port on the TOA board to other boards. For detailsabout the configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.



153





Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1

non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1).l Operation description: For details about the configuration

procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.







Type are HD-SDI, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FICONExpress, and OTU1. The total received service bandwidthcannot exceed 20 Gbit/s.


4 Configure the servicemode.

Optionall Parameter settings: The default value of Service Mode is

Client Mode. When you set Service Type to OTU1, setService Mode to OTN Mode.

l Operation description: For details about the configurationprocedure, see Configuring the Service Mode.






154

Configuration Procedure for the ODU1 Convergence Mode




Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1

convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1).l Operation description: For details about the configuration








Type are ANY, FE, FDDI, GE(GFP-T), FC100, FC200,DVB-ASI, ESCON, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, SDI,HD-SDI, FICON, and FICON Express.


NOTEl Only channel 1, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, in

each group of ClientLP ports can receive services with rateshigher than 1.25 Gbit/s.

l The total rate of services received by each group of ClientLPports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s.

l The total rate of services received by all ClientLP ports from 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8,cannot exceed 20 Gbit/s.



155


4 Configure cross-connections from theclient side to LP portson the TOA board.


– Level and Service Type:– If you set Service Type to GE(GFP-T) in step 3,

retain the default value (GE) for Level.– If you set Service Type to a value other than GE

in step 3, set Level to Any and then set ServiceType to the same value that you set in step 3.

– Direction: Set it to Bidirectional.– Source Slot/Sink Slot: Set the two parameters to the

ID of the slot where the TOA board is housed.– Source Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of 3

(RX1/TX1) to 10(RX8/TX8).– Source Optical Channel: Set it to 1.– Sink Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of 201

(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8).There is no mapping between client-side ports and LPports. For example, if you set the source optical portto 3(RX1/TX1), you can set the sink optical port toany of the ports from 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8).

– Sink Optical Channel: Set it to a value in the rangeof 1 to 8, which is the ID of the channel for which youconfigure the service type in step 3.

l Operation description: Configure cross-connections fromthe client side to each LP port. For details about theconfiguration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

NOTESet Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1) for each sink optical port.






156

Configuration Procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 Mode




Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to

ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).l Operation description: For details about the configuration







Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Set Service Type to OTU1.l Operation description: For details about the configuration

procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

4 Configure the servicemode.

Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Set Service Mode to OTN Mode.l Operation description: For details about the configuration

procedure, see Configuring the Service Mode.



each ODU0LP port on the TOA board to other boards.For details about the configuration procedure, seeCreating Cross-Connections.

Configuration Procedure for the ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode




Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex

non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex).l Operation description: For details about the configuration




157






3 Configure the timeslotconfiguration modefor the line board thatis interconnected withthe TOA board.

Mandatoryl Parameter settings: The default value of ODU Timeslot

Configuration Mode is Assign random. If the defaultvalue is used, skip this step.

l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the lineboard that is interconnected with the TOA board andchoose Configuration > WDM Interface > AdvancedAttributes from the Function Tree. In the displayedwindow, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode toAssign random for the required ports.



Type are 3G-SDI and FC400.l Operation description: Configure the service type based

on the service plan. For details about the configurationprocedure, see Configuring the Service Type.




Table 5-7 Parameters for configuring inter-board cross-connections

Parameter

ODU0 Non-ConvergenceMode

ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode

ODU1ConvergenceMode

ODU1_ODU0 Mode

ODUflexNon-Convergence Mode

Level ODU0 ODU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODUflex



158

Parameter



ODU1ConvergenceMode

ODU1_ODU0 Mode


ServiceType

- - - - Custom,PACKET,FC400,FC800,3GSDI,InfiniBand2.5G, orCPRI4NOTE

For theV100R006C01 version,only supportFC400,FC800, and3GSDI.

Direction

Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional

SourceSlot

ID of the slotwhere the TOAboard ishoused

ID of the slotwhere theTOA board ishoused

ID of the slotwhere the TOAboard is housed



SourceOpticalPort

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)



161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)to 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)


SourceOpticalChannel

1 1 1 1 or 2 1

SinkSlot

ID of the slotwhere theinterconnectedboard ishouseda

ID of the slotwhere theinterconnected board ishouseda

ID of the slotwhere theinterconnectedboard ishouseda

ID of the slotwhere theinterconnected board ishouseda

TN53NQ2,TN53ND2,TN53NS2

SinkOpticalPort

Example: 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)



Example:161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)

1(IN1/OUT1) to 2(IN2/OUT2)



159

Parameter



ODU1ConvergenceMode

ODU1_ODU0 Mode


SinkOpticalChannel

1 or 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 or 2 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 toOCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2



160

Parameter



ODU1ConvergenceMode

ODU1_ODU0 Mode


OccupiedODUTUk SlotCount

- - - - l The valueis 4 whentheservicetype isFC400.

l The valueis 7 whentheservicetype isFC800.

l The valueis 3 whentheservicetype is3GSDI.

l The valueis 3 whentheservicetype isInfiniBand 2.5G.

l The valueis 3 whentheservicetype isCPRI4.

l The valueneeds tobe set to 1to 8 basedon theactualservicewhen theservicetype isCustomorPACKET.



161

Parameter



ODU1ConvergenceMode

ODU1_ODU0 Mode


ServiceRate(bit/s)

- - - - Theparametervalue isautomaticallydisplayedaccording tothe value ofOccupiedODUTUkSlot Count.

l There is no mapping between source optical ports and sink optical ports. For example, ifyou set the source optical port to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1), you can set the sink opticalport to 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) or any other ODU0LP port on the board in the sinkslot.

l a: The interconnected board can be TN52ND2, TN52NQ2, TN54NQ2, TN52NS2,TN53ND2, TN53NQ2, TN53NS2, TN52NS3, TN54NS3, TN54ENQ2, TN54NPO2, orTN55NPO2.

NOTE

To better understand the service signal flow and ports required for configuring cross-connections, see thesection "Board Service Configuration" for each board in the Hardware Description, where detailed portmodels and working modes are provided.

5.3 Application Scenario 1: ODU0 Non-Convergence ModeWhen using the ODU0 non-convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion betweeneight channels of optical signals with arbitrary bit rates (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s) and eightchannels of ODU0 electrical signals.

5.3.1 Networking DiagramThis section describes the networking diagram of TOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode.

Service Requirement

As shown in Figure 5-2, optical NEs A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the NEs functionas OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows:

l User1 and User2 communicate with each other.

l One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between NE A and NE B.

l At NE A, the TOA board receives eight Any services (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s) andconverts them into eight ODU0 services. The TOA board then transmits the eight ODU0



162

services to the TN52NQ2 board, where the ODU0 services are converged into one OTU2service.

Figure 5-2 Networking diagram for the TOA board (ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode)

B

A

C

D

User 1

EastNMS

West

:OADM

TN52NQ2TN54TOA

SLOT 12SLOT 15

TN52NQ2TN54TOA

SLOT 12SLOT 15

User 2East

West

West

West

East

East

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, a TOA board and a TN52NQ2 board should be configured on both station Aand station B.

5.3.2 Service Signal FlowThis section describes the service signal flow of TOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode.

One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 5-3 shows the servicesignal flow on station A.

Figure 5-3 Bidirectional service on station A


: WDM-side services



TN54TOA

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)


9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)

TN52NQ2




















71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

3(IN3/OUT3)

4(IN4/OUT4)













163

5.3.3 Configuration ProcessThis section describes how to configure the TOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode.


Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)


Step 1 Set the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) for the TOAboard. For details, see Configuring the Working Mode.

Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TOA according to the serviceplanning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TOA boardfor the Any services that are input to the board.

NOTE

In this scenario, If you set the Level to ANY, the Service Type must be the same as the Service Type atthe WDM interface of the TOA board.

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU0 services between the TOA and TN52NQ2boards.1. Configure a cross-connection for one ODU0 service between the TOA and TN52NQ2

boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.2. Repeat 4.a to configure a cross-connection for the other ODU0 services between the TOA

and TN52NQ2 boards.

----End

5.4 Application Scenario 2: ODU1 Non-Convergence ModeWhen using the ODU1 non-convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion betweeneight channels of optical signals with arbitrary bit rates (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s) and eightchannels of ODU1 electrical signals.

5.4.1 Networking DiagramThis section describes the networking diagram of TOA board in ODU1 non-convergence mode.

Service RequirementAs shown in Figure 5-4, optical NEs A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the NEs functionas OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows:



164

l User1 and User2 communicate with each other.l One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between NE A and NE B.l At NE A, the TOA board receives eight Any services (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s) and

converts them into eight channels of ODU1 services. The TOA board then transmits theeight ODU1 services to the TN52NQ2 board, where the ODU1 services are converged intotwo OTU2 services.

Figure 5-4 Networking diagram for the TOA board (ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode)

B

A

C

D

User 1

EastNMS

West

:OADM

TN52NQ2TN54TOA

SLOT 12SLOT 15

TN52NQ2TN54TOA

SLOT 12SLOT 15

User 2East

West

West

West

East

East


5.4.2 Service Signal FlowThis section describes the service signal flow of TOA board in ODU1 non-convergence mode.




165

Figure 5-5 Bidirectional service on station ATN54TOA

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)


9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)

TN52NQ2




















: WDM-side services



1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

3(IN3/OUT3)

4(IN4/OUT4)

5.4.3 Configuration ProcessThis section describes how to configure the TOA board in ODU1 non-convergence mode.



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCTStep 1 Set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) for the

TOA board. For details, see Configuring the Working Mode.

Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TOA according to the serviceplanning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.



and TN52NQ2 boards.

----End

5.5 Application Scenario 3: ODU1 Convergence ModeWhen using the ODU1 convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion between eightchannels of optical signals with arbitrary bit rates (125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and eight channelsof ODU1 electrical signals.



166

5.5.1 Networking DiagramThis section describes the networking diagram of TOA board in ODU1 convergence mode.

Service RequirementAs shown in Figure 5-6, optical NEs A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the NEs functionas OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows:

l User1 and User2 communicate with each other.l One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B.l At NE A, the TOA board receives eight Any services (125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and converts

them into eight channels of ODU1 services. The TOA board then transmits the eight ODU1services to the TN52NQ2 board, where the ODU1 services are converged into two OTU2services.

Figure 5-6 Networking diagram for the TOA board (ODU1 Convergence Mode)

B

A

C

D

User 1

EastNMS

West

:OADM

TN52NQ2TN54TOA

SLOT 12SLOT 15

TN52NQ2TN54TOA

SLOT 12SLOT 15

User 2East

West

West

West

East

East


5.5.2 Service Signal FlowThis section describes the service signal flow of TOA board in ODU1 convergence mode.




167

Figure 5-7 Bidirectional service on station ATN54TOA

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)

9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)






TN52NQ2

















: WDM-side services



1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

3(IN3/OUT3)

4(IN4/OUT4)

5.5.3 Configuration ProcessThis section describes how to configure the TOA board in ODU1 convergence mode.




Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1) for the TOA board.For details, see Configuring the Working Mode.

Step 2 Configure the Service Type at WDM Interface of the TOA according to the service planning.For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TOA boardfor the Any services that are input to the board.

NOTE

In this scenario, If you set the Level to ANY, Service Type must be the same as Service Type at WDMinterface of the TOA board.

To configure an indirect cross-connection between a TX/RX port and a ClientLP port, you must set PortWorking Mode of the direct ClientLP port corresponding to the TX/RX port to ODU1 convergence mode(n*Any->ODU1) or None (not for ports).



and TN52NQ2 boards.

----End



168

5.6 Application Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 ModeIn ODU1_ODU0 mode, the TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of OTU1optical signals and 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals.

5.6.1 Networking DiagramThis section describes the networking diagram of TOA board in ODU0_ODU1 mode.

Service RequirementAs shown in Figure 5-8, optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEsfunction as OADM stations.

The service requirements are as follows:

l User1 and User2 communicate with each other.l One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between NE A and NE B.l At NE A, the TOA board receives eight OTU1 services and converts them into 16 ODU0

services. The TOA board then transmits the 16 ODU0 to the TN52NQ2 board, where theODU0 services are converged into two OTU2 services.

Figure 5-8 Networking diagram for the TOA board (ODU0_ODU1 Mode)

B

A

C

D

User1

User2

EASTNMS

WEST

WEST

EAST

WEST EAST

OADM

WEST

EAST

TN52NQ2TN54TOA

SLOT 12SLOT 15

TN52NQ2TN54TOA

SLOT 12SLOT 15

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, a TOA board and a TN52NQ2 board must be configured at station A and stationB each.



169

5.6.2 Service Signal FlowThis section describes the service signal flow of TOA board in ODU0_ODU1 mode.

One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. The signal flow at station A isas shown inFigure 5-9.

Figure 5-9 Signal flow at station ATN54TOA

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)



9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)











TN52NQ2













Client-side services

WDM-side services

Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Services cross-connection, which nedds to be configured on the NMS


71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

3(IN3/OUT3)

4(IN4/OUT4)



5.6.3 Configuration ProcessThis section describes how to configure the TOA board in ODU1_ODU0 mode.

Prerequisite





Step 1 Configure the port working modes for the TOA board. Set Port Working Mode toODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). For details, see Configuring the WorkingMode.

Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TOA as OTU1 according to theservice planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 3 Configure electrical cross-connections for the two ODU0 services between the TOA andTN52NQ2 boards.

1. Configure a cross-connection for one ODU0 service between the TOA and TN52NQ2boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

2. Repeat 3.a to configure cross-connection for the other ODU0 service between the TOA andTN52NQ2 boards.

----End



170

5.7 Application Scenario 5: ODUflex Non-ConvergenceMode

When using the ODUflex non-convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion betweenfour channels of FC400 optical signals and four channels of ODUflex electrical signals orconversion between five channels of 3G-SDI optical signals and five channels of ODUflexelectrical signals.

5.7.1 Networking DiagramThis section describes the networking diagram of the TOA board in ODUflex mode.

Service RequirementAs shown in Figure 5-10, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs functionas OADM stations.


l User1 and User2 communicate with each other.l Four bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B.l FC400 services are used as an example. At station A, the TOA board receives four FC400

services and converts them into four ODUflex services. The TOA board then transmits thefour ODUflex services to the TN53NQ2 board at station A. Then the TN53NQ2 boardconverges the four ODUflex services into four OTU2 services.

Figure 5-10 Networking diagram for the TOA board (ODUflex mode)

B

A

C

D

User1

User2

EASTNMS

WEST

WEST

EAST

WEST EAST

OADM

WEST

EAST

TN53NQ2TN54TOA

SLOT 12SLOT 15

TN53NQ2TN54TOA

SLOT 12SLOT 15



171

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, one TOA board and one TN53NQ2 board must be configured at stations A andB each.

5.7.2 Service Signal FlowThis section describes the service signal flow of the TOA board in ODUflex mode.

One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 5-11 shows the servicesignal flow at station A.

Figure 5-11 Bidirectional service at station ATN54TOA

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)



9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)



TN53NQ2

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

3(IN3/OUT3)

4(IN4/OUT4)

ODUflex-1

ODUflex-2

ODUflex-1

ODUflex-2

ODUflex-1

ODUflex-2

ODUflex-1

ODUflex-2

Service processing module

ODUflex:1

ODUflex:2

ODUflex:1 OCH:1

OCH:4ODUflex:2

IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODUflex:1

IN4/OUT4-OCH:4-ODUflex:2

Multiplexing module

ODU2:1

ODU2:4

Client-side services

WDM-side services

Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Services cross-connection, which nedds to be configured on the NMS

5.7.3 Configuration ProcessThis section describes how to configure the TOA board in ODUflex mode.


PrecautionsAfter configurate cross-connections for four ODUflex services for the TOA board (service typeis FC-400), any cross-connections cannot be configurated for the other ports of the TOA board.



Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) for the TOAboard.

For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.



172

Step 2 Set the service type of the ClientLP ports on the TOA board to FC-400 based on the serviceplan.

For details about the configuration procedure, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

Step 3 Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random for the TN53NQ2 board.

Choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. Inthe displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random for therequired ports.

Step 4 Configure cross-connections for the ODUflex services between the TOA and TN53NQ2 boards.1. Configure the cross-connection for the first ODUflex service between the TOA and

TN53NQ2 boards. The following figure shows the parameters that you need to set. Fordetails about the configuration procedure, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

2. Repeat 4.a to configure cross-connections for the other three ODUflex services betweenthe TOA and TN53NQ2 boards.

----End



173

6 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually byStation)

About This Chapter

The LOA board can be configured with different port working modes and is applicable to fivescenarios accordingly. You need to manually configure the board by station on the NMS for theapplication scenarios.

6.1 Overview of the Working ModeEach port on the LOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed ondifferent paths.

6.2 Configuration ProceduresSix port working modes are available for the LOA board on the NMS. The port for the None(not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes requireconfigurations.

6.3 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and One OTU2 OpticalSignals (with ODU0 Mapping)This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversionbetween eight channels of optical signals at any rate from 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and onechannel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU0 mapping.

6.4 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Four Any Services and One OTU2 OpticalSignalsThis configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversionbetween four channels of optical signals at any rate from 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and onechannel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU1 mapping.

6.5 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Services and One OTU2 OpticalSignals (with ODU0 Mapping)This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversionbetween four channels of OTU1 optical signals and one channel of ODU2 optical signals bymeans of ODU0 mapping.

6.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Two 3G-SDI Services and One OTU2 OpticalSignals

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)


174

This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversionbetween two channels of 3G-SDI optical signals and one channel of ODU2 optical signals bymeans of ODU0 mapping.

6.7 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between One FC800 Services and One OTU2 OpticalSignalsThis configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversionbetween one channels of FC800 optical signals and one channel of ODU2 optical signals bymeans of ODU0 mapping.



175

6.1 Overview of the Working ModeEach port on the LOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed ondifferent paths.

The LOA board supports six port working modes listed in Table 6-1. You can set the portworking modes on the NMS.

Table 6-1 Port working modes on the LOA board

Port Working Mode Signal Flow

ODU0 non-convergence mode Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2

ODU1 non-convergence mode OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2

ODU1_ODU0 mode OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2

ODUflex non-convergence mode Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2

ODU2 non-convergence mode Any->ODU2->OTU2

None (not for ports) -

NOTE

l [->ODU1]: indicates that "ODU1" is optional. For example, in ODU0 non-convergence mode, twoservice signal flows are available: Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2 and Any->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2.

l None (not for ports): indicates that the resources at the port in this mode are not used and are releasedto other ports.

6.2 Configuration ProceduresSix port working modes are available for the LOA board on the NMS. The port for the None(not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes requireconfigurations.

General Configuration ProcedureFigure 6-1 shows the general configuration procedure for the port working modes on the LOAboard.



176

Figure 6-1 General configuration procedure

Configure the portworking mode

Configure theservice type

Configure theport type

Mandatory

Optional

Configure ODU0-levelcross-connections from

LP ports to the WDM side

Configure theservice mode

Configure cross-connections from theclient side to LP ports

Configure the timeslotconfiguration mode

In the flowchart, the mandatory actions are required for each port working mode and optionalactions vary according to port working modes.

The optional actions must be configured in the following scenarios:

l Configure the port type: Port Type must be set to Client Side Color Optical Port whencolored optical signals are received on the client side.

l Configure the timeslot configuration mode: ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must beset for the line side of the LOA board.

– When the signal flow is from ODU0 or ODUflex to ODU2, ODU TimeslotConfiguration Mode must be set to Assign random.

– When the signal flow is ODU0 -> ODU1 -> ODU2, ODU Timeslot ConfigurationMode must be set to Assign consecutive.

– When the signal flow is from Any or ODU1 to ODU2 directly, ODU TimeslotConfiguration Mode can be set to Assign consecutive or Assign random. However,the value must be the same as the value that is set on the interconnected LOA or lineboard.

l Configure the service mode: When Service Type is set to OTU1, Service Mode must beset to OTN Mode.



177

l Configure cross-connections from the client side to LP ports: This action is required onlyfor the ODU0 non-convergence mode and ODU1 convergence mode.

The following describes the configuration procedure and involved parameter settings for eachmode.

l Table 6-2 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU0 non-convergence mode.


l Table 6-4 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 mode.

l Table 6-5 describes the configuration procedure for the ODUflex non-convergence mode.




No.

Action Description


Optionall Parameter settings: The default value of Port Working

Mode is ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2). If the default value is used, skipthis step.



Optionall Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is Client

Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical signals are receivedon the client side, set Port Type to Client Side Color OpticalPort.



Optionall Parameter settings: The value of ODU Timeslot

Configuration Mode varies according to the two signal flowsin the ODU0 non-convergence mode.– When the signal flow is Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, set

ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random.– When the signal flow is Any->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2-

>OTU2, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode toAssign consecutive.

l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOAboard and choose Configuration > WDM Interface >Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayedwindow, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for theWDM side port.



178

No.

Action Description


Mandatoryl Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type are

FE, GE(TTT-AGMP), GE(GFP-T), STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, FC100, ESCON, FICON, FDDI, SDI, and DVB-ASI.

l Operation description: For details about the configurationprocedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

NOTETwo channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each LP port. Setthe service type for only one of the two channels. When the LOA board isinterconnected with a TN52TOM board, the channel where you set theservice type must be the same as the channel where the service type is seton the TN52TOM board. When the LOA board is interconnected withanother board, set the service type for channel 1.

5 Configure cross-connections fromthe client side to LPports on the LOAboard.


– Level and Service Type:– If you set Service Type to GE in step 4, retain the

default value (GE) for Level.– If you set Service Type to a value other than GE in step

4, set Level to Any and then set Service Type to thesame value that you set in step 4.

– Direction: Set it to Bidirectional.– Source Slot/Sink Slot: Set the two parameters to the ID of

the slot where the LOA board is housed.– Source Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of 3(RX1/

TX1) to 10(RX8/TX8).– Source Optical Channel: Set it to 1.– Sink Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of 201

(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8).Ensure that the client-side port matches an LP port. That is,if you set the source optical port to RXi/TXi, set the sinkoptical port to ClientLPi.

– Sink Optical Channel: 1 or 2. Set it to the channel forwhich you configure the service type in step 4.

l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from theclient side to each LP port. For details about the configurationprocedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

6 Configure ODU0-level cross-connections fromLP ports to theWDM side on theLOA board.

Mandatoryl Parameter settings: See Table 6-7.l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from each

LP port to the WDM side. For details about the configurationprocedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.



179



No.

Action Description


Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-

convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).l Operation description: For details about the configuration







Optionall Parameter settings: Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode

to Assign consecutive or Assign random.l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA

board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface >Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayedwindow, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for theWDM side port.



HD-SDI, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, STM16, or OC-48.l Operation description: For details about the configuration


5 Configure theservice mode.

Optionall Parameter settings: The default value of Service Mode is

Client Mode. When you set Service Type to OTU1, setService Mode to OTN Mode.

l Operation description: For details about the configurationprocedure, see Configuring the Service Mode.

6 Configure ODUk-level cross-connections fromLP ports to theWDM side on theLOA board.





180

Configuration Procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 Mode


No.

Action Description


Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0

mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).







Optionall Parameter settings: The value of ODU Timeslot

Configuration Mode varies according to the two signal flowsin the ODU1_ODU0 mode.– When the signal flow is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU2-

>OTU2, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode toAssign random.

– When the signal flow is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2, set ODU Timeslot ConfigurationMode to Assign consecutive.

l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOAboard and choose Configuration > WDM Interface >Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayedwindow, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for theWDM side port.


Mandatoryl Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type is

OTU1 only.l Operation description: For details about the configuration


5 Configure theservice mode.

Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Set Service Mode to OTN Mode.l Operation description: For details about the configuration

procedure, see Configuring the Service Mode.



181

No.

Action Description




Configuration Procedure for the ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode


No.

Action Description


Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-

convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).l Operation description: For details about the configuration

procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.NOTE

When the RX1/TX1 port receives the FC800 service, set Port WorkingMode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) only for port LP1. And set Port Working Mode to None (notfor ports) for the other seven LP ports.






Mandatoryl Parameter settings: The default value of ODU Timeslot

Configuration Mode is Assign random. If the default valueis used, skip this step.

l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOAboard and choose Configuration > WDM Interface >Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayedwindow, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assignrandom for the WDM side port.



182

No.

Action Description



3GSDI, FC-400, or FC-800. FC-800 is only for the RX1/TX1port.

l Operation description: For details about the configurationprocedure, see Configuring the Service Type.






No.

Action Description


Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Before setting Port Working Mode to

ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2) forport LP1, set to None (not for ports) for the other seven LPports.







Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode

to Assign random or Assign consecutive.l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA

board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface >Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayedwindow, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for theWDM side port.



183

No.

Action Description


Mandatoryl Parameter settings: Set Service Type to FC800 only for the

RX1/TX1 port.l Operation description: For details about the configuration





Table 6-7 Parameters for configuring ODUk-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDMside

Parameter



ODU1_ODU0 Mode


ODU2Non-Convergence Mode

Level ODU0 ODU1 ODU0 ODUflex ODU2

ServiceType

- - - Custom,PACKET,FC400,FC800,3GSDI,InfiniBand2.5G, orCPRI4NOTE

For theV100R006C01 version,only supportFC400,FC800, and3GSDI.

-

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional

SourceSlot/SinkSlot

ID of the slotwhere theLOA board ishoused







184

Parameter



ODU1_ODU0 Mode



SourceOpticalPort




201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)a


SourceOpticalChannel

1 or 2 1 1 1 1

SinkOpticalPort

1(IN1/OUT1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

SinkOpticalChannel

OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 toOCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 orOCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 toOCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:8

OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 toOCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:8

OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 toOCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 orOCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 toOCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:8

OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1a

OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2

OCH:1-ODU2:1



185

Parameter



ODU1_ODU0 Mode



OccupiedODUTUkSlot Count

- - - l The valueis 4 whentheservicetype isFC400.

l The valueis 7 whentheservicetype isFC800.

l The valueis 3 whentheservicetype is3GSDI.

l The valueis 3 whentheservicetype isInfiniBand 2.5G.

l The valueis 3 whentheservicetype isCPRI4.

l The valueneeds tobe set to 1to 8 basedon theactualservicewhen theservicetype isCustom orPACKET.

-



186

Parameter



ODU1_ODU0 Mode



ServiceRate(bit/s)

- - - Theparametervalue isautomaticallydisplayedaccording tothe value ofOccupiedODUTUkSlot Count.

-

l a: When the LOA board receives FC800 services, set Source Optical Port only to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) and Sink Optical Channel only to OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1.

NOTE

To better understand the service signal flow and ports required for configuring cross-connections, see thesection "Physical and Logical Ports" for each board in the Hardware Description, where detailed portmodels and working modes are provided.

6.3 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight AnyServices and One OTU2 Optical Signals (with ODU0Mapping)

This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversionbetween eight channels of optical signals at any rate from 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and onechannel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU0 mapping.

6.3.1 Networking DiagramThis section describes how to configure the LOA board on a ring network.

Service Requirement

As shown in Figure 6-2, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs functionas OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows:


l One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B.

l At station A, the LOA board receives eight services at any rate from 125 Mbit/s to 1.25Gbit/s (GE services are used as an example) and converts them into one OTU2 service.



187

Figure 6-2 Networking diagram for the LOA board (ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode)

B

A

C

D

User 1

EastNMS

West

:OADM

LOASLOT 15

LOASLOT 15

User 2East

West

West

West

East

East

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, one LOA board must be configured at stations A and B each.

6.3.2 Service Signal FlowThis section describes the service signal flow of the LOA board in ODU0 non-convergencemode.

One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 6-3 shows the servicesignal flow (GE->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2) at station A. And Figure 6-4 shows the service signalflow (GE->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) at station A.

Figure 6-3 Bidirectional service at station A (GE->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)


OCH:1ODU2:1 IN/OUT

WDM Side

ODU0:1

ODU0:2

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1 to 8)


4(RX2/TX2)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

Client Side

10(RX8/TX8)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2

.

.

.


.

.

.

.

.

.

ODU0:8



188

Figure 6-4 Bidirectional service at station A (GE->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1 to 4)-ODU0:(1 to 2)

ODU0:1

ODU0:2



OCH:1ODU2:1 IN/OUT

201(ClientLP/ClientLP1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

Client Side

10(RX8/TX8)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2





9(RX7/TX7)-1

ODU1:1

ODU0:1

ODU0:2

ODU1:4

WDM Side

6.3.3 Configuration ProcessThis section uses station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the LOAboard.




Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) (the default value) for the LOA board. If the default value is used, skip this step.


Step 2 If the service signal flow is GE->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, set ODU Timeslot ConfigurationMode to Assign random (the default value) for the LOA board. If the service signal flow isGE->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assignconsecutive for the LOA board. If the default value is used, skip this step.

To set the parameter, select the LOA board in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration >WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, setODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random or Assign consecutive for the "1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1" port.



189

Step 3 Set the service type of the ClientLP ports on the LOA board to GE(TTT-AGMP) based on theservice plan.


NOTE

l The GE services that the LOA board supports include GE(GFP-T) and GE(TTT-AGMP). Therecommended service type is GE(TTT-AGMP).

l Two channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each LP port. You can set the service type foronly one of the two channels. When the LOA board is interconnected with a TN52TOM board, thechannel where you set the service type must be the same as the channel where the service type is seton the TN52TOM board. When the LOA board is interconnected with another board, set the servicetype for channel 1.

Step 4 Configure cross-connections from the client side to LP ports on the LOA board.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Managementfrom the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service window.

1. Configure the cross-connection for the first GE service. See the following table to set theparameters.

Parameter Value

Level GE


Source Slot Subrack 0(subrack)-15-LOA

Source OpticalPort

3(RX1/TX1)

Source OpticalChannel

1

Sink Slot Subrack 0(subrack)-15-LOA

Sink Optical Port 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

Sink OpticalChannel

1

2. Repeat substep a in step 4 to configure cross-connections for the other seven GE services.Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and SinkOptical Port. For each of the remaining seven GE services, set Source Optical Port to avalue in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8) and Sink Optical Port to a value inthe range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). The sink optical portnumber must match the source optical port number. That is, if the source optical port isRXi/TXi, the sink optical port must be ClientLPi.

Step 5 Configure ODU0-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board.

Perform the following configurations in the Create Cross-Connection Service window.

1. Configure the first ODU0 cross-connection. See the following table to set the parameters.



190

Parameter Value

Level ODU0



Source OpticalPort



1


Sink Optical Port 1(IN1/OUT1)

Sink OpticalChannel

OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

2. Repeat substep a in step 5 to configure the other seven ODU0 cross-connections. Retainthe same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink OpticalPort. For each of the remaining seven ODU0 cross-connections, set Source OpticalPort to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)and Sink Optical Port to a value in the range of OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2 to OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8. The sink optical port number does not need to match the source opticalport number.

----End

6.4 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Four AnyServices and One OTU2 Optical Signals

This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversionbetween four channels of optical signals at any rate from 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and onechannel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU1 mapping.


Service Requirement




l At station A, the LOA board receives four services at any rate from 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67Gbit/s (STM-16 services are used as an example) and converts them into one OTU2 service.



191


B

A

C

D

User 1

EastNMS

West

:OADM

LOASLOT 15

LOASLOT 15

User 2East

West

West

West

East

East



One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 6-6 shows the servicesignal flow (STM-16->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) at station A.


10(RX8/TX8)-1208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

OCH:1ODU2:1 IN/OUT

WDM Side

ODU1:1

ODU1:2

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1 to 4)


4(RX2/TX2)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

Client Side201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to



ODU1:4

9(RX7/TX7)-1207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 ODU1:3



192


Prerequisite





Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) for the LOA board.


Step 2 Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive.

To set the parameter, select the LOA board in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration >WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, setODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the "1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1" port.

Step 3 Set the service type of the ClientLP ports on the LOA board to STM-16 based on the serviceplan.





Parameter Value

Level ODU1



Source OpticalPort



1





193

Parameter Value

Sink OpticalChannel

OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1

2. Repeat substep a in step 4 to configure the other three ODU1 cross-connections. Retain the

same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink OpticalPort. For each of the remaining three ODU1 cross-connections, set Source Optical Portto a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) and SinkOptical Port to a value in the range of OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 to OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4. The sink optical port number does not need to match the source optical portnumber.

----End

6.5 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Four OTU1Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals (with ODU0Mapping)

This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversionbetween four channels of OTU1 optical signals and one channel of ODU2 optical signals bymeans of ODU0 mapping.


Service RequirementAs shown in Figure 6-7, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs functionas OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows:

l User1 and User2 communicate with each other.l One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B.l At station A, the LOA board receives four OTU1 services and converts them into one OTU2

service.



194

Figure 6-7 Networking diagram for the LOA board (ODU1_ODU0 Mode)

B

A

C

D

User 1

EastNMS

West

:OADM

LOASLOT 15

LOASLOT 15

User 2East

West

West

West

East

East


6.5.2 Service Signal FlowThis section describes the service signal flow of the LOA board in ODU1_ODU0 mode.

One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 6-8 shows the servicesignal flow (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2) at station A.


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0(1~8)

ODU0:1

ODU0:2


OCH:1ODU2:1 IN/OUT


3(RX1/TX1)-1

Client side

10(RX8/TX8)-1

ODU0:7

ODU0:8

WDM side





ODU0:3

ODU0:4



195





Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) for the LOA board.


Step 2 Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random (the default value) for the LOAboard. If the default value is used, skip this step.

To set the parameter, select the LOA board in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration >WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, setODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random for the "1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1" port.

Step 3 Set the service type of the ClientLP ports on the LOA board to OTU1 based on the service plan.


Step 4 Set the client ports of the LOA board Service Mode to OTN Mode.

For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Mode.




Parameter Value

Level ODU0



Source OpticalPort



1



196

Parameter Value



Sink OpticalChannel

OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

2. Repeat substep a in step 5 to configure the other seven ODU0 cross-connections. Retain

the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink OpticalPort. For each of the remaining seven ODU0 cross-connections, set Source OpticalPort to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)and Sink Optical Port to a value in the range of OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2 to OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8. The sink optical port number does not need to match the source opticalport number.

----End

6.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Two 3G-SDI Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals

This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversionbetween two channels of 3G-SDI optical signals and one channel of ODU2 optical signals bymeans of ODU0 mapping.


Service RequirementAs shown in Figure 6-9, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs functionas OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows:

l User1 and User2 communicate with each other.l One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B.l At station A, the LOA board can receives two 3G-SDI or FC400 services, or receives one

FC800 service and converts them into one OTU2 service. 3G-SDI services are used as anexample.



197

Figure 6-9 Networking diagram for the LOA board (ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode)

B

A

C

D

User 1

EastNMS

West

:OADM

LOASLOT 15

LOASLOT 15

User 2East

West

West

West

East

East


In this example, one LOA board must be configured at stations A and B each.

6.6.2 Service Signal FlowThis section describes the service signal flow of the LOA board in ODUflex non-convergencemode.

One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 6-10 shows the servicesignal flow (3G-SDI->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) at station A.


10(RX8/TX8)-1

IN/OUT


Client Side

OCH:1

ODUflex:1

ODU2:1

WDM Side

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1 to 2)

ODUflex:2





198





Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) for the LOA board.




Step 3 Set the service type of the ClientLP ports on the LOA board to 3GSDI based on the service plan.


Step 4 Set ODUflex Tolerance (ppm) to 10.

To set the parameter, select the LOA board in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration >WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, setODUflex Tolerance (ppm) to 10 for the ODUflex port.

Step 5 Configure ODUflex-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board.


1. Configure the first ODUflex cross-connection. See the following table to set the parameters.

Parameter Value

Level ODUflex

Service Type 3GSDI


Source Slot Subrack 0(subrack)-7-11LOA

Source OpticalPort




199

Parameter Value


1

Sink Slot Subrack 0(subrack)-7-11LOA

Sink Optical Port 1(IN/OUT)

Sink OpticalChannel

Och:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1

2. Repeat substep a in step 5 to configure the other ODUflex cross-connection. Retain thesame values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink OpticalPort. For the other ODUflex cross-connection, set Source Optical Port to a value in therange of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) and Sink Optical Portto OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2. The sink optical port number does not need to match thesource optical port number.

----End

6.7 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between One FC800Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals

This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversionbetween one channels of FC800 optical signals and one channel of ODU2 optical signals bymeans of ODU0 mapping.



200


Service Requirement




l At station A, the LOA board receives one FC800 service and converts the service into oneOTU2 service.


B

A

C

D

User 1

EastNMS

West

:OADM

LOASLOT 15

LOASLOT 15

User 2East

West

West

West

East

East


In this example, one LOA board must be configured at stations A and B each.


One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 6-12 shows the servicesignal flow (FC800->ODU2->OTU2) at station A.



201


IN/OUT201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-13(RX1/TX1)-1

Client Side

OCH:1ODU2:1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1WDM Side


Prerequisite





Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to None (not for ports) for the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) ports and then set the parameter to ODU2 non-convergence mode(Any->ODU2->OTU2) for the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) port.




Step 3 Set the service type of the ClientLP ports on the LOA board to FC-800 based on the serviceplan.




1. Configure one ODU2 cross-connection. See the following table to set the parameters.



202

Parameter Value

Level ODU2


Source Slot Subrack 0(subrack)-15-11LOA

Source OpticalPort



1

Sink Slot Subrack 0(subrack)-15-11LOA

Sink Optical Port 1(IN/OUT)

Sink OpticalChannel

Och:1-ODU2:1

----End



203

7 Configuring WDM Services (by StationService Package)

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to configure the TN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards in stationservice package mode to achieve one-click configuration. In station service package mode,multiple configurations such as configuring port working modes and service types are performedon a single NMS GUI, facilitating operations and improving configuration efficiency. The stationservice package mode is applicable only to some fixed scenarios.

NOTE

You can also configure the TN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards in manual station mode. In this mode,you need to perform various operations such as configuring port working modes and service types onmultiple NMS GUIs. The configuration process is complex but applicable to various scenarios. For detailsabout the manual station mode, see the related sections for manually configuring the TN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards by station.

7.1 Overview of the Service PackagesService packages enable one-click configuration of typical services by issuing multipleconfiguration commands in batches, facilitating product deployment commissioning andreducing maintenance costs. The configuration commands include commands for configuringworking modes, service types, cross-connections, and port types. Configuration contents varyaccording to boards and service packages. Currently, service packages are available to theTN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards.

7.2 Configuring Service PackagesYou can configure service packages for multiple boards in batches or configure the servicepackage for each board separately.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)


204

7.1 Overview of the Service PackagesService packages enable one-click configuration of typical services by issuing multipleconfiguration commands in batches, facilitating product deployment commissioning andreducing maintenance costs. The configuration commands include commands for configuringworking modes, service types, cross-connections, and port types. Configuration contents varyaccording to boards and service packages. Currently, service packages are available to theTN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards.

7.1.1 Service Packages for the TN52TOM BoardConfiguration contents vary according to service packages.

Table 7-1 lists the service packages for the TN52TOM board and the correspondingconfiguration contents.

Table 7-1 Service packages for the TN52TOM board and the corresponding configurationcontents

ServicePackageName

BoardWorkingMode

PortWorkingMode

ServiceType

Port Type Cross-ConnectionConfiguration

Tributary4*STM-16/OC48->4*ODU1

Non-Cascadingmode

PortWorkingMode is setto ODU1Mode(OTU1/Any->ODU1) forportsClientLP1,ClientLP3,ClientLP5,andClientLP7.

ServiceType is set toSTM-16/OC48 forchannel 1 ofportsClientLP1,ClientLP3,ClientLP5,andClientLP7.

- BidirectionalANY-levelcross-connectionsareconfiguredbetweenports fromRX1/TX1 toRX4/TX4and channel1 of portsClientLP1,ClientLP3,ClientLP5,andClientLP7.



205

ServicePackageName

BoardWorkingMode

PortWorkingMode

ServiceType


Tributary8*GE->8*ODU0

Non-Cascadingmode

PortWorkingMode is setto ODU0Mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) forportsClientLP1,ClientLP3,ClientLP5,andClientLP7.

ServiceType is set toGE forchannel 1 ofports fromClientLP1 toClientLP8.

- l Bidirectional GE-levelcross-connections areconfiguredbetweenportsRX1/TX1,RX3/TX3,RX5/TX5, andRX7/TX7 andchannel 1of portsClientLP1,ClientLP3,ClientLP5, andClientLP7.

l Bidirectional GE-levelcross-connections areconfiguredbetweenportsRX2/TX2,RX4/TX4,RX6/TX6, andRX8/TX8 and



206

ServicePackageName

BoardWorkingMode

PortWorkingMode

ServiceType


channel 2of portsClientLP2,ClientLP4,ClientLP6, andClientLP8.



207

ServicePackageName

BoardWorkingMode

PortWorkingMode

ServiceType


Tributaryline7*STM-1/OC3->ODU1

Cascadingmode

PortWorkingMode is setto ODU1tributary-line (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) forportClientLP1.

ServiceType is set toSTM-1/OC3 forchannels 1 to4 of portClientLP1.

Port Type isset to LineSide ColorOpticalPort for portRX8/TX8.

l BidirectionalANY-levelcross-connections areconfiguredbetweenportsfromRX1/TX1 toRX7/TX7 andchannels1 to 7 ofportClientLP1.

l BidirectionalOTU1-levelcross-connections areconfiguredbetweenportRX8/TX8 andchannel 1of portODU1LP1.



208

ServicePackageName

BoardWorkingMode

PortWorkingMode

ServiceType


Tributaryline 7*FE->ODU0

Cascadingmode

PortWorkingMode is setto ODU0tributary-line (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) forportClientLP1.

l ServiceType isset to FEforchannels1 to 4 ofportClientLP1 andchannels5 to 7 forportClientLP2.

Port Type isset to LineSide ColorOpticalPort for portRX8/TX8.

l BidirectionalANY-levelcross-connections areconfiguredbetweenportsfromRX1/TX1 toRX7/TX7 andchannels1 to 4 ofportClientLP1 andchannels5 to 7 ofportClientLP2.

l BidirectionalOTU1-levelcross-connections areconfiguredbetweenportRX8/TX8 andchannel 1of portODU1LP1.



209

ServicePackageName

BoardWorkingMode

PortWorkingMode

ServiceType


4*OTU1REG

Non-Cascadingmode

PortWorkingMode is setto ODU1tributary-line (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) forportsClientLP1,ClientLP3,ClientLP5,andClientLP7.

ServiceType is set toOTU1 forchannel 1 ofportsClientLP1,ClientLP3,ClientLP5,andClientLP7.

Port Type isset to LineSide ColorOpticalPort forports fromRX5/TX5 toRX8/TX8.

l BidirectionalOTU1-levelcross-connections areconfiguredbetweenportsfromRX1/TX1 toRX4/TX4 andchannel 1of portsClientLP1,ClientLP3,ClientLP5, andClientLP7.

l BidirectionalOTU1-levelcross-connections areconfiguredbetweenportsfromRX5/TX5 toRX8/TX8 andchannel 1of portsfromODU1LP



210

ServicePackageName

BoardWorkingMode

PortWorkingMode

ServiceType


1 toODU1LP4.

Tributary4*OTU1->ODU1 (re-encapsulatedinto ODU0)

Non-Cascadingmode

PortWorkingMode is settoODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulationtributary-line mode(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) forportsClientLP1,ClientLP3,ClientLP5,andClientLP7.

ServiceType is set toOTU1 forchannel 1 ofportsClientLP1,ClientLP3,ClientLP5,andClientLP7.

- BidirectionalOTU1-levelcross-connectionsareconfiguredbetweenports fromRX1/TX1 toRX4/TX4and channel1 of portsClientLP1,ClientLP3,ClientLP5,andClientLP7.

7.1.2 Service Packages for the THA/TOA BoardConfiguration contents vary according to service packages.

Table 7-2 lists the service packages for the TOA board and the corresponding configurationcontents.

Table 7-2 Service packages for the TOA board and the corresponding configuration contents

Service PackageName

Port Working Mode Service Type

8*GE->8*ODU0 Port Working Mode is set toODU0 non-convergencemode (Any->ODU0) for portsfrom ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.

Service Type is set to GE forports from ClientLP1 toClientLP8.



211

Service PackageName


8*STM-16/OC48->4*ODU1

Port Working Mode is set toODU1 non-convergencemode (Any->ODU1) for portsfrom ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.

Service Type is set toSTM-16/OC48 for ports fromClientLP1 to ClientLP8.

Table 7-3 lists the service packages for the THA board and the corresponding configurationcontents.

Table 7-3 Service packages for the THA board and the corresponding configuration contents

Service PackageName


16*GE->16*ODU0 Port Working Mode is set toODU0 non-convergencemode (Any->ODU0) for portsfrom ClientLP1 to ClientLP16.

Service Type is set to GE forports from ClientLP1 toClientLP16.

16*STM-16/OC48->8*ODU1

Port Working Mode is set toODU1 non-convergencemode (Any->ODU1) for portsfrom ClientLP1 to ClientLP16.

Service Type is set toSTM-16/OC48 for ports fromClientLP1 to ClientLP16.

7.1.3 Service Packages for the LOA BoardThe LOA board supports only one service package (8 x GE->8 x ODU0). The configurationcontents of the service package include port working modes, service types, ODU timeslotconfiguration modes, and cross-connections from the client side to LP ports, and cross-connections from the LP ports to the WDM side.

Table 7-4 lists the service packages for the LOA board and the corresponding configurationcontents.



212

Table 7-4 Service packages for the LOA board and the corresponding configuration contents

ServicePackageName

PortWorkingMode

ServiceType

ODUTimeslotConfiguration Mode

Cross-Connections from theClient Sideto LP Ports

Cross-Connections from theLP ports tothe WDMside

8*GE->8*ODU0

PortWorkingMode is set toODU0 non-convergencemode (Any->ODU0) forports fromClientLP1 toClientLP8.

ServiceType is set toGE for portsfromClientLP1 toClientLP8.

ODUTimeslotConfiguration Mode isset to Assignrandom forWDM sideports IN/OUT-OCH:1.

BidirectionalGE-levelcross-connectionsareconfiguredbetweenports fromRX1/TX1 toRX8/TX8and channel 1at each portfromClientLP1 toClientLP8.

BidirectionalODU0-levelcross-connectionsareconfiguredbetweenports fromOCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 toOCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 andchannel 1 ateach portfromClientLP1 toClientLP8.

7.2 Configuring Service PackagesYou can configure service packages for multiple boards in batches or configure the servicepackage for each board separately.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.

l The boards that support service packages must be created.

l No cross-connection or protection is configured on the board.

l Port Type is not set to Line Side Color Optical Port for the port in tributary-line integratedmode on the TN52TOM board.

Precautionsl Existing services on a board will be interrupted if you configure service packages on the

board.

l After a service package is configured for a board, you can change the working mode, servicetype, and cross-connections at a port as required. After the change, the configurations onthe board will be different from the fixed configuration contents of the service package.



213

Configuration Process

Figure 7-1 Service package configuration process

Start

Delete cross-connections and protection configured on the

board

End

Are cross-connections and protection configured for the

board?

No

Yes

Select the required service package

Configure WDM services in one-click mode using the

service package

Yes

NoAre the configurations

successful?

NOTE

The following describes how to configure a service package in two modes.

NE Batch ConfigurationThis mode helps you configure service packages for all involved boards in batches on the NMS.

Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Batch Service PackageConfiguration from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Batch Service Package Configuration window, click the Board Type drop-down listto select the required board type.



214

Step 3 In the Service Package window, select the name of the service package that you want toconfigure and click Apply To.... In the Select Board dialog box that is displayed, all subnetscontaining the selected board type are displayed. Select the boards where you want to configurethe service package and click OK.

TIP

To configure service packages for all boards on the NMS, click the Physical Root check box.TIP

When configuring service packages, you can choose whether creating cross-connection or not.

Step 4 Click OK in the Confirm dialog box that is displayed asking you "Board services will beinterrupted if you configure a service package. Are you sure you want to continue?" TheConfirm dialog box will be displayed again for confirmation. Click OK.



215

Step 5 The Configuring Service Package for Boards dialog box is displayed to show the operationprogress. After the operation is completed, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

----End

Separate Board ConfigurationThis mode helps you to configure a service package for a separate board.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required board and choose Configuration > Service Packagefrom the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select a service package from Service Package on the right and click Apply.

Step 3 Click OK in the Confirm dialog box that is displayed asking you "Board services will beinterrupted if you configure a service package. Are you sure you want to continue?" TheConfirm dialog box will be displayed again for confirmation. Click OK.

Step 4 The Configuring Service Package for Boards dialog box is displayed to show the operationprogress. After the operation is completed, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

----End

Operation Resultl If "Operation succeeded" is displayed in the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to

complete the operation.l If "Operation failed" or "Operation partially succeeded" is displayed in the Operation

Result dialog box, click Details to view the cause. The possible causes are listed in thefollowing table. Handle the problem based on the displayed cause.

Cause Solution

Cross connection alreadyexists

Delete all cross-connections on the board corresponding tothe value of Object.

Invalid port type Change the port type of all ports on the board correspondingto the value of Object to client-side ports.

Configuration VerificationAfter a service package is completed, verify that the service package is successfully configured.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the board where the service package is configured and chooseConfiguration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Verify that the value of ServiceType is correctly set for the required ports according to the configured service package.

Step 2 In the NE Explorer, select the board where the service package is configured and chooseConfiguration > Working Mode from the Function Tree. Verify that the values of BoardWorking Mode and Port Working Mode are correctly set according to the configured servicepackage.

NOTE

Verify the value of Board Working Mode only for the TN52TOM board.

Step 3 If the board is TN52TOM, select the required NE in the NE Explorer and chooseConfiguration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click the WDM Cross-



216

Connection Configuration tab and verify that the WDM cross-connections are correctlyconfigured according to the configured service package.

Step 4 If the board is TN52TOM and the configured service package is Tributary line 7*STM-1/OC3->ODU1, Tributary line 7*FE->ODU0, or 4*OTU1 REG, select the NE where the servicepackage is configured in the Main Topology. Double-click the NE icon to open the NE panel.In the NE panel, select and right-click the required board, and then choose Path View from theshortcut menu that is displayed. Right-click the required port and choose Modify Port from theshortcut menu that is displayed. Verify that the value of Type is correctly set according to theconfigured service package.

----End



217

8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

About This Chapter

You can configure WDM services in end-to-end mode by searching for trails and creating trailsat different layers. In addition, the NMS provides the signal flow diagram that visually displaysthe signal flow and the transmission media layer route of trails. This facilitates operations andimproves the maintenance efficiency.

8.1 WDM TrailThe concept, type, and relevant information about trails are described here.

8.2 Creating OCh Trails by Trail SearchAfter you create fiber connections and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000,the trail information does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails,you need to search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network togenerate end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

8.3 Configuration ExampleAfter you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trailinformation does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage WDM trails, you needto search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network to generateend-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

8.4 Parameters: End to End Service ConfigurationIn this user interface, you can configure WDM trails.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)


218

8.1 WDM TrailThe concept, type, and relevant information about trails are described here.

Currently, the NMS provides the following OTN trail modules that comply with ITU-T G.872:l Client traill ODUk trail: optical channel data unit (ODUk) traill OTUk trail: optical channel transport unit (OTUk) traill OCh trail: optical channel traill OMS trail: optical multiplexing section traill OTS trail: optical transmission section traill OSC trail: optical supervisory channel (OSC) trail

l The first six types are related to services, and the OSC trail is related to supervisory signals.l The OTS trail cannot be deleted from the NMS. You must delete the fiber connection before

deleting the OTS trail.l The rate level varies with the value of "k" in ODUk/OTUk. For details, see Table 8-1.

ODU5G/OTU5G is a level customized by Huawei.

Table 8-1 ODUk rate level

Trail Level Rate (Gbit/s)

ODU0 1.25

ODU1/OTU1 2.5

ODU5G/OTU5G 5

ODU2/OTU2 10

ODU3/OTU3 40

ODUflex 1.25 to 10 (n x 1.25)

Trail ModuleFigure 8-1 and Figure 8-2 illustrate the relationship and location of the trails.



219

Figure 8-1 Trail

Client

OCh

OMS

OTS

ODUk

OTUk

:OTU :MUX :DMUX :OA

NOTE

In the case of the NG WDM equipment, an OMS trail terminates at the MUX and DMUX cards.

Figure 8-2 OSC Trail

:OSC

TM RM TM RM

OLA OTMOTM

OSC Trail OSC Trail

:FIU

ODUk TrailDifferent from other trails, an ODUk/OTUk sets the source and sink at the internal ports of anOTU card, a tributary card or a line card. Figure 8-3 displays a typical ODUk trail module whosesource and sink are set on the internal ports of tributary ports or of line cards.



220

Figure 8-3 ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, ...) trail

RX1 TX1

LP1 ODU1

OUT IN

LP1ODU1

ODU1

ODU2

OTU2

OTU2

ODU2

ODU1

OCh Trail

OTU2 Trail

ODU2 Trail

ODU1 Trail

Client Trail

NS2TQS TQSNS2

STM-16 STM-16ODU0 ODU0

ODU0 Trail

Electrical Signal

Optical Signal

In the case of the client-side service whose rate is less than 1.25 Gbit/s, an ODU0 trail is added,as shown in Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, ...) trail

RX1 TX1

LP1 ODU1

OUT IN

LP1ODU1ODU1

ODU2

OTU2

OTU2

ODU2

ODU1

OCh Trail

OTU2 Trail

ODU2 Trail

ODU1 Trail

Client Trail

Electrical Signal

Optical Signal

52NS252TOM 52TOM52NS2

GE GEODU0 ODU0

ODU0 Trail

NOTE

The service rate of an ODUflex is in the range of 1.25 Gbit/s to 10 Gbit/s. Therefore, an ODUflex trail isa trail ranging from ODU0 to ODU2.



221

Inverse Multiplexing TrailThe rate of the client layer of an inverse multiplexing trail is greater than the rate of the serverlayer. Hence, an inverse multiplexing client trail needs multiple trails to serve as its server layer.Currently, you can only search for an inverse multiplexing trail, but you cannot create an end-to-end inverse multiplexing trail.

An inverse multiplexing client trail can take an ODU1 or ODU2 trail as the server trail. That is,an inverse multiplexing client trail cannot take ODU1 and ODU2 trails as the server trails at thesame time.

40G inverse multiplexing trail modelThe transmission rate of a single wavelength is 40G, but a single wavelength cannot be used forlong-distance transmission due to an optical layer index (such as dispersion) restriction. In a40G inverse multiplexing transmission scheme, a 40G signal is converted to four 10G ODU2signals, each of which uses one wavelength. This is equal to four 10G signals on the line sideand lowers the optical layer index requirement.

Figure 8-5 shows the inverse multiplexing trail model of the TSXL card. You cannotdynamically adjust the bandwidth of STM-256 or OC768 services whose rate is 40G. Hence,you can search for a client trail only after you configure four ODU2 trails. If you configure onlyone, two or three ODU2 trails, services are unavailable and you fail to search for the client trail.

Figure 8-5 40G Inverse Multiplexing Trail

10G Inverse Multiplexing Trail ModelThe TDX card is a 10G inverse multiplexing tributary card that has two individual transmissionpaths. Each path inversely multiplexes a 10G service to multiple ODU1 signals, which are cross-connected to a line card for transmission. The 10G service uses any or all of the four ODU1signals according to bandwidth status. When the 10G service does not use all of the four ODU1signals, the 10G service share an ODU2 trail with other ODU1 signals. This saves line resources.



222

Figure 8-6 shows the inverse multiplexing trail model of the IP3 port on the TDX card. A 10Gservice is an Ethernet service for which you can dynamically adjust bandwidth. The server layerallows one, two, three or four ODU1 trails. Hence, the client trail that you search out is ofdifferent rate levels.

Figure 8-6 10G inverse multiplexing trail

8.2 Creating OCh Trails by Trail SearchAfter you create fiber connections and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000,the trail information does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails,you need to search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network togenerate end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.l Fiber connections must be created correctly for the WDM equipment.

Precautionsl If certain cross-connections exist, you can create an optical-layer trail by using any of the

following methods:– Delete the original cross-connection and create the optical-layer trail by using the trail

function. This method affects services.– Complement cross-connections on NEs and search for the trail.

l You can create only single-NE optical cross-connections from the AM port to the OUTport of the RMU9 board, from the IN port to the DM port of the RDU9 board, from theAM port to the OUT port of the WSMD4/WSMD2 board and from the IN port to the DMport of the WSMD4/WSMD2 board. In this case, the board optical cross-connection is notsupported. These single-NE optical cross-connections do not affect services. You need tocreate such single-NE optical cross-connections and search for trails if you want to managethe services transmitted in the cross-connections by using the trail management function.



223


U2000

Procedure on the U2000

Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail fromthe Main Menu.

Step 2 Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

NOTEIn the mode of searching by subnet, the selected subnet range must be independent from the networkingaspect. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area that is beyondthe selected subnet range.

Step 3 Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,depending on the number of services.

NOTE

l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end to endtrails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation.

l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: The networking changes. The trail may causeinterruption of service flow. For example, the key information of the trail, including deleting a cross-connection or fiber, is verified.

Step 4 Optional: Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. If you want to set a trailmanagement flag, check the Management Flag check box or right-click it and select themanagement flag.

NOTESkip this step if the policy of automatically creating trails after searching is selected in Step 2.

Step 5 Click Next to view all discrete services in the network.

NOTEIf Step 4 is executed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the network layer.This does not affect services of the actual NE or the data of an individual NE on the U2000.

Step 6 After the search is complete, click Finish.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from theMain Menu.

Step 2 On the Basic Settings tab, select the level of the service being queried for Level.

Step 3 Optional: On the Subnet Settings tab, select the subnet being queried.

Step 4 Click Filter All. In Manage WDM Trail, check whether the trails on the subnet being queriedare consistent with the network design.

----End



224

8.3 Configuration ExampleAfter you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trailinformation does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage WDM trails, you needto search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network to generateend-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

8.3.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThis section describes how to configure end-to-end GE services on a ring network.

Service RequirementsOn the network shown in Figure 8-7, ONEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEsfunction as OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows:

l User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTN service isconfigured between station A and station C.

l One GE service is added and dropped for User1 and User2 each.l ODUk SNCP protection is configured.

Figure 8-7 Network diagram of end-to-end services

B

A

C

D

NMS

User1

User2

OADM

E W

W

W

WE

E

E

21-TOM04-

NQ216-

NQ2

16-NQ204-

NQ2

21-TOM

04-NQ2

16-NQ2

04-NQ216-

NQ2

Working service route

Protection service route



225

Boards ConfiguredTwo NQ2 boards and one TOM board must be configured at stations A and C each. Two NQ2boards must be configured at stations B and D each.

8.3.2 Service Signal FlowThis section describes the service signal flow of end-to-end GE services.

One OTN service is configured between NEs A and C.

Figure 8-8 shows the service signal flow between station A and station C.


3(RX1/TX1)4(RX2/TX2)5(RX3/TX3)6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)8(RX6/TX6)9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)




C

3(RX1/TX1)4(RX2/TX2)5(RX3/TX3)6(RX4/TX4)7(RX5/TX5)8(RX6/TX6)9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)

A

NQ2 TOM

B

NQ2 NQ2

TOM NQ2





1(IN1/OUT1)

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

52(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

72(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

2(IN2/OUT2)

53(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

54(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

73(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

74(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

3(IN2/OUT2)

4(IN2/OUT2)

1(IN1/OUT1)

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

52(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

72(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

2(IN2/OUT2)

53(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

54(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

73(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

74(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

3(IN2/OUT2)

4(IN2/OUT2)

1(IN1/OUT1)

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

52(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

72(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

2(IN2/OUT2)

53(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

54(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

73(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

74(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

3(IN2/OUT2)

4(IN2/OUT2)

1(IN1/OUT1)

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

52(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

72(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

2(IN2/OUT2)

53(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

54(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)

73(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

74(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

3(IN2/OUT2)

4(IN2/OUT2)

:Client-side services :WDM-side services :Vritual channel



226

l At station A:

Use the Rx1/Tx1 optical port on the TN52TOM board at station A to add a service.

l At station C:

Use the Rx1/Tx1 optical port on the TN52TOM board at station C to drop a service.

8.3.3 Configuration ProcessAfter searching for the relevant trail information on the U2000, you can create OCh, ODUk, orclient trails by specifying the sources and sinks of the trails. This section describes how toconfigure an end-to-end GE service between NEs A and C.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.

l A license for trail management must be available.

l The OCh server trail must be searched out.

l The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must beestablished correctly.


U2000

PrecautionsNOTE

The value of TN52TOM Board Mode is NON-Cascading mode by default. In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) and 205(ClientLP5/ ClientLP5) ports can access a maximum of four services, and the 203(ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) and 207 (ClientLP7/ ClientLP7) ports can access a maximum of two services.

NOTE

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can beconfigured in only the first channel of the ClientLP port.

The total rate of services accessed by a ClientLP port must be equal to or lower than 2.5 Gbit/s.


The client-side ports can be grouped as required.


ODUk SNCP is classified into three types: SNC/I, SNC/N, and SNC/S. The difference amongthe three types is that they have different monitoring abilities and therefore are triggered bydifferent conditions.

l SNC/I (inherent monitoring): inherent monitoring; the trigger condition is the state ofoverheads in the SM section. When there is neither need for ODU end to end protectionnor need for TCM subnet application, select SNC/I.

l SNC/S (sub-layer monitoring): sub-layer monitoring; the trigger condition is the state ofoverheads in the SM and TCM sections. When there is no need for ODU end to endprotection but there is need for TCM subnet application, select SNC/S.



227

l SNC/N (non-intrusive monitoring): non-intrusive monitoring; the trigger condition is thestate of overheads in the SM, TCM or PM sections. When there is need for ODU end toend protection, select SNC/N.

For details on ODUk SNCP protection, see the Feature Description.


Step 1 Configure board attributes.1. Configure port attributes of the TN52TOM boards in slot 21 at stations A and C.

l Set Board Working mode to Non-cascading. For details, see Configuring theWorking Mode.

l Set Service Type of TOM-201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP)-1 to GE. For details, see 12.2Configuring the Service Type.

2. Configure port attributes of the NQ2 boards in slots 4 and 16 at stations A, B, C, and D.l Set Configuring Non-Intrusive Monitoring of NQ2-51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP)-

ODU1-1 to ENABLED. For details, see 12.14 Configuring Non-IntrusiveMonitoring.

l Set Service Mode of NQ2-51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP)-ODU1 to ODU1. For details, see12.3 Configuring the Service Mode.

CAUTIONl If you need to change Service Mode of a board, deactivate the services on the board

first. Note that deactivation interrupts the services.l For a 51NQ2 board, the default value of Service Mode is ODU1. For a 52NQ2

board, the default value of Service Mode is AUTO. You can change the value toODU1 or retain the default value.

Step 2 Create ODU1 server trails.1. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the Main Menu.2. Make the following settings in the Create WDM Trail window:

l Level: ODU1l Direction: Bidirectionall Rate: ODU1

3. Double-click NE A in the Physical Root. Then, select the TOM board in slot 21 in thedisplayed Select Board Port window and make the following settings:l Available Timeslots/Port: 201(ClientLP1)l Channel: 1

4. Click OK.5. Double-click NE C in the Physical Root. Then, select the TOM board in slot 21 in the

displayed Select Board Port window and make the following settings:l Available Timeslots/Port: 201(ClientLP1)l Channel: 1



228

6. Click OK.

7. Check values of Source and Sink in Route Information and ensure that the route is thedesign route.

8. Optional: Click a server tail between the source and sink NEs, and select the includedserver trail in the displayed dialog box. You can click the trail again, and cancel the selectedserver trail in the displayed dialog box.

9. Optional: Double-click the other NE in the subnet to specify the NE that the route cannot

pass through. The sign is shown on the NE. Double-click the NE again to cancel yourselection.

10. Optional: Click Specify Route Channel and the Specify Route Channel dialog box isdisplayed. Select a path and click OK.

11. Click the Protection Setting tab, and set the SNCP protection route.

l Right-click the NEA that dual feeds services and choose Set Dual-Feed Point from the

shortcut menu. In the upper left corner of the NEA icon, is displayed.

l Right-click the NEC that dual feeds services and choose Set Selective-Receiving

Point from the shortcut menu. In the upper left corner of the NEC icon, is displayed.

12. Right-click on the Node list window and choose Set SNCP Parameter. In the displayedSet SNCP Parameter window, set SNCP Type of NEs A and C to SNC/N. Click OK.

13. Click the General Attributes set the basic trail attributes, including the name and ID.

14. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

NOTE

Select the Activate the trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after it is createdsuccessfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on the U2000.

Step 3 Create client trails.

1. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

2. Make the following settings in the Create WDM Trail window:

l Level: Client

l Direction: Bidirectional

l Rate: GE

3. Double-click NE A in Physical Root. Then, select the TOM board in slot 21 in the displayedSelect Board Port window and make the following settings:

l Available Timeslots/Port: 3(RX1/TX1)

l Channel: 1

4. Click OK5. Double-click NE C in Physical Root. Then, select the TOM board in slot 21 in the displayed

Select Board Port window and make the following settings:

l Available Timeslots/Port: 3(RX1/TX1)

l Channel: 1

6. Click OK.



229

7. Click the General Attributes tab to set the basic trail attributes, including the name andID.

8. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

NOTE

Select the Activate the trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after it is createdsuccessfully. If you do not select the Activate the trail check box, the trail configuration data issaved only on the U2000.

NOTE

The preceding configuration procedure is described based on the scenario of ODU1 SNCP protection. Inthis scenario, cross-connect and pass-through services of the ODU1 level and optical ports 51-54 on theline board must be configured. If ODU0 SNCP protection is configured, cross-connect and pass-throughservices of the ODU0 level and optical ports 161-176 on the line board must be configured. If no SNCPprotection is configured, you do not need to create ODUk server trails but directly create client trails.

----End

Result

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > WDM Trail Management from the Main Menu and selectthe proper filter criteria for the trails.

TIPYou can filter other trails based on the source and sink of the new trail.

Step 2 In the WDM Trail Management window, verify that the trail is correctly created.

----End

8.4 Parameters: End to End Service ConfigurationIn this user interface, you can configure WDM trails.


Level OCh, ODU0, ODU1,ODU2, ODUflex,Client

Specifies the level of a trail.Click A.32 Rate (WDM TrailCreation) for more information.

Rate For example: GE Selects the service type.Click A.30 Level (WDM TrailCreation) for more information.

Direction Bidirectional,Unidirectional

Selects the service direction.Click A.31 Direction (WDM TrailCreation) for more information.

SPC First Checked, Unchecked When checked, you can create ASON-WDM trail, if the trail passes through theASON domain.



230


OVPN Customer For example, SharedResource

Indicates the OVPN customer of theWDM ASON trail.Click A.35 OVPN Customer (ASONTrail Management) for moreinformation.NOTE

This parameter is displayed only when youset Level to OCh and Direction toBidirectional, and check SPC First.

Source For example: NE6-shelf0-21-52TOM-3(RX1/TX1)-1

Selects the source of the route.Click A.33 Source (WDM TrailCreation) for more information.

Sink For example: NE7-shelf0-21-52TOM-3(RX1/TX1)-1

Selects the sink of the route.Click A.34 Sink (WDM TrailCreation) for more information.

TrailSetting

ExplicitLink

- Specifies the explicit server link for thetrail to be created.Click A.25 Explicit Link for moreinformation.

ExplicitNode

For example: NE7 Specifies the explicit NE for the trail tobe created.Click A.26 Explicit Node for moreinformation.

ExcludedNode

For example: NE7 Indicates the excluded node of the trail.Click A.27 Excluded Node for moreinformation.

PlatinumServiceGroup

- Indicates the reference trail selectedwhen the platinum service of the trail iscreated.

RouteConstraint

Source-Sink-ChannelOccupied-Working/Protection

Indicates the calculation result ofavailable trails.

Auto-Calculation

Checked, Unchecked Calculates routes automatically whenyou select this parameter.Click A.28 Auto-Calculation for moreinformation.

Protection Setting

Node list Dual-Fed Point To set or cancel the dual-fed point, right-click the NE on the topology and selectSet Dual-Feed Point or Cancel Dual-Feed Point from the shortcut menu.



231


Selective-ReceivingPoint

To set or cancel the selective-receivingpoint, right-click the NE on the topologyand select Set Selective-ReceivingPoint or Cancel Selective-ReceivingPoint from the shortcut menu.

SNCP Parameter ofDual Fed Point

Specifies the SNCP parameter of thedual fed point.

SNCP Parameter ofSelective ReceivingPoint

Specifies the SNCP parameter of theselective receiving point.

Set SNCPParameter

SNCP Type Specifies the SNCP type. For example,SNC/N.

OTN Level Specifies the OTN level. For example,TCM1.

RouteInformation

Source-Sink-ChannelOccupied-Working/Protection

Indicates the calculation result ofavailable trail.

GeneralAttributes

Customer Customer name Selects the customer that the trailbelongs to.

Order No Character string Specifies the order number of the trail.

Remarks Character string Adds the remarks.

ID For example: 1 Specifies the trail ID.

SpecifyRouteChannel

Source For example: NE6 Indicates the source of the server layertrail.

Sink For example: NE7 Indicates the sink of the server layer trail.

ServerLayer TrailName

Source-Sink-TrailLevel-Trail NO

Indicates the name of the server layertrail.

ServerLayer Trail

For example: 5 Indicates the channel that the trailoccupies.

RouteDescription

Negative Working,Positive Working

Indicates the route description.

Selecttheincludedservertrail

Source/Sink

For example: NE6-shelf0-21-52TOM-3(RX1/TX1)-1

Indicates the source/sink of a server trail.

Level For example: OCh Indicates the level of the server trail.

TrailName

Source NE-Sink NE-Trail Level-Trail Suffix

Indicates the name of a server trail.



232


NE List For example: NE6;NE7 Indicates the NE that a server trail passesthrough.

RouteDescription

Positive, Negative Indicates the route information.

Wavelength

For example: 1\1560.61\192.100

Specifies the optical channel occupiedby the trail.

Activate the trail Checked, Unchecked Applies trail configuration to the NE sothat the service takes effect on the NE.

Copy after Creation - Creates multiple trails whose share thesame routes but have different channels.Click A.29 Copy after Creation formore information.

Set Optical PowerAfter Creation

- Switches to the Query RelevantOptical Power window to view therelevant optical power.



233

9 Configuring SDH Services

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports SDH boards. Hence, the OptiX OSN 8800 can be interconnectedto the SDH equipment. When you configure an SDH service for the OptiX OSN 8800, you canconfigure the SDH service on a per-NE basis. In this way, you can specify the timeslot and routefor the service on each NE.

9.1 SDH Service Configuration ProcessThis topic describes the process of configuring SDH services. The process consists of deployinga network, configuring the source NE, configuring the sink NE, configuring a pass-through NE,and verifying services.

9.2 SDH Service OverheadThis topic describes the SDH overheads, including J0, J1, and C2, that the OptiX OSN 8800supports.

9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection RingConfigure the protection subnet and the services on the non-protection ring separately. It isrecommended that you configure the protection subnet before configuring services on the non-protection ring.

9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP ServicesIn the case of 1+1 linear MSP, the source NE dual-feeds service signals to the working andprotection lines. In normal conditions, the sink NE selectively receives the services from theworking line. When the working line is faulty, the sink NE selectively receives the services fromthe protection line.

9.5 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring ServicesTo configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services, you need to create the MSP subnetprotection and MSP services. There is no requirement for the sequence of creating the MSPsubnet protection and MSP services.

9.6 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring ServicesWith respect to the physical topology, the SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent ring.It can protect services on the two SNCP rings when one fiber between any adjacent stations oneach ring is cut. For service configuration of the SNCP tangent ring, you should focus on thetangent node. Each bidirectional service that passes by the tangent node must be configured withfour pairs of protection groups.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide 9 Configuring SDH Services


234

9.7 Parameter



235

9.1 SDH Service Configuration ProcessThis topic describes the process of configuring SDH services. The process consists of deployinga network, configuring the source NE, configuring the sink NE, configuring a pass-through NE,and verifying services.

Figure 9-1 shows the process of configuring SDH services.

Figure 9-1 SDH service configuration process

Deploy a network

Create andconfigure NEs

Create fibers

Configure thecommunication

Set the NE time

Configure clocks

Configure theorderwire

Configure theprotection

Configure thesource NE

Querying the NESoftware Version

Querying theCapacity of Lower

Order Cross-Connections

Create SDHservices

Create SNCPservices

Maintenance forSDH services

Change SDHservices

Delete SDHservices

Verifyservices

Test SDHservices

Configure thesink NE


Querying theCapacity of Lower

Order Cross-Connections

Create SDHservices

Create SNCPservices

Configure pass-through NEs

Create SDHservices

Required

Optional


NOTE

l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart, there are six main phases of SDH serviceconfiguration process. They are deploying a network, configuring the source NE, configuring the sinkNE, configuring a pass-through NE, maintenance for SDH services, and verifying services.

l The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relationships between operation tasks in each phase.

9.2 SDH Service OverheadThis topic describes the SDH overheads, including J0, J1, and C2, that the OptiX OSN 8800supports.



236

9.2.1 Trace ByteTrace bytes are used to trace the connection status between the receive end and transmit end.The trace bytes can be used to detect and solve problems in advance to prevent transmittedservices from being affected. This decreases the network restoration time to a great extent.

J0 ByteThe J0 byte is located at line 1 and column (6N+1) in a STM-N frame.

The J0 byte is the regenerator section trace byte. The J0 byte is continuously to carry an accesspoint identifier of a regenerator section, according to which the receive end verifies thecontinuous connection to the intended transmit end.

J1 ByteThe J1 byte is the first byte in a virtual container (VC) and its location is indicated by the relevantpointer.

The J1 byte is the higher order path trace byte. The J1 byte is used to repetitively transmit theaccess point identifier of a higher order path (HO APId) so that the receive end of the path canverify its continuous connection to the intended transmit end. The J1 byte can be used to detectand solve problems in advance to prevent transmitted services from being affected. Thisdecreases the network restoration time to a great extent.

9.2.2 Signal Label ByteThis topic describes the locations and functions of the signal label bytes C2 in SDH overheads.

C2 ByteThe C2 byte is the third byte in a VC.

C2 is the signal label byte, which is used to indicate the multiplexing structure of VC framesand the payload property. The sent C2 byte must match the received C2 byte. If C2 mismatchoccurs, an HP_SLM alarm is generated in the corresponding VC4 path at the local end.

9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection RingConfigure the protection subnet and the services on the non-protection ring separately. It isrecommended that you configure the protection subnet before configuring services on the non-protection ring.

9.3.1 Networking DiagramYou can configure a non-protection ring if the services on the ring do not need to be protected.In this case, all the timeslots on the ring can carry services.

Figure 9-2 shows a non-protection ring that consists of four NEs. NE1, NE2, NE3 and NE4 arethe OptiX OSN 8800. In this example, the source NE NE1 and the sink NE NE3 use the SLO16boards to add or drop services, and use the SLQ64 boards to transmit SDH services. NE2 andNE4 use the SLQ64 boards to pass through the SDH services.



237

Figure 9-2 Networking diagram of a non-protection

NE1

NE2 NE4NE3

Two-fiber bidirectionalnon-protection ring

West

East

WestEast

EastWest

17-SLQ6418-SLO16

01-SLQ6417-SLQ64

01-SLQ6417-SLQ64

17-SLQ6418-SLO16

: OptiX OSN 8800

9.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot AllocationTo configure services on the non-protection ring, you need to plan the traffic direction andtimeslot allocation for the services on the non-protection ring.

Figure 9-3 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation. In this example, five STM-1 servicesare added to or dropped from the source NE NE1 and the sink NE NE3, and the STM-1 servicespass through the intermediate NE NE2.



238

Figure 9-3 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the services on the non-protection ring

VC4-1:1-5

NE1

NE2

NE3

线路板Pass-through service

VC4-1:1-5

NE4Two-fiber bidirectionalnon-protection ring

VC4-1:1-5

5xSTM-1

5xSTM-1

NE2:

NE3:

NE1:

18-SLO1617-SLQ64

17-SLQ6401-SLQ64

18-SLO1617-SLQ64

: Traffic direction : Line board

9.3.3 Configuration ProcessConfiguration of the services on the non-protection ring is not related to the configuration of theprotection subnet. To configure the services on the non-protection ring, configure the SDHservices on the source and sink NEs and the pass-through services on the intermediate NEs ifthe protection subnet is already created.

Prerequisite

The physical topology of the network must be created.

The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.

The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology.





239


Step 1 Configure an SDH service for the source NE NE1.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > SDH Service

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Create in the lower-right pane and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.

Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialogbox that is displayed.

Parameter Value inThisExample

Description

Level VC4 In this example, STM-1 services are configured. Hence,Level of the STM-1 services is set to VC4.


In this example, the services are transmitted and receivedover the same path. That is, the services areBidirectional services.

Source Slot 18-N4SLO16-1(SDH-1)

In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 18 of NE1 isconfigured as the source board.

Source VC4 - In this example, five STM-1 services are configuredbetween NE1-NE3. Hence, the source VC4 is notconfigured.

SourceTimeslotRange (e.g.1,3-6)

1-5 In this example, five STM-1 services are configuredbetween NE1-NE3. Hence, the source timeslot range isconfigured as 1-5.

Sink Slot 17-N4SLQ64-1(SDH-1)

In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 17 of NE1 isconfigured as the sink board.

Sink VC4 - In this example, five STM-1 services are configuredbetween NE1-NE3. Hence, the sink VC4 is notconfigured.

SinkTimeslotRange (e.g.1,3-6)

1-5 In this example, five STM-1 services are configuredbetween NE1-NE3. Hence, the sink timeslot range isconfigured as 1-5.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 2 Configure an SDH service for the sink NE3. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH service onNE3. Set the following parameters.



240


Description


Direction Bidirectional In this example, the services are transmitted and receivedover the same path. That is, the services are Bidirectionalservices.


In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 18 of NE3 isconfigured as the source board.






Sink VC4 - In this example, five STM-1 services are configuredbetween NE1-NE3. Hence, the sink VC4 is not configured.

Sink TimeslotRange (e.g.1,3-6)


ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 3 Configure pass-through services on the intermediate NE NE2.1. Select NE2 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set

the parameters that are required, and then click OK. Click Close in the OperationResult dialog box that is displayed.


Description




241


Description


In this example, the services are transmitted and receivedover the same path. That is, the services areBidirectional services.

Source Slot 01-N4SLQ64-1(SDH-1)

In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 01 of NE2 isconfigured as the source board.






Sink VC4 - In this example, five STM-1 services are configuredbetween NE1-NE3. Hence, the sink VC4 is notconfigured.



ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 4 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see Verifying the Correctnessof the Service Configuration.

Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see Setting PerformanceMonitoring Parameters of an NE.

Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Select a proper one from the following secondmethods depending on the actual situation.

Option Description

When the system control and communicationboard is not configured with the CF card

Backing Up the NE Database to the SCCBoard.

When the system control and communicationboard is configured with the CF card

Manually Backing Up the NE Database to aCF Card.

----End



242

9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP ServicesIn the case of 1+1 linear MSP, the source NE dual-feeds service signals to the working andprotection lines. In normal conditions, the sink NE selectively receives the services from theworking line. When the working line is faulty, the sink NE selectively receives the services fromthe protection line.

9.4.1 Networking DiagramThis topic describes the configuration of 1+1 linear MSP. The OptiX OSN 8800 is used as onlythe intermediate NE that transmits an SDH service. The OptiX OSN 3500 adds or drops the SDHservice.

In Figure 9-4, NE1, NE2, NE5, and NE6 use the OptiX OSN 3500, and the intermediate NEsNE3 and NE4 use the OptiX OSN 8800. In this example, the OptiX OSN 3500 adds or dropsthe SDH service, and the OptiX OSN 8800 only transmits the SDH service instead of adding ordropping the SDH service. NE1, NE2, NE5, and NE6 use the PQ1 boards as the tributary boardsthat add or drop the SDH service, and use the SL16 boards as the line boards that transmit theSDH service. The intermediate NEs NE3 and NE4 use the SLO16 boards as the line boards thatdual-feed or selectively receive the SDH service, and use the SLQ64 boards as the line boardsthat transmit the SDH service.

Figure 9-4 Networking diagram of the 1+1 linear MSP

NE1

NE2

NE3 NE4

NE5

NE6

Line boardTributary board 2-PQ1

7-SL16


7-SL16

Line boardLine board 7-SLO16

8-SLQ64Line board 12-SLQ64

Line boardLine board 7-SLO16

8-SLQ64Line board 12-SLQ64


7-SL16


7-SL16

: OptiX OSN 8800 : OptiX OSN 3500

9.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot AllocationYou can configure the service added to the source NE and dropped to the sink NE if the 1+1linear MSP is already created.

Figure 9-5 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation between NE1 and NE6.



243

l The service flow from NE1 to NE6 is as follows: NE1→NE3→NE4→NE6.A service is added to the source NE NE1, cross-connected from the tributary board PQ1 tothe line board SL16, and then transmitted to the intermediate NE3. The line board SLO16dual-feeds the service to the line board SLQ64 through the working and protection lines.The two services are received by the line board SLQ64 on the intermediate NE4, and theline board SLO16 selects one of the two services and then transmits the service to the sinkNE6. The service is dropped to NE6, and cross-connected from the line board SL16 to thetributary board PQ1.


l The services between NE1 and NE6 use the first to fourth VC12 timeslots (VC4-1:1-4(VC12)) in the first VC4 on the SDH link between NE1 and NE6. There are totally fourE1 services.

Figure 9-5 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation between NE2 and NE5.l The service flow from NE2 to NE5 is as follows: NE2→NE3→NE4→NE5.

A service is added to the source NE NE2, cross-connected from the tributary board PQ1 tothe line board SL16, and then transmitted to the intermediate NE3. The line board SLO16dual-feeds the service to the line board SLQ64 through the working and protection lines.The two services are received by the line board SLQ64 on the intermediate NE4, and theline board SLO16 selects one of the two services and then transmits the service to the sinkNE5. The service is dropped to NE5, and cross-connected from the line board SL16 to thetributary board PQ1.


l The services between NE2 and NE3 occupy the first to fourth VC12 timeslots (VC4-1:1-4(VC12)) in the first VC4 on the SDH link. There are totally four E1 services.

l The services between NE3 and NE4 occupy the fifth to eighth VC12 timeslots (VC4-1:5-8(VC12)) in the first VC4 on the SDH link. There are totally four E1 services.

l The services between NE4 and NE5 occupy the first to fourth VC12 timeslots (VC4-1:1-4(VC12)) in the first VC4 on the SDH link. There are totally four E1 services.



244

Figure 9-5 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the 1+1 linear MSP service

VC4-1:1-4(VC12)

VC4-1:1-4(VC12)4xE1 services

are added/dropped

VC4-1:1-4(VC12)

VC4-1:1-4(VC12)

VC4-1:5-8(VC12)

VC4-1:1-4(VC12)

VC4-1:5-8(VC12)

VC4-1:1-4(VC12)

NE1

NE2NE3 NE4

NE5

NE6

4xE1 servicesare added/

droppedLine boardLine board

7-SLO168-SLQ64

Line board 12-SLQ64

Line boardLine board

7-SLO168-SLQ64

Line board 12-SLQ64


dropped


dropped


2-PQ17-SL16


2-PQ17-SL16


2-PQ17-SL16


2-PQ17-SL16

: Line Board : Tributary board

: Traffic direction of the workingpath

: Traffic direction of the protectionpath

9.4.3 Configuration ProcessThis topic describes how to configure the 1+1 linear MSP services.

Prerequisite

The physical topology of the network must be created.

The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.

The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology.

Tools, Equipment and Materials



Step 1 Configure an SDH service for the source NE NE1.

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > SDH ServiceConfiguration from the Function Tree.

2. Click Create in the lower-right pane and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialogbox that is displayed.



245


Description

Level VC12 In this example, E1 services are configured. Hence,Level of the E1 services is set to VC12.


In this example, the services are transmitted and receivedover the same path. That is, the services are bidirectionalservices. Hence, Direction of the services is set toBidirectional.

Source Slot 2-PQ1 In this example, the PQ1 board in slot 2 is configured asthe source tributary board for the bidirectional services.

Source VC4 - -


1-4 The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according tothe plan. Hence, Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) isset to 1-4

Sink Slot 7-N1SL16-1(SDH-1)

In this example, the SL16 board in slot 7 is configuredas the sink line board.

Sink VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the services require four VC12s. As aresult, Sink VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC4contains 63 VC12s.


1-4 The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according tothe plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) isset to 1-4.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 2 Configure another SDH service for the source NE NE2. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDHservice on NE2. Set the following parameters.


Description

Level VC12 In this example, E1 services are configured. Hence, Levelof the E1 services is set to VC12.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the services are transmitted and receivedover the same path. That is, the services are bidirectionalservices. Hence, Direction of the services is set toBidirectional.

Source Slot 2-PQ1 In this example, the PQ1 board in slot 2 is configured as thesource tributary board for the bidirectional services.



246


Description

Source VC4 - -


1-4 The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according to theplan. Hence, Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) is set to1-4


In this example, the SL16 board in slot 7 is configured asthe sink line board.

Sink VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the services require four VC12s. As a result,Sink VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC4 contains 63VC12s.


1-4 The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according to theplan. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) is set to1-4.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 3 Configure an SDH service for the sink NE NE6. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH serviceon NE6. Set the following parameters.


Description




Source VC4 - -







247


Description




ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 4 Configure another SDH service for the sink NE NE5. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDHservice on NE5. Set the following parameters.


Description




Source VC4 - -








ActivateImmediately

Yes -



248

Step 5 Configure an SDH service for the intermediate NE NE3.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and choose Configuration > SDH Service




Description

Level VC12 In this example, E1 services are configured. Hence,Level of the E1 services is set to VC12.



Source Slot 7-N4SLO16(SDH-1)

In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 7 is configuredas the source line board.

Source VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the services require four VC12s. As aresult, Source VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC4contains 63 VC12s.


1-4 The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according tothe plan. Hence, Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) isset to 1-4


In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 8 is configuredas the sink line board.

Sink VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the services require four VC12s. As aresult, Sink VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC4contains 63 VC12s.


1-4 The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according tothe plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) isset to 1-4.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 6 Configure another SDH service for the intermediate NE NE3. See Step Step 5 to configure theSDH service on NE3. Set the following parameters.



249


Description



Source Slot 7-N4SLO16(SDH-2)

In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 7 is configured asthe source line board.

Source VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the services require four VC12s. As a result,Source VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC4 contains 63VC12s.




In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 8 is configured asthe sink line board.




ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 7 Configure an SDH service for the intermediate NE NE4. See Step Step 5 to configure the SDHservice on NE4. Set the following parameters.


Description





250


Description


In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 8 is configured asthe source line board.




Sink Slot 7-N4SLO16(SDH-1)

In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 7 is configured asthe sink line board.




ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 8 Configure another SDH service for the intermediate NE NE4. See Step Step 5 to configure theSDH service on NE4. Set the following parameters.


Description




In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 8 is configured asthe source line board.




251


Description



Sink Slot 7-N4SLO16(SDH-2)

In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 7 is configured asthe sink line board.




ActivateImmediately

Yes -




Option Description





----End

9.5 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP RingServices

To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services, you need to create the MSP subnetprotection and MSP services. There is no requirement for the sequence of creating the MSPsubnet protection and MSP services.



252

9.5.1 Networking DiagramIn the network construction, you should create and name NEs in sequence according to the certaindirection, which helps you facilitate the planning of the service flow and service configuration.

In the networking diagram shown in Figure 9-6, a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring that consistsof four OptiX OSN 8800 NEs. The OptiX OSN 3500 NEs at the source and sink ends are usedto add or drop services. In this example, the source NE NE5 and the sink NE NE6 use the PQ1boards as the tributary boards that add or drop services, and use the SL16 boards as the lineboards that transmit SDH services. NE2 and NE4 on the ring use the SLO16 boards to receivethe services sent from the OptiX OSN 3500 or to transmit the services to the OptiX OSN3500, and use the SLQ64 boards to transmit the SDH services. NE1 and NE3 on the ring usesthe SLQ64 board to transparently transmit the SDH services.

Figure 9-6 Networking of two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring

NE1

NE2 NE4

NE3

Two-fiber bidirectionalMSP ring

NE5 NE6

12-SLQ648-SLQ64

12-SLQ648-SLQ647-SLO16

Tributary board: 2-PQ1Line board: 7-SL16


12-SLQ648-SLQ64



9.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot AllocationIf you have created an MSP protection subnet, you can configure a service on a two-fiberbidirectional MSP ring as follows: The source NE adds a service, an NE accesses the service tothe ring network, the intermediate NE passes through the service, an NE transmits the serviceout of the ring network, and then the sink NE drops the service. The service on a ring networkhas more than one route from the source NE to the sink NE. You need not configure all routesin actual situations. Hence, it is important that you plan and configure the flow of service signalsand timeslot allocation properly before you configure a service.

Figure 9-7 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation of a service. In this example, NE5 addsa service, NE2 accesses the service to the ring network, NE1 passes through the service, NE4transmits the service out of the network, and NE6 drops the service. There are totally five E1services.



253

Figure 9-7 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

VC4-1:1-5(VC12)

线路

板线

路板

线路板

线路板Two-fiber bidirectional

MSP ring5xE1 services areadded/dropped

NE5 NE2

NE3

NE1

NE4 NE6

VC4-1:1-5(VC12)

VC4-1:1-5(VC12)

VC4-1:1-5(VC12)

VC4-1:1-5(VC12)VC4-1:1-5(VC12)

5xE1 services areadded/dropped

12-SLQ648-SLQ64




12-SLQ648-SLQ64


: Traffic direction : Line board : Tributary board

9.5.3 Configuration ProcessThe configuration of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP service is independent of creation of itsMSP protection subnet. In the case that the protection subnet is created, you need to respectivelyconfigure SDH services from the tributary board to the line board on the source NE and thedestination NE, and configure the pass-through service on the intermediate NE.

Prerequisite

The physical network topology must be created.

NEs, boards, and fibers must be successfully created on the U2000.

The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual topology.




Step 1 Configure an SDH service for the source NE NE5.


2. Click Create in the lower-right pane and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialogbox that is displayed.



254


Value Description

Level VC12 In this example, E1 services are added and dropped.Hence, Level of the E1 services is set to VC12.



Source Slot 2-PQ1 In the planning of this example, the PQ1 housed in slot2 serves as the source tributary board. Different sourceboards can be selected according to actual situations.

Source VC4 - -


1-5 In the planning of this example, the total service volumeis 5xE1. The service level is VC12, and thus the 5xVC12need be set.


In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot7 serves as the sink line board. Different sink boards canbe selected according to actual situations.

Sink VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the service requires 5xVC12. One VC4timeslot contains 63xVC12. Hence, only the first VC4timeslot need be set.



ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 2 Configure an SDH service for the sink NE NE6. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH serviceon NE6. Set the following parameters.


Value Description

Level VC12 In this example, E1 services are added and dropped. Hence,Level of the E1 services is set to VC12.




255


Value Description

Source Slot 2-PQ1 In the planning of this example, the PQ1 housed in slot 2serves as the source tributary board. Different sink boardscan be selected according to actual situations.

Source VC4 - -


1-5 In the planning of this example, the total service volume is5xE1. The service level is VC12, and thus the 5xVC12 needbe set.


In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot 7serves as the sink line board. Different source boards canbe selected according to actual situations.




ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 3 Configure the SDH service for NE2 to access the SDH service to the ring network.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and choose Configuration > SDH Service




Value Description

Level VC12 In this example, E1 services are added and dropped. Thecorresponding service level is set to VC12.




In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed inslot 7 serves as the source board. Different source boardscan be selected according to actual situations.



256


Value Description

Source VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the service requires 5xVC12. One VC4timeslot contains 63xVC12. Hence, only the first VC4timeslot need be set.




In the planning of this example, the SLQ64 housed inslot 8 serves as the sink board. Different sink boards canbe selected according to actual situations.




ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 4 Configure the SDH service for NE4 to transmit the SDH service out of the ring network. SeeStep Step 3 to configure the SDH service on NE4. Set the following parameters.


Value Description




In the planning of this example, the SLQ64 housed in slot8 serves as the source board. Different source boards can beselected according to actual situations.




257


Value Description



Sink Slot 7-N4SLO16-1(SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed in slot7 serves as the sink board. Different sink boards can beselected according to actual situations.




ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 5 Configure the pass-through service for NE1.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > SDH Service




Value Description





In the planning of this example, the SLQ64 housed inslot 12 serves as the source board. Different sourceboards can be selected according to actual situations.




258


Value Description




In the planning of this example, the SLQ64 housed inslot 8 serves as the sink board. Different sink boards canbe selected according to actual situations.




ActivateImmediately

Yes -




Option Description





----End

9.6 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring ServicesWith respect to the physical topology, the SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent ring.It can protect services on the two SNCP rings when one fiber between any adjacent stations oneach ring is cut. For service configuration of the SNCP tangent ring, you should focus on thetangent node. Each bidirectional service that passes by the tangent node must be configured withfour pairs of protection groups.



259

9.6.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThe SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent ring in terms of physical networkingtopology. The difference is that you need to configure only one pair of bidirectional services inthe tangent point for the MSP ring. For the SNCP ring, however, you need to configure fourprotection groups for each pair of bidirectional services.

In the networking diagram shown in Figure 9-8, two SNCP tangent rings consist of six OptiXOSN 3500 NEs and an OptiX OSN 8800 NE. The OptiX OSN 8800 NE functions as the tangentNE, namely, NE3. The source NE NE1 and the sink NE NE6 use the PQ1 boards as the tributaryboards that add or drop services.

Figure 9-8 SNCP tangent ring networking

NE5 NE7

NE6

SNCP Ring2

NE1

NE2 NE4

NE3

SNCP Ring1

2-PQ1

Line board:

8-SL16

Tributary board:

11-SL16Line board:

Line board:

11-SL16

Line board:

Line board:

Line board:

Line board:

Line board:

Line board:

8-SL16

11-SL16

8-SL168-SL16

11-SL16

8-SL16

11-SL16

Line board:

7-SLO168-SLO1612-SLO16

Line board:Line board:Line board:Line board: 13-SLO16

2-PQ1

Line board: 8-SL16

Tributary board:

11-SL16Line board:


NOTE

This example illustrates a network that consists of the OptiX OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 8800. In the caseof a network that consists of the OptiX OSN 8800 and other MSTP equipment, the configuration methodis the same. The difference lies in the slots where boards are inserted. For the slot information, see theHardware Description of the relevant product.



260

9.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot AllocationThe service in the SNCP tangent ring is not transmitted in a fixed direction. The service flowdirection depends on the configuration of the working path and the protection path on each NEwhere the SNCP protection group is configured. When configuring the SNCP protection groupon the tangent NE, you need to configure four SNCP protection groups for each bidirectionalservice in the tangent point. The service timeslot allocation in the SNCP tangent ring is same asthe service timeslot allocation on a single SNCP ring.

Figure 9-9 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation. The service can be transmittedin the MSP tangent ring in different directions and routes. In this example, the service in the ringis transmitted to the ring network from NE1 and then is dropped on the sink NE (NE6). on tangentNE (NE3), four SNCP protection groups need to be configured. The service flow direction isNE1-NE2-NE3-NE5-NE6 or NE1-NE2-NE3-NE7-NE6. There are five E1 services on the ring.


VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

NE1

5xE1

NE2

8

NE4线路板

11

SNCP Ring1

11

8

8 11

NE5

NE6

NE7

811

11

8

8

11

5 xE1

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

NE2 and NE4:

SDH service

8-SL16VC12

NE6:

NE3SNCP

812

137

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

NE1:

11-SL16

12-SLO1613-SLO16

12-SLO16

NE3:

workingservice route

protectionservice route

Line board

Tributary board

Service pass-through Service pass-through

Service pass-through Service pass-throughSNCP Ring2

servicesource

servicesink

SNCPprotection group

protection group1

protection group2

protection group3

protection group4

servicesource

protectionsource

servicesink

11-SL16 8-SL16 2-PQ1


protection group1

servicesource

protectionsource

servicesink

11-SL16 8-SL16 2-PQ1


protection group1

servicesource

protectionsource

servicesink

7-SLO16

8-SLO167-SLO16

8-SLO16 7-SLO16

12-SLO16 8-SLO16 13-SLO16

13-SLO16



261

9.6.3 Configuration ProcessFor non-tangent nodes in the SNCP tangent rings, the service configuration is the same as theservice configuration in a single ring network. On tangent nodes, you need to configure fourSNCP protection groups for a bidirectional service.

PrerequisiteThe physical network topology must be created.

NEs, boards, and fibers must be successfully created on the U2000.



Step 1 Configure an SNCP-protected SDH service for NE1.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > SDH Service

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Create SNCP Service in the lower-right pane and the Create SNCP Service dialog

box is displayed. Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in theOperation Result dialog box that is displayed.


Value Description

Service Type SNCP In this example, this parameter is set to the default value,that is, SNCP.

Level VC12 In this example, the service in the ring is the E1 service.The corresponding service level is set to VC12.


In this example, the received and transmitted servicespass through the same route, and thus the service isbidirectional. The service direction is set toBidirectional.

RevertiveMode

Revertive This parameter indicates the processing policies after thefaulty line is recovered, that is, revertive or non-revertive. During the service configuration, the revertivemode is set to Revertive.

Source Slotof theWorkingService

11-N1SL16-1(SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot11 serves as the source board of the working service.Different source boards of the working service can beselected according to actual situations.



262


Value Description

SourceTimeslotRange of theWorkingService

1-5 In the planning of this example, the total service volumeis 5xE1. The service level is VC12, and thus 5xVC12need be set.

Source Slotof theProtectionService

8-N1SL16-1(SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot8 serves as the source board of the protection service.Different source boards of the protection service can beselected according to actual situations.

SourceTimeslotRange of theProtectionService


Sink Slot 2-PQ1 In the planning of this example, the PQ1 housed in slot2 serves as the sink tributary board. Different sink boardscan be selected according to actual situations.

SinkTimeslotRange of theWorkingService


ActivateImmediately

Yes -

3. Click OK.

Step 2 The procedure of configuring a service for NE6 is similar to the procedure for NE1. Hence,configure an SDH service for NE6 by referring to the service configuration process of NE1 andthe NE6 service planning described in Figure 9-9.

Step 3 Configure the pass-through service on NE2.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and choose Configuration > SDH Service

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and choose Configuration > Cross Connection





263


Value Description




Source Slot 11-N1SL16-1(SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot11 serves as the source line board. Different sourceboards can be selected according to actual situations.





In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot8 serves as the sink board. Different sink boards can beselected according to actual situations.




ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 4 In this example, NE4, NE5, and NE7 are pass-through NEs. The configuration method andparameter setting are the same as those of NE2. Refer to the configuration of NE2 to configurepass-though SDH service of NE4, NE5 and NE7

Step 5 Configure the SDH service on NE3 (tangent NE).

NOTE

According to the configuration principle of the SNCP tangent rings, you need to configure four SNCPprotection groups for each bidirectional service. The configuration combination of protection groups is notfixed. You can configure the protection group according to actual requirements. The followingconfiguration is considered as a reference.




264

2. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and choose Configuration > Cross ConnectionConfiguration from the Function Tree.

3. Click Create SNCP Service in the lower-right pane and the Create SNCP Service dialogbox is displayed. Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in theOperation Result dialog box that is displayed.


Value Description

Service Type SNCP In this example, this parameter is set to the default value,that is, SNCP.


RevertiveMode

Revertive This parameter indicates the processing policies after thefaulty line is recovered, that is, revertive or non-revertive. During the service configuration, the revertivemode is set to Revertive.



Hold-offTime(100ms)

0 In this example, only one protection switching mode isavailable, and thus the hold-off time does not need to beset. During the service configuration, the hold-off timeis set to 0.

WTR Time(s)

600 In normal cases, this parameter is set to the default value,that is, 600.

Source Boardof theWorkingService

13-N4SLO16

In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed inslot 13 serves as the source board of the working service.Different source boards of the working service can beselected according to actual situations.

Source Portof theWorkingService

1 In the planning of this example, the port 1 of SLO16housed in slot 13 serves as the source port of the workingservice.

Source VC4of theWorkingService

VC4-1 The service source uses the timeslots of VC4-1.

SourceTimeslotRange of theWorkingService




265


Value Description

Source Boardof theProtectionService

7-N4SLO16 In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed inslot 7 serves as the source board of the protection service.Different source boards of the protection service can beselected according to actual situations.

Source Portof theProtectionService

1 In the planning of this example, the port 1 of SLO16housed in slot 7 serves as the source port of the protectionservice.

Source VC4of theProtectionService

VC4-1 The service source uses the timeslots of VC4-1.

SourceTimeslotRange of theProtectionService


Sink Board 12-N4SLO16

In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed inslot 12 serves as the sink board. Different sink boardscan be selected according to actual situations.

Sink Port 1 In the planning of this example, the port 1 of SLO16housed in slot 12 serves as the sink port.

Sink VC4 VC4-1 The service source uses the timeslots of VC4-1.



ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 6 Enable the performance monitoring of the NE. For the operation steps, see Setting PerformanceMonitoring Parameters of an NE.

Step 7 To back up configuration data of the NE, you can take the following second methods asreferences:

Option Description





266

Option Description



----End

9.7 Parameter9.7.1 SDH Service Configuration

In this user interface, you can configure services for stations, such as services at VC4, VC3 andVC12 levels. In addition, you can configure SNCP services and other services. You can query,delete, print, and bind/unbind services. You can also customize columns to display importantparameters.

ParametersField Value Description

Level VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4-4C,VC4-16C, VC4-64C

Specifies the level of thenewly created service.

Direction Bidirectional, Unidirectional The service received andtransmitted through the sameroute is called bidirectionalservice, while the servicereceived and transmittedthrough different routes iscalled unidirectional service.

Source (Sink) Slot For example: Shelf ID(subrack)-Slot ID-BoardName-Optical Port No.(name)

Specifies the service source(sink) slot.

Source (Sink) VC4 For example: VC4-1 Selects the source (sink)VC4. This parameter isunavailable if a tributaryboard is selected for Source(Sink) Slot.



267


Source (Sink) TimeslotRange (for example: 1,3-6)

For example: 1 to 63 Sets the specific timeslot ortimeslot range of the service.The format of inputtingmultiple consecutivetimeslots: start timeslotnumber - end timeslotnumber. The format ofinputting multipleinconsecutive timeslots: ts1,ts2.... Two formats can beused together.The range can be different fordifferent levels of services ordifferent boards.

Activate Immediately Checked, Unchecked If this option is checked,activate the serviceimmediately.

9.7.2 SNCP Service ControlIn this user interface, you can query and modify attributes and status of SNCP service.


Service Type SNCP Displays the service protectiontype.

Source For example: Shelf ID(subrack)-Slot ID-BoardName-Optical Port No.(name)

Displays the service sourcetimeslot of the service.

Sink For example: Shelf ID(subrack)-Slot ID-BoardName-Optical Port No.(name)

Displays the service sinktimeslot of the service.

Level VC12, VC3, VC4,VC4-4C, VC4-16C,VC4-64C

Displays the service level.



268


Current Status Normal, Lockout, ForcedSwitching, ForcedSwitching to Working,Forced Switching toProtection, SF Switching,SD Switching, ManualSwitching, ManualSwitching to Working,Manual Switching toProtection, AutomaticSwitching, WTR, DNR,Unknown

Displays the current switchingstatus of the protection group.

Revertive Mode Revertive, Non-Revertive

Displays the revertive mode.Whether the working service isswitched back from theprotection service after it returnsnormal.

WTR Time (s) 300 to 720 Sets the wait-to-restore time.Refer to the period of timestarting when it is detected thatthe working service returns tonormal and ending when theworking service is switched backafter the protection switching. Ifthe revertive mode is non-revertive, skip this step.

Hold-off Time (100ms) 0 to 100, in the unit of 100milliseconds

Sets a period of time which startswhen the system detects signaldegrade and ends when serviceswitching occurs, so as to avoidduplicate switching when theservice status is unstable. Sets100 milliseconds as the unit timefor switching. 5 indicates that thehold-off time is 500milliseconds.

Initiation ConditionSwitching Condition

TIM, EXC, SD, UNEQ,SLM, BIPOVER, NULLDefault: NULL

Sets the startup conditions thattrigger service protectionswitching.

Trail Status Normal, SF, SD,Unknown

Displays the working status ofthe working or the protectionservice in a protection group.

Service Grouping For example: Null Displays and configures thegroup status of the service.

Group Type For example: Null Displays the group type.



269


Active Channel For example: WorkingChannel, ProtectionChannel, Unknown

Displays what the activeprotection group selectivelyreceives: the working or theprotection service.

Trail Name For example: NE350-NE351-VC12-0001

Displays the trail name.

9.7.3 VC4 Path OverheadYou can query and set overhead bytes of the VC4 path in this user interface.


Object For example: NE351-3-ADL4-2(SDH-2)-VC4:1For example: NE56-4-SD1-1(SDH-2)-1

Displays the name of theoperation object.

J1 to be Sent ([Mode]Content)

For example: [16 Bytes]Huawei SBS

Sets the higher-order pathoverhead byte J1 to be sent.[Mode] indicates whether theoverhead byte is of thesingle-byte mode, 16-bytemode or 64-bytemode. Object: VC4 pathIt is applicable to SDH lineboards. The default value isusually used, but in the caseof Huawei equipmentinterconnecting with third-party's equipment, you needto set the same value as J1 tobe received at the oppositeend.



270


J1 to be Received ([Mode]Content)


Sets the higher-order pathoverhead byte J1 to bereceived. [Mode] indicateswhether the overhead byte isof the single-byte mode, 16-byte mode or 64-bytemode. Object: VC4 pathIt is applicable to SDH lineboards. The default value isusually used, but in the caseof Huawei equipmentinterconnecting with third-party's equipment, you needto set the same value as J1 tobe sent of the opposite end.

J1 Received ([Mode]Content)


Queries the higher-order pathoverhead byte J1 received.The NE reports an alarm ifthe byte is different from theJ1 to be received. [Mode]indicates whether theoverhead byte is of thesingle-byte mode, 16-bytemode or 64-bytemode.



271


C2 to be Sent (0x00)Unequipped, (0x01)Reserved, (0x02)TUGStructure, (0x03)Locked TU-n, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3,(0x05)ExperimentalMapping, (0x12)140M intoC-4, (0x13)ATM Mapping,(0x14)MAN DQDBMapping, (0x15)FDDIMapping, (0x16)HDLC/PPPMapping, (0x17)Reservedfor Special Purpose, (0x18)HDLC/LAPS Mapping,(0x19)Reserved for SpecialPurpose, (0x1A)10GEthernet Frames, (0x1B)GFPMapping, (0xCF)Reserved,(0xFE)O.181 Test Signal,(0xFF)VC-AIS(0x00)Unequipped, (0x01)Reserved, (0x02)TUGStructure, (0x03)Locke TU-n, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3,(0x05)Experimental, (0x12)140M into C-4asynchronously, (0x13)ATMMapping, (0x14)MANDQDB Mapping, (0x15)FDDI Mapping, (0x16)HDLC/PPP Mapping, (0x17)Reserved for SpecialPurpose, (0x18)HDLC/LAPS Mapping, (0x19)Reserved for SpecialPurpose, (0x1A)10GEthernet Frame, (0x1B)GFPMapping, (0xCF)Reserved,(0xFE)O.181 Test Signal,(0xFF)VC-AIS

Sets the signal label byte C2to be sent.Object: VC4 pathIt is applicable to SDH lineboards. The default value isusually used, but whenaccessing signals of non-TUG structure (for example,ATM, FDDI), you need to setthe C2 to be sent as required.



272


C2 to be Received (0x00)Unequipped, (0x01)Reserved, (0x02)TUGStructure, (0x03)Locked TU-n, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3,(0x05)ExperimentalMapping, (0x12)140M intoC-4, (0x13)ATM Mapping,(0x14)MAN DQDBMapping, (0x15)FDDIMapping, (0x16)HDLC/PPPMapping, (0x17)Reservedfor Special Purpose, (0x18)HDLC/LAPS Mapping,(0x19)Reserved for SpecialPurpose, (0x1A)10GEthernet Frames, (0x1B)GFPMapping, (0xCF)Reserved,(0xFE)O.181 Test Signal,(0xFF)VC-AIS(0x00)Unequipped, (0x01)Reserved, (0x02)TUGStructure, (0x03)Locke TU-n, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3,(0x05)Experimental, (0x12)140M into C-4asynchronously, (0x13)ATMMapping, (0x14)MANDQDB Mapping, (0x15)FDDI Mapping, (0x16)HDLC/PPP Mapping, (0x17)Reserved for SpecialPurpose, (0x18)HDLC/LAPS Mapping, (0x19)Reserved for SpecialPurpose, (0x1A)10GEthernet Frame, (0x1B)GFPMapping, (0xCF)Reserved,(0xFE)O.181 Test Signal,(0xFF)VC-AIS

Sets the signal label byte C2to be received. Object: VC4 pathIt is applicable to the SDHline board. The default isusually used, but whenaccessing signals of non-TUG structure (for example,ATM, FDDI), you need to setthe C2 to be received asrequired.

C2 Received For example: (0x00)Unequipped

Queries the signal label byteC2 received. Reports analarm if it is different fromthe C2 to be received.

VC4 Overhead Termination Auto, Termination, Pass-Through

Displays VC4 overheadtermination.



273


Byte Mode Single Byte Mode, 16-ByteMode(the first byte is createdautomatically), 64-ByteMode(Synchronization Bit0x0D,0x0A), 64-Byte Mode(Without SynchronizationBit), Disable Mode

Sets byte mode for theoverhead byte.



274

10 Configuring Ethernet Services

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to configure Ethernet services. The flexible grooming of Ethernetservices is implemented by configuring Ethernet services and electrical cross-connections.

10.1 Ethernet Service TypesThe WDM equipment supports the following Ethernet services: Ethernet private line (EPL),Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL), Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) services, andEthernet virtual private local area network (EVPLAN) services.

10.2 Basic ConceptsBefore you configure Ethernet boards with services, you need to learn the basic concepts ofconfiguring the Ethernet service.

10.3 Configuration Process of Ethernet ServicesThis section describes the configuration process of Ethernet services using figures.

10.4 Configuring Ethernet Services in an OTN SystemThis section describes how to configure Ethernet services in an OTN system.

10.5 Configuring Ethernet Services in an OCS SystemThis section describes how to configure Ethernet services in an OCS system.

10.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL ServicesThe EPL service provides a solution for the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernetservices over an exclusive bandwidth. EPL services are applied to the scenarios where the user-side data communication equipment connected to the transmission network does not supportVLANs or where the VLAN planning is kept secret from the network carrier.

10.7 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM NetworkEVPL (QinQ) services realize the nesting of VLAN. With the increase of network users, theexisting number of VLAN IDs fails to meet the requirement of users. After EVPL (QinQ)services are configured, however, users can be identified through multiple layers of VLAN IDs.In this case, VLAN extension is achieved.

10.8 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a WDMNetworkThe EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides an LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipoint convergence. This service applies in cases where user-side data communication

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services


275

equipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs or where the VLANplanning is kept secret from the network operator.

10.9 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDMNetworkThe EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides an LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipoint convergence. This service applies in cases where user-side data communicationequipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs or where the VLANplanning is open to the network operator.

10.10 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge) on aWDM NetworkThe QinQ technology provides a cheap and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual private networks(VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPN solution, thusfacilitating the identifying, differentiating and grooming EVPLAN services.

10.11 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)on a WDM NetworkBased on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed through a same port,which is applicable to the scenario where the EVPL and EVPLAN users share the same port.

10.12 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services on a SDH NetworkEPL services provide the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission solution where thebandwidth is occupied exclusively. EPL services are applicable when the communicationequipment that is used to access the client-side data in the transmission network does not supportVLAN or when the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.

10.13 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a SDH NetworkThe EVPL (QinQ) service provides an Ethernet private line solution. The services are applicablewhere the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed into a transmissionnetwork and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In the case of EVPL (QinQ)services, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added on the network side to isolate the services of differentusers from each other.

10.14 Configuration Example: Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services on a SDHNetworkThe PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) service is applicable when the services of multiple users,which are received from the same external port on the Ethernet board at a station, need to betransmitted on different VCTRUNKs to another station or to another external port of the station.

10.15 Configuration Example: Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services on a SDHNetworkWhen the services of multiple users that do not carry VLAN tags are accessed into a transmissionnetwork and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN)service is used to isolate the services of different users by adding VLAN tags. In this manner,the bandwidth is shared on the SDH side.

10.16 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a SDHNetworkThe EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipointconvergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication equipmentconnected to the transmission network does not support VLAN tags or where the VLAN planningcannot be disclosed to the network operator.

10.17 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDHNetworkThe EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipoint convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication



276

equipment, which is connected to the transmission network, does not support VLAN tags orwhere the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.

10.18 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge) on a SDHNetworkThe QinQ technology provides an economical and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual privatenetworks (VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPNsolution, thus facilitating the identifying, differentiating, and grooming of EVPLAN services.

10.19 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)on a SDH NetworkThe EGSH board supports the EVPL and EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) on a sameport. Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed through a sameport, which is applicable to the scenario where the EVPL and EVPLAN users share the sameport.

10.20 Parameters



277

10.1 Ethernet Service TypesThe WDM equipment supports the following Ethernet services: Ethernet private line (EPL),Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL), Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) services, andEthernet virtual private local area network (EVPLAN) services.

NOTE

When configuring Ethernet services between the client-side ports of the boards, the ALS function of theclient side interfaces should be set to Disable.

10.1.1 Ethernet Private Line ServiceEthernet private line services include Ethernet private line (EPL) services and Ethernet virtualprivate line (EVPL) services.

EPL ServicesTwo nodes are used to access EPL services and implement transparent transmission of theEthernet services to the users. Service of one user occupies one VCTRUNK and does not needto share the bandwidth with the services of the other users, as shown in Figure 10-1. Hence, inthe case of EPL services, a bandwidth is exclusively occupied by the service of a user and theservices of different users are isolated. In addition, the extra QoS scheme and security schemeare not required.

Figure 10-1 EPL services

EVPL ServicesFor EVPL services, services of different users share the bandwidth. Therefore, the VLAN/QinQscheme needs to be used for differentiating the services of different users. If the services ofdifferent users need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt thecorresponding QoS scheme. EVPL services are classified into two types, depending on whetherthe PORT or VCTRUNK is shared.

There are two types of EVPL services:l PORT-shared EVPL servicesl VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services

– VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services



278

– QinQ technology-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services

PORT-shared EVPL services

As shown in Figure 10-2, the services of different users are accessed through an external port(that is, PORT) at a station, and are then isolated from each other by using the VLAN IDs.Services are transmitted to other PORTs at this station through different VCTRUNKs.

Figure 10-2 PORT-shared EVPL services

VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services

As shown in Figure 10-3, the services of different users are isolated by using the VLAN/QinQscheme. Hence, the services of different users can be transmitted in the same VCTRUNK.

l VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services

Figure 10-3 VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services

l QinQ technology-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services

The implementation principle of the QinQ technology-based EVPL services and theimplementation principle of the VLAN tag-based EVPL services are similar. Users ofVLAN tag-based EVPL services are identified by only one layer of VLAN IDs. Users ofQinQ technology-based EVPL services are identified by multiple layers of VLAN IDs. Inthis manner, the number of VLANs is extended and more users can be identified.

10.1.2 Ethernet LAN ServiceHuawei OSN equipment supports Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) and Ethernetvirtual private local area network (EVPLAN) services.



279

EPLAN ServicesCurrently, Ethernet LAN services mainly refer to Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services.Based on the Layer 2 switch function, The EPLAN realizes transmission of the accessed databased on destination media access control (MAC) address of the data.

The EPLAN services can be accessed from a minimum of two nodes. The services of differentusers need not share the bandwidth. That is, in the case of EPLAN services, a bandwidth isexclusively occupied by the service of a user and the services of different users are isolated. Inaddition, the extra QoS scheme and security scheme are not required. There is more than onenode in the EPLAN services, Hence, the nodes need to learn the MAC addresses and forwarddata according to MAC addresses. Therefore, Layer 2 switching is involved. See Figure 10-4.

Figure 10-4 EPLAN services

F1

NM

NE3

NE1

NE4

F3

F2PORT3

VCTRUNK1

PORT3

VCTRUNK1

VB1 VB1

PORT3

VCTRUNK2

VB1

VCTRUNK1

NE2

PORT3F1

10M

VCTRUNKPORT

WDM

VCTRUNK

VCTRUNK1 PORT3 F2

PORT

NE1

NE2

10M

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VB1

VCTRUNK

VCTRUNK1 PORT3 F3

PORTNE4

10M

VB1

VB1

VB

Service Mount of VB

Cross-conection

As shown in Figure 10-4, three branches of user F need to communicate with each other. OnNE1, the IEEE 802.1d bridge is established to achieve EPLAN services. IEEE 802.1d bridgecan create the MAC address-based forwarding table, which is periodically updated by using the



280

self-learning function of the system. Accessed data can be forwarded or broadcast within thedomain of the IEEE 802.1d bridge according to the destination MAC addresses.

To avoid broadcast storm, the EPLAN services cannot be set as a ring. If the EPLAN servicesare set as a ring, the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) or Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol(MSTP) must be started in the network.

EVPLAN ServicesEVPLAN services of different users need to share the bandwidth. Hence, the VLAN/QinQscheme needs to be used for differentiating the data of different users. If the services of differentusers need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt the correspondingQoS scheme.

As shown in Figure 10-5, three branches of user G need to communicate with each other.Services of user G need to be isolated from the services of user H. In this case, the operator needsto separately groom the VoIP services and HSI services, be established on NE1 to achieveEVPLAN services.

IEEE 802.1q bridge: IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using one layer of VLAN tags.This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames and performs Layer2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.

Figure 10-5 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

NMNE3

NE2

NE1

NE4

G3

PORT1G2

PORT1

PORT2H3H2

PORT2

G1H1PORT5PORT6

PORT5

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VLAN 100IEEE 802.1q bridge

PORT6

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VLAN 200IEEE 802.1q bridge

VCTRUNK

As shown in Figure 10-6, the GE services from user M and the FE services from user N needto access network respectively. In this case, the operator needs to separately groom the GEservices and FE services, and isolate the data on the transmission network side. On NE1, theIEEE 802.1ad bridge must be established to support the EVPLAN services.

IEEE 802.1ad bridge: The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports data frames with two layers of VLANtags. This bridge adopts the outer S-VLAN tags to isolate different VLANs and supports onlythe mounted ports whose attributes are C-Aware or S-Aware. This bridge supports the followingswitching modes:



281

l This bridge does not check the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets, andperforms Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses of the packets.

l This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets, and performsLayer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and the S-VLAN IDs of thepackets.

Figure 10-6 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

NMNE3

NE2

NE1

NE4 PORT1

User M

PORT1

User N

GE FE

20FE10GE

C-VLANService

11

11

8

8

PORT7

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

S-VLAN 100IEEE 802.1ad bridge IEEE 802.1ad bridge

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

S-VLAN 200

20FE10GE

C-VLANService

VCTRUNK

PORT8

10.2 Basic ConceptsBefore you configure Ethernet boards with services, you need to learn the basic concepts ofconfiguring the Ethernet service.

10.2.1 Tag AttributesIn a virtual LAN, the tag attribute of an Ethernet port indicates how the port processes Ethernetpackets.

Ethernet packets are classified into tagged and untagged packets in 802.1q. A four-byte field isadded to the Ethernet frame header of a tagged packet. The 802.1q-compliant field is used toidentify the VLAN ID. An untagged packet does not have such a four-byte field. That is, taggedpackets contain VLAN IDs and untagged packets do not contain VLAN IDs.

An Ethernet port has the following three types, which are Tag aware, Access and Hybrid.

See Table 10-1 for details on how an Ethernet board processes tagged and untagged packets atthe ingress.



282

Table 10-1 Processing policy at ingress

Port Type Tagged Packet Untagged Packet

Tag aware Transparently transmitted Discarded

Access Discarded Added with the defaultVLAN tag

Hybrid Transparently transmitted Added with the defaultVLAN tag

See Table 10-2 for details on how an Ethernet board processes tagged and untagged packets atthe egress.

Table 10-2 Processing policy at egress

Port Type Tagged Packet Untagged Packet

Tag aware Transparently transmitted -

Access The VLAN tag is removed -

Hybrid The VLAN tag is removed ifit is the same as the defaulttag for the portTransparently transmitted ifthe VLAN tag is differentfrom the default tag for theport

-

As shown in Table 10-1 and Table 10-2, in an actual network, you need to set the port type forthe Ethernet board of an NE according to the Tag attribute of the messages sent from the user-side equipment. If the user-side equipment sends the Untag message, set the ingress port toAccess and set the egress port to Tag aware. If the user-side equipment sends the Tag message,set the ingress port to Tag aware and set the egress port to Tag aware.

10.2.2 VLAN GroupThis section describes the application scenarios of the VLAN group.

VLAN GroupThe U2000 and its managed NG WDM equipment organize certain consecutively accessedVLAN services in a group (usually service demands of the same type) to form a VLAN group.U2000 creates services, manages the QoS flow, and performs Ethernet OAM operationsaccording to the initial VLAN ID so that the other VLAN services in the VLAN group have thesame configuration.



283

Application Scenarios of the VLAN Group

Currently, the digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM) does not support the QinQfunction. The broadband remote access server (BRAS), however, requires that two layers ofVLAN tags should be verified. Based on this, the VLAN grouping function provides thebroadband bearer solution from the DSLAM to the BRAS.

Currently, the NG WDM equipment supports the following three service scenarios:l Convergence from multiple GE services to one 10GE service. The BRAS has the 10GE

access port. The GE service of the DSLAM is converged to the 10GE port of the BRAS/PE through the NG WDM VLAN group.

l Convergence from multiple GE services to one GE service. The BRAS increases thenumber of access ports. The WDM equipment implements GE transparent transmission orGE convergence from the DSLAM to the BRAS.

l Private line from GE services to GE services. In the metropolitan enterprise private lines,point-to-point service transparent transmission is required. In this case, a typicaltransmission channel is adopted. That is, services are transmitted over the 10GE opticalline by using the WDM equipment. This is realized as follows: GE services are accessedon the client side of the WDM equipment, and then the GE services are multiplexed to the10GE line for transmission through the VLAN group.

10.2.3 QinQThe QinQ technology is the basis for implementing EVPL services. QinQ technology achievesVLAN nesting. With the increase of network users, the current number of VLAN IDs fail tomeet the network requirement. With the QinQ technology, users can be identified throughmultiple layers of VLAN IDs. In this case, the VLAN is extended.

The VLAN is a LAN technology developed along with the Ethernet switch technology. As theEthernet technology is deployed largely in the networks of carriers, which are the metropolitanarea networks, implementing the 802.1Q VLAN to isolate and identifying users is limited to agreat extent. The VLAN tag domain that is defined in the IEEE 802.1Q has 12 bits, which canrepresent 4K VLANs only. This cannot meet the requirements for identifying a large number ofusers in metropolitan area networks. In order to increase the number of VLANs, the QinQtechnology is developed.

The QinQ technology is realized by adding a layer of 802.1Q tags to 802.1Q packets. Thus, thenumber of VLANs is increased to 4096 x 4096. With the development of the metro Ethernet andthe requirement of fine operation, QinQ double tags can be implemented in other scenarios. Theinner and outer tags can represent different information. The inner tag (namely the C-VLAN)represents the client and the outer tag (namely the S-VLAN) represents the service. See Table10-3.

Table 10-3 EVPL services based on QinQ

Operation Illustration

Add S-VLANC-VLANData S-VLANData C-VLAN



284

Operation Illustration

Strip S-VLANData C-VLAN S-VLAN Data C-VLAN

TransparentlyTransmit C-VLAN

Data Data C-VLANC-VLAN

TransparentlyTransmit S-VLAN

Data S-VLANData S-VLAN

TransparentlyTransmit S-VLAN and C-VLAN

Data C-VLAN S-VLAN Data C-VLAN S-VLAN

Translate S-VLAN S-VLAN1 S-VLAN2DataData

NOTE

l The "Strip S-VLAN" is valid only for unidirectional services.

l The LEM24 and LEX4 boards do not support "Add S-VLAN and C-VLAN" and "Strip S-VLAN and C-VLAN".

10.2.4 MAC Address FilteringMAC address filtering is an OTN broadband transmission solution. MAC address filtering isenabled for Ethernet data boards to alleviate router load.

Figure 10-7 describes the principle and function of MAC address filtering.

1. Station 2: Sets the MAC address of the opposite BRAS1.

2. Station 3: Dual feeds services. The dual-fed services carry the MAC address of thedestination BRAS1 and respectively reach stations 1 and 2.



285

3. Station 2: Analyzes whether the MAC address of the destination router is included in theMAC addresses set in the opposite BRAS1 of station 2.l Included: Indicates that BRAS2 is not the destination BRAS of the service and the

transmission of the service stops at station 2.l Excluded: Indicates that BRAS2 is the destination BRAS of the service and the service

is transmitted to BRAS2.

Figure 10-7 Principle and function of MAC address filtering

TBE

L4G

TBE

L4G

L4G

BRAS1 BRAS2

Station 3

Filter MAC address on the standby node

L2

BRAS

Working ServiceProtection ServiceBroadband Remote Access Server

Station 1 Station 2

10.2.5 IGMP SnoopingThe Internet group management protocol (IGMP) Snooping technology is used to enhance themulticast management capability of Layer 2 switching equipment. This technology applies todata service boards that support Layer 2 switching. Based on the interception of Layer 3 IGMPpackets, the Layer 2 multicast function is created and maintained, to prevent multicast packetsfrom being broadcast in the Layer 2 equipment.

Overviewl Restriction on the User Access: Illegal users are prevented from using multicast services

by configuring the attributes of the multicast strategy, static multicast group, static routerport and unknown multicast service forwarding. As shown in Figure 10-9, the multicastgroup strategy is configured on the equipment. In this way, the range of the group addressesthat can be accessed by users through the access control list (ACL) is set. Thus, the multicastpackets that can be received by the user host can be controlled.

l Quick Response to the Link Change: When the topology of the network where theequipment resides changes, the switching equipment should set up new forwarding tableitems in minutes after receiving the subsequent multicast query packet. As a result, the



286

multicast services are interrupted for a long time. The IGMP Snooping informs the routerof the change in the response spanning tree topology and then quickly transmits the querypackets. In this way, the switching equipment in the downstream can learn the multicastinformation quickly and decrease the service interruption time.

Basic Concepts1. Enabling the IGMP Snooping Protocol

l If the IGMP Snooping protocol is enabled, the equipment begins to perform the learningand aging of the router port and multicast group. Then, the multicast services aremulticast in corresponding multicast groups.

l If the IGMP Snooping protocol is disabled, the equipment stops learning and aging ofthe router port and multicast group, and deletes all the learned dynamic multicast groups.

2. Router Port

The router port refers to the port that faces the multicast router. The Ethernet data board ofthe equipment regards the port that receives the IGMP query packets as the router port.Router ports are classified into two types:

l Dynamic router ports: They receive the IGMP query packets. These ports are decidedon the basis of the packets transmitted between routers and hosts. Moreover, they aredynamically maintained. Each of this port can enable a router port aging timer. Whenthe timer times out, this router port is invalid and the multicast group that relies on therouter port is deleted.

l Static router ports: They are specified with configuration commands, and are not aged.

NOTEBoth the L4G and TBE boards do not support the static router ports.

3. Member Port

The multicast member port refers to the port that faces the host of the member. The Layer2 equipment forwards the multicast service packets to these ports. The multicast groupmember ports, referred to as member ports for short, are classified into the following twotypes:

l Dynamic member ports, which can receive the IGMP report packets. These ports aredecided on the basis of the packets transmitted between routers and hosts. Moreover,they are dynamically maintained. Each dynamic member port is aged after reaching themaximum non-response times.

l Static member ports, which are specified by users by using configuration commands,cannot be aged.

Basic Principle

As a multicast constraint mechanism of the Layer 2 Ethernet switch, the IGMP Snooping runsat the data link layer, to manage and control multicast groups.

When the Layer 2 Ethernet switch receives an IGMP packet between the host and router, theIGMP Snooping analyzes the information carried by the packet.

l When monitoring an IGMP response packet sent by the host, the switch adds the host intothe corresponding multicast table.

l When monitoring an IGMP departure packet sent by the host, the switch deletes themulticast table item corresponding to the host.



287

By monitoring IGMP packets continuously, the switch creates and maintains the MAC multicastaddress table at Layer 2, and forwards multicast packets sent by the router according to the MACmulticast address table.

If the IGMP Snooping does not run, multicast packets are broadcast at Layer 2. When the IGMPSnooping runs, the packets are multicast instead of broadcast at Layer 2. See Figure 10-8.

Figure 10-8 IGMP Snooping

Multicast service source

Physical connection

Flow direction of the ulticast service

Multicast management router

IGMP Snooping-supported NGWDM equipment

Host(Non-multicast

member)

Host(Multicast member)

Host(Non-multicast member)

Host(Multicast member)

Compliant Standard and Protocol: The IGMP complies with RFC 4541, Considerations forInternet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) and Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD)Snooping Switches.

ApplicationThe IGMP Snooping enhances the resource utilization through multicast forwarding, and thenetwork security by restricting the user access.

The advantages of the application of the IGMP Snooping are as follows:l The network bandwidth can be saved.l Signals are forwarded based on the VLAN. Hence, the information security is enhanced.l Quick response is made to the link fault. Hence, the reliability is enhanced.

Figure 10-9 shows how to configure the IGMP Snooping function. After reaching theequipment, the multicast packets are distributed from the port of the host where group membersexist in the downstream.



288

Figure 10-9 IGMP Snooping application

Source

Multicast packets

OTN/OCS

/IntranetInternet

Group member

Host 5

Group member

Host 4Host3Host 2Host 1

Group member

OTN/OCS

10.2.6 STP/RSTP/MSTPGenerally, the topology for the Layer 2 switching network involves the loop. This may result inthe broadcast storm and MAC bridge table flapping. The STP/RSTP protocol is used to trim abridged LAN to a single spanning tree based on the logical topology. Thus, the broadcast stormcan be avoided. MSTP is compatible with the STP and RSTP, and it also fixes the defects of theSTP and RSTP. The MSTP fixes the defects of the STP and RSTP. The convergence rate of theMSTP is fast. In addition, traffic of different VLANs passes through corresponding trails, whichprovides a well load balancing mechanism.

Basic PrincipleSTP applies to a redundant network. Based on a certain algorithm, the STP is used to blockredundant trails so that a loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this way, thereproduction and endless cycling of packets in the loop network are avoided. Besides, aconnected network without redundant trails can be formed in the case of the link failure.

RSTP is an improvement of the STP. The RSTP not only supports all the functions of the STP,but also shortens the delay of generating the network topology structure and ensures theconnectivity of the network.

STP is based on this basic principle. That is, bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) are transmittedbetween bridges to decide the network topology structure. The STP blocks redundant links toprevent possible loops in the bridged network, and activates the redundant backup links to restore



289

the network connectivity when the working trail fails. BPDUs of STP are classified into twotypes:

l Configuration BPDU (CBPDU)

l BPDU for topology change notice (TCN)

RSTP is based on STP. RSTP makes, however, detailed modifications and supplements to STP.Different from STP, RSTP shortens the time delay at the ports from congestion to forwarding,rapidly restores the network connectivity, and provides better services if no temporary loops arecaused. The protocol packets transmitted between the bridges using RSTP are rapid spanningtree protocol data units (namely, RST PDUs).

NOTE

l OptiX NG WDM the Ethernet data boards support both STP and RSTP. By default, they support RSTP.

l Only the LEX4/LEM24 boards support MSTP.

Status Migration for Ports

The STP ports are of either the Enabled or Disabled status. The Enabled status is further classifiedinto the following statuses: Blocking, Listening, Learning and Forwarding. According to theforwarding and learning situation of the port, RSTP sorts Disabled, Blocking and Listening toDiscarding. For this reason, there are altogether three statuses: Learning, Forwarding andDiscarding.

Figure 10-10 shows the status migration of an STP port.

Figure 10-10 Status migration of STP ports

Disabled

Listening

Blocking Learning

Forwarding

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

l Disabled: The port in the Disabled status is not involved in the topology and does notforward any packets. Any sub-status of the Enabled status can migrate to this status. TheDisabled status must migrate to the Blocking status to enter the Enabled status. The STPcannot control this status because the port in the Disabled status is not involved in thetopology. This status can only be controlled by the management.



290

l Blocking: The port in the Blocking status is involved in the topology, and does not forwardany packets. Moreover, it does not learn the MAC addresses.

l Listening: The port in the Listening status is involved in the topology. It can forward BPDUsand discard service packets. It does not, however, learn the MAC addresses. The Listeningstatus is a temporary status when a topology is being created or transformed.

l Learning: The port in the Learning status is involved in the topology. It can forward BPDUsand discard service packets. Moreover, it learns the MAC addresses of the service packetsto make ready for forwarding these packets. The Learning status is a temporary status whena topology is being created or transformed.

l Forwarding: The port in forwarding status is involved in the topology. It can forward theservice packets and BPDUs.

Migrate some ports into the Forwarding or Blocking status by controlling the port status. If aloop exists, at least one port is blocked to release the loop. This is the ultimate goal of the STPalgorithm.

For the STP, the convergence time is relatively long and the ports play unclear roles. In this case,the RSTP is widely used and is compatible with the STP. In comparison with the STP, the RSTPshows the following improvements.

l By configuration, The definition of the role of a port is clearer and there are following fourtypes of port: Root port, Designated port, Replacing port, Backup port.

NOTERSTP can configure an edge port to help the topology-independent port to rapidly forward servicepackets.

l A more active handshake mechanism is applied to decrease the port status to the followingtypes: Forwarding, Learning, and Discarding.

l The Discarding status in the RSTP maps with the Listening, Blocking, and Disabled statusin the STP.

l Fast convergence.

Improvement of the MSTP

The MSTP fixes the defects of the STP and RSTP. The convergence rate of the MSTP is fast.In addition, traffic of different VLANs passes through corresponding trails, which provides awell load balancing mechanism.

The MSTP divides a switching network into different regions, each of which is called an MSTregion. Within each region, there are multiple spanning trees, which are independent from eachother. Each spanning tree is a multiple spanning tree instance (MSTI).

The MSTP sets the VLAN mapping table, which specifies the mapping relation between VLANand MSTI.

The network shown in Figure 1 can be considered as an MST region when MSTP is used. Thus,Figure 10-11 shows the result. It is computed that two spanning trees are generated for VLAN2 and VLAN 3 respectively.

l MSTI 1 takes Switch B as the root switch to forward packets of VLAN 2.

l MSTI 2 takes Switch F as the root switch to forward packets of VLAN 3.

In this way, all VLAN packets can be properly forwarded. In addition, different VLAN packetsare forwarded through different paths. Thus, the load is balanced.



291

Figure 10-11 MSTI in an MST region

Switch A Switch B

Switch DSwitch C

Switch E Switch F

Host A Host B

Host C Host D

VLAN 3

VLAN 2

VLAN 2VLAN 3

VLAN 2VLAN 3

Switch A Switch B

Switch DSwitch C

Switch E Switch F(Root)

VLAN 3

VLAN 2

VLAN 2VLAN 3

VLAN 3

MSTI 2 -> VLAN 3

Switch ASwitch B(Root)

Switch DSwitch C

Switch E Switch F

VLAN 2

VLAN 2

VLAN 2VLAN 3

MSTI 1 -> VLAN 2

10.3 Configuration Process of Ethernet ServicesThis section describes the configuration process of Ethernet services using figures.

10.3.1 EPL Service Configuration ProcessThis section describes the EPL service configuration process that mainly consists of deployinga network, configuring source NEs, configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-through NEs, andverifying services.

Figure 10-12 shows the process for configuring EPL services.



292

Figure 10-12 EPL service configuration process

Configurepass-through NE

Configure sink NE

Creating Fibers

Configuring Communication

Configuring Clocks

Configuring Orderwire

Deploy a Network

Setting the NE Time

Configuring Protection

Creating and Configuring NEs

Configure source NE

Setting External Ports Attributes of Ethernet Boards

Setting Internal Ports Attributes of Ethernet Boards

Creating Cross-Connection

Between Ethernet and Line Boards

Creating EPL Services

Setting External Ports Attributes of Ethernet Boards

Setting Internal Ports Attributes of Ethernet Boards


Between Ethernet and Line Boards

Creating EPL Services


Between Line andLine Boards

Verify service

Optional

Required

Test the EthernetServices

Checking theConnectivity of

Ethernet Service

Checking theConnectivity ofEthernet Port

NOTE

l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart by using U2000, there are five main phasesof EPL service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configuring source NEs,configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-through NEs, and verifying services.


10.3.2 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration ProcessThis section describes the EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process that mainly consists ofdeploying a network, configuring the source NEs, configuring the sink NEs, configuring pass-through NEs, and verifying services.

Figure 10-13 shows the process for configuring EVPL (QinQ) services.



293

Figure 10-13 EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process

ConfiguringEthernet Service

OAM

Configuring theEthernet Port

OAM

Enable NEPerformanceMonitoring

SettingPerformanceMonitoring

Parameters ofan NE

Back up NEConfiguration Data

Backing Up theNE Database tothe SCC Board

AutomaticallyBacking Up the

NE Database to aCF Card

Manually BackingUp the NE

Database to a CFCard

Verifyservice

Test the EthernetServices

Configurepass-through

NE

Configuresink NE

Creating Fibers

ConfiguringCommunication

ConfiguringClocks

ConfiguringOrderwire

Deploying aNetwork

Setting the NETime

ConfiguringProtection

Creating andConfiguring

NEs

Configuresource NE

SettingExternal PortsAttributes of

EthernetBoards

Setting InternalPorts

Attributes ofEthernetBoards

CreatingCross-

ConnectionBetween

Ethernet andLine Boards

SettingExternal PortsAttributes of

EthernetBoards

Setting InternalPorts

Attributes ofEthernetBoards

CreatingCross-

ConnectionBetween

Ethernet andLine Boards

CreatingEVPL(QinQ)

Services

CreatingCross-

ConnectionBetween Line

and LineBoards

Optional

Required

CreatingEVPL(QinQ)

Services

NOTE

l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart by using U2000, there are five main phasesof EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configure source NE,configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service.


10.3.3 EPLAN Service Configuration ProcessThis section describes the EPLAN service configuration process that mainly consists ofdeploying a network, configuring source NEs, configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-throughNEs, and verifying services.

Figure 10-14 shows the process for configuring EPLAN services.



294

Figure 10-14 EPLAN service configuration process

Configuresink NE

Deploying aNetwork

Configuresource NE

OptionalRequired

Creating andConfiguring

NEs

CreatingFibers

ConfiguringCommunicati

on

ConfiguringClocks

ConfiguringOrderwire

Setting theNE Time

ConfiguringProtection

Test theEthernetServices

Checking theConnectivity of

EthernetService

Checking theConnectivityof Ethernet

Port

Configurepass-through

NE

ConfiguringCross-

ConnectionBetween Line

and Line Boards

Verify serviceEnable NE

PerformanceMonitoring

SettingPerformanceMonitoring

Parameters ofan NE

Back up NEConfiguration Data

Backing Up theNE Database tothe SCC Board

AutomaticallyBacking Up the

NE Database to aCF Card

Manually BackingUp the NE

Database to a CFCard

Setting ExternalPorts Attributes

of EthernetBoards

Setting InternalPorts Attributes

of EthernetBoards

CreatingEPLANServices

Creating VLAN

ConfiguringQOS


BetweenEthernet andLine Boards

Setting ExternalPorts Attributes

of EthernetBoards

Setting InternalPorts Attributes

of EthernetBoards

CreatingEPLAN

Services

Creating VLAN

ConfiguringQOS


BetweenEthernet andLine Boards

NOTE

l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart by using U2000, there are five main phasesof EPLAN service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configure source NE,configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service.


10.4 Configuring Ethernet Services in an OTN SystemThis section describes how to configure Ethernet services in an OTN system.

10.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections on an Ethernet BoardBefore the client Ethernet services are transmitted to the WDM side, appropriate cross-connections must be created on the U2000.

Prerequisite


Applicable to the LEM24, LEX4, TBE, L4G board.

When you configure cross-connections, make sure that the source optical channel is the sameas the sink optical channel.



295




Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Managementfrom the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab.

Step 3 Click New and then the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Configure the parameters for the cross-connection and click OK. For details of the parameters,see 2.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.

----End

Procedure on the Web LCT

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-ConnectionService Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab.



296

Step 3 Click New and then the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Configure the parameters for the cross-connection and click OK.


----End

10.4.2 Creating EPL ServicesYou can configure EPL services for a single NE.

Prerequisite


The port attribute must be configured for the Ethernet board.

The cross-connections must be configured for the Ethernet boards.

Applicable to the TBE and L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.

Applicable to the LEX4 and LEM24 board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800.




The configuration of service parameters on both ends of an Ethernet service must be the same.

The following are the three types of EPL services that can be configured on the NMS.

l EPL services between PORT and VCTRUNK ports.

l EPL services between VCTRUNK and VCTRUNK ports.

l EPL services between PORT and PORT ports.



297

NOTE

l For the above three types of services, if the source VLAN ID and sink VLAN ID are different, thisVLAN is a switched VLAN. To configure VLAN SNCP at the receive end of services, the sourceVLAN ID and sink VLAN ID must be the same.

l For the port description and configuration rules of each board, refer to the Hardware Description ofthe corresponding equipment.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab. Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box isdisplayed.

Step 3 Select EPL from the Service Type drop-down list.

Step 4 Configure the information related to the EPL service, such as Direction, Source Port, SinkPort, etc.

NOTE

l You can set Direction to unidirectional or bidirectional.

l In Port Attributes, you can set Port Enabled and TAG for a port in the Create Ethernet LineService dialog box, or in Ethernet Interface.

l In Port Attributes, certain parameters can be modified. If port attributes are already set, however,retain the default values.

Step 5 Click Apply or OK. The created EPL service is displayed in the window.

Step 6 Optional: If the VLAN SNCP is required at the receive end of services, after creating Ethernetservices at the transmit end, double-click the OAM Enabled field corresponding to the Ethernetservices and set it to Enabled.



298

NOTE

When creating the VLAN SNCP protection on the TBE board, you can choose not to enable the OAMfunction because a large volume of service data may be transmitted in consideration of bandwidth usage

----End

10.4.3 Creating EPLAN ServicesBased on the Ethernet data layer 2 switch function, EPLAN services allow the accessed data tobe transported to its destination media access control (MAC) address. This section describes themethod to set the EPLAN service.


The port attributes must be set for the Ethernet board.

The electrical cross-connect services between the TBE board and the line board must be created.

Applicable to the TBE, L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.

Applicable to the LEX4, LEM24 board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800.

Each TBE, L4G LEM24 and LEX4 board support one virtual bridge (VB).


Background InformationOne VB can be created in each Ethernet board in the system. Inside VBs, the MAC addresslearning function is used to complete the forwarding of Ethernet data. The MAC address tableis updated periodically based on the address learning result.

PrecautionNOTESetting the parameters of a port affect the service of the board. Before setting the parameters of a port,configure State of the port as OOS at the Ethernet Interface. After setting the parameters, restore Stateof the port to IS.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the Service Mount tab.

Step 2 Click New and the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Complete the information of the EPLAN service. Enter a VB Name, and select VB Type andBridge Switch Mode.

Step 4 Click Configure Mount... in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box. The Service MountConfiguration dialog box is displayed. Select a port in the Available Mounted Ports pane and

click .



299

CAUTIONModifying the ports that are mounted to the bridge may interrupt the service.

Step 5 Click OK to return to Create Ethernet LAN Service.



300

Step 6 Click OK.

Step 7 Select the Service Mount tab, and then click Query. The created EPLAN service is displayed.NOTE

After you create an EPLAN service, if you want to set the Hub/Spoke attribute of a VB port,1. Click Query in the Service Mount panel to query the parameters value.2. Double-click Hub/Spoke and select an option from the drop-down list.Services are interoperable between Hub ports or between a Hub port and a Spoke port, but are isolatedbetween Spoke ports.

----End

10.4.4 Creating VLANs FilteringYou can create VLANs to divide services in a virtual bridge (VB). The PORT port and theVCTRUNK port that have different VLANs are isolated and do not transmit services to eachother.


The port must be mounted to a VB.

Make sure that you set Bridge Switch Mode to IVL/Ingress Filter Enable. Only in this way,you can create VLANs.



301


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCTStep 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >

Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Select a service and click the VLANFiltering tab.

Step 2 Select the service and click New, the Create VLAN dialog box is displayed. Enter a VLAN

ID, select an Available forwarding port, and then click .

Step 3 Click OK.


Step 5 Create other VLAN Filtering according to the requirements.

----End

10.4.5 Creating VLAN UnicastYou can configure VLAN unicast, to allow a packet whose destination address is the specifiedMAC address, to be forwarded through the specified port in the specified VLAN. If the VBswapping mode is SVL/Ingress Filter Disable, the packets are forwarded through the specifiedport in the entire VB.


The VLAN must be created.





302


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN Unicast tab.

Step 2 Click New and the Create VLAN Unicast dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID, MACAddress, and Physical Port.

NOTE

The first byte of the MAC Address of VLAN unicast must be even.For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.20.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service.

Step 3 Click OK.


----End

10.4.6 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC AddressesYou can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to realize the dynamic address agingfunction. If the MAC addresses that do not appear again in the transport network during theaging time, the system considers that no information needs to be sent to these MAC addresses.The MAC addresses are deleted from the MAC address table, so that the MAC address tablecan contain more MAC addresses.


Applicable to the TBE board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.

Applicable to the LEX4 and LEM24 boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800.

Applicable to the EGSH board of the OptiX OSN 8800.


Background InformationIf the aging time is too long, the MAC address table may save many outdated MAC addressitems. This may use up the resources of the MAC address table. As a result, the MAC addresstable may not be updated according to the change in the network.



303

If the aging time is too short, the effective MAC address items may be deleted. As a result,packets that are broadcasted cannot find the destination MAC address and the performance ofthe network is affected.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Layer-2 SwitchingManagement > Aging Time from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Double-click MAC Address Aging Time and the MAC Address Aging Time dialog box isdisplayed. Enter the value of the aging time.

NOTE

MAC Address Aging Time supports three time units, including minute, hour, and day. The value rangesfrom 1 to 120.

When the unit of the MAC Address Aging Time is set to day, the valid range is 1-12.

Step 3 Click OK and then click Apply.

----End

10.4.7 Creating EVPL (QinQ) ServicesWhen the services of multiple users that have the same C-VLAN ID are accessed on the samestation and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added toisolate the services of different users from each other.




Applicable to the TBE, L4G and ECOM board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.



Background InformationEVPL (QinQ) services is the Ethernet service packets that are added with an S-VLAN tag or C-VLAN tag. In this way, the extension of VLAN ID is realized.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.

Step 2 Select the Display QinQ Shared Service check box in the lower right corner.

Step 3 Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.



304

Step 4 Select EVPL(QinQ) from the Service Type drop-down list.

Step 5 Configure the information related to the EVPL (QinQ) service, such as Direction, SourcePort, Sink Port, etc.

NOTE

l You can only set Direction to unidirectional.

l In Port Attributes, certain parameters can be modified. If port attributes are already set, however, usethe default values.

l In Port Attributes, you can set TAG for a port in Ethernet Interface.

Step 6 Click Apply or OK. The created EVPL service is displayed in the window.

Step 7 Optional: To create VLAN SNCP at the receive end of services, after creating Ethernet servicesat the transmit end, double-click the field of OAM Enabled and set the value to Enabled.

Step 8 Select the Ethernet Line Service tab, and then click Query. The created EVPL (QinQ) serviceis displayed.

NOTE

To transmit a large volume of service data, you do not need to set OAM Enabled during the creation ofVLAN SNCP on the TBE board in consideration of bandwidth usage.

----End



305

10.5 Configuring Ethernet Services in an OCS SystemThis section describes how to configure Ethernet services in an OCS system.

10.5.1 Creating Cross-Connections Between an Ethernet Board anda Line Board

The cross-connections between an Ethernet board and a line board carry Ethernet services.Hence, you need to create cross-connections between the Ethernet board and the line board priorto creating Ethernet services.


The EGSH and OCS line board must be installed.



Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configurationfrom the Function Tree.

NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: In the NE Explorer, select the NE and chooseConfiguration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Create and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Create a cross connection between Ethernet and line boards by entering the values of the attributein the dialog box. For details of the parameters, see 9.7.1 SDH Service Configuration.

NOTE

l In the case of the EGSH board, Level can be set to only VC3 or VC4.

l The service level and timeslot of the cross-connection created must be consistent with the level andtimeslot of the bound path of the Ethernet interface.



306

Step 4 Click OK.NOTE

When the operation is performed on the U2000, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicatingthat the operation is successful. Then, click Close.

----End

10.5.2 Creating EPL ServicesYou can create an EPL service on a per-NE basis.


Applies to the EGSH board.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCTStep 1 In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >

Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click New.

Step 3 In the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box displayed, configure the relevant informationabout the EPL service.

NOTE

l If an appropriate path is not available in the Bound Path field, click Configuration to bind new paths.l To configure the VLAN ID, you can set the same or different VLAN IDs for both the source and the

sink ports.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End



307

10.5.3 Creating EPLAN ServicesYou can create an EPLAN service on a per-NE basis.

Prerequisite


The port attributes and bound paths must be set for the Ethernet board.

Applies to the EGSH board.



Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >Ethernet LAN Service.

Step 2 Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set the parameters of the bridge.

Step 4 Configure service mounting relationships.

Option Description

Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1d or IEEE802.1q bridge.

Go to Step 5.

Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. Go to Step 6.

Step 5 Optional: Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1d or IEEE 802.1q bridge.

CAUTIONModifying the ports that are mounted to the bridge may interrupt the service.

1. Click Configure Mount.

2. Select Available Mounted Ports and click .

3. Optional: Repeat Step 5.2 and select other ports to be mounted.

4. Click OK.

Step 6 Optional: Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.

1. Click Configure Mount.



308

2. Set the parameters for configuring mounted services.

3. Click Add Mount Port.4. Repeat Step 6.2 to Step 6.3 to add the other mount ports.5. Click OK.

Step 7 Click Configuration to configure the VC paths that are bound with the internal ports.

Step 8 Click OK and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

NOTE

After you create an EPLAN service, if you want to set the Hub/Spoke attribute of a VB port, double-clickHub/Spoke and select an option from the drop-down list. Services are interoperable between Hub ports orbetween a Hub port and a Spoke port, but are isolated between Spoke ports.

----End

10.5.4 Creating VLANs FilteringYou can create VLANs to divide services in a virtual bridge (VB). The PORT port and theVCTRUNK port that have different VLANs are isolated and do not transmit services to eachother.


The port must be mounted to a VB.

Make sure that you set Bridge Switch Mode to IVL/Ingress Filter Enable. Only in this way,you can create VLANs.




309


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Select a service and click the VLANFiltering tab.

Step 2 Select the service and click New, the Create VLAN dialog box is displayed. Enter a VLAN

ID, select an Available forwarding port, and then click .

Step 3 Click OK.


Step 5 Create other VLAN Filtering according to the requirements.

----End

10.5.5 Creating VLAN UnicastYou can configure VLAN unicast, to allow a packet whose destination address is the specifiedMAC address, to be forwarded through the specified port in the specified VLAN. If the VBswapping mode is SVL/Ingress Filter Disable, the packets are forwarded through the specifiedport in the entire VB.

Prerequisite


The VLAN must be created.





310


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN Unicast tab.

Step 2 Click New and the Create VLAN Unicast dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID, MACAddress, and Physical Port.

NOTE

The first byte of the MAC Address of VLAN unicast must be even.For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.20.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service.

Step 3 Click OK.


----End

10.5.6 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC AddressesYou can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to realize the dynamic address agingfunction. If the MAC addresses that do not appear again in the transport network during theaging time, the system considers that no information needs to be sent to these MAC addresses.The MAC addresses are deleted from the MAC address table, so that the MAC address tablecan contain more MAC addresses.






Background InformationIf the aging time is too long, the MAC address table may save many outdated MAC addressitems. This may use up the resources of the MAC address table. As a result, the MAC addresstable may not be updated according to the change in the network.



311

If the aging time is too short, the effective MAC address items may be deleted. As a result,packets that are broadcasted cannot find the destination MAC address and the performance ofthe network is affected.



Step 2 Double-click MAC Address Aging Time and the MAC Address Aging Time dialog box isdisplayed. Enter the value of the aging time.

NOTE


When the unit of the MAC Address Aging Time is set to day, the valid range is 1-12.


----End





Applicable to the TBE, L4G and ECOM board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.



Background InformationEVPL (QinQ) services is the Ethernet service packets that are added with an S-VLAN tag or C-VLAN tag. In this way, the extension of VLAN ID is realized.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.





312

Step 4 Select EVPL(QinQ) from the Service Type drop-down list.

Step 5 Configure the information related to the EVPL (QinQ) service, such as Direction, SourcePort, Sink Port, etc.

NOTE

l You can only set Direction to unidirectional.

l In Port Attributes, certain parameters can be modified. If port attributes are already set, however, usethe default values.

l In Port Attributes, you can set TAG for a port in Ethernet Interface.

Step 6 Click Apply or OK. The created EVPL service is displayed in the window.

Step 7 Optional: To create VLAN SNCP at the receive end of services, after creating Ethernet servicesat the transmit end, double-click the field of OAM Enabled and set the value to Enabled.

Step 8 Select the Ethernet Line Service tab, and then click Query. The created EVPL (QinQ) serviceis displayed.

NOTE

To transmit a large volume of service data, you do not need to set OAM Enabled during the creation ofVLAN SNCP on the TBE board in consideration of bandwidth usage.

----End



313






Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click New.



Step 4 Complete the information of the EVPL (QinQ) service.

NOTEIf an appropriate path is not available in the Bound Path field, click Configuration to bind new paths.



314

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

10.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL ServicesThe EPL service provides a solution for the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernetservices over an exclusive bandwidth. EPL services are applied to the scenarios where the user-side data communication equipment connected to the transmission network does not supportVLANs or where the VLAN planning is kept secret from the network carrier.

10.6.1 Networking DiagramThis section describes the Ethernet service configuration in a ring network.

Service RequirementSee Figure 10-15. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network. All the ONEsfunction as OADM stations.



315

There is Ethernet communication between User1 and User2. In addition, a bidirectional EPLservice exists between stations A and C and passes through station B. The working mode of thebidirectional EPL service is set to auto-negotiation and the bidirectional EPL service does notsupport the VLAN function.

Figure 10-15 Networking diagram for configuring EPL services

NG WDM Equipment

A

B

C

D

NM

User1

User2

IU 3 LEM24

IU 3 LEM24

IU 3 LEM24

IU 3 LEM24

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, each station is configured with one LEM24 board.

10.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength AllocationEthernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port, andtransparently transmitted on the WDM network. In this way, the node communicates with theremote node.

Figure 10-16 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EPL services between stations A andC.



316

Figure 10-16 Service signal flow of the bidirectional EPL service

:Client-side signals

ONE C

PORT5

PORT6

PORT28

PORT7

AP1

AP2

AP4

PORT5

PORT6

PORT28

PORT7

AP1

AP2

AP4

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

ONE ALEM24

:WDM-side working service :Working service direction

AP3 AP3

LEM24

(VCTrunck 1)

(VCTrunck 2)

(VCTrunck 1)

(VCTrunck 2)

1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1

ONE B

LEM24

(VCTrunck 1) (VCTrunck 2)

Figure 10-17 shows the wavelength allocation.

Figure 10-17 Wavelength allocation diagram

A B C D

Working channel

Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)

1560.61/192.10

Table 10-4 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards

Parameter A C

Board 3-LEM24 3-LEM24

Port PORT7 PORT7

Port Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation

Maximum Frame Length 1522 1522

Table 10-5 Parameters of internal ports on the Ethernet boards

Parameter A C


Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1



317

Table 10-6 Parameters of the EPL services

Parameter EPL Service of A EPL Service of B EPL Service of C

Board 3-LEM24 3-LEM24 3-LEM24

Service Type EPL EPL EPL

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 PORT7

Source C-VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6)

- - -

Sink Port PORT7 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6)

- - -

10.6.3 Configuration ProcessThis section describes how to configure an EPL service through an example in which station Ctransmits the EPL service to station A. The case that station A transmits the EPL service tostation C is similar, and thus is not described in this section.

Prerequisite

You must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EPL Service.




Step 1 Configure the EPL service that User2 occupies at station C.

1. Configure the attributes of the external port that User2 occupies.

a. In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then chooseConfiguration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from theFunction Tree. Then, select External Port.

b. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, clickApply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes(External Port).

Parameter Value Description

Port Enabled PORT7: Enabled The EPL service of User2 occupies theexternal port PORT7, and the enablingstatus of PORT7 is set to Enabled.



318


Working Mode PORT7: Auto-Negotiation

The access equipment of the EPLservice of User2 supports auto-negotiation, and the working mode ofPORT7 is set to Auto-Negotiation.

Maximum FrameLength

PORT7: 1522 In general, the default value 1522 isused.

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non-Loopback

The MAC loopback setting is used forfault diagnosis. When configuring aservice, set this parameter to Non-Loopback.

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non-Loopback

The PHY loopback setting is used forfault diagnosis. When configuring aservice, set this parameter to Non-Loopback.

c. Click the Flow Control tab. The default value of the parameter is recommended.d. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click

Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.6 Parameters: TAGAttributes.


TAG PORT7: Access The access equipment of the service ofUser2 does not support the VLANfunction. The transmitted data doesnot contain the VLAN ID. In this case,the TAG identifier of PORT7 is set toAccess.

Default VLAN ID PORT7: 1 The EPL service of User2 occupies thePORT and VCTRUNK interfacesexclusively, and the service does notneed to be separated by using a VLANID. In this case, you do not need toconfigure the VLAN ID but retain thedefault value.

VLAN Priority PORT7: 0 The VLAN ID is not required, and thusVLAN priority is also not required. Inthis case, retain the default value,namely 0.

e. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click

Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.7 Parameters: NetworkAttributes.



319


Port PORT7: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the portprocesses the 802.1Q tag header. Theport attributes include Tag Aware,Access, and Hybrid.

2. Configure the attribute of the internal port that User2 occupies.

a. In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then chooseConfiguration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from theFunction Tree. Then, select Internal Port.

b. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, clickApply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.7 Parameters: NetworkAttributes.


Port VCTRUNK1: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the portprocesses the 802.1Q tag header. Theport attributes include Tag Aware,Access, and Hybrid.

c. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click

Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.6 Parameters: TAGAttributes.


TAG VCTRUNK1: TagAware

For the internal port, you do not needto configure the tag header but retainthe default value, namely Tag Aware.

3. Configure the EPL service of User2 at station C.

a. In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then chooseConfiguration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.Click the EPL Service tab.

b. Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialogbox is displayed.

c. Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box. For detailson parameter settings, see 10.20.8 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.



320


Service Type EPL The service type of User2 is EPL.

Direction Bidirectional The service of User2 is a bidirectionalservice.

Source Port PORT7 Indicates the name of the source port.

Source C-VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6)

- Keep this item empty.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 Indicates the name of the sink port.

Sink C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)


d. Click OK, and the created Ethernet private line service is displayed on the interface.

Step 2 Configure pass-through EPL services at station B.

1. Configure the attributes of the external port at station B.

a. In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then chooseConfiguration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from theFunction Tree. Then, select Internal Port.

b. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, clickApply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.7 Parameters: NetworkAttributes.


Port VCTRUNK1: UNIVCTRUNK2: UNI

If the port is a UNI port, the portprocesses the 802.1Q tag header. Theport attributes include Tag Aware,Access, and Hybrid.



321

c. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, clickApply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.6 Parameters: TAGAttributes.


TAG VCTRUNK1: TagAwareVCTRUNK2: TagAware


2. Configure the EPL service at station B.

a. In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then chooseConfiguration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.Click the EPL Service tab.

b. Click New on the lower right of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Servicedialog box is displayed.

c. Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box. For detailson parameter settings, see 10.20.8 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.


Service Type EPL The service type is EPL.

Direction Bidirectional The service is a bidirectional service.

Source Port VCTRUNK1 Indicates the name of the source port.

Source S-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)


Sink Port VCTRUNK2 Indicates the name of the source port.



322


Sink S-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)


d. Click OK, and the created EPL service is displayed on the interface.

Step 3 Configure the EPL service that User1 occupies at station A.

Configure the EPL service at station A by referring to step 1.

Step 4 Verify the service configurations of User2 and User1. For the verification procedure, see TestingEthernet Service Channels in the Commissioning Guide.

NOTE

The external ports on the Ethernet boards at the source and sink ends of the accessed Ethernet service mustbe set to Access, and the default VLAN ID must be set to the same value.

Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function for the NEs. For the operation procedures, seeSetting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE in the Commissioning Guide.

Step 6 Back up the configuration data on the NEs. Two methods are available for the backup.

NOTEOnly the U2000 supports backing up the configuration data of NEs.

Option Description

The SCC board is not configured with any CFcard

See Backing Up the NE Database to the SCCBoard in the Commissioning Guide

The SCC board is configured with a CF card See Manually Backing Up the NE Databaseto a CF Card in the Commissioning Guide

----End

10.7 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ)Services on a WDM Network

EVPL (QinQ) services realize the nesting of VLAN. With the increase of network users, theexisting number of VLAN IDs fails to meet the requirement of users. After EVPL (QinQ)services are configured, however, users can be identified through multiple layers of VLAN IDs.In this case, VLAN extension is achieved.

10.7.1 Networking DiagramThis section describes the Ethernet service configuration in a ring network.

Service RequirementSee Figure 10-18. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, and C form a ring network, and all the ONEsare OADM stations.



323

There is Ethernet communication between User1 and User2. In addition, a bidirectional EVPL(QinQ) service exists between stations A and B. The working mode of the bidirectional EVPL(QinQ) service is set to auto-negotiation.

Figure 10-18 Networking diagram for configuring EVPL(QinQ) service

NG WDM Equipment

NM

A B

C

User 1 User 2

IU 3 LEM24

IU 3 LEM24 IU 3 LEM24

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, each station is configured with one LEM24 board.

10.7.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength AllocationEthernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port, andtransparently transmitted on the WDM network. In this way, the node communicates with theremote node.

Figure 10-19 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EVPL (QinQ) services between stationsA and B.

Figure 10-19 Service signal flow of EVPL (QinQ) service


ONE A

PORT5

PORT6

PORT28

PORT7

AP1

AP2

AP4

PORT5

PORT6

PORT28

PORT7

AP1

AP2

AP4

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

ONE B

LEM24

:WDM-side working service

:Working service direction

AP3 AP3

LEM24



324



A B C

Working channel


1560.61/192.10


Parameters A B


Port PORT7 PORT7

Port Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation

Maximum Frame Length 1522 1522


Parameter A B



Table 10-9 Parameters of the EVPL (QinQ) service

Parameter EVPL (QinQ) Service of A EVPL (QinQ) Service of B

Service Type EVPL (QinQ) EVPL (QinQ)

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional

Operation Type Add S-VLAN Strip S-VLAN

Source Port PORT7 VCTRUNK1



325

Parameter EVPL (QinQ) Service of A EVPL (QinQ) Service of B

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 PORT7

Sink S-VLAN 1 1

10.7.3 Configuration ProcessThis section describes how to configure an EVPL (QinQ) service through an example in whichstation A transmits the EVPL (QinQ) service to station B. The case that station B transmits theEVPL (QinQ) service to station A is similar, and thus is not described in this section.

PrerequisiteYou must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EVPL (QinQ)Service.



Step 1 Configure the EVPL (QinQ) service that User1 occupies at station A.1. Configure the attributes of the external port that User1 occupies.

l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration> Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.Then, select External Port.

l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, clickApply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Basic AttributesParameter (External Port).


Port Enabled PORT7: Enabled The EVPL (QinQ) service of User1occupies the external port PORT7, andthe enabling status of PORT7 is set toEnabled.


The access equipment of the EVPL(QinQ) service of User1 supports auto-negotiation, and the working mode ofPORT7 is set to Auto-Negotiation.

Maximum FrameLength

PORT7: 1522 In general, the default value 1522 isused.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The default value of the parameter is recommended. For

the default value of the parameter, see Description of the Flow Control Parameter(External Port).



326

l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, clickApply. For the default value of the parameter, see Description of the TAG AttributesParameter.


Port PORT7: C-Aware In the case of C-Aware, the port doesnot process the TAG attribute of802.1Q. It determines that the datapacket carries C-VLAN tag andprocesses the data packet based on theC-VLAN tag.

2. Configure the attribute of the internal port that User1 occupies.

l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration> Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.Then, select Internal Port.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, clickApply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network AttributesParameter.


Port VCTRUNK1: S-Aware

In the case of S-Aware, the port doesnot process the TAG attribute of802.1Q. It determines that the datapacket carries S-VLAN tag andprocesses the data packet based on theS-VLAN tag.

l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, clickApply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the TAG AttributesParameter.




3. Configure the EVPL (QinQ) service of User1 at station A.

l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration> Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPLService tab.

l Select Display QinQ Shared Service check box in the lower right corner.

l Click New on the lower right of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialogbox is displayed.

l Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box.



327


Service Type EVPL (QinQ) The service type of User1 is EVPL(QinQ).

Direction Bidirectional The service of User1 is a bidirectionalservice.

Operation Type Add S-VLAN Add the label of S-VLAN.

Source Port PORT7 Indicates the name of the source port.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 Indicates the name of the sink port.

Sink S-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)

1 Select the S-VLAN.

l Click OK, and the created EVPL (QinQ) service is displayed on the interface.

Step 2 Configure the EVPL (QinQ) service that User2 occupies at station B.

Configure the EVPL (QinQ) service at station B by referring to step 1.

Step 3 Verify the service configurations of User2 and User1. For the verification procedure, see TestingEthernet Service Channels in the Commissioning Guide.





328

Option Description




----End

10.8 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services(IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a WDM Network

The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides an LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipoint convergence. This service applies in cases where user-side data communicationequipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs or where the VLANplanning is kept secret from the network operator.

10.8.1 Networking DiagramThe convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.The two access nodes need not communicate with each other.

Service RequirementOn the network as shown in Figure 10-21, the service requirements are as follows:

l Three branches (F1, F2, and F3) of user F are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4. F1 needs tocommunicate with F2 and F3.

l The Ethernet equipment of user F provides Ethernet optical ports that work in auto-negotiation mode and support VLANs. VLAN IDs and the number of VLANs, however,are unknown and may be changed.

NOTE

The application scenarios whether one branch needs to communicate with other branches are as follows:

l Branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other.

l Branches F2 and F3 do not need to communicate with each other.

If branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other, skip Step 2.



329

Figure 10-21 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

F 1NG WDM equipment

NM

F 3F 2

PORT7VCTRUNK1

VB

VCTRUNCK

NE 3

NE 1NE 4NE 2

LEM24IU 3

LEM24IU 3 LEM24IU 3

LEM24IU 3

VCTRUNK2

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with one LEM24 boards that supportsthe IEEE 802.1d bridge, thus implementing EPLAN services wherein user VLANs are notlimited.

The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with one LEM24 board each. The EPL servicesare configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.8.2 Service Signals Flow and Wavelength AllocationThe Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port, forwarded toan internal port through Layer 2 switching, encapsulated, and transparently transmitted on theWDM network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.

Figure 10-22 shows the signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) and thetimeslot allocation to the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge).



330

Figure 10-22 Service signal flow of the EPLAN service

ONE 1


:WDM-side working service

:Working service direction

LEM24

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

PORT7

PORT8

PORT28

PORT5

PORT6

PORT28

LEM24

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

LEM24

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

(VCTRUNCK 1)PORT6

PORT5PORT7

(VCTRUNCK 2)

VB

(VCTRUNCK 1)

(VCTRUNCK 2)

AP1

(VCTRUNCK 1)

(VCTRUNCK 2)

AP1 PORT5

PORT6

PORT28

PORT7

ONE 2

ONE 4



NE3

Working channel


1560.61/192.10

1559.79/192.20

NE4NE1 NE2


Parameter NE2 NE1 NE4


Port PORT7 PORT7 PORT7

Port Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation

Maximum FrameLength

1522 1522 1522

Entry Detection - Enabled -

TAG - Tag Aware -

Port Type - UNI -



331




Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Table 10-12 Parameters of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

Parameter EPLAN Service of NE1

VB Name VB

VB Type 802.1d

Bridge Switch Mode SVL/Ingress Filter Disable

Bridge Learning Mode SVL

Ingress Filter Disabled

VB Mount Port PORT7, VCTRUNK1,VCTRUNK2

Hub/Spoke PORT7 Hub

VCTRUNK1 Spoke

VCTRUNK2 Spoke

10.8.3 Configuration ProcessAt the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge). Atthe access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure only transparently transmitted EPLservices.

Prerequisite

You must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EPLANService.




Step 1 Configure EPLAN services for users F1, F2, and F3 on NE1.

1. Set the attributes of the external port used by the service of user F1.



332

l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration> Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

l Select External Port.l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click

Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Basic AttributesParameter (External Port).


Port Enabled PORT7: Enabled Set PORT7 to Enabled.


If the Ethernet service accessequipment of user F1 supports the auto-negotiation function, set the workingmode of PORT7 to Auto-Negotiation.

Maximum FrameLength

PORT7: 1522 Generally, this parameter is set to1522 by default.

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non-Loopback

The loopback setting is used for faultdiagnosis. When configuring a service,set this parameter to Non-Loopback.

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non-Loopback




l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, clickApply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the TAG AttributesParameter.


Entry Detection PORT7: Enabled If the packets of user F1 carry VLANtags, you need to enable the entrydetection function to detect the VLANtags of packets. In this case, set thisparameter to Enabled.

TAG PORT7: Tag Aware If the service access equipment of userF1 supports VLAN and if thetransmitted data frames carry VLANtags, set these parameters to TagAware for PORT7 and PORT8.

Default VLAN ID - If TAG is set to Tag Aware, it isunnecessary to set Default VLAN ID.

VLAN Priority - If TAG is set to Tag Aware, it isunnecessary to set VLAN Priority.



333



Port Type PORT7: UNI A UNI port is connected to theequipment on the user side because it isprovided by the service provider. Thisport processes the packets with TAGattributes specified in IEEE 802.1q. Inaddition, this port identifies andprocesses the VLAN information of thereceived packets according to thesupported Tag Aware, Access, orHybrid attribute.

2. Configure the attribute of the internal port that F1 occupies.

l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration> Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

l Select Internal Port.l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click

Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network AttributesParameter.


Port VCTRUNK1: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the portprocesses the 802.1Q tag header. Theport attributes include Tag Aware,Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click

Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the TAG AttributesParameter.


Entry Detection VCTRUNK1:Enabled

If the data frames of users F2 and F3carry VLAN tags, you need to enablethe entry detection function to detectthe VLAN tags of packets. In this case,set this parameter to Enabled.



3. Create a bridge for the LEM24 board on NE1.

l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board and then choose Configuration > EthernetService > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.



334

l Click New.l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.

For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service.


Description

VB Name VB This parameter is a character string used to describethe bridge. It is recommended that you set thisparameter to a character string that contains theinformation about the detailed application of thebridge.

VB Type 802.1d The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge learns and forwardsthe packets according to the MAC addresses of theuser packets. The information in the VLAN tags ofthe user packets, however, is not considered in thelearning and forwarding process. The IEEE 802.1dMAC bridge is used when the entire information ofthe VLANs used by the client cannot be learned orwhen the data between the VLANs of the client doesnot need to be isolated.

BridgeSwitch Mode

SVL/IngressFilterDisable

When the bridge adopts the SVL learning mode, allthe VLANs share the same MAC address table. Thatis, the bridge learns and forwards the packetsaccording to the MAC address of the user packetsonly. The information in the VLAN tags of the userpackets, however, is not considered in the learningand forwarding process.

BridgeLearningMode

SVL -

Ingress Filter Disabled The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge does not detect theVLAN tags of the received packets.

MACAddress Self-learning

Enabled -

l Click Configure Mountnt....l In Available Mounted Ports, select PORT7, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Then,

click .l Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the

operation is successful. Click Close.l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

4. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge.NOTEIf normal communication is required between user F2 and user F3, go to Step 2.



335

l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge. After setting the

parameters, click Apply.


Hub/Spoke PORT7: HubVCTRUNK2: SpokeVCTRUNK1: Spoke

If user F1 needs to communicate withusers F2 and F3 respectively, set PORT7that accesses the services of user F1 toHub. A port of the Hub attribute cancommunicate with a port of the Spoke orHub attribute.If user F2 does not need to communicatewith user F3, set the VCTRUNK1 andVCTRUNK2 that receive the services ofusers F2 and F3 to Spoke. Ports of theSpoke attribute cannot communicatewith each other.

Step 2 Configure EPL services on NE2 and NE4.

NOTEThe Ethernet services on NE2 and NE4 are EPL services transparently transmitted from point to point.Complete the configuration based on the planned parameters by referring to the operations described in10.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services

Step 3 Verify the correctness of the service configuration. For the verification procedure, see TestingEthernet Service Channels in the Commissioning Guide.

NOTE


NOTE

After the test, change the modified parameter values to the values specified in the service configuration.



Option Description




----End



336

10.9 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLANServices (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network

The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides an LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipoint convergence. This service applies in cases where user-side data communicationequipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs or where the VLANplanning is open to the network operator.

10.9.1 Networking DiagramThe convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.LAN services of the two users (H and G) need to be isolated.


l Three branches (G1, G2, and G3) of user G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively.G2 and G3 do not need to communicate with each other.

l Three branches (H1, H2, and H3) of user H are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively.l The service of user G needs to be isolated from the service of user H.l The Ethernet equipment of user G and user H provides Ethernet electrical ports that work

mode in auto-negotiation mode and do not support VLANs.

Figure 10-24 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

NG WDM equipment

NM

NE 3

NE 1 H3H2

LEM24IU 3

NE 4NE 2

VCTRUNCK

LEM24IU 3

LEM24IU 3

LEM24IU 3

G2

H1 G1

G3

VCTRUNK1

VB1 VLAN 100

POR7VCTRUNK2

VB2 VLAN 200

VCTRUNK1

PORT8

VCTRUNK2



337


In this example, the convergence node NE 1 is configured with one LEM24 board that supportsthe IEEE 802.1q bridge to implement EVPLAN services in which user data is isolated.

The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with an LEM24 board respectively. EVPLservices are configured to implement transparent transmission from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.9.2 Service Signals FlowThe Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and taggedwith the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port throughLayer 2 switching, the VLAN IDs are stripped and then the services are transparently transmittedin the WDM network. In this way, the node communicates with a remote node.

Figure 10-25 shows the signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and thetimeslot allocation to the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge).


LEM24

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

PORT7

PORT8

PORT7

PORT8

LEM24

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

PORT7

PORT8

LEM24

(VCTRUNCK1)

AP1

(VCTRUNCK2)VB2

VB1

(VCTRUNCK1)

2(IN2/OUT2)-1(VCTRUNCK2)

AP2

ONE 4

:Client-side signals:WDM-side working service

:Working service of H

:Working service of G

ONE 1

ONE 2


Parameter

NE1 NE2 NE4


Port PORT7PORT8

PORT8 PORT7 PORT8 PORT7 PORT8

PortEnabled

Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

WorkingMode

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation



338

Parameter

NE1 NE2 NE4

MaximumFrameLength

1522 1522 1522 1522 1522 1522

TAG Access Access Access Access Access Access

EntryDetection

Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

DefaultVLAN ID

100 200 100 200 100 200

VLANPriority

0 0 0 0 0 0

Port Type UNI UNI UNI UNI UNI UNI




Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

TAG Access Access - -

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Default VLANID

100 200 - -

VLAN Priority 0 0 - -

Port Type UNI UNI UNI UNI

Table 10-15 Parameters of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)


VB Name VB

VB Type 802.1q

Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable

Bridge LearningMode

IVL

Ingress Filter Enabled



339


VB Mount Port PORT7, PORT8, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

VLAN Filtering VLAN Filtering VLAN filter table 1 VLAN filter table 2

VLAN ID 100 200

Forwarding PhysicalPort

PORT7,VCTRUNK1,VCTRUNK2


Hub/Spoke PORT7 Hub

PORT8 Hub

VCTRUNK1 Spoke

VCTRUNK2 Spoke

10.9.3 Configuration ProcessAt the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) anda VLAN filtering table. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 need to be configured with EVPLservices only.

PrerequisiteYou must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EPLANService.



Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN services for user G1, user G2, user G3, user H1, user H2, and user H3on NE1.1. Configure the attributes of the external ports used by the services of user G1 and user H1.

l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board and then choose Configuration > EthernetInterface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

l Select External Port.l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click

Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.



340

Parameter

Value in This Example Description

Enabled/Disabled

PORT7: EnabledPORT8: Enabled

In this example, PORT7 and PORT8 carrythe services and Enabled/Disabled is set toEnabled for PORT7 and PORT8.

Working Mode

PORT7: Auto-NegotiationPORT8: Auto-Negotiation

In this example, the Ethernet service accessequipment of user G1 and user H1 supportsthe auto-negotiation mode. Hence, WorkingMode is set to Auto-Negotiation for PORT7and PORT8.

MaximumFrameLength

PORT7: 1522PORT8: 1522

Generally, this parameter adopts the defaultvalue 1522.

MACLoopback

PORT7: Non-LoopbackPORT8: Non-Loopback

The MAC loopback setting is used for faultdiagnosis. In this example, MACLoopback is set to Non-Loopback.

PHYLoopback


The PHY loopback setting is used for faultdiagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopbackis set to Non-Loopback.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the

default values. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.7 Parameters: NetworkAttributes

l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, clickClose in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter


TAG PORT7: AccessPORT8: Access

The access equipment of user G1 and user H1does not support VLAN tags. Hence, theEthernet access equipment transmits only thepackets without the VLAN tags. In thisexample, TAG is set to Access for PORT7and PORT8.

DefaultVLANID

PORT7: 100PORT8: 200

According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to100 on the transmission network side for theEthernet services between user G1, user G2,and user G3. The VLAN ID is set to 200 onthe transmission network side for theEVPLAN services between user H1, user H2,and user H3. In this manner, the services ofdifferent users are isolated.

VLANPriority

- This parameter adopts the default value.



341

Parameter


EntryDetection


The services of user G1 and user H1 areEVPLAN services. Hence, the entrydetection function must be enabled to checkwhether the packets carry VLAN tags. In thisexample, Entry Detection is set toEnabled.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,

click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter


PortType

PORT7: UNIPORT8: UNI

UNI indicates the user-network interface,namely, the interface of the service providerlocated near the user side. The UNI interfaceprocesses the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. That is, the UNI interfaceprocesses and identifies the VLANinformation of the accessed user packets,according to the supported tag flags, namelyTag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab

page adopt the default values. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.4Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Port).

2. Set the attributes of the internal ports used by the services of user G2, user G3, user H2,and user H3 on NE1.l Select Internal Port.l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click

Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. For details on parametersettings, see Description of the TAG Attributes Parameter.

Parameter


TAG VCTRUNK1: AccessVCTRUNK2: Access

The service access equipment of user G2,user G3, user H2, and user H3 supportsVLAN tags and the transmitted data framesdo not carry VLAN tags. In this example,TAG is set to Access for VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4.



342

Parameter


EntryDetection

VCTRUNK1: EnabledVCTRUNK2: Enabled

The services of user G2, user G3, user H2,and user H3 are EVPLAN services. Hence,the entry detection function must be enabledto check whether the packets carry VLANtags. In this example, Entry Detection is setto Enabled.


click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. For details onparameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes Parameter.

Parameter


PortType

VCTRUNK1: UNIVCTRUNK2: UNI



page adopt the default values. For details on parameter settings, see Description of theAdvanced Attributes Parameter (External Port).

3. Create a bridge for the LEM24 board on NE1.l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.l Click New.l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.


Description

VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character string used to describethe bridge. It is recommended that you set thisparameter to a character string that contains theinformation about the detailed application of thebridge.

VB Type 802.1q The IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by usingone layer of VLAN tags. This bridge checks thecontents of the VLAN tags that are in the data framesand performs Layer 2 switching according to thedestination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.



343


Description

BridgeSwitch Mode

IVL/IngressFilter Enable

When Bridge Learning Mode is set to IVL, thebridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that arein the packets and performs Layer 2 switchingaccording to the destination MAC addresses and theVLAN IDs of the packets.

BridgeLearningMode

IVL -

Ingress Filter Enabled -


Enabled -

l Click Configure Mount.l In Available Mounted Ports, select PORT7, PORT8, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.

Then, click .l Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the

operation is successful. Click Close.l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

4. Create a VLAN filtering table.l Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.l Click New.l Create the VLAN filtering table for user G1, user G2, and user G3 in the Create

VLAN dialog box that is displayed.


Description

VLAN ID 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 onthe transmission network side for the EVPLANservices between user G1, user G2, and user G3.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT7, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Click

. Then, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed,indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

l Create the VLAN filtering table for user H1, user H2, and user H3.



344


Description

VLAN ID 200 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 200 onthe transmission network side for the EVPLANservices between user H1, user H2, and user H3.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT8, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Click

. Then, click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicatingthat the operation is successful. Click Close.

5. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.

NOTEIf normal communication is required between user G2 and user G3, go to Step 2.

l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. After setting

the parameters, click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicatingthat the operation is successful. Click Close.

Parameter Value in ThisExample

Description

Hub/Spoke PORT7: HubVCTRUNK1:SpokeVCTRUNK2:SpokePORT8: Hub

If user G2 need not communicate with user G3,set VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that accessthe services of user G2 and user G3 to Spoke.Ports of the Spoke attribute cannotcommunicate with each other. A port of theHub attribute can communicate with a port ofthe Spoke or Hub attribute.

Step 2 Configure EVPL services on NE2 and NE4.

NOTEThe Ethernet services on NE2 and NE4 are EVPL services. Complete the configuration based on theplanned parameters by referring to the operations described in 10.7 Configuration Example: ConfiguringEVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM Network


NOTE






345

Option Description




----End

10.10 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLANServices (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge) on a WDM Network

The QinQ technology provides a cheap and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual private networks(VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPN solution, thusfacilitating the identifying, differentiating and grooming EVPLAN services.

10.10.1 Networking DiagramA network operator requires that the GE and FE services sent to the transmission network beuniformly labeled and groomed at the convergence node.

Service Requirement

On the network as shown in Figure 10-26, the service requirements are as follows:

l The GE services of user M and user N are sent to the transmission network at NE2 andNE4 respectively and to the GE server at the convergence node NE1.

l The FE services of user M and user N are sent to the transmission network at NE2 and NE4respectively and to the FE server at the convergence node NE1.

l The GE services need to be isolated from the FE services. User M does not need tocommunicate with user N.

l The data communication equipment of user M and user N provides Ethernet electrical portsthat work in auto-negotiation mode and support VLANs.

– C-VLAN ID of the GE services: 10

– C-VLAN ID of the FE services: 20

NOTEThe application senarios whether user M needs to communicate with user N are as follows:

l User M needs to communicate with user N.

l User M does not need to communicate with user N.

Requirement of the operator requires that all services received from the user side should beuniformly labeled and groomed through planned S-VLANs.

l S-VLAN ID of the GE services: 100

l S-VLAN ID of the FE services: 200



346

Figure 10-26 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

NG WDM equipment

NM

NE3

NE1User M

PORT7VCTRUNK1

VB1

VCTRUNK2

NE4NE2

VCTRUNCK

VLAN 100

PORT8VCTRUNK1

VB2

VCTRUNK2

VLAN 200LEM24IU 3

User N

FEGE

LEM24IU 3

LEM24IU 3

LEM24IU 3

C-VLANService10GE20FE

C-VLANService10GE20FE


In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with one LEM24 board that supportsthe IEEE 802.1ad bridge, thus implementing the EVPLAN services in which GE data is isolatedfrom FE data.

l The GE services tagged with C-VLAN ID 10 from NE2 and NE4 respectively are furthertagged with S-VLAN ID 100 when they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1 theservices are forwarded to the NE1 through Layer 2 switching.

l The FE services tagged with C-VLAN ID 20 from NE2 and NE4 respectively are furthertagged with S-VLAN ID 200 when they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1 theservices are forwarded to the NE1 through Layer 2 switching.

The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with one LEM24 board each. The EPL servicesare configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.10.2 Service Signals Flow and Wavelength AllocationThe services of user M and user N are transmitted from the access nodes NE2 and NE4respectively to the convergence node NE1 through the Ethernet transparent transmission boards.GE and FE services carrying different C-VLANs are tagged with different S-VLANs. Servicedata is isolated and exchanged at Layer 2 through S-VLAN filtering.

Figure 10-27 shows the signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and thetimeslot allocation to the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1 ad bridge).



347


User M

User N

LEM24

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

PORT7

PORT8

PORT7

PORT8

LEM24

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

PORT7

PORT8

LEM24

(VCTRUNCK1)

AP1

(VCTRUNCK2)

(VCTRUNCK1)

1(IN1/OUT1)-1(VCTRUNCK1)

AP2

ONE 4

:Client-side signals:WDM-side working service

:Working service of GE

:Working service of FE

ONE 1

ONE 2VB1

SVLAN 200

SVLAN 100




Port PORT7 PORT8 PORT7 PORT7

Port Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

MaximumFrame Length

1522 1522 1522 1522

Port Type C-Aware C-Aware - -






Table 10-18 Parameters of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)


VB Name VB1

VB Type 802.1ad



348



Bridge Learning Mode IVL


Operation Type Add S-VLAN base for Port and C-VLAN

VB Port 1 2 3 4

Mount Port PORT7 PORT8 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

C-VLAN 10 20 10 20 10 20

S-VLAN 100 200 100 200 100 200

VLANFiltering

VLAN Filtering VLAN filter table1

VLAN filter table 2

VLAN ID 100 200

ForwardingPhysical Port


PORT8, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

Hub/Spoke

PORT7 Hub

PORT8 Hub

VCTRUNK1 Spoke

VCTRUNK2 Spoke

10.10.3 Configuration ProcessAn EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and the corresponding S-VLAN filtering table needto be created for the convergence node NE1. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 need to beconfigured with EPL transparent transmission services only.

PrerequisiteYou must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EPLANService.


Background InformationThe IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports ports with the C-Aware and S-Aware attributes only.

The C-Aware ports are used to add and strip the S-VLAN tags. The S-Aware ports are used totransparently transmit the S-VLAN tag.



349

The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports the following operation types:

l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port

l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN

l Performing port mounting based on the port

l Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN

This topic describes the four operation types when Bridge Switch Mode of the IEEE 802.1adbridge is set to IVL/Ingree Filter Enabled.

l Adding the S-VLAN based on the port: The packets that enter the C-Aware port are addedwith the preset S-VLAN tag, and are forwarded in the bridge according to the S-VLANfiltering table. Before the packets leave the C-Aware port, the S-VLAN tag is stripped.

l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN: Then entry detection is performedfor the packets that enter the C-Aware port. Then, the corresponding S-VLAN tags areadded to the packets according to the mapping relationship between the C-VLAN tags andthe S-VLAN tags of the packets. If the mapping relationship does not exist, the packets arediscarded. After the S-VLAN tags are added, the packets enter the bridge, where the packetsare forwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Before the packets leave the C-Aware port, the S-VLAN tag is stripped.

NOTE

l The same C-Aware port supports different C-VLAN tags being mapped to different S-VLANtags, but does not support the same C-VLAN tag being mapping to multiple S-VLAN tags.

l Performing port mounting based on the port: The packets that enter the S-Aware port arenot filtered. Instead, the S-VLAN switch is performed directly. The packets must have theS-VLAN tags. Otherwise, the packets are discarded. When the packets leave the S-Awareport, the packets are transparently transmitted.

l Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN: The entry filtering isperformed according to the preset S-VLAN tag. The packets that do not belong to the S-VLAN are discarded. Then, the packets are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filteringtable. When the packets leave the S-Aware port, the packets are transparently transmitted.

In the case of the four operation types, the following conditions must be met before the packetsleave a port:

l The port is contained in the S-VLAN filtering table that is created by the user.

l The S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port must be specified when the user manuallymounts the port to the bridge.

– In the case of a C-VLAN port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-VLANID that is added when the packets enter the port.

– In the case of an S-VLAN port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-VLAN ID that is set when the user mounts the port to the bridge. If the S-Aware portis mounted based on the port, the S-VLAN ID is considered to contain all the legal S-VLAN IDs.


Step 1 Configure EVPLAN services on NE1.

1. Configure the attributes of the external ports.



350

l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration> Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.Then, select External Port.

l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, clickApply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Basic AttributesParameter (External Port).


Port Enabled PORT7: EnabledPORT8: Enabled

Set PORT7 and PORT8 that carry theservice to Enabled.

Working Mode PORT7: Auto-NegotiationPORT8: Auto-Negotiation

The GE server and FE server supportthe auto-negotiation function. Thisparameter is set to Auto-Negotiationfor PORT7 and PORT8.

Maximum FrameLength

PORT7: 1522PORT8: 1522

In general, the default value 1522 isused.

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non-LoopbackPORT8: Non-Loopback

The loopback setting is used for faultdiagnosis. When configuring a service,set this parameter to Non-Loopback

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non-LoopbackPORT8: Non-Loopback







351


Port Type PORT7: C-AwarePORT8: C-Aware

The C-Aware or S-Aware attributemust be selected for the port when youconfigure the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.The C-Aware port connects to the portin the client network, identifies andprocesses the packets that contain C-VLAN tags (namely, client tags). TheS-Aware port connects to the port onthe network side, identifies andprocesses the packets that contain S-VLAN tags (namely, service tags of thenetwork operator). It is unnecessary toset the parameters on the TAGAttributes tab. If the port type

l It is unnecessary to set the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab. If the port type isset to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters on the TAG Attributes are meaningless.

2. Set the attributes of the internal ports used by the service between user M and user N.

l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration> Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.Then, select Internal Port.



Port Type VCTRUNK1: S-AwareVCTRUNK2: S-Aware

When you configure the IEEE 802.1adbridge, set the port to C-Aware or S-Aware. The C-Aware port is connectedto the UNI port, identifies, andprocesses the packets with the C-VLAN tags. The S-Aware port isconnected to the network-side port,identifies, and processes the packetswith the S-VLAN tags.

l It is unnecessary to set the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab. If the port type isset to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters on the TAG Attributes are meaningless.

3. Create a bridge for the LEM24 board on NE1.

l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration> Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the ServiceMount tab.

l Click New on the lower right of the window. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialogbox is displayed.

l Enter the attributes of the Ethernet LAN service in the dialog box. For details onparameter settings, see Description of the EPLAN Service Parameter.



352


VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character stringused to describe the bridge. It isrecommended that you set thisparameter to a character string thatcontains the information about thedetailed application of the bridge.

VB Type 802.1ad The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supportspackets with two layers of VLAN tagsand adopts the outer S-VLAN tags toisolate services of different VLANs. Itcan be mounted to the ports whoseattributes are C-Aware and S-Awareonly.

Bridge SwitchMode

IVL/Ingress FilterEnable

An IEEE 802.1ad bridge checks thecontent of VLAN tags of the receivedpackets. The bridge performs Layer 2switching based on the destinationMAC addresses and the S-VLAN IDsof the packets.

Bridge LearningMode

IVL -


l Click Configure Mount, the Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed.l Select the mount ports in the dialog box.

Attribute

Attribute Value

OperationType

Adding S-VLAN tags based on Port and C-VLAN

VBPort

1 2 3 4

MountPort

PORT7

PORT8 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

C-VLAN

10 20 10 20 10 20



353

Attribute

Attribute Value

S-VLAN

100 200 100 200 100 200

l Click OK, and the service mount is displayed on the interface.l Click OK, and the created EPLAN service is displayed on the interface.

4. Create a VLAN filtering table.l Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering Table tab.l Click New.l Create the VLAN filtering table of the GE service.


VLAN ID 100 According to the plan, the S-VLAN IDis 100 for the GE service.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT7, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click

. Then click Apply.l Create the VLAN filtering table of the FE service.


VLAN ID 200 According to the plan, the S-VLAN IDis 200 for the FE service.


. Then click Apply.5. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge.

NOTEIf normal communication is required between user M and user N, go to Step 2.

l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.



354


Hub/Spoke PORT7: HubPORT8: HubVCTRUNK1: SpokeVCTRUNK2: Spoke

Users M and N do not need tocommunicate with each other. In thiscase, set VCTRUNK1 andVCTRUNK2 that access the services ofusers M and N to the Spoke attribute.Ports of the Spoke attribute cannotcommunicate with each other. A port ofthe Hub attribute can communicatewith a port of the Spoke or Hubattribute.

Step 2 Configure EPL services on NE2 and NE4.

NOTEThe Ethernet services on NE2 and NE4 are EPL services transparently transmitted from point to point.Complete the configuration based on the planned parameters by referring to the operations described in10.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services


NOTE




Option Description




----End

10.11 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL andEVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network

Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed through a same port,which is applicable to the scenario where the EVPL and EVPLAN users share the same port.

10.11.1 Networking DiagramBased on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed through a same port.



355


l The same Ethernet port receives services from A1 and B1.l Two branches of user A are located at NE1 and NE2.l Three branches (B1, B2, and B3) of user B are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively.

B2 and B3 do not need to communicate with each other.l The service of user A needs to be isolated from the service of user B.l The Ethernet equipment of user A and user B provides Ethernet optical ports that work

mode in auto-negotiation mode.l VLAN ID of the A1 and A2 services: 100l VLAN ID of the B1, B2 and B3 services: 200

Figure 10-28 Networking diagram for configuring EVPL and EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1qbridge)

NG WDM equipment

LEM24IU3

NE1

NE3NE2

VCTRUNCK

PORT7

PORT7

VCTRUNK1VLAN 200VB1

B3

B2

A2

PORT8

PORT7

A1 B1

VCTRUNK2

LEM24IU3

LEM24IU3

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with one LEM24 board that supportsthe IEEE 802.1q bridge.

The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with one LEM24 board each. The EPL and EVPLservices are configured to be transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.11.2 Service Signals FlowThe Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and taggedwith the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port through



356

Layer 2 switching, the VLAN IDs are stripped and then the services are transparently transmittedin the SDH network. In this way, the node communicates with a remote node.

Figure 10-29 shows the signal flow of the EVPL and EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge).

Figure 10-29 Service signal flow of the EVPL and EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

LEM24

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

PORT7

ONE 2

PORT7

PORT8

LEM24

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

ONE 1

(VCTRUNCK 2)VLAN 200

EVPL 1(IN1/OUT1)-1(VCTRUNCK 1)

(VCTRUNCK 1)

ONE 3

PORT7

LEM24

1(IN1/OUT1)-1(VCTRUNCK 1)

EPL

VLAN 100

User A1

User B1

User A2

User B2

User B3

:WDM-side working service :Working service direction:Client-side working service



Board LEM24 LEM24 LEM24


Port Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

MaximumFrame Length

1522 1522 1522 1522

TAG Tag Aware - - -

Entry Detection Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Default VLANID

0 - - -




Board LEM24 LEM24 LEM24





357


Entry Detection Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled

Default VLANID

100 200 - -


Table 10-21 Parameters of the EVPL services

Parameter EVPL Service of NE1

Board EGSH

Service Type EVPL

Service Direction Bidirectional

Source Port PORT7

Source C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) 100

Sink Port VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) 100

Table 10-22 Parameters of the EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1q bridge) services


VB Name VB1

VB Type 802.1q




VB Mount Port PORT7, VCTRUNK1,VCTRUNK2

VLAN Filtering VLAN Filtering VLAN filtering table 1

VLAN ID 200

Forwarding Physical Port PORT7, VCTRUNK1,VCTRUNK2

Hub/Spoke PORT7 HUB

VCTRUNK1 Spoke



358


VCTRUNK2 Spoke

10.11.3 Configuration ProcessThis section describes how to configure an EPLAN service through an example in which stationB transmits the EPLAN service to station D. The case that station D transmits the EPLAN serviceto station B is similar, and thus is not described in this section.

PrerequisiteYou must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EVPL Serviceand Configuration Process of the EVPLAN Service.



Step 1 Configure the EVPL services form user A1 to user A2 on NE1. For the operation procedures,see 10.7 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDMNetwork.

Step 2 Configure the EVPLAN services of user B1 and user B3. For the operation procedures, see 10.9Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDMNetwork.

Step 3 Configure the EVPL services on NE2. For the operation procedures, see 10.7 ConfigurationExample: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM Network.

Step 4 Configure the EPL services on NE3. For the operation procedures, see 10.6 ConfigurationExample: Configuring EPL Services.

Step 5 Verify the service configurations. For the verification procedure, see Testing Ethernet ServiceChannels in the Commissioning Guide.



Option Description




----End



359

10.12 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services ona SDH Network

EPL services provide the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission solution where thebandwidth is occupied exclusively. EPL services are applicable when the communicationequipment that is used to access the client-side data in the transmission network does not supportVLAN or when the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.

10.12.1 Networking DiagramThe completely isolated data services of two users at a station must be transported to anotherstation.

Service RequirementOn the network shown in Figure 10-30, the service requirements are as follows:

l The two branches of user A that are located at NE1 and NE3 need to communicate witheach other over Ethernet. A 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.

l The two branches of user B that are located at NE1 and NE3 need to communicate witheach other over Ethernet. A 200 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.

l The services of user A must be isolated from the services of user B.l The Ethernet equipment of user A and user B provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical

interfaces that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.



360

Figure 10-30 Networking diagram of the EPL services

NE3

NE2

NE1

NE4

User A2

PORT1 PORT2

PORT1 PORT2

VCTRUNK

User A1 User B1

User B2

1-SLQ644-EGSH

Line BoardEthernet Board


Line BoardLine Board

1-SLQ6417-SLQ64

17-SLQ644-EGSH

17

1

1

17

OptiX OSN 8800

10.12.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot AllocationEthernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port, andmapped into the SDH network for transparent transmission. In this manner, the nodecommunicates with a remote node.

The signal flow of the EPL services and the timeslot allocation to the EPL services are shownin Figure 10-31.

Figure 10-31 Signal flow and timeslot allocation (Ethernet switching board)

VCTRUNK1 VC4--xv:VC4-1

VCTRUNK2

VC4--xv:VC4-2 VC4--xv:VC4-3

SDH

NE1

VCTRUNK1 VC4--xv:VC4-1

PORT1

NE3

User A2

VCTRUNK2 PORT2User B2

VC4:VC4-2 VC4:VC4-3

VC4:VC4-1

EGSH EGSH

PORT1

PORT2

User A1

User B1

NE2

VC4--xv:VC4-2 VC4--xv:VC4-3



361

l The EPL services of user A:

– Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE3 and passthrough NE2.

– Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH boardof NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE3.

l The EPL services of user B:

– Occupy the second and third VC-4s (VC4:VC4-2 and VC4:VC4-3) on the SDH linkbetween NE1 and NE3 and pass through NE2.

– Are added and dropped by using the second and third VC-4s (VC4-xv:VC4-2 and VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the second and third VC-4s (VC4-xv:VC4-2and VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGSH board of NE3.

Table 10-23 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE3

Board EGSH EGSH


Enabled/Disabled


Working Mode 1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

MaximumFrame Length

1522 1522 1522 1522

Entry Detection Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled


Table 10-24 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE3

Board EGSH EGSH

Internal Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

MappingProtocol

GFP GFP GFP GFP

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-2and VC4-xv:VC4-3

VC4-xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-2,VC4-xv:VC4-3

Entry Detection Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled




362

Table 10-25 Parameters of the EPL services

Parameter EPL Services of User A EPL Services of User B

Board EGSH

Service Type EPL


Source Port PORT1 PORT2

Source C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) Null Null

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Sink C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) Null Null

10.12.3 Configuration ProcessDuring the configuration of EPL services on Ethernet switching boards, you need to configureEthernet private line services. This topic describes the process of configuring Ethernet privateline services for Ethernet switching boards.

PrerequisiteThe Creating a Network task must be complete.

You must be familiar with 10.3.1 EPL Service Configuration Process.



Step 1 Configure the EPL services for user A1 and user B1 on NE1.1. Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used

by the services of user A1 and user B1.l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH and then choose Communication > Ethernet

Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.l Select External Port.l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the

Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parameter

Value in ThisExample

Description

Enabled/Disabled


PORT1 is used by the service of user A1.PORT2 is used by the service of user B1. Inthis example, Enabled/Disabled is set toEnabled for PORT1 and PORT2.



363

Parameter


Description

Working Mode

PORT1: 1000M Full-DuplexPORT2: 1000M Full-Duplex

In this example, the Ethernet service accessequipment of user A1 and user B1 supportsthe 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence,Working Mode is set to 1000M Full-Duplex for PORT1 and PORT2.

MaximumFrameLength

PORT1: 1522PORT2: 1522


MACLoopback



PHYLoopback



l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt thedefault values.

l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, theOperation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parameter


EntryDetection

PORT1: DisabledPORT2: Disabled

The services of user A1 and user B1 are EPLtransparent transmission services. Hence,you need not enable the entry detectionfunction to check the VLAN tags of thepackets. In this example, Entry Detectionneeds to be set to Disabled. When EntryDetection is set to Disabled, the parametersof TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLANPriority are invalid.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, theOperation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parameter


PortType


The UNI interface processes the tag attributeof IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. That is,the UNI interface processes and identifies theVLAN information of the accessed userpackets, according to the supported tag flag,namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.



364


page adopt the default values.2. Configure the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH

board) used by the services of user A1 and user B1.l Select Internal Port.l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the


Parameter


EntryDetection

VCTRUNK1: DisabledVCTRUNK2: Disabled

The services of user A1 and user B1 are EPLtransparent transmission services. Hence,you need not enable the entry detectionfunction to check the VLAN tags of thepackets. In this example, Entry Detectionneeds to be set to Disabled. When EntryDetection is set to Disabled, the parametersof TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLANPriority are invalid. Hence, it isrecommended that this parameter adopts thedefault value.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the


Parameter


PortType


The UNI interface processes the tag attributeof IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. That is,the UNI interface processes and identifies theVLAN information of the accessed userpackets, according to the supported tag flag,namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,

the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parameter


MappingProtocol

VCTRUNK1: GFPVCTRUNK2: GFP

In this example, the EGSH board is used.This parameter adopts the default valueGFP. Mapping Protocol of theVCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of theinterconnected equipment at both ends mustbe set to the same value.



365

Parameter


Scramble

VCTRUNK1:Scrambling mode[X43+1]VCTRUNK2:Scrambling mode[X43+1]

In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value Scrambling mode[X43+1].Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on theEthernet boards of the interconnectedequipment at both ends must be set to thesame value.

CheckFieldLength

VCTRUNK1: FCS32VCTRUNK2: FCS32

In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value FCS32. Check Field Lengthof the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards ofthe interconnected equipment at both endsmust be set to the same value.

FCSCalculated BitSequence

VCTRUNK1: Big endianVCTRUNK2: Big endian

When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCSCalculated Bit Sequence is set to Bigendian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence ofthe VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards ofthe interconnected equipment at both endsmust be set to the same value.

ExtensionHeaderOption

VCTRUNK1: NoVCTRUNK2: No

When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, thisparameter is valid and adopts the defaultvalue No. Extension Header Option of theVCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of theinterconnected equipment at both ends mustbe set to the same value.

l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click

Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parameter


Enabling LCAS


In this example, the LCAS function isenabled.

LCASMode

VCTRUNK1: HuaweiModeVCTRUNK2: HuaweiMode

In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value Huawei Mode. When Huaweiequipment is used at both ends, LCASMode of the equipment at both ends is set toHuawei Mode.

HOTime(ms)

VCTRUNK1: 2000VCTRUNK2: 2000

In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value 2000. This parameter can alsobe set according to the requirement of theuser.

WTRTime (s)


In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value 300. This parameter can also beset according to the requirement of the user.



366

Parameter


TSD VCTRUNK1: DisabledVCTRUNK2: Disabled

In this example, the TSD function is disabled.The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error orBIP status of the VCTRUNK members.

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the following

parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click

and click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. ClickClose in the Operation dialog box that is displayed.

User Parameter Value inThisExample

Description

UserA1←→userA2

Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK

VCTRUNK1 is used by the service betweenuser A1 and user A2.

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service between user A1 and user A2uses a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, oneVC-4 needs to be bound.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service between user A1 and user A2 isa bidirectional service.

AvailableResources

VC4-1 -

UserB1←→userB2

Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK

VCTRUNK2 is used by the service betweenuser B1 and user B2.

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service between user B1 and user B2 usesa 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4sneed to be bound.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service between user B1 and user B2 isa bidirectional service.



367


Description

AvailableResources

VC4-2,VC4-3

The service between user B1 and user B2 usesa 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4sneeds to be bound.

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tabpage adopt the default values.

3. Configure the Ethernet private line services for user A1 and user B1.

l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH and then choose Communication > Ethernet

Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click .

l Click New on the lower-right pane to display the Create Ethernet Line Service dialogbox. Set the following parameters, and then click OK. The Operation Result dialogbox is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.


Description

User A1 ServiceType

EPL The service of user A1 is an EPL service.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service of user A1 is a bidirectionalservice.

Source Port PORT1 When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specific PORT asthe source port. In this example, the service ofuser A1 occupies PORT1.

Source C-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)

Null In this example, the EPL service does not carrythe VLAN tag.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specificVCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,the service of user A1 occupies VCTRUNK1.

Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)


User B1 ServiceType

EPL The service of user B1 is an EPL service.



368


Description

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service of user B1 is a bidirectionalservice.

Source Port PORT2 When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specific PORT asthe source port. In this example, the service ofuser B1 occupies PORT2.



Sink Port VCTRUNK2

When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specificVCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,the service of user B1 occupies VCTRUNK2.



4. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user A1

and user B1.l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service

Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box.

Set the parameters that are required, and then click Apply. Then, the OperationResult dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description

User A1 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of userA1 is at the VC-4 level. The service levelmust be consistent with the level of the pathbound with the VCTRUNK.


The service of user A1 is a bidirectionalservice.

Source Slot 4-EGSH-1(SDH-1)

When you create a bidirectional SDHservice from an Ethernet board to a lineboard, it is recommended that you set theslot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.



369

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description


1 The value range of the source VC-4timeslots is consistent with the value ofAvailable Resources, which is set for thepaths bound with VCTRUNK1. In thisexample, the value of AvailableResources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot 17-SLQ64-1(SDH-1)

When you create a bidirectional SDHservice from an Ethernet board to a lineboard, it is recommended that you set theslot of the line board as the sink slot.


1 The value range of the sink timeslots can bethe same as or different from the valuerange of the source timeslots. The numberof sink timeslots, however, must beconsistent with the number of sourcetimeslots.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

User B1 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of userB1 is at the VC-4 level. The service levelmust be consistent with the level of the pathbound with the VCTRUNK.


The service of user B1 is a bidirectionalservice.




2-3 The value range of the source VC-4timeslots is consistent with the value ofAvailable Resources, which is set for thepaths bound with VCTRUNK1. In thisexample, the values of AvailableResources are VC4-2 and VC4-3.





370

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description


2-3 The value range of the sink timeslot can bethe same as or different from the valuerange of the source timeslot. The number ofsource timeslots must be, however, thesame as the number of sink timeslots.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 2 Configure the pass-through services for user A1 and user B1 on NE2.

1. Click . Select NE2 in the dialog box that is displayed. Then, click OK.2. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service

Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .3. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set

the parameters that are required, and then click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialogbox is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.


Description

Level VC4 The SDH service of NE1, which passes through NE2, isat the VC-4 level.

Direction Bidirectional The SDH service from NE1 to NE2 is a bidirectionalservice.

Source Slot 1-SLQ64-1(SDH-1)

The service signals are transmitted from 1-SLQ64-1(SDH-1) to 17-SLQ64-1(SDH-1). In this example,Source Slot is set to 1-SLQ64-1(SDH-1).


1-3 The service between user A1 and user B1 occupies threeVC-4s.


The service signals are transmitted from 1-SLQ64-1(SDH-1) to 17-SLQ64-1(SDH-1). In this example, SinkSlot is set to 17-SLQ64-1(SDH-1).


1-3 The service between user A1 and user B1 occupies threeVC-4s.



371


Description

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 3 Configure the EPL services for user A2 and user B2 on NE3.

Refer to Step 1 and configure the EPL services for user A2 and user B2.

Step 4 Check whether the service between user A1 and user A2 and the service between user B1 anduser B2 are correct. For the operation procedure, see Testing Ethernet Service Paths.


Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Second methods are available for the backup.

Option Description

The SCC board is not configured with anyCF card.

Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board

The SCC board is configured with a CFcard.

Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CFCard

----End

10.13 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ)Services on a SDH Network

The EVPL (QinQ) service provides an Ethernet private line solution. The services are applicablewhere the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed into a transmissionnetwork and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In the case of EVPL (QinQ)services, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added on the network side to isolate the services of differentusers from each other.

10.13.1 Networking DiagramWhen the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed on the samestation and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added toisolate the services of different users from each other.

Service Requirement


l Two branches of user J are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with eachother.



372

l Two branches of user K are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with eachother.

l The services of user J need to be isolated from the services of user K. The traffic of user Jand the traffic of user K, however, occupy a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth during different timeperiods.

l The Ethernet equipment of user J and user K provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical portsthat work in 1000M full-duplex mode. The services of all the users have the same VLANID of 100 and are accessed into the transmission network.

Figure 10-32 Networking diagram of the EVPL (QinQ) services

NE3

NE2

NE1

NE4

PORT1

User J2

PORT1

VCTRUNK

User J1

User K2

PORT2

PORT2

User K1VLAN 100

VLAN 100

VLAN 100

VLAN 100

17

1

17-SLQ64Line BoardEthernet Board 4-EGSH

1-SLQ64Line BoardEthernet Board 4-EGSH

OptiX OSN 8800

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, NE1 and NE2 are each configured with one EGSH board, which is an Ethernetswitching board supporting the QinQ function. Two layers of VLAN tags are added to isolatethe services of different users from each other.

l When the data of user J is accessed into the transmission network, the S-VLAN tags areadded to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the S-VLAN tags are stripped.

l When the data of user K is accessed into the transmission network, the S-VLAN tags areadded to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the S-VLAN tags are stripped.



373

10.13.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot AllocationThe services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed through differentexternal ports of the Ethernet board on the source node. After different S-VLAN tags are addedto the services, the services are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner, the servicesof different users are isolated from each other. After the services arrive at the sink node, the S-VLAN tags are stripped.

Figure 10-33 shows the signal flow of the EVPL (QinQ) services and the timeslot allocation tothe EVPL (QinQ) services.

Figure 10-33 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

PORT1

NE1:EGSH

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

PORT1

NE2:EGSH

SDH

User J1 EVPL1

VC4-xv:VC4-1VC4-xv:VC4-2EVPL2

EVPL1

EVPL2PORT2

User K1

User J2

PORT2 User K2VC4:VC4-1VC4:VC4-2

VLAN 100

VLAN 100

VLAN 100

VLAN 100VC4-xv:VC4-1VC4-xv:VC4-2

Add S-VLAN Label

PORT

Strip S-VLAN Label

VCTRUNK

Strip S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN(100)

C-VLAN(100)

User K1

User J1

S-VLAN(20) C-VLAN(100)


User K1

User J1

C-VLAN(100)

C-VLAN(100)

User K1

User J1

l The EVPL services of user J and user K that share VCTRUNK1 occupy the first VC-4(VC4:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.

l The EVPL services of user J and user K are added and dropped by using the first VC-4(VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE1 and thefirst VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board ofNE2.


Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGSH EGSH


Enabled/Disabled


Working Mode 1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

MaximumFrame Length

1522 1522 1522 1522

Port Type C-Aware C-Aware C-Aware C-Aware



374


Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGSH EGSH


Mapping Protocol GFP GFP

Port Type S-Aware S-Aware

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4-xv:VC4-2

VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4-xv:VC4-2

Table 10-28 Parameters of the EVPL (QinQ) services

Parameter NE1 NE2

EVPL1PORT1←→VCTRUNK1




Board EGSH EGSH

Service Type EVPL(QinQ) EVPL(QinQ)

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional Bidirectional

Operation Type Add S-VLAN Add S-VLAN

Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Source C-VLAN(e.g.1,3-6)

100 100 100 100

Source S-VLAN

- - - -

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1


100 100 100 100

Sink S-VLAN 10 20 10 20

C-VLANPriority

AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO

S-VLANPriority

AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO



375

10.13.3 Configuration ProcessThe Ethernet switching boards supporting the QinQ function need to be installed at the sourceand sink nodes and need to be configured with the EVPL services of different users. DifferentS-VLAN tags are added to the services of different users that have the same C-VLAN ID andare accessed through different ports on the Ethernet switching boards. In this manner, the servicesof different users are isolated from each other and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.


You must be familiar with EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process.

Procedure

Step 1 Configure the EVPL services for user J1 and user K1 on NE1.1. Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used

by the services of user J1 and user K1.l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet


Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.Click Close.

Parameter


Enabled/Disabled


PORT1 is used by the service of user J1.PORT2 is used by the service of user K1. Inthis example, Enabled/Disabled is set toEnabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

Working Mode


In this example, the Ethernet service accessequipment of user J1 and user K1 supportsthe 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence,Working Mode is set to 1000M Full-Duplex for PORT1 and PORT2.

MaximumFrameLength

PORT1: 1522PORT2: 1522


MACLoopback



PHYLoopback





376


l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, theOperation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.Click Close.

Parameter Value in This Example Description


The C-Aware port is used forconnecting to the client network, andidentifies and processes the packetsthat carry C-VLAN tags.

l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAGAttributes tab page are invalid. Hence, The parameters in the TAG Attributes tab pageneed not be set.


2. Set the attributes of the internal port (VCTRUNK1 on the EGSH board) used by the servicebetween user J1 and user J2 and the service between K1 and user K2.

l Select Internal Port.l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the


Parameter


PortType

VCTRUNK1: S-Aware The S-Aware port is used for connecting tothe supplier network, and identifies andprocesses the packets that carry S-VLANtags.

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.Click Close.

Parameter


MappingProtocol

VCTRUNK1: GFP Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs onthe Ethernet boards of the interconnectedequipment at both ends must be set to thesame value.

Scramble

VCTRUNK1:Scrambling mode[X43+1]




377

Parameter


CheckFieldLength

VCTRUNK1: FCS32 In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value FCS32. Check Field Lengthof the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards ofthe interconnected equipment at both endsmust be set to the same value.


VCTRUNK1: Big endian When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCSCalculated Bit Sequence is set to Bigendian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence ofthe VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards ofthe interconnected equipment at both endsmust be set to the same value.


VCTRUNK1: No When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, thisparameter is valid and adopts the defaultvalue No. Extension Header Option of theVCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of theinterconnected equipment at both ends mustbe set to the same value.


Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click Close.

Parameter


Enabling LCAS

VCTRUNK1: Enabled In this example, the LCAS function isenabled.

LCASMode

VCTRUNK1: HuaweiMode


HOTime(ms)

VCTRUNK1: 2000 In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value 2000. This parameter can alsobe set according to the requirement of theuser.

WTRTime(s)

VCTRUNK1: 300 In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value 300. This parameter can also beset according to the requirement of the user.

TSD VCTRUNK1: Disabled In this example, the TSD function is disabled.The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error orBIP status of the VCTRUNK members.



378

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the parameters in the

Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and then clickApply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the OperationResult dialog box that is displayed.

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description

UserJ1←→user J2UserK1←→userK2

Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1 is used by the service betweenuser J1 and user J2 and the service betweenuser K1 and user K2.

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service between user J1 and user J2 andthe service between user K1 and user K2 sharea 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4sneed to be bound.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service between user J1 and user J2 andthe service between user K1 and user K2 arebidirectional services.

AvailableResources

VC4-1,VC4-2

In this example, the first and second VC-4s ofthe EGSH board are bound.

l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAG

Attributes tab page are invalid. Hence, The parameters in the TAG Attributes tab pageneed not be set.


3. Configure the Ethernet private line services between user J1 and user J2 and between userK1 and user K2.l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.l Select Display QinQ Shared Service on the lower-right pane. Then, click New.l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box that is displayed.

Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click Close.


Description

User J1←→user J2

ServiceType

EVPL(QinQ)

The service between user J1 and user J2 is anEVPL (QinQ) service.



379


Description

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service between user J1 and user J2 is abidirectional service.

OperationType

Add S-VLAN

The service between user J1 and user J2 andthe service between user K1 and user K2carry the same C-VLAN tag. Hence, a layerof S-VLAN tag needs to be added to isolatethe services of different users.

Source Port PORT1 When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specific PORTas the source port. In this example, PORT1is the external port used by the servicebetween user J1 and user J2.

Source C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)

100 The Ethernet service of user J1 carries the C-VLAN ID of 100.

Source S-VLAN

- The data packets that are accessed into theexternal port carry the C-VLAN tags but donot carry the S-VLAN tags.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specificVCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by theservice between user J1 and user J2.



Sink S-VLAN

10 According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID of 10needs to be added to the service between userJ1 and user J2.

C-VLANPriority

AUTO In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value.

S-VLANPriority


User K1←→user K2

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service between user K1 and user K2 isa bidirectional service.



380


Description

OperationType

Add S-VLAN


Source Port PORT2 When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specific PORTas the source port. In this example, PORT2is the external port used by the servicebetween user K1 and user K2.

Source C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)

100 The Ethernet service of user K1 carries theC-VLAN ID of 100.

Source S-VLAN


Sink Port VCTRUNK1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specificVCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by theservice between user K1 and user K2.



Sink S-VLAN

20 According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID of 20needs to be added to the service between userK1 and user K2.

C-VLANPriority


S-VLANPriority


4. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user J1and user K1.

l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service

Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .

l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box.Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result isdisplayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.



381

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description

User J1←→user J2User K1←→user K2

Level VC4 The timeslots bound with the servicebetween user J1 and user J2 and the servicebetween user K1 and user K2 are at theVC-4 level. The service level must beconsistent with the level of the paths boundwith the VCTRUNK.





SourceTimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2 The value range of the source timeslots isconsistent with the value of AvailableResources, which is set for the paths boundwith VCTRUNK1. In this example, thevalues of Available Resources are VC4-1and VC4-2.



SinkTimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2 The value range of the sink timeslots can bethe same as or different from the valuerange of the source timeslots. The numberof sink timeslots, however, must beconsistent with the number of sourcetimeslots.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 2 Configure the EVPL service of NE2.

Refer to Step 1 and configure the EVPL service of NE2. The procedures and parameters forconfiguring the EVPL service of NE2 are the same as the procedures and parameters forconfiguring the EVPL service of NE1.

Step 3 Check whether the services between NE1 and NE2 are configured correctly. For the operationprocedures, see Testing Ethernet Service Paths.

l Before testing the service connectivity between user J1 and user J2, set TAG to Access andDefault VLAN ID to 100 for PORT1 on the EGSH board.



382

l Before testing the service connectivity between user K1 and user K2, set TAG to Access andDefault VLAN ID to 100 for PORT2 on the EGSH board.

NOTE

After the test, change the parameter values back to the values specified in the service configuration.


Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description





----End

10.14 Configuration Example: Configuring PORT-SharedEVPL (VLAN) Services on a SDH Network

The PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) service is applicable when the services of multiple users,which are received from the same external port on the Ethernet board at a station, need to betransmitted on different VCTRUNKs to another station or to another external port of the station.

10.14.1 Networking DiagramThe services of multiple users, which are received from the same external port on an Ethernetboard of a station, need to be transmitted to different stations on different VCTRUNKs.

Service RequirementOn the network shown in Figure 10-34, the service requirements are as follows:

l The headquarters C1 of user C is located at NE1. Two branches (C2 and C3) of user C arelocated at NE2 and NE4. The services between C1 and C2 are transmitted in the VLAN ofwhich the VLAN ID is 100. The services between C1 and C3 are transmitted in the VLANof which the VLAN ID is 200.

l The services of C2 are isolated from the services of C3. The services of C2 and C3 requirea 100 Mbit/s bandwidth respectively.

l The Ethernet equipment of C1, C2, and C3 provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical ports thatwork in 1000M full-duplex mode. The Ethernet equipment of C1 supports VLAN tags, butthe Ethernet equipment of C2 and C3 does not support VLAN tags.– The VLAN ID used by the Ethernet services between C1 and C2 is 100.– The VLAN ID used by the Ethernet services between C1 and C3 is 200.



383

Figure 10-34 Networking diagram for configuring PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

T2000

NE3

NE2

NE1

NE4

PORT1



User C1

User C2User C3

PORT1 PORT1

17-JL6415-EGT6

1-JL6415-EGT6

VCTRUNK

VLAN 100

VLAN 200

17

Line Board 17-SLQ64Line Board 1-SLQ64

Ethernet Board 4-EGSH

17 1

1

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 8800

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, NE1 is configured with an EGSH board. VLAN IDs are used to isolate the dataof different users that are received from the same port. NE2 and NE4 are configured with anEGT6 board each. The EPL services are configured to implement service transparenttransmission from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

NOTEThe Ethernet boards are classified into the Ethernet transparent transmission boards and Ethernet switchingboards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent transmission boards supportonly EPL services whereas the Ethernet switching boards support EPL services, EVPL services, and Layer2 switching. Hence, Ethernet switching boards are used more widely than Ethernet transparent transmissionboards.

10.14.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot AllocationThe Ethernet services wherein different VLAN IDs are used to isolate the data of different users,are received from the same external port of NE1, encapsulated through an internal port, and thentransparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with aremote node.

Figure 10-35 shows the signal flow of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services and thetimeslot allocation to the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services.



384


PORT1

NE1:EGSH

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2 VC4-xv:VC4-2

VCTRUNK1VC4-xv:VC4-1

PORT1

NE2:EGT6

SDH

User C1

User C2

EVPL1 VC4-xv:VC4-1

EVPL2

EPL


PORT1

NE4:EGT6

User C3EPL

VC4:VC4-1

VC4:VC4-1

l The EVPL service from C1 to C2:

– Occupies the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.– Is added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of

NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE2.l The EVPL service from C1 to C3:

– Occupies the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4.– Is added and dropped by using the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board

of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE4.



Board EGSH EGT6 EGT6


Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex

Maximum FrameLength

1522 1522 1522

TAG Tag Aware - -

Entry Detection Enabled - -

Port Type UNI - -






385



MappingProtocol

GFP GFP GFP GFP


Entry Detection Enabled Enabled - -

Default VLANID

100 200 - -

VLAN Priority 0 0 - -

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1

Port Type UNI UNI - -

Table 10-31 Parameters of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

Parameter NE1

EVPL1(PORT1←→VCTRUNK1)

EVPL2(PORT1←→VCTRUNK2)

Board EGSH

Service Type EVPL


Source Port PORT1 PORT1

Source C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) 100 200

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Sink C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) 100 200

10.14.3 Configuration ProcessEthernet switching boards are required for creating EVPL services of different VLAN IDs onNE1. In this manner, the data of different users, which are received from the same external port,can be differentiated. Ethernet transparent transmission boards are required for creating EPLtransparent transmission services on NE2 and NE4.


You must be familiar with 10.3.2 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process.



386



Step 1 Configure the EVPL services for user C1 on NE1.1. Configure the attributes of the external port (PORT1 of the EGSH board) used by the service

of user C1.l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH and then choose Communication > Ethernet



Parameter


Enabled/Disabled

PORT1: Enabled The service of user C1 occupies PORT1. Inthis example, Enabled/Disabled is set toEnabled.

Working Mode

PORT1: 1000M Full-Duplex

The Ethernet service access equipment ofuser C1 supports the 1000M full-duplexmode. In this example, Working Mode is setto Auto-Negotiation.

MaximumFrameLength

PORT1: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the defaultvalue 1522.

MACLoopback

PORT1: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for faultdiagnosis. In this example, MACLoopback is set to Non-Loopback.

PHYLoopback

PORT1: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for faultdiagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopbackis set to Non-Loopback.


default values.l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the




387

Parameter


TAG PORT1: Tag Aware When the port is set to Tag Aware, all dataframes transmitted and received at the portmust carry VLAN tags. In this example,TAG is set to Tag Aware.

DefaultVLANID

- When TAG is set to Tag Aware, you neednot set Default VLAN ID.

VLANPriority

- When TAG is set to Tag Aware, you neednot set VLAN Priority.

EntryDetection

PORT1: Enabled The services of user C1 is EVPL services.Hence, the entry detection function must beenabled to check whether the data framescarry VLAN tags. In this manner, the userdata frames with different VLAN tags can bedistinguished at one port. In this example,Entry Detection of PORT1 is set toEnabled.



Parameter


PortType

PORT1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,namely, the interface of the service providerlocated near the user side. The UNI interfaceprocesses the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. That is, the UNI interfaceprocesses and identifies the VLANinformation of the accessed user packets,according to the supported tag flags, namelyTag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.


page adopt the default values.2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board)

used by the services between user C1 and user C2 and between user C1 and user C3.l Select Internal Port.l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the




388

Parameter


TAG VCTRUNK1: AccessVCTRUNK2: Access

This parameter is set to Access if the Ethernetequipment of user C2 and user C3 does notsupport VLAN tags and if the transmittedpackets do not carry VLAN tags.

DefaultVLANID


According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to100 on the transmission network side for theEthernet services between user C1 and userC2.The VLAN ID is set to 200 on thetransmission network side for the Ethernetservices between user C1 and user C3.

VLANPriority


In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value.

EntryDetection


The services of user C1, user C2 and user C3are EVPL services. Hence, the entrydetection function must be enabled to checkwhether the received packets carry VLANtags.



Parameter


PortType




the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parameter


MappingProtocol


Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs onthe Ethernet boards of the interconnectedequipment at both ends must be set to thesame value.



389

Parameter


Scramble



CheckFieldLength











Parameter


Enabling LCAS



LCASMode



HOTime(ms)



WTRTime (s)





390

Parameter






and click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. ClickClose in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.


Description

UserC1←→userC2

Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK1

As shown in Figure 10-35, VCTRUNK1 isused by the service between user C1 and userC2.

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service between user C1 and user C2 usesa 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4needs to be bound.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service between user C1 and user C2 is abidirectional service.

AvailableResources

VC4-1 In this example, Available Resources is setto VC4-1.

UserC1←→userC3

Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK2

As shown in Figure 10-35, VCTRUNK2 isused by the service between user C1 and userC3.

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service between user C1 and user C3 usesa 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4needs to be bound.



391


Description

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional


AvailableResources

VC4-2 In this example, Available Resources is setto VC4-2.


3. Configure the Ethernet private line services between user C1 and user C2 and between userC1 and user C3.

l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click .

l Click New on the lower-right pane to display the Create Ethernet Line Service dialogbox. Set the following parameters, and then click OK. The Operation Result dialogbox is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.


Description

User C1←→userC2

ServiceType

EPL The service between user C1 and C2 is a point-to-point Ethernet private line service.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional


Source Port PORT1 When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specific PORT asthe source port. PORT1 is the external portused by the service between user C1 and userC2.


100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to100 for the Ethernet service between user C1and user C2.



392


Description

Sink Port VCTRUNK1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specificVCTRUNK as the sink port. VCTRUNK1 isthe internal port used by the service betweenuser C1 and user C2.



User C1←→userC3

ServiceType

EPL The service between user C1 and user C3 is apoint-to-point Ethernet private line service.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional


Source Port PORT1 When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specific PORT asthe source port. PORT1 is the external portused by the service between user C1 and userC3.



Sink Port VCTRUNK2

When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specificVCTRUNK as the sink port. VCTRUNK2 isthe internal port used by the service betweenuser C1 and user C2.



4. Configure the cross-connections from Ethernet services (between user C1 and user C2 and

between user C1 and user C3) to the SDH links.l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service


Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialogbox is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.



393

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description

User C1←→user C2

Level VC4 The timeslots bound with the servicebetween user C1 and user C2 is at the VC-4level. The service level must be consistentwith the level of the paths bound with theVCTRUNK.


The service between user C1 and user C2 isa bidirectional service.




1 The value range of the source timeslots isconsistent with the value of AvailableResources, which is set for the paths boundwith VCTRUNK1. In this example, thevalue of Available Resources is VC4-1.





ActivateImmediately

Yes -

User C1←→user C3

Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the servicebetween user C1 and user C3 is at the VC-4level. The service level must be consistentwith the level of the paths bound with theVCTRUNK.


The service between user C1 and user C3 isa bidirectional service.





394

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description







ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 2 Configure the EPL services of NE2 and NE4.NOTEThe Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. SeeConfiguration Guide (on a SDH Network) to set the parameters.

Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see TestingEthernet Service Paths.l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters C1 and branch C2, set TAG to

Access and Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT1 on the EGSH board.l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters C1 and branch C3, set TAG to

Access and Default VLAN ID to 200 for PORT1 on the EGSH board.NOTE




Option Description





----End



395

10.15 Configuration Example: Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services on a SDH Network

When the services of multiple users that do not carry VLAN tags are accessed into a transmissionnetwork and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN)service is used to isolate the services of different users by adding VLAN tags. In this manner,the bandwidth is shared on the SDH side.

10.15.1 Networking DiagramThe services of multiple Ethernet users are accessed on the same station, transmitted on the sameVCTRUNK, and isolated by using different VLAN IDs. In this manner, the bandwidth is sharedon the SDH side.


l Two branches of user D are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with eachother.

l Two branches of user E are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with eachother.

l The services of user D need to be isolated from the services of user E. The traffic of userD and the traffic of user E, however, occupy a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth during different timeperiod.

l The Ethernet equipment of user D and user E provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical portsthat work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.



396

Figure 10-36 Networking diagram for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

NE3

NE2

NE1

NE4

PORT1

User D2

PORT1

VCTRUNK

User D1

User E2

PORT2

PORT2 User E1



1

17

17-SLQ644-EGSH

1-SLQ644-EGSH

OptiX OSN 8800

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, NE1 and NE2 are each configured with an EGSH board. Different VLAN IDsare used to isolate the data of different users transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.

l When the data of user D is accessed into the transmission network, the VLAN ID of 100is added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, theVLAN tag is stripped.

l When the data of user E is accessed into the transmission network, the VLAN ID of 200 isadded to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the VLANtag is stripped.

10.15.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot AllocationThe services of multiple users are received from different external ports on an Ethernet board,tagged with different VLAN IDs, and then transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner,the services of different users are isolated from each other. After the data arrives at the sink node,the VLAN tags are stripped.

Figure 10-37 shows the signal flow of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services and thetimeslot allocation to the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services.



397


PORT1

NE1:EGSH

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

PORT1

NE2:EGSH

SDH

User D1 EVPL1

VC4-xv:VC4-1EVPL2

EVPL1

EVPL2PORT2

User E1

User D2

PORT2User E2 VC4:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1

l The EVPL services of user D and user E that share VCTRUNK1 occupy the first VC-4(VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.

l The EVPL services are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on theEGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE2.


Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGSH EGSH


Enabled/Disabled



1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

MaximumFrame Length

1522 1522 1522 1522

TAG Access Access Access Access

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Default VLANID

100 200 100 200

VLAN Priority 0 0 0 0



Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGSH EGSH


Mapping Protocol GFP GFP



398

Parameter NE1 NE2

TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1

Port Type UNI UNI

Table 10-34 Parameters of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

Parameter NE1 NE2





Board EGSH EGSH

Service Type EVPL EVPL

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Source C-VLAN(e.g.1,3-6)

100 200 100 200

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1


100 200 100 200

10.15.3 Configuration ProcessThe Ethernet switching boards supporting the QinQ function need to be installed at the sourceand sink nodes and need to be configured with the EVPL services of different users. DifferentS-VLAN tags are added to the services of different users that have the same C-VLAN ID andare accessed through different ports on the Ethernet switching boards. In this manner, the servicesof different users are isolated from each other and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.


You must be familiar with 10.3.2 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process.




399


Step 1 Configure the EVPL services for user J1 and user K1 on NE1.1. Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used

by the services of user J1 and user K1.

l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > EthernetInterface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

l Select External Port.l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the


Parameter


Enabled/Disabled


PORT1 is used by the service of user J1.PORT2 is used by the service of user K1. Inthis example, Enabled/Disabled is set toEnabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

Working Mode


In this example, the Ethernet service accessequipment of user J1 and user K1 supportsthe 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence,Working Mode is set to 1000M Full-Duplex for PORT1 and PORT2.

MaximumFrameLength

PORT1: 1522PORT2: 1522


MACLoopback



PHYLoopback




l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, theOperation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.Click Close.



The C-Aware port is used forconnecting to the client network, andidentifies and processes the packetsthat carry C-VLAN tags.



400

l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAGAttributes tab page are invalid. Hence, the parameters in the TAG Attributes tab pagedo not need to be set.


2. Set the attributes of the internal port (VCTRUNK1 on the EGSH board) used by the servicebetween user J1 and user J2 and the service between K1 and user K2.l Select Internal Port.l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the


Parameter


PortType

VCTRUNK1: S-Aware The S-Aware port is used for connecting tothe supplier network, and identifies andprocesses the packets that carry S-VLANtags.


the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.Click Close.

Parameter


MappingProtocol

VCTRUNK1: GFP Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs onthe Ethernet boards of the interconnectedequipment at both ends must be set to thesame value.

Scramble

VCTRUNK1:Scrambling mode[X43+1]


CheckFieldLength

VCTRUNK1: FCS32 In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value FCS32. Check Field Lengthof the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards ofthe interconnected equipment at both endsmust be set to the same value.


VCTRUNK1: Big endian When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCSCalculated Bit Sequence is set to Bigendian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence ofthe VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards ofthe interconnected equipment at both endsmust be set to the same value.



401

Parameter



VCTRUNK1: No When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, thisparameter is valid and adopts the defaultvalue No. Extension Header Option of theVCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of theinterconnected equipment at both ends mustbe set to the same value.


Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click Close.

Parameter


Enabling LCAS

VCTRUNK1: Enabled In this example, the LCAS function isenabled.

LCASMode

VCTRUNK1: HuaweiMode


HOTime(ms)

VCTRUNK1: 2000 In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value 2000. This parameter can alsobe set according to the requirement of theuser.

WTRTime(s)

VCTRUNK1: 300 In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value 300. This parameter can also beset according to the requirement of the user.

TSD VCTRUNK1: Disabled In this example, the TSD function is disabled.The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error orBIP status of the VCTRUNK members.


Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and then clickApply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the OperationResult dialog box that is displayed.

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description

UserJ1←→user J2

Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1 is used by the service betweenuser J1 and user J2 and the service betweenuser K1 and user K2.



402

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description

UserK1←→userK2

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service between user J1 and user J2 andthe service between user K1 and user K2 sharea 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4sneed to be bound.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional


AvailableResources

VC4-1,VC4-2

In this example, the first and second VC-4s ofthe EGSH board are bound.

l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAGAttributes tab page are invalid. Hence, the parameters in the TAG Attributes tab pagedo not need to be set.


3. Configure the Ethernet private line services between user J1 and user J2 and between userK1 and user K2.

l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > EthernetService > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

l Select Display QinQ Shared Service on the lower-right pane. Then, click New.

l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click Close.


Description

User J1←→user J2

ServiceType

EVPL(QinQ)

The service between user J1 and user J2 is anEVPL (QinQ) service.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service between user J1 and user J2 is abidirectional service.

OperationType

Add S-VLAN




403


Description

Source Port PORT1 When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specific PORTas the source port. In this example, PORT1is the external port used by the servicebetween user J1 and user J2.



Source S-VLAN


Sink Port VCTRUNK1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specificVCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by theservice between user J1 and user J2.



Sink S-VLAN

10 According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID of 10needs to be added to the service between userJ1 and user J2.

C-VLANPriority


S-VLANPriority


User K1←→user K2

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service between user K1 and user K2 isa bidirectional service.

OperationType

Add S-VLAN


Source Port PORT2 When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specific PORTas the source port. In this example, PORT2is the external port used by the servicebetween user K1 and user K2.



404


Description



Source S-VLAN


Sink Port VCTRUNK1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it isrecommended that you use a specificVCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by theservice between user K1 and user K2.



Sink S-VLAN

20 According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID of 20needs to be added to the service between userK1 and user K2.

C-VLANPriority


S-VLANPriority


4. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user J1

and user K1.l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service


Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result isdisplayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description

User J1←→user J2User K1←→user K2

Level VC4 The timeslots bound with the servicebetween user J1 and user J2 and the servicebetween user K1 and user K2 are at theVC-4 level. The service level must beconsistent with the level of the paths boundwith the VCTRUNK.



405

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description











ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 2 Configure the EVPL service of NE2.

Refer to Step 1 and configure the EVPL service of NE2. The procedures and parameters forconfiguring the EVPL service of NE2 are the same as the procedures and parameters forconfiguring the EVPL service of NE1.

Step 3 Check whether the services between NE1 and NE2 are configured correctly. For the operationprocedures, see Testing Ethernet Service Paths.l Before testing the service connectivity between user J1 and user J2, set TAG to Access and

Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT1 on the EGSH board.l Before testing the service connectivity between user K1 and user K2, set TAG to Access and

Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT2 on the EGSH board.

NOTE





406


Option Description





----End

10.16 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services(IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a SDH Network

The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipointconvergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication equipmentconnected to the transmission network does not support VLAN tags or where the VLAN planningcannot be disclosed to the network operator.

10.16.1 Networking DiagramThe convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.The two access nodes need not communicate with each other.


l Three branches (F1, F2, and F3) of user F are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4. F1 needs tocommunicate with F2 and F3, and requires a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth for communicationwith each branch.

l The Ethernet equipment of user F provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical ports that work in1000M full-duplex mode and support VLAN tags. The VLAN IDs and the number ofVLANs, however, are unknown and may be changed.

NOTE

The application scenarios where one branch needs to communicate with other branches are as follows:

l Branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other.

l Branches F2 and F3 need not communicate with each other.

If branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other, skip Step 1.4.



407

Figure 10-38 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

F1

PORT1

NE3

NE2

NE1

NE4

VCTRUNK

F3

PORT1

F2

PORT1

PORT1

VCTRUNK1

VBVCTRUNK

2


17-SLQ644-EGSH

Line Board 1-SLQ64


1-SL6415-EGT2


17-SL6415-EGT2

1

1

17

17

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 8800

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with an EGSH board that supports theIEEE 802.1d bridge, thus implementing EPLAN services wherein user VLANs are not limited.

The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with a EGT2 board each. The EPL services areconfigured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.16.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot AllocationThe Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port, forwarded toan internal port through Layer 2 switching, encapsulated, and transparently transmitted on theSDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.

Figure 10-39 shows the signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) and thetimeslot allocation to the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge).



408

Figure 10-39 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation

PORT1

NE1:EGSH

VCTRUNK1


SDH

User F1

VB1

VC4-xv:VC4-1


NE2:EGT2

VCTRUNK1

VC4-xv:VC4-1

NE4:EGT2

VC4:VC4-1

VC4:VC4-1

PORT1User F2

PORT1User F3

l The Ethernet LAN services of user F occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH linkbetween NE1 and NE2 and the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1and NE4.

l The Ethernet LAN services between NE1 and NE2 are added and dropped by using thefirst VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT2 board of NE2.

l The Ethernet LAN services between NE1 and NE4 are added and dropped by using thesecond VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT2 board of NE4.





Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex

Maximum FrameLength

1522 1522 1522

Entry Detection Enabled - -

TAG Tag Aware - -

Port Type UNI - -






409



MappingProtocol

GFP GFP GFP GFP

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled - -

TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware - -

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1

Port Type UNI UNI - -

Table 10-37 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

Parameter Ethernet LAN Service of NE1

Board EGSH

VB Name VB1

Bridge Type IEEE 802.1d

Bridge Switch Mode SVL/Ingress Filter Disable

Bridge Learning Mode SVL

Ingress Filter Disabled

VB Mount Port PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub

VCTRUNK1 Spoke

VCTRUNK2 Spoke

10.16.3 Configuration ProcessAt the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge). Atthe access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure only transparent transmission EPLservices.


You must be familiar with EPLAN Service Configuration Process.



410

Procedure

Step 1 Configure the EPLAN services for user F1, user F2, and user F3 on NE1.1. Configure the attributes of the external port (PORT1 of the EGSH board) used by the service

of user F1.l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.l Select External Port.l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click


Parameter


Description

Enabled/Disabled

PORT1: Enabled In this example, PORT1 carries the servicesand Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled forPORT1.

Working Mode

PORT1: 1000M Full-Duplex

The Ethernet service access equipment ofuser F1 supports the 1000M full-duplexmode. In this example, Working Mode is setto Auto-Negotiation.

MaximumFrameLength

PORT1: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the defaultvalue 1522.

MACLoopback

PORT1: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for faultdiagnosis. In this example, MACLoopback is set to Non-Loopback.

PHYLoopback

PORT1: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for faultdiagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopbackis set to Non-Loopback.


default values.l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click


Parameter


TAG PORT1: Tag Aware The service access equipment of user F1supports VLAN tags and the transmitted dataframes carry VLAN tags. In this example,TAG is set to Tag Aware for PORT1.

DefaultVLANID




411

Parameter


VLANPriority


EntryDetection

PORT1: Enabled The services of user F1 is EPLAN services.Hence, the entry detection function must beenabled to check whether the packets carryVLAN tags. In this example, EntryDetection is set to Enabled.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter


PortType

PORT1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,namely, the interface of the service providerlocated near the user side. The UNI interfaceprocesses the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. That is, the UNI interfaceprocesses and identifies the VLANinformation of the accessed user packets,according to the supported tag flags, namelyTag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.


2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board)used by the services of user F2 and user F3 on NE1.

l Select Internal Port.

l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, clickClose in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter


TAG VCTRUNK1: Tag AwareVCTRUNK2: Tag Aware

The service access equipment of user F2 anduser F3 supports VLAN tags and thetransmitted data frames carry VLAN tags. Inthis example, TAG is set to Tag Aware forVCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.

DefaultVLANID


VLANPriority




412

Parameter


EntryDetection


The services of user F2 and user F3 areEPLAN services. Hence, the entry detectionfunction must be enabled to check whetherthe packets carry VLAN tags. In thisexample, Entry Detection is set toEnabled.



Parameter


PortType





Parameter


MappingProtocol



Scramble



CheckFieldLength





413

Parameter









Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter


Enabling LCAS



LCASMode



HOTime(ms)



WTRTime(s)







and then click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. ClickClose in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.



414


Description

UserF2

Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1 of the EGSH board is used bythe service of user F2.

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service of user F2 uses a 100 Mbit/sbandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to bebound.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service of user F2 is a bidirectionalservice.

AvailableResources

VC4-1 -

UserF3

Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board is used bythe service of user F3.

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service of user F3 uses a 100 Mbit/sbandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to bebound.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional


AvailableResources

VC4-2 -


page adopt the default values.3. Create a bridge for the EGSH board on NE1.


l Click New.



415

l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.


Description


VB Type 802.1d The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge learns and forwardsthe packets according to the MAC addresses of theuser packets. The information in the VLAN tags ofthe user packets, however, is not considered in thelearning and forwarding process. The IEEE 802.1dMAC bridge is used when the entire information ofthe VLANs used by the client cannot be learned orwhen the data between the VLANs of the client neednot be isolated.

BridgeSwitchMode

SVL/IngressFilterDisable

When the bridge adopts the SVL learning mode, allthe VLANs share the same MAC address table. Thatis, the bridge learns and forwards the packetsaccording to the MAC addresses of the user packetsonly. The information in the VLAN tags of the userpackets, however, is not considered in the learningand forwarding process.

BridgeLearningMode

SVL -

Ingress Filter Disabled The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge does not detect theVLAN tags of the received packets.

MACAddressSelf-learning

Enabled When MAC Address Self-learning is set toEnabled, the bridge can learn the MAC address.

l Click Configure Mount.l Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 in the Service Mount Configuration

dialog box that is displayed. Then, click .l Click OK.l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK. Then, the


4. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.

NOTE

If normal communication is required between user F2 and user F3, proceed to Step 1.5.



416

l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. After setting

the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed,indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.


Description

Hub/Spoke PORT1: HubVCTRUNK1: SpokeVCTRUNK2: Spoke

If user F1 needs to communicate with user F2 anduser F3, Hub/Spoke of PORT1 that accesses theservices of user F1 is set to Hub. A port of theHub attribute can communicate with a port of theSpoke or Hub attribute.If user F2 need not communicate with user F3, setthe two VCTRUNKs that access the services of usersF2 and F3 to Spoke. Ports of the Spoke attributecannot communicate with each other.

5. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user F2

and user F3.l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service



User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description

User F2 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of userF2 is at the VC-4 level. The service levelmust be consistent with the level of the pathsbound with the VCTRUNK.



SourceSlot

4-EGSH-1(SDH-1)






417

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description




1 The value range of the sink timeslots can bethe same as or different from the value rangeof the source timeslots. The number of sinktimeslots, however, must be consistent withthe number of source timeslots.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

User F3 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of userF3 is at the VC-4 level. The service levelmust be consistent with the level of the pathsbound with the VCTRUNK.



SourceSlot

4-EGSH-1(SDH-1)







1 The value range of the sink timeslot can bethe same as or different from the value rangeof the source timeslot. The number ofsource timeslots, however, must be the sameas the number of source timeslots.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 2 Configure the EPL services of NE2 and NE4.



418

NOTEThe Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. SeeConfiguration Guide(on a SDH Network) to set the parameters.

Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see TestingEthernet Service Paths.

l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters F1 and branch F2, set TAG toAccess and Default VLAN ID to 1 for PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 of the EGSH board.

l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters F1 and branch F3, set TAG toAccess and Default VLAN ID to 1 for PORT1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board.

NOTE




Option Description





----End

10.17 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLANServices (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH Network

The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipoint convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communicationequipment, which is connected to the transmission network, does not support VLAN tags orwhere the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.

10.17.1 Networking DiagramThe convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.LAN services of two users need to be isolated.

Service Requirement


l Three branches (G1, G2, and G3) of user G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively.A 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required. G2 and G3 need not communicate with each other.

l Three branches (H1, H2, and H3) of user H are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively.A 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.

l The services of user G must be isolated from the services of user H.



419

l The Ethernet equipment of user G and user H provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical portsthat work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.

Figure 10-40 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

T2000NE3

NE2

NE1

NE4

G3

PORT1G2

PORT1

VCTRUNK

PORT2H3H2

PORT2

G1H1PORT1PORT2

PORT1VCTRUNK1

VB1VCTRUNK2

VLAN 100

PORT2VCTRUNK3

VB1VCTRUNK4

VLAN 200


17-SLQ644-EGSH

Line Board 1-SLQ64

17 1

1 17


17-JL6415-EGT6

Line BoardEthernet Board 15-EGT6

1-JL64

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 8800


In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with an EGSH board that supports theIEEE 802.1q bridge, thus implementing EVPLAN services wherein services of different usersare isolated from each other.


NOTEThe Ethernet boards are classified into the Ethernet transparent transmission boards and Ethernet switchingboards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent transmission boards supportonly EPL services whereas the Ethernet switching boards support EPL services, EVPL services, and Layer2 switching. Hence, Ethernet switching boards are used more widely than Ethernet transparent transmissionboards.



420

10.17.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot AllocationThe Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and taggedwith the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port throughLayer 2 switching, the VLAN tags are stripped and then the services are transparently transmittedon the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.

Figure 10-41 shows the signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and thetimeslot allocation to the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge).


PORT1

NE1:EGSH

VB1

VLAN 100

VLAN 200PORT2





SDH

User G1

User H1


PORT1

NE2:EGT6

User G2


PORT2User H2


PORT1

NE4:EGT6

User G3


PORT2User H3

VC4:VC4-1

VC4:VC4-2

VC4:VC4-1VC4:VC4-2

Add VLAN Label

PORT

Strip VLAN Label

VCTRUNK

Strip VLAN Label

VLAN(200)

VLAN(100)

Data(User H)

Data(User G)

Data(User H)

Data(User G)

Data(User H)

Data(User G)

l The Ethernet LAN services of user G:

– Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and thefirst VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4.

– Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH boardof NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE2.

– Are added and dropped by using the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH boardof NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE4.

l The Ethernet LAN services of user H:– Occupy the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and

the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-3) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4.– Are added and dropped by using the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGSH board

of NE1 and the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT6 board of NE2.– Are added and dropped by using the fourth VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-4) on the EGSH board

of NE1 and the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT6 board of NE4.



421


Parameter

NE1 NE2 NE4


Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

WorkingMode

1000MFull-Duplex

1000MFull-Duplex

1000MFull-Duplex

1000MFull-Duplex

1000MFull-Duplex

1000MFull-Duplex

MaximumFrameLength

1522 1522 1522 1522 1522 1522

TAG Access Access - - - -

EntryDetection

Enabled Enabled - - - -

DefaultVLAN ID

100 200 - - - -

VLANPriority

0 0 - - - -

Port Type UNI UNI - - - -


Parameter

NE1 NE2 NE3


Port VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK3

VCTRUNK4

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

MappingProtocol

GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP

TAG Access Access Access Access - - - -

EntryDetection

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

- - - -



422

Parameter

NE1 NE2 NE3

DefaultVLANID

100 100 200 200 - - - -

VLANPriority

0 0 0 0 - - - -

BoundPath

VC4-xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-2

VC4-xv:VC4-3

VC4-xv:VC4-4

VC4-xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-2

VC4-xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-2

PortType

UNI UNI UNI UNI - - - -

Table 10-40 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)


Board EGSH

VB Name VB1

Bridge Type IEEE 802.1q




VB Mount Port PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3,VCTRUNK4

VLANFiltering

VLANFiltering

VLAN filtering table 1 VLAN filtering table 2

VLAN ID 100 200


PORT1, VCTRUNK1,VCTRUNK2


Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub

PORT2 Hub

VCTRUNK1

Spoke

VCTRUNK2

Spoke

VCTRUNK3

Hub



423


VCTRUNK4

Hub

10.17.3 Configuration ProcessAt the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge)and a VLAN filtering table. At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure transparenttransmission EPL services only.


You must be familiar with 10.3.3 EPLAN Service Configuration Process.



Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN services for user G1, user G2, user G3, user H1, user H2, and user H3on NE1.1. Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used

by the services of user G1 and user H1.l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.l Select External Port.l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click


Parameter


Enabled/Disabled


In this example, PORT1 carries the servicesand Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled forPORT1 and PORT2.

Working Mode


In this example, the Ethernet service accessequipment of user G1 and user H1 supportsthe 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence,Working Mode is set to 1000M Full-Duplex for PORT1 and PORT2.



424

Parameter


MaximumFrameLength

PORT1: 1522PORT2: 1522


MACLoopback



PHYLoopback




default values.l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click


Parameter


TAG PORT1: AccessPORT2: Access

The access equipment of user G1 and user H1does not support VLAN tags. Hence, theEthernet access equipment transmits only thepackets without the VLAN tags. In thisexample, TAG is set to Access for PORT1and PORT2.

DefaultVLANID

PORT1: 100PORT2: 200

According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to100 on the transmission network side for theEthernet services between user G1, user G2,and user G3. The VLAN ID is set to 200 onthe transmission network side for theEVPLAN services between user H1, user H2,and user H3. In this manner, the services ofdifferent users are isolated.

VLANPriority

- This parameter adopts the default value.

EntryDetection


The services of user G1 and user H1 areEVPLAN services. Hence, the entrydetection function must be enabled to checkwhether the packets carry VLAN tags. In thisexample, Entry Detection is set toEnabled.





425

Parameter


PortType




page adopt the default values.2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and

VCTRUNK4 of the EGSH board) used by the services of user G2, user G3, user H2, anduser H3 on NE1.l Select Internal Port.l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click


Parameter


TAG VCTRUNK1: AccessVCTRUNK2: AccessVCTRUNK3: AccessVCTRUNK4: Access

The service access equipment of user G2,user G3, user H2, and user H3 supportsVLAN tags and the transmitted data framesdo not carry VLAN tags. In this example,TAG is set to Access for VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4.

DefaultVLANID

VCTRUNK1: 100VCTRUNK2: 100VCTRUNK3: 200VCTRUNK4: 200

According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to100 on the transmission network side for theEVPLAN services between user G1, user G2,and user G3. The VLAN ID is set to 200 onthe transmission network side for theEVPLAN services between user H1, user H2,and user H3. In this manner, the services ofdifferent users are isolated.

VLANPriority


This parameter adopts the default value.



426

Parameter


EntryDetection

VCTRUNK1: EnabledVCTRUNK2: EnabledVCTRUNK3: EnabledVCTRUNK4: Enabled

The services of user G2, user G3, user H2,and user H3 are EVPLAN services. Hence,the entry detection function must be enabledto check whether the packets carry VLANtags. In this example, Entry Detection is setto Enabled.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter


PortType

VCTRUNK1: UNIVCTRUNK2: UNIVCTRUNK3: UNIVCTRUNK4: UNI


l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter


MappingProtocol

VCTRUNK1: GFPVCTRUNK2: GFPVCTRUNK3: GFPVCTRUNK4: GFP


Scramble

VCTRUNK1:Scrambling mode[X43+1]VCTRUNK2:Scrambling mode[X43+1]VCTRUNK3:Scrambling mode[X43+1]VCTRUNK4:Scrambling mode[X43+1]




427

Parameter


CheckFieldLength

VCTRUNK1: FCS32VCTRUNK2: FCS32VCTRUNK3: FCS32VCTRUNK4: FCS32



VCTRUNK1: Big endianVCTRUNK2: Big endianVCTRUNK3: Big endianVCTRUNK4: Big endian



VCTRUNK1: NoVCTRUNK2: NoVCTRUNK3: NoVCTRUNK4: No



Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter


Enabling LCAS

VCTRUNK1: EnabledVCTRUNK2: EnabledVCTRUNK3: EnabledVCTRUNK4: Enabled


LCASMode

VCTRUNK1: HuaweiModeVCTRUNK2: HuaweiModeVCTRUNK3: HuaweiModeVCTRUNK4: HuaweiMode


HOTime(ms)





428

Parameter


WTRTime(s)



TSD VCTRUNK1: DisabledVCTRUNK2: DisabledVCTRUNK3: DisabledVCTRUNK4: Disabled




and then click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. ClickClose in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.


Description

UserG2

Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK1

As shown in Figure 10-41, VCTRUNK1 ofthe EGSH board is used by the service of userG2.

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service of user G2 uses a 100 Mbit/sbandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to bebound.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service of user G2 is a bidirectionalservice.

AvailableResources

VC4-1 In this example, Available Resources is set toVC4-1.

UserG3

Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK2

As shown in Figure 10-41, VCTRUNK2 ofthe EGSH board is used by the service of userG3.

AvailableBound

Level

VC4-xv The service of user G3 uses a 100 Mbit/sbandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to bebound.



429


Description

Paths

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional


AvailableResources


UserH2

Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK3

As shown in Figure 10-41, VCTRUNK3 ofthe EGSH board is used by the service of userH2.

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service of user H2 uses a 100 Mbit/sbandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to bebound.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service of user H2 is a bidirectionalservice.

AvailableResources


UserH3

Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK4

As shown in Figure 10-41, VCTRUNK4 ofthe EGSH board is used by the service of userH3.

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service of user H3 uses a 100 Mbit/sbandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to bebound.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional




430


Description

AvailableResources







Description


VB Type 802.1q The IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by usingone layer of VLAN tags. This bridge checks thecontents of the VLAN tags that are in the data framesand performs Layer 2 switching according to thedestination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.

BridgeSwitch Mode


When Bridge Learning Mode is set to IVL, thebridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that arein the packets and performs Layer 2 switchingaccording to the destination MAC addresses and theVLAN IDs of the packets.

BridgeLearningMode

IVL -



Enabled -

l Click Configure Mount.



431

l In Available Mounted Ports, select PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2,

VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. Then, click .l Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the

operation is successful. ClickClose.l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

4. Create a VLAN filtering table.l Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.l Click New.l Create the VLAN filtering table for user G1, user G2, and user G3 in the Create

VLAN dialog box that is displayed.


Description

VLAN ID 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 onthe transmission network side for the EVPLANservices between user G1, user G2, and user G3.


. Then, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed,indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

l Create the VLAN filtering table for user H1, user H2, and user H3.


Description

VLAN ID 200 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 200 onthe transmission network side for the EVPLANservices between user H1, user H2, and user H3.


. Then, click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicatingthat the operation is successful. Click Close.

5. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. After setting

the parameters, click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicatingthat the operation is successful. ClickClose.



432


Description

Hub/Spoke PORT1: HubVCTRUNK1:SpokeVCTRUNK2:SpokePORT2: HubVCTRUNK3:HubVCTRUNK4:Hub

If user G2 need not communicate with user G3,set VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that accessthe services of user G2 and user G3 to Spoke.Ports of the Spoke attribute cannotcommunicate with each other. A port of theHub attribute can communicate with a port ofthe Spoke or Hub attribute.

6. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user G2,

user G3, user H2, and user H3.l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service



User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description

User G2 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of userG2 is at the VC-4 level. The service levelmust be consistent with the level of thepaths bound with the VCTRUNK.











433

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description



ActivateImmediately

Yes -

User G3 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of userG3 is at the VC-4 level. The service levelmust be consistent with the level of thepaths bound with the VCTRUNK.










1 The value range of the sink timeslot can bethe same as or different from the valuerange of the source timeslot. The number ofsource timeslots, however, must be thesame as the number of sink timeslots.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

User H2 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of userH2 is at the VC-12 level. The service levelmust be consistent with the level of thepaths bound with the VCTRUNK.



434

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description










2 The value range of the sink timeslot can bethe same as or different from the valuerange of the source timeslot. The number ofsource timeslots, however, must be thesame as the number of source timeslots.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

User H3 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of userH3 is at the VC-12 level. The service levelmust be consistent with the level of thepaths bound with the VCTRUNK.









435

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description




2 The value range of the sink timeslot can bethe same as or different from the valuerange of the source timeslot. The number ofsource timeslots, however, must be thesame as the number of source timeslots.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -

Step 2 Configure the EPL services of NE2 and NE4.NOTEThe Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. SeeConfiguration Guide (on a SDH Network) to set the parameters.




Option Description





----End

10.18 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLANServices (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge) on a SDH Network

The QinQ technology provides an economical and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual privatenetworks (VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPNsolution, thus facilitating the identifying, differentiating, and grooming of EVPLAN services.

10.18.1 Networking DiagramA network operator requires that the voice over IP (VoIP) and high speed Internet (HSI) servicessent to the transmission network be uniformly labeled and groomed at the convergence node.



436

Service RequirementAs shown in Figure 10-42, the transmission network is required to transmit the VoIP and HSIservices.


l The VoIP services of user M and user N are accessed into the transmission network at NE2and NE4 respectively and into the VoIP server at the convergence node NE1. A 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.

l The HSI services of user M and user N are accessed into the transmission network at NE2and NE4 respectively and into the HSI server at the convergence node NE1. A 150 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.

l The VoIP services need to be isolated from the HSI services.l The data communication equipment of user M and user N provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet

optical ports that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and support VLAN tags.– C-VLAN ID of the VoIP services: 10– C-VLAN ID of the HSI services: 20

NOTE

The application scenarios where one branch needs to communicate with other branches are as follows:

l User M needs to communicate with user N.

l User M need not communicate with user N.

If user M and user N need to communicate with each other, skip 10.18.3 Configuration Process.

The operator requires that all services received from the user side should be uniformly labeledand groomed through planned S-VLANs.

l S-VLAN ID of the VoIP services: 100l S-VLAN ID of the HSI services: 200



437

Figure 10-42 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

NE3

NE2

NE1

NE4 PORT1User M PORT1User N

VCTRUNK

PORT2PORT1

PORT2

VCTRUNK1

VB1

VCTRUNK2S-VLAN 200

PORT1

VCTRUNK1VB1

VCTRUNK2S-VLAN 100

VoIP HSI20HSI10VoIP

C-VLANService

20HSI10VoIP

C-VLANService


17-SLQ644-EGSH

Line Board 1-SLQ64

17

17

1

1


17-SL6415-EGT2


1-SL6415-EGT2

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 8800

u

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with an EGSH board that supports theIEEE 802.1ad bridge, thus implementing the EVPLAN services in which VoIP data is isolatedfrom HSI data.

l The VoIP services tagged with the C-VLAN ID of 10 from NE2 and NE4 are further taggedwith the S-VLAN ID of 100 when they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1. Then,the services are forwarded to the VoIP server through Layer 2 switching.

l The HSI services tagged with the C-VLAN ID of 20 from NE2 and NE4 are further taggedwith the S-VLAN ID of 200 when they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1. Then,the services are forwarded to the HSI server through Layer 2 switching.


10.18.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot AllocationThe services of user M and user N are transmitted from the access nodes NE2 and NE4respectively to the convergence node NE1 through the Ethernet transparent transmission boards.The VoIP and HSI services carrying different C-VLAN IDs are tagged with different S-VLANIDs. The service data is isolated and exchanged at Layer 2 through S-VLAN filtering.



438

Figure 10-43 shows the signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and thetimeslot allocation to the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).


SDH

VC4:VC4-1

VC4:VC4-2

VC4:VC4-1VC4:VC4-2

User MPORT1

NE1:EGSH

VB1

SVLAN 100

SVLAN 200PORT2

VoIPServer

HSIServer

VCTRUNK1VC4-xv:VC4-1VC4-xv:VC4-2

VCTRUNK2 VC4-xv:VC4-3 VC4-xv:VC4-4 VCTRUNK1

VC4-xv:VC4-1VC4-xv:VC4-2

NE4:EGT2

PORT1User N

VCTRUNK1VC4-xv:VC4-1VC4-xv:VC4-2

NE2:EGT2

PORT1

Add S-VLAN Label

PORT

Strip S-VLAN Label

VCTRUNK

Strip S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN(20)

C-VLAN(10)

Data(HSI)

Data(VoIP)

C-VLAN(20)

C-VLAN(10)

Data(HSI)

Data(VoIP)



Data(HSI)

Data(VoIP)

l The EVPLAN services of user M:

– Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH linkbetween NE1 and NE2.

– Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4(VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) andsecond VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT2 board of NE2.

l The EVPLAN services of user N:– Occupy the third VC-4 (VC4:VC4-3) and fourth VC-4 (VC4:VC4-4) on the SDH link

between NE1 and NE4.– Are added and dropped by using the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) and fourth VC-4

(VC4-xv:VC4-4) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) andsecond VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT2 board of NE4.





Enabled/Disabled



1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

MaximumFrame Length

1522 1522 1522 1522



439







MappingProtocol

GFP GFP GFP GFP


Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1,VC4-xv:VC4-2




Table 10-43 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)


Board EGSH

VB Name VB1

Bridge Type 802.1ad




Operation Type Add S-VLAN base for Port and C-VLAN

VB Port 1 2 3 4


C-VLAN 10 20 10 20 10 20

S-VLAN 100 200 100 200 100 200

VLANFiltering

VLANFiltering

VLAN filtering table 1 VLAN filtering table 2

VLAN ID 100 200






440


Hub/Spoke

PORT1 Hub

PORT2 Hub

VCTRUNK1

Spoke

VCTRUNK2

Spoke

10.18.3 Configuration ProcessAt the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)and an S-VLAN filtering table. At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configuretransparent transmission EPL services only.

Prerequisite

The Creating a Network task must be complete.


The IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge supports ports with the C-Aware and S-Aware attributes only.

The C-Aware ports are used to add and strip the S-VLAN tags. The S-Aware ports are used totransparently transmit the S-VLAN tags.

The IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge supports the following operation types:

l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port

l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN

l Performing port mounting based on the port

l Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN

This topic describes the four operation types when Bridge Switch Mode of the IEEE 802.1adprovider bridge is set to IVL/Ingress Filter Enabled.

l Adding the S-VLAN based on the port: The packets that enter the C-Aware port are addedwith the preset S-VLAN tags, and are forwarded in the bridge according to the S-VLANfiltering table. Before the packets leave the C-Aware port, the S-VLAN tags are stripped.

l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN: The entry detection is performedfor the packets that enter the C-Aware port. Then, the corresponding S-VLAN tags areadded to the packets according to the mapping relation between the C-VLAN tags and theS-VLAN tags of the packets. If the mapping relation does not exist, the packets arediscarded. After the S-VLAN tags are added, the packets enter the bridge, where the packetsare forwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Before the packets leave the C-Aware port, the S-VLAN tags are stripped.



441

NOTE

l A C-Aware port supports different C-VLAN tags being mapped into different S-VLAN tags, butdoes not support the same C-VLAN tag being mapping into multiple S-VLAN tags.

l Performing port mounting based on the port: The packets that enter the S-Aware port arenot filtered. Instead, the S-VLAN switch is performed directly. The packets must have theS-VLAN tags. Otherwise, the packets are discarded. When the packets leave the S-Awareport, the packets are transparently transmitted.

l Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN: The entry filtering isperformed according to the preset S-VLAN tag. The packets that do not belong to the S-VLAN are discarded. Then, the packets are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filteringtable. When the packets leave the S-Aware port, the packets are transparently transmitted.

In the case of the four operation types, the following conditions must be met before the packetsleave a port:

l The port must be contained in the S-VLAN filtering table that is created by the user.l The S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port must be specified when the user manually

mounts the port to the bridge.– In the case of a C-Aware port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-VLAN

ID that is added when the packets enter the port.– In the case of an S-Aware port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-VLAN

ID that is set when the user mounts the port to the bridge. If the S-Aware port is mountedbased on the port, the S-VLAN ID is considered to contain all the legal S-VLAN IDs.

Procedure

Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN service of NE1.1. Set the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used by

the VoIP server and HSI server.l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet



Parameter


Enabled/Disabled


In this example, PORT1 and PORT2 transmitthe services and Enabled/Disabled is set toEnabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

Working Mode


In this example, the VoIP server and HSIserver support the 1000M full-duplex mode.Hence, Working Mode is set to 1000M Full-Duplex for PORT1 and PORT2.



442

Parameter


MaximumFrameLength

PORT1: 1522PORT2: 1522


MACLoopback



PHYLoopback




default values.l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the




The C-Aware or S-Aware attributemust be selected for the port whenyou configure the IEEE 802.1adbridge. The C-Aware port connects tothe port on the client network,identifies and processes the packetsthat contain C-VLAN tags (namely,client tags). The S-Aware portconnects to the port on the networkside, identifies and processes thepackets that contain S-VLAN tags(namely, service tags of the networkoperator).




2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board)used by the services of user M and user N on NE1.l Select Internal Port.l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the




443

Parameter


PortType

VCTRUNK1: C-AwareVCTRUNK2: C-Aware

The C-Aware or S-Aware attribute must beselected for the port when you configure theIEEE 802.1ad bridge. The C-Aware port isconnected to the network port of the userequipment, and identifies and processes thepackets that carry the C-VLAN tags. The S-aware port is used for connecting to thesupplier network, and identifies andprocesses the packets that carry the S-VLANtags.



l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parameter


MappingProtocol



Scramble



CheckFieldLength








444

Parameter







Parameter


Enabling LCAS



LCASMode



HOTime(ms)



WTRTime(s)






Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and then clickApply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the OperationResult that is displayed.


Description

User M Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1 of the EGSH board is used bythe service of user M.



445


Description

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service of user M uses a 200 Mbit/sbandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s need to bebound.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service of user M is a bidirectionalservice.

AvailableResources

VC4-1,VC4-2

-

User N Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board is used bythe service of user N.

AvailableBoundPaths

Level

VC4-xv The service of user N uses a 200 Mbit/sbandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s need to bebound.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional

The service of user N is a bidirectionalservice.

AvailableResources

VC4-3,VC4-4

-







446


Description


VB Type 802.1ad The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports data frames withtwo layers of VLAN tags. This bridge adopts theouter S-VLAN tags to isolate different VLANs andsupports only the mounted ports whose attributes areC-Aware or S-Aware.

BridgeSwitch Mode


This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tagsthat are in the packets and performs Layer 2switching according to the destination MACaddresses and the S-VLAN IDs of the packets.

BridgeLearningMode

IVL -



Enabled -

l Click Configure Mount.l Set the parameters in the Service Mount Configuration dialog box that is displayed.

Click Add Mount Port and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialogbox.

Parameter Value in This Example

OperationType

Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN

VB Port 1 2 3 4


C-VLAN 10 20 10 20 10 20

S-VLAN 100 200 100 200 100 200

The other parameters take the default values.l Click OK.



447

l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK. ClickClose in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

4. Create a VLAN filtering table.l Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.l Click New.l Create the VLAN filtering table of the VoIP service.


Description

VLAN ID 100 According to the plan, the VoIP service uses the S-VLAN ID of 100.


. Then, click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result that is displayed.l Create the VLAN filtering table of the HSI service.


Description

VLAN ID 200 According to the plan, the HSI service uses the S-VLAN ID of 200.


. Then, click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that isdisplayed.

5. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.NOTE

If normal communication is required between user M and user N, proceed to Step 1.6.

l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.


Description

Hub/Spoke PORT1: HubPORT2: HubVCTRUNK1:SpokeVCTRUNK2:Spoke

User M and user N need not communicate witheach other. In this case, set VCTRUNK1 andVCTRUNK2 that access the services of user Mand user N to the Spoke attribute. Ports of theSpoke attribute cannot communicate with eachother. A port of the Hub attribute cancommunicate with a port of the Spoke or Hubattribute.

6. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user M

and user N.



448

l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service


Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, click Close in the OperationResult dialog box that is displayed.

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description

User M Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of userM is at the VC-12 level. The service levelmust be consistent with the level of thepaths bound with the VCTRUNK.


The service of user M is a bidirectionalservice.









ActivateImmediately

Yes -

User N Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of userN is at the VC-12 level. The service levelmust be consistent with the level of thepaths bound with the VCTRUNK.


The service of user N is a bidirectionalservice.



449

User Parameter

Value inThisExample

Description








1-2 The value range of the sink timeslot can bethe same as or different from the valuerange of the source timeslot. The number ofsource timeslots, however, must be thesame as the number of source timeslots.

ActivateImmediately

Yes -


NOTEThe Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. SeeConfiguration Guide(on a SDH Network) to set the parameters.



Option Description





----End



450

10.19 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL andEVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH Network

The EGSH board supports the EVPL and EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) on a sameport. Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed through a sameport, which is applicable to the scenario where the EVPL and EVPLAN users share the sameport.

10.19.1 Networking DiagramBased on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed through a same port.

Service RequirementOn the network as shown Figure 10-44, the service requirements are as follows:

l Three branches (G1, G2, and G3) of user G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively.The branches need to form a LAN and share a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. G2 and G3 need notcommunicate with each other.

l Two branches of user H are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with eachother.

l The services of user G must be isolated from the services of user H.l The Ethernet equipment of user G and user H provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical ports

that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.



451

Figure 10-44 Networking diagram for configuring EVPL and EVPLAN services

T2000NE3

NE2

NE1

NE4

G3

PORT1

G2PORT1

H2PORT2

G1H1 PORT1PORT2

PORT2VCTRUNK3

VB1VCTRUNK4

VLAN 200


17-SLQ644-EGSH

Line Board 1-SLQ64

17 1

1 17


17-JL6415-EGT6

Line BoardEthernet Board 15-EGT6

1-JL64

VCTRUNK

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 8800

Board Configuration InformationIn this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with an EGSH board that supports theIEEE 802.1q, the access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with a EGT6 board each.

When the data of user G is accessed into the transmission network, services of different usersare isolated from each other by EGSH board on NE1. The EPL services are configured to betransparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1 when the NE2 and NE4 are used as accessnodes.

When the data of user H is accessed into the transmission network, the VLAN ID of 200 is addedto the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the VLAN tag isstripped.

10.19.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot AllocationWhen the data of user E is accessed into the transmission network, the Ethernet services of theconvergence node are received from an external port and tagged with the corresponding VLANIDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port through Layer 2 switching, the VLANtags are stripped and then the services are transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In thismanner, the node communicates with a remote node. The Ethernet services of user H are received



452

from the external port on an Ethernet board, tagged with different VLAN IDs, and thentransmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner, the services of different users are isolatedfrom each other. After the data arrives at the sink node, the VLAN tags are stripped.

Figure 10-45 shows the signal flow of the EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)and the timeslot allocation to the EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge).


PORT1

NE1:EGSH

VB1

VLAN 100

PORT2

VCTRUNK1

VC4-xv :VC4-1

VCTRUNK2

VC4-xv :VC4-2

VCTRUNK3

VC4-xv :VC4-3

SDH

User G1

User H1

VCTRUNK1VC4-xv :VC4-1

PORT1

NE2:EGT6

User G2


PORT2User H2


PORT1

NE4:EGT6

User G3

VC4:VC4-1

VC4:VC4-2

VC4:VC4-1

Add VLAN Label

PORT

Strip VLAN Label

VCTRUNK

Strip VLAN Label

VLAN(200)

VLAN(100)

Data(User H)

Data(User G)

Data(User H)

Data(User G)

Data(User H)

Data(User G)

l The Ethernet LAN services of user G:

– Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and thefirst VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4.

– Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH boardof NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE2.

– Are added and dropped by using the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH boardof NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE4.

l The Ethernet services of user H– Occupy the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.– Are added and dropped by using the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGSH board

of NE1 and the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT6 board of NE2.




Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2 PORT1

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled



453


WorkingMode

1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

MaximumFrameLength

1522 1522 1522 1522 1522

TAG Access Access - - -

EntryDetection

Enabled Enabled - - -

DefaultVLAN ID

100 200 - - -

VLANPriority

0 0 - - -

Port Type UNI UNI - - -


Parameter

NE1 NE2 NE3


Port VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK3

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

MappingProtocol

GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP

TAG Access Access Tag aware - - -

EntryDetection

Enabled Enabled Enabled - - -

DefaultVLAN ID

100 100 200 - - -

VLANPriority

0 0 0 - - -

BoundPath

VC4-xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-2

VC4-xv:VC4-3

VC4-xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-2

VC4-xv:VC4-1

Port Type UNI UNI UNI - - -



454

Table 10-46 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)


Board EGSH

VB Name VB1

Bridge Type IEEE 802.1q




VB Mount Port PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

VLAN Filtering VLAN Filtering VLAN filtering table 1

VLAN ID 100

Forwarding PhysicalPort

PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub

PORT2 Hub

VCTRUNK1 Spoke

VCTRUNK2 Spoke

VCTRUNK3 Hub

VCTRUNK4 Hub

Table 10-47 Parameters of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

Parameter NE1

EVPLPORT1←→VCTRUNK1

Board EGSH

Service Type EVPL


Source Port PORT1

Source C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) 200

Sink Port VCRTUNK1

Sink C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) 200



455

10.19.3 Configuration ProcessFor the Ethernet service of user G, at convergence node NE1, the EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1qbridge) and VLAN filtering table should be created. Access nodes NE2 and NE4 should beconfigured with the EPL transparent services. After user H transmits services to the Ethernet,the service data is added with different VLAN tags and thus different user data is isolated buttransmitted over the same VCTRUNK.

Prerequisite

The Creating a Network task must be complete.

You must be familiar with 10.3.2 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process and 10.3.3EPLAN Service Configuration Process.




Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN services for user G1, user G2 and user G3 on NE1. For the operationprocedures, see 10.17.3 Configuration Process.


NOTEThe Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. SeeConfiguration Guide (on a SDH Network) to set the parameters.

Step 3 Configure the EVPL services for user H1 and user H2 on NE1. For the operation procedures,see 10.15.3 Configuration Process.




Option Description





----End

10.20 Parameters



456

10.20.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Port)In this user interface, you can query and set basic attributes of a MAC port.


Port PORTn Displays all PORT ports anEthernet board can use.A PORT port numbered n.

Port Enabled Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled

Enabled: the port is used andits services will be processed.Disabled: services at the portwill not be processed. So, youneed to enable the ports thatwill be used duringconfiguring services.

Working Mode For example: Auto-Negotiation

Working modes of theEthernet port. The Auto-Negotiation mode isrecommended, because it canautomatically find out thebest working mode tocombine a port and itsinterconnected port and thusis convenient formaintenance.Be careful to configure thesame working mode for theport and its interconnectedport. Otherwise, service willfail.

Max. Frame Length Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.

Max. Frame Length(Ethernet Port Attribute)parameter specifies themaximum transmission unit(MTU).For the NG WDMequipment, the range is from1518 to 9600.Click A.2 Max. FrameLength for moreinformation.

Port physical parameters Displays the value that isqueried.

Displays the actual workingstatus of the PORT port.



457


MAC Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,OutloopDefault: Non-Loopback

The MAC Loopbackparameter specifies the MACloopback state at an Ethernetport. With this parameter,users can test whetherequipment runs normally bycreating a looped path at theMAC layer and then sendingand receiving signals over thepath.

PHY Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,OutloopDefault: Non-Loopback

The PHY Loopbackparameter specifies the PHYloopback state at an Ethernetport. With this parameter,users can test whetherequipment runs normally bycreating a looped path at thePHY layer and then sendingand receiving signals over thepath.

QinQ Type Area 0x0600 - 0xFFFF Displays in hexadecimals.

Physical Type Reported value by query Displays the physical type ofport.

Logic Type SDH-OPPORT, SDH-EPORT

Displays the logic type ofport.

10.20.2 Parameters: Basic Attributes (Internal Port)In this user interface, you can query or set basic attributes of an internal port, including port,port enabling and port physical parameters.

Parameters


Port VCTRUNKn, RPRn Displays the VCTRUNK orRPR port number.

Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled Sets this parameter for theRPR port of the ER4 board.

Port Physical Parameters Displays the value that isqueried.

This value can be queriedonly.

QinQ Type Area For example: 33024 Sets the QinQ type of the port.



458

10.20.3 Parameters: Flow Control (External Port)In this user interface, you can enable and disable the auto-negotiation or non-auto-negotiationflow control mode for an external port.


Port PORTn Displays all PORT ports anEthernet board can use.A port numbered n.

Non-Autonegotiation FlowControl Mode

Disabled, Enable SymmetricFlow Control, Send Only,Receive OnlyDefault: Disable

Non-Autonegotiation FlowControl Mode is selectedwhen a port works in non-autonegotiation mode.

Autonegotiation FlowControl Mode

Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.

Autonegotiation FlowControl Mode is selectedwhen a port works in auto-negotiation mode.

10.20.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Port)In this user interface, you can set and query advanced attributes for an external port.


Port PORTn Displays the PORT port. Theletter n indicates the portnumber.

Enabling Broadcast PacketSuppression

Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled

Enables or disables broadcastpacket suppression.

Broadcast PacketSuppression Threshold

10% to 100% When the broadcast packetsuppression function isenabled, if the broadcastpacket occupies a bandwidththat exceeds the overallbandwidth of the port x thesuppression threshold, thebroadcast packet issuppressed.



459


Loop Detection Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled

Sets whether to enable loopdetection, which is used tocheck whether a loop exists atthe port.

Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enableshutdown of a loop port,which is used to set blockingfor a loop port.

10.20.5 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (Internal Port)In this user interface, you can set and query advanced attributes for an internal port.

Parameters


Port VCTRUNKn Displays the VCTRUNKport. The letter n indicates theport number.

Loop Detection Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled

The Loop Detectionparameter specifies thefunction of reporting the self-loop alarms after one of thefollowing loopback cases isdetected.

Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, DisabledDefault: Enabled

The Loop Port Shutdownparameter is set to disable theself-loop port after a self-loop port is detected if theloop port shutdown functionis enabled. After the self-loopport is shut down, the self-loop port only transmits orreceives the self-loopdetection packets rather thanany other packets. If the portis not a self-loop port, it startsto work again.

10.20.6 Parameters: TAG AttributesIn this user interface, you can query and set the TAG attribute for a PORT port or a VCTRUNKport.



460


Port PORTn or VCTRUNKn PORT port or VCTRUNKport. "n" is the port number.

TAG Tag Aware, Access, HybridDefault: Tag Aware

The tag is used for settingwhich type of data packetscan be processed.Set this parameter to TagAware to enable the port totransparently transmitpackets that have the VLANID (tag). If packets do nothave the VLAN ID (untag),the packets are discarded.Default VLAN ID andVLAN priority cannot beedited.Set this parameter to Accessto enable the port to add thedefault VLAN ID to packetsthat do not have the VLANID (untag). If the packetshave the VLAN ID (tag), thepackets are discarded.Set this parameter toHybrid to enable the port toadd the default VLAN ID tothe packets that do not havethe VLAN ID (untag). If thepackets have the VLAN ID(tag), the packets aretransparently transmitted.The tag attribute is effectiveonly when the networkattribute of the port is PE orUNI.NOTE

The tag attribute does not applyto C-Aware and S-Aware ports.

Default VLAN ID 1-4095Default: 1

The Default VLAN IDparameter specifies a defaultVLAN ID for a port thattransmits untagged packets.NOTE

When the tag attribute is TagAware, the default VLANcannot be set. When the tagattribute is Access or Hybrid,the default VLAN can be set.



461


VLAN Priority 0-7Default: 0

The VLAN Priorityparameter specifies thepriority of the default VLANID of a port.NOTE

When the tag attribute is TagAware, the VLAN prioritycannot be set. When the tagattribute is Access or Hybrid,the VLAN priority can be set.

Entry Detection Enabled, DisabledDefault: Enabled

The Entry Detectionparameter determineswhether a port detectspackets by tag identifier.

10.20.7 Parameters: Network AttributesIn this user interface, you can set port attributes.


Port PORTn or VCTRUNKn A PORT or VCTRUNK portnumbered n.

Port Attribute Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.

The Port Attribute(Ethernet Port) parameterspecifies the position of aport in the network. Differentport attributes supportdifferent packets.

10.20.8 Parameters: Ethernet Line ServiceIn this user interface, you can create or query the source and sink routes of an Ethernet leasedline, and set port attributes and path binding.



462

Parameters

Table 10-48 Ethernet Service Parameters


Service Type Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.

Displays the service type.

Direction Unidirectional, BidirectionalDefault: Bidirectional

Displays the transmitdirection of the service.The bidirectional servicerefers to two services, one ofwhich is transmitted from thesource port to the sink portand the other one of which istransmitted from the sink portto the source port. Theunidirectional service refersto a service transmitted fromthe source port to the sinkport.

Operation Type Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.Add S-VLAN, Add S-VLANand C-VLAN, Strip S-VLAN, Strip S-VLAN andC-VLAN, Transparentlytransmit S-VLAN, TranslateS-VLAN, Transparentlytransmit C-VLAN,Add S-VLAN, Transparentlytransmit S-VLAN, TranslateS-VLAN, Transparentlytransmit C-VLAN, TranslateC-VLAN

Sets the operation type for theEVPL(QinQ) services.l Add S-VLAN: Adds S-

TAG based on the PORTroute.

l Add S-VLAN and C-VLAN: Adds S-TAG andC-TAG based on thePORT route.

l Transparently transmit S-VLAN: Transmits theUser TAG transparently.

l Transparently transmit C-VLAN: Transmits the C-TAG transparently.

l Translate S-VLAN:Exchanges S-TAG basedon the PORT route.

l Strip S-VLAN: Strip S-TAG.

l Strip S-VLAN and C-VLAN: Strip S-TAG andC-TAG.

Source Port PORTn, VCTRUNKnDefault: PORT3

Displays the name of thesource port.



463


Source VLAN 1-4095 Sets VLAN ID of the sourceport. Applies to EPLservices.

Source C-VLAN 1-4095 Sets C-VLAN of the sourceport. C-VLAN is the clientVLAN ID.Applies to EVPL(QinQ)services.

Source S-VLAN 1-4095, NULLDefault: NULL

Sets S-VLAN of the sourceport. S-VLAN is the serviceVLAN ID.Applies to EVPL(QinQ)services.

Sink Port PORTn, VCTRUNKnFor example: PORT3

Displays the name of the sinkport.

Sink VLAN 1-4095 Sets VLAN ID of the sinkport. Applies to EPLservices.

Sink C-VLAN 1-4095 Sets C-VLAN of the sinkport. C-VLAN is the clientVLAN ID.Applies to EVPL(QinQ)services.

Sink S-VLAN 1-4095, NULLDefault: NULL

Sets S-VLAN of the sinkport. S-VLAN is the serviceVLAN ID.Applies to EVPL(QinQ)services.

C-VLAN Priority AUTO, Priority0, Priority1,Priority2, Priority3,Priority4, Priority5,Priority6, Priority7

Sets the priority of C-VLAN.

S-VLAN Priority AUTO, Priority0, Priority1,Priority2, Priority3,Priority4, Priority5,Priority6, Priority7

Sets the priority of S-VLAN.



464


OAM Enable Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled

Enable OAM Protocolparameter specified whetherthe end-to-end OAMprotocol (namely, the IEEE802.3ah protocol) is enabledat a port.l Enabled indicates that the

IEEE 802.3ah protocol isenabled and the end-to-end Ethernet OAMfunction is available.

l Disabled indicates thatthe IEEE 802.3ahprotocol is disabled andthe end-to-end EthernetOAM function isunavailable.

Port For example: PORT3 Displays the name of a port.

Port Type UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware (forboards that support QinQ)Default: UNI

Sets the network attributesfor a port.If the port is of the UNI type,the port processes the tagattributes in 802.1Q and theport has the Tag, Access, andHybrid attributes.If the port is of the C-Awaretype, the port does notprocess the tag attributes in802.1Q. It determines that thedata packet carries the C-VLAN tag and processesonly the data packet that hasthe C-VLAN tag.If the port is of the S-Awaretype, the port does notprocess the tag attributes in802.1Q. It determines that thedata packet carries the S-VLAN tag and processesonly the data packet that hasthe S-VLAN tag.

Port Enabled Enabled, DisabledDefault: Enabled

Enables or disables a port.Enabled: This port canaccess services.Disabled: This port cannotaccess services.



465


TAG Tag Aware, Access, HybridDefault: Tag Aware

TAG is used to set the type ofthe processed messages. Thetag aware port only processesthe messages with a tag, andthose messages without a tagare discarded. However, theAccess port is quite thecontrary. The hybrid portprocesses the two types ofmessages. It adds a tag to themessages without a tagaccording to the VLAN ID ofthis port.

10.20.9 Parameters: VLAN GroupIn this user interface, you can configure a VLAN group. You can assign services that haveconsecutive CVLANs into a VLAN group. In this way, you configure the VLAN group as awhole in the same way as you configure a single VLAN.


Board For example: 4-TBE Displays the name of a board.

Port For example: PORT3 Choose the port of the VLANgroup.

Initial VLAN For example: 1 Sets and displays the initialVLAN. The value of InitialVLAN ranges from 1 to4095. The calculationformula is as follows: InitialVLAN = p x (2^n), where n= 0, 1,..., 12, and p is aninteger ranging from 1 to2^m. m + n< = 12.

Last VLAN For example: 1 Displays the VLAN ID of lastthe VLAN.



466


VLAN Group MemberCount

For example: 1 Sets and displays the numberof members in a VLANgroup.l The calculation formula

of VLAN GroupMember CountVLANdepends on the value ofInitial VLAN. WhenInitial VLAN = 1, VLANGroup Member Count =2^n - 1. When InitialVLAN has another value,VLAN Group MemberCount = 2^n, where n isequal to the n in theformula of InitialVLAN.

l The maximum number ofVLAN groups is equal tothe number of links on aboard.

10.20.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN ServiceIn this user interface, you can create and query Ethernet LAN services, and configure theforwarding filter table.


Board For example: NE501-4-TBE Displays the name of theboard.

VB ID For example: 1 Allocated automaticallywhen an Ethernet LANservice is created.

VB Name A maximum of 16 Englishletters or numerals

Indicates the name of the VB.

Bridge Type For example: 802.1q Sets the type of a bridge.

Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable,SVL/Ingress Filter DisableDefault: IVL/Ingress FilterEnable

Selects the bridge switchmode.



467


Bridge Learning Mode Values of default withdifferent bridge mode. Fordetails, click the links in theDescription column.

Bridge Learning Mode(Ethernet LAN Service)indicates how the bridgelearns the MAC address.Bridge Learning Mode isclassified into the sharedVLAN learning andindependent VLAN learningmodes. The shared VLANlearning mode indicateslearning and forwardingbased on the MAC address.The independent VLANlearning mode indicateslearning and forwardingbased on the VLAN andMAC address.

Ingress Filter Enabled, Disabled Displays the status of aningress filter.Enabled: Checks the validityof a VLAN ID on the basis ofbridge. If the ingress receivesa packet that does not belongto the VLAN associated tothe port on the bridge, theingress discards the packet.Disabled: Does not check thevalidity of a VLAN ID. Allpackets that need to enter thebridge are valid.

MAC Address Self-learning Enabled, DisabledDefault: Enabled

Enables or disables MACaddress learning.Enabled: MAC addresses arelearned.Disabled: MAC addressesare statically configured.

Active Active, Inactive Displays the activation statusof a VB.

Table 10-49 Service Mount


VB Port For example: 1 Sets the VB logical ports.



468


Mount Port For example: PORT1 The mount port may be thePORT port or VC trunk port.

Operation Type Add S-VLAN base for Port,Add S-VLAN base for Portand C-VLAN, Mount Port,Mount Port and base for Portand S-VLAN

You can perform operationsas follows:l Mounting that is based on

port and for which the S-VLAN tag is added

l Mounting that is based onport and C-VLAN and forwhich the S-VLAN tag isadded

l Mounting that is based onport

l Mounting that is based onport and S-VLAN

Port Type UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware (forboards that support QinQ)Default: UNI

Sets the network attributesfor a port.If the port is of the UNI type,the port processes the TAGattributes in 802.1Q and theport has the Tag Aware,Access and Hybrid attributes.If the port is of the C-Awaretype, the port does notprocess the tag attributes in802.1Q. It determines that thedata packet carries no S-VLAN tag and processesonly the data packet that hasthe C-VLAN tag.If the port is of the S-Awaretype, it can identify andprocess the VLANinformation about theprovider. If the QinQ Typefield is valid, this port treatsthe outmost label carried bythe packets as S-VLAN.

Service Direction BidirectionalDefault: Bidirectional

Displays the direction of anEthernet service.



469


Port Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables a port.Enabled: This port canaccess services.Disabled: This port cannotaccess services.

TAG Access, Tag aware, Hybrid Sets the tag attribute of theVB.

Hub/Spoke Hub, SpokeDefault: Hub

Hub/Spoke (Ethernet LANService) is used to separatepackets between the logicalports in the network bridge.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Sets the VLAN ID. To set theVLAN ID, right-click a port,and choose VLANAllocation from the shortcutmenu. Then, in the dialog boxdisplayed, set the VLAN IDof the VB link that the portbelongs to. You can also setthe VLAN ID in the VLANFiltering tab.

Working Mode For example: 10M Half-Duplex

Displays the working modesof the Ethernet port. Auto-Negotiation canautomatically determine theoptimized working modes ofthe connected ports. Thismode is easy to maintain andis recommended.During configuration, makesure that working modes ofthe connected ports areconsistent. If the workingmodes are different, theservices are down.

Service Direction Bidirectional Sets the direction of service.

C-VLAN 0 to 4095 Sets the C-VLAN value.

S-VLAN 0 to 4095 Sets the S-VLAN value.



470


VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Sets the VLAN ID. To set theVLAN ID, right-click a port,and choose VLANAllocation from the shortcutmenu. Then, in the dialog boxdisplayed, set the VLAN IDof the VB link that the portbelongs to. You can also setthe VLAN ID in the VLANFiltering tab.

MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FE-FF-FF-FF-FF-FFThe first byte is an evennumber.

Sets the MAC address ofVLAN unicast. To set theMAC address of VLANunicast, right-click a port thatis already allocated with aVLAN ID, and chooseVLAN Unicast from theshortcut menu. Then, in thedialog box displayed, set theMAC address of VLANunicast for the port. You canalso set the MAC address ofVLAN unicast in the VLANUnicast tab.

Table 10-50 VLAN Filtering


VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Specifies the VLAN ID andconfigures the forwardingfilter table.

VB Port For example: (1-2) Sets the VB logical ports.

Forwarding Physical Port For example: PORT1,VCTRUNK1

Displays the physical portthat is actually attached to theVB link.

Available forwarding ports For example: PORT4 Displays the queried physicalports that can be used forforwarding.

Selected forwarding ports For example: PORT4 Displays the selected portsthat can be used forforwarding.



471

Table 10-51 VLAN Unicast


VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Only the VLAN ID specifiedin the forwarding filter tablecan be selected. VLANunicast is different fromcommon unicast. A VLANunicast uses VB, VLAN ID,port, and MAC address as itsunique identifier.


Displays the MAC address ofVLAN unicast.


Physical Port For example: PORT1 Displays the name of the port.

Aging Status Static Displays the aging status ofunicast items, includingstatic and dynamic.

VB VB ID-VB Name VB is automaticallydisplayed by the U2000.

Table 10-52 Disable MAC Address


VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Inhibits a MAC address in theVLAN of a certain VB.


Enters a MAC address that isto be inhibited. Hence, entersa MAC address that is notassociated to the VLANunicast of this VLAN.

Table 10-53 Bound Path


VCTRUNK Port For example: VCTRUNK1 Displays the name of theconfigured VC trunk port.

Level For example: VC12 Displays the level of a VCtrunk-bound path.



472


Service Direction Bidirectional, Uplink,DownlinkDefault: Bidirectional

Displays the direction of anEthernet service.

Bound Path For example: VC4-1-VC3(1) Specifies the number of thepath that you want to bind,including VC4 path No. andVC12/VC3 path No. VC4-1-VC12(1-3).

Number of Bound Paths For example: 1 Displays the number of thebound paths.

Table 10-54 Self-learning MAC address



Enters a MAC address.


VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Displays the VLAN ID.

10.20.11 Parameters: Aging TimeIn this user interface, you can set the life cycle for filtering dynamic records in the database andthe aging time for the MAC address.

Parameters


Board For example: NE1-3-N1EFS4For example: NE1-8-TBE

Displays the board name.

MAC Address Aging Time /Aging Time Unit

1-120Default: 5

The MAC Address AgingTime parameter specifies thevalid duration of adynamically learnt MACaddress in the MAC addresstable.



473

10.20.12 Parameters: VLAN UnicastIn this user interface, you can create, query or delete a VLAN unicast item.


Board For example: NE70-4-ER4 Displays the Board.

VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Only the VLAN ID that hasbeen created in earlier VLANFiltering can be selected.

MAC Address The first digit is an evennumber

MAC Address

Port For example: LP1 Logical port (LP) +port No.

Aging Status Static, DynamicDefault: Static

Aging status of unicast items,including static, dynamic andso on.

10.20.13 Parameters: Port MirroringIn this user interface, you can configure the port mirroring of the Ethernet interface board. Then,you can use the port mirroring to perform packet monitoring, daily maintenance and in-servicecommissioning.


Board For example: 8-N1EAS2For example: 5-L4G

Selects a board for port mirroring.

Mirror Listener Port For example: PORT4 Displays the mirror listener port. It isused to perform packet detection anddaily maintenance.

Uplink Listened Port For example: PORT3 Sets the uplink listened port.

Downlink ListenedPort

For example: PORT5 Sets the downlink listened port.

10.20.14 Parameters: Ethernet TestThis user interface is for commissioning of installed Ethernet boards and fault location. You canset the send mode, send direction and the number of test frames to be sent. At the same time,you can query the number of received test frames and response frames, and carry out a serviceconnection test to check whether the service connection is normal.



474

Parameters

Table 10-55 Ethernet test


Port For example: 3-L4G-VCTRUNK1

Displays the internal portname.

Send Mode Disabled, Burst Mode,Continue ModeDefault: Disabled

Send Mode(Ethernet Test)is used to set the test frameand the transmit mode of thetest frame. The test frame isused for simulating packettransmission to checkwhether the link is normal.

Send Direction WDM Direction Send Direction (EthernetTest) indicates the transmitdirection of the test packet.

Frames to Send 0-255Default: 0

Frames to Send indicates thenumber of test packets to betransmitted. With thisparameter enabled, thesystem transmits a test packetevery one second until thenumber of transmitted testpackets reaches the specifiedvalue.NOTE

The number of Frames toSend could be slightly differentfor some equipment.

Status Sending, Finished SendingDefault: -

Status indicates the transmitstatus of the current testframes at the port. Thisparameter is displayed as thecurrent test status after youconfigure Send Mode andFrames to Send and thenclick Apply.



475


Counter of Frames Sent For example: 1 Counter of Frames Sentindicates the number of testframes that are transmitted bythe VC trunk port in theEthernet test. This parametervalue is accumulative. Thevalue indicates the totalnumber of test frames that aretransmitted from last timewhen the parameter value iscleared to this time when thevalue is queried.

Counter of ReceivedResponse Test Frame

For example: 1 Counter of ReceivedResponse Test Frameindicates the number ofresponse test frames that arereceived by the VC trunk portin the Ethernet test. Thisparameter value isaccumulative. The valueindicates the total number ofresponse test frames that arereceived from last time whenthe parameter value is clearedto this time when the value isqueried.

Counter of Test Frames toReceive

For example: 1 Counter of Test Frames toReceive indicates the numberof test frames that arereceived by the VC trunk portin the Ethernet test. Thisparameter value isaccumulative. The valueindicates the total number oftest frames that aretransmitted from last timewhen the parameter value iscleared to this time when thevalue is queried.

Table 10-56 Setting the bearer mode


Port For example: VCTRUNK1 Selects the port at which youwant to set the bearer mode.



476


Bearer Mode Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.

Bearer Mode (EthernetTest) indicates the transmitpath of the test frame.Different bearer modescorrespond to different typesof test frames. If the bearermode of the received testframe is inconsistent with thebearer mode of this port, thetest frame is discardeddirectly.

Remote Bearer Mode GFP, Ethernet Displays the bearer mode atthe opposite end.

Table 10-57 Service Connection Test


Port For example: VCTRUNK1 Selects the port to query theopposite port information.

Opposite Port Information NE-board-VCTRUNKnumber

Displays the opposite portinformation that is queried.

10.20.15 Parameters: Protocol Fault ManagementIn this user interface, you can diagnose the Ethernet protocol and restart the protocol statemachine by restoring the protocol, to remove the protocol faults.

Parameters

Field Description

Diagnose Port Selects the diagnose port.

Protocol Type Selects the Ethernet protocol type.

Diagnose Information Select the diagnose information.

Fault Displays the fault diagnosis result.

10.20.16 Parameters: Port MAC Address FilteringIn this user interface, you can set the port MAC address filtering.



477


Port For example: Port1 Displays the port name.

MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FE-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

Displays the opposite routerMAC address.



478

11 Modifying the Configuration Data

About This Chapter

11.1 Modifying PortThe client-side and line-side ports of the OTU board in the NG WDM equipment can beconfigured as color ports or grey ports. The port type needs to be set according to type of thesmall form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module used in the equipment.

11.2 Modifying the Services ConfigurationAfter a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the servicebased on the following task sets.

11.3 Conversion Between EPL Ethernet Services and VLAN SNCP ServicesThe conversion between the created EPL Ethernet services and VLAN SNCP services can berealized on the U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide 11 Modifying the Configuration Data


479

11.1 Modifying PortThe client-side and line-side ports of the OTU board in the NG WDM equipment can beconfigured as color ports or grey ports. The port type needs to be set according to type of thesmall form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module used in the equipment.




Background Informationsl Only the TOM board supports interchange of line-side ports and client-side ports. When a

TOM board is created, the ports on the TOM board are created automatically and are definedas client-side ports by default.

l When a board is created, the ports on the board are created automatically and the client-side ports are defined as Client Side Grey Optical Port by default.


Step 1 Right-click the board in the NE panel, and choose Path View from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 Right-click the port for which you want to modify the port type and choose Modify Port fromthe shortcut menu. The Modify Port dialog box is displayed. Set Type and click OK to applythe configuration.

NOTEIf you need to modify Type to Client Side Color Optical Port, Line Side Color Optical Port or ElectricalPort, you must first delete the port, and then add the port. Otherwise the port cannot be modifiedsuccessfully.

Step 3 Optional: In Path View, right-click the desired port, and click Delete Port.

Step 4 Optional: In Path View, right-click a blank space and select Add Port. In the Add Port dialogbox displayed, set the Type of the port. Click OK to apply the configuration.

----End



480

11.2 Modifying the Services ConfigurationAfter a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the servicebased on the following task sets.

11.2.1 Deactivating Cross-Connection ServiceTo release the occupied channel resources, you need to deactivate cross-connections and thendelete the cross-connections.

Prerequisite




Precautions

CAUTIONThe deactivation operation may interrupt services.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Managementfrom the Function Tree.

NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: in the NE Explorer, select the NE and chooseConfiguration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree.


NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: click the Electrical Cross-ConnectionConfiguration tab

Step 3 Optional: Click Query to query the services on the NE. The Working cross-connection listdisplays all the created cross-connections.

Step 4 Select one or more cross-connections in Active state (you can press Ctrl or Shift to selectmultiple cross-connections at the same time), click Deactivate. Then, the Confirm dialog boxis displayed.

Step 5 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation wassuccessful.



481

Step 6 Click Close. In WDM Cross-Connection Configuration, Activation Status of the selectedcross-connection(s) changes from Active to Inactive.

----End

11.2.2 Deleting Cross-ConnectionsWhen you need to modify or re-configure cross-connections, you need to first delete them.

Prerequisite


The cross-connections must be created and inactive.



Precautions

CAUTIONDeleting cross-connections may interrupt services.



Step 2 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click Query to query the informationabout the existing cross-connections.

Step 3 Select the cross-connections to be deleted and click Delete.

Step 4 In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK and then click Close. In the OperationResult dialog box.

----End


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-ConnectionService Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click Query to query theinformation about the existing cross-connections.

Step 3 Select the cross-connections to be deleted and click Delete.

----End



482

11.2.3 Modifying SDH ServicesWhen a network changes or services are adjusted, you can modify an SDH service by using themodification function of the U2000 and Web LCT. Alternatively, you can modify the SDHservice by deleting it and then creating a cross-connection again.

Prerequisite




Precautions

CAUTIONPerforming this operation interrupts the service that you modify.



NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: in the NE Explorer, select the NE and chooseConfiguration > Cross Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select a cross-connection and choose Display > Expand to Unidirectional.

Step 3 You can modify the SDH service by using the method described in Step Step 4 or Step 5.

NOTE

l By using the method described in Step Step 4, you can modify the source or sink of a service, but thesource and sink must be on the same board before and after the modification.

l If the modification requirement cannot be met in the method described in Step Step 4 (for example, apass-through service needs to be configured to the local through modification), you can delete theoriginal service and create the cross-connection again in the method described in Step Step 5, to achievethe modification.

Step 4 Optional: To modify the SDH service, choose Modify from the shortcut menu.

1. Select the service that you want to modify, right click the service and choose Modify fromthe shortcut menu. The Modify SDH Service dialog box is displayed.

2. Modify Source VC4 or Sink VC4, Source Timeslot Range (e.g.1,3-6), and Sink TimeslotRange (e.g.1,3-6). For details of the parameters, see 9.7.1 SDH Service Configuration.



483

NOTE

In this method, you can modify only Source VC4 or Sink VC4 at a time. The source VC4 and sinkVC4 cannot be modified at the same time.

3. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operationwas successful.

4. Click Close.5. Select the service that is modified, and click Activate.6. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.7. Click Close.

Step 5 Optional: To modify the SDH service, delete the service and then create the service again.1. Select the service that you want to modify, and click Delete.2. Click OK and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation

was successful.3. Click Close. The service is deleted.4. Create the service again as required. For details, see 12.6.2 Creating SDH Cross-

Connections.

----End

11.2.4 Deleting SDH ServicesYou can delete an existing SDH when it is no longer applicable or is adjusted.





484



NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: in the NE Explorer, select the NE and chooseConfiguration > Cross Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query existing services. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box.

Step 3 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Step 4 Optional: If the service to be deleted is active, you should deactivate the service. Select theservice that you want to delete and click Deactivate.

CAUTIONDeactivation will interrupt services.

Step 5 Select the desired service and click Delete.

Step 6 In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK.

Step 7 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.

----End

11.2.5 Converting a Non-Protection Service to an SNCP ServiceThe SNCP service features the dual fed and selective receiving function and is used to protectcross-subnet services. When configuring SDH services on a per-NE basis, you can perform thisoperation to convert a configured non-protection service to an SNCP service.


The normal service is created.

Precaution

CAUTIONConverting a normal cross-connection service to an SNCP service may interrupt services.

Procedure




485

Step 2 Click Query to query the SDH services from the NE.

Step 3 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

Step 4 Select the desired normal service, click Display and choose Expand to Unidirectional fromthe drop-down list. Right-click a desired normal service and choose Convert to SNCP from theshortcut menu.

NOTE

You can select multiple services to change them in batches.

Step 5 In the Prompt dialog box displayed, click OK.

Step 6 In the Create SNCP Service dialog box displayed, configure the protection service and clickOK.

NOTE

You need to perform the operation on the NEs that are set as the dual fed nodes and selective receivingnodes on the source or sink, or in the cross protection subnets.

Step 7 Click Create. In the Create SDH Service dialog box displayed, configure a unidirectionalservice from the service source board to the line board of another direction.

NOTE


Step 8 On the intermediate NE that protection services pass through, configure bidirectional pass-through services between line boards.

NOTE

You need to perform this operation on all the intermediate NEs that protection services pass through.

----End

11.2.6 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection ServiceThe SNCP service features the dual fed and selective receiving function and is used to protectcross-subnet services. When configuring SDH services on a per-NE basis, you can perform thisoperation to change a configured SNCP service to a non-protection service.

Prerequisite


The SNCP service must be created.

Precaution

CAUTIONConverting an SNCP service to a normal cross-connection service may interrupt services.



486

ProcedureStep 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration

from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query the SDH services from the NE.


Step 4 Select the desired SNCP service, click Display and choose Expand to Unidirectional to displaythe service one by one. Right-click the SNCP service and choose Convert to Non-ProtectionService from the shortcut menu. The protection service is then deleted.

NOTE

To convert the service in the protection path into a normal service, select a cross-connection in the Auto-Created Cross-Connection pane, right-click the SNCP service and choose Convert to Non-ProtectionService from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 In the Prompt dialog box displayed, click OK.

Step 6 Select a unidirectional service from the service source board to the line board of anotherdirection, and click Deactivate. In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK. In theOperation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.

NOTE


Step 7 Select the unidirectional service that you deactivated, right-click, and choose Delete from theshortcut menu. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the OperationResult dialog box displayed, click Close.

NOTE

You need to perform the operation on the source and sink NEs of the service or the NE that is set as a dualfed or selective receiving node that crosses protection subnets.

Step 8 On the intermediate NE that protection services pass through, delete bidirectional pass-throughservices between line boards.

NOTE

You need to perform this operation on all the intermediate NEs that protection services pass through.

----End

11.3 Conversion Between EPL Ethernet Services and VLANSNCP Services

The conversion between the created EPL Ethernet services and VLAN SNCP services can berealized on the U2000.

11.3.1 Converting an EPL Ethernet Service to a VLAN SNCP ServiceYou can convert an EPL service to a VLAN SNCP service by using the U2000 or the Web LCT.




487

Applicable to the TBE, L4G, LEM24 and LEX4 board.

An EPL Ethernet services must be created.

An idle port must be available when you convert an EPL service to a VLAN SNCP service.




Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab. Select a service that you want to convert, right-click, and chooseConvert to VLAN SNCP from the shortcut menu. The Convert to VLAN SNCP Service dialogbox is displayed.

Step 3 Set protection service parameters such as Source Port according to the actual requirements.

NOTE

l Make sure that the port settings of the protection service and the service being protected are consistent.

l If the port type of protection services is not UNI, the U2000 automatically sets the port type to UNI.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Managementfrom the Function Tree. Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Then, createthe cross-connections between the Ethernet board and the east line board and between theEthernet board and the west line board.



488

NOTE

l When the Ethernet board is the L4G board, create the cross-connection between this L4G board andthe L4G board that is in another direction.

l If the cross-connection already exists, skip this step.

Step 6 In the NE Explorer of the opposite NE, create the Ethernet dual fed service of the opposite NEand the corresponding cross-connections between the Ethernet board and the east line board andbetween the Ethernet board and the west line board.

Step 7 Optional: If the service passes through an intermediate station, on the intermediate station, youshould configure the pass-through for the service between the line boards.

----End



Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab. Select a service that you want to convert, right-click, and chooseConvert to VLAN SNCP from the shortcut menu. The Convert to VLAN SNCP Service dialogbox is displayed.

Step 3 Set protection service parameters such as Source Port according to the actual requirements.

NOTE

l Make sure that the port settings of the protection service and the service being protected are consistent.

l If the port type of protection services is not UNI, the Web LCT automatically sets the port type to UNI.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-ConnectionConfiguration tab. Then, create the cross-connections between the Ethernet board and the eastline board and between the Ethernet board and the west line board.

NOTE

l When the Ethernet board is the L4G board, create the cross-connection between this L4G board andthe L4G board that is in another direction.

l If the cross-connection already exists, skip this step.

Step 6 In the NE Explorer of the opposite NE, create the Ethernet dual fed service of the opposite NEand the corresponding cross-connections between the Ethernet board and the east line board andbetween the Ethernet board and the west line board.

Step 7 Optional: If the service passes through an intermediate station, on the intermediate station, youshould configure the pass-through for the service between the line boards.

----End

11.3.2 Converting a VLAN SNCP Service to an EPL Ethernet ServiceYou can convert a VLAN SNCP service to an EPL service by using the U2000.




489

Applicable to the TBE, L4G, LEM24 and LEX4 boards.

VLAN SNCP services must be created.




Step 2 Click the VLAN SNCP Service Management tab.

Step 3 Select a VLAN SNCP working service, right-click, and choose Convert to Normal Servicefrom the shortcut menu, a confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click OK to convert the service to an EPL service.

----End

11.3.3 Deleting EPL ServicesTo release network resources, you can delete the unwanted EPL services.


EPL services must be created.


Precautions

CAUTIONThe deletion operation affects services. Exercise caution when you perform this operation.



Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab and click Query to view the created EPL services.

Step 3 Select the desired EPL service and click Delete. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK todelete the service.

----End



490

11.3.4 Deleting EVPL (QinQ) ServicesTo release network resources, you can delete the unwanted EVPL (QinQ) services.

Prerequisite


EVPL (QinQ) services must be created.



Precautions




Step 2 Click the Ethernet Line ServiceEPL Service tab and click Query to view the created EVPL(QinQ) services.

Step 3 Select the desired EVPL (QinQ) service and click Delete. In the dialog box that is displayed,click OK to delete the service.

----End

11.3.5 Deleting EPLAN ServicesTo release network resources, you can delete the unwanted EPLAN services.

Prerequisite


EPLAN services must be created.





491

Precautions



Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Service Mount tab and click Query to view the created EPLAN services.

Step 3 Select the desired EPLAN service and click Delete. In the dialog box that is displayed, clickOK to delete the service.

NOTE

Before delete the EPLAN service, you must delete the VLAN filtering table.

Step 4 Optional: On the Service Mount tab page, select the port that does not need to be mounted,and then double-click Mount Port. In the drop-down list, select unconnected. Then, clickApply. The port is then disconnected.

NOTE

Before disconnecting the EPLAN service mounting port, delete the port on the VLAN Filtering tab page.

----End

11.3.6 Modifying a VLAN GroupYou can modify the configuration of a VLAN group to meet service requirements. Modifyinga VLAN group is to modify the number of VLAN members.

Prerequisite


The VLAN group must be created.



Precautions

CAUTIONModifying a VLAN group may affect the services.



492


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the VLAN Group tab.

Step 3 Select a VLAN group that you want to modify, and double-click the VLAN Group MemberCount to modify the number of VLANs. Then, click Apply.

NOTE

The modified VLAN Group Member Count is restricted as follows:

l The value of Initial VLAN is in the range of 1 to 4095. The formula is as follows: Initial VLAN = p x2n. n is an integer from 0 to 12. p is an integer from 1 to 2m. m + n <= 12.

l The formula of VLAN Group Member Count depends on the value of the Initial VLAN. If the valueof Initial VLAN is 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n - 1. If the value of Initial VLAN is an integerother than 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n. The value of n is the same as that in the formula ofthe Initial VLAN.

l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.20.9 Parameters: VLAN Group.

Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The configuration is complete.


----End

11.3.7 Deleting a VLAN GroupYou can delete VLAN groups according to service requirements.


The VLAN group must be created.


Precautions

CAUTIONDeleting a VLAN group may interrupt the services in the VLAN group.



493


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > EthernetLine Service from the Function Tree.


Step 3 Select a VLAN group that you want to delete, and click Delete.

Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The configuration is complete.

----End



494

12 Configuration Tasks

About This Chapter

This chapter describes basic operations that may be used when you configure services. Forexample, configure the service type and WDM-side port attributes of the board. You can seethis topic if required.

12.1 Configuring Working ModesBefore using some boards, you need to configure the port working modes for the boards.Different port working modes enable a board to process services differently.

12.2 Configuring the Service TypeThe services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interfaceof the board is the same as the actual service type.

12.3 Configuring the Service ModeIf services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of theboard.

12.4 Configuring Common Cross-ConnectionsThis section describes how to configure common electrical cross-connections.

12.5 Configuring Service TimeslotsFor some boards the transmit and receive timeslots of the client-end services should beconfigured during service creation.

12.6 Configuring SDH Cross-ConnectionsThis topic describes how to configure SDH cross-connections.

12.7 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH ServicesThe path overhead is configured for services, which helps network maintenance personnel tomaintain the network.

12.8 Configuring the Board ModeThe board supports different functions in different board modes. Set the board mode of the boardproperly according to the actual requirements. For example, when the ND2 board is used as aregeneration board, set the board mode of the ND2 board to the regeneration mode.

12.9 Creating a VLAN Group

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks


495

The VLAN group can extend the number of supported VLAN flows. You can follow theprocedure described in this section to create a VLAN group.

12.10 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC AddressesYou can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to implement the dynamic address aging.The MAC addresses that do not appear again on a transport network during the aging time areregarded as having no route requirements. Then these MAC addresses are deleted from the MACaddress table to make space for more MAC addresses.

12.11 Configuring MAC Address FilteringMAC address filtering is a broadband transmission solution intended to alleviate the load of thestandby router.

12.12 Configuring Port MirroringYou can configure port mirroring to analyze only packets for mirrored ports. In this way, youcan monitor all mirrored ports. This helps you to manage the ports.

12.13 Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol FaultsWhen the Ethernet protocol operates abnormally, the U2000 diagnoses the protocol fault,displays the diagnosis contents, and restores the normal operation of the Ethernet protocol.

12.14 Configuring Non-Intrusive MonitoringNon-intrusive monitoring indicates that the board monitors the overhead, however, does nothandle it, thus the service is not affected. The non-intrusive monitoring is performed for theoverheads that are transmitted through the intermediate nodes between the nodes where theoverhead bytes are added or dropped.



496

12.1 Configuring Working ModesBefore using some boards, you need to configure the port working modes for the boards.Different port working modes enable a board to process services differently.

Prerequisite


The required boards must be created.

Before changing the working mode or port working mode of a board, delete the cross-connections on the board and logical fiber connections at the optical ports.

Contextl You need to configure working modes for the following boards: TN52TOM, THA, TOA,

LOA, TN53TDX, and TN55TQX.l You need to configure only Port Working Mode for the following boards: THA, TOA,

LOA, TN53TDX, and TN55TQX.l For the TN52TOM board, you need to configure not only Board Working Mode but also

Port Working Mode (such as ODU0/ODU1 mapping and tributary-line integration) toachieve different service signal flows.

l If you set Board Working Mode to Non-Cascading mode for the TN52TOM board, youneed to set Port Working Mode only for optical ports ClicentLP1, ClicentLP3,ClicentLP5, and ClicentLP7.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the board that you want to configure and choose Configuration >Working Mode from the Function Tree.

Step 2 In the Board Working Mode pane, set Board Working Mode to Cascading mode or Non-Cascading mode.

NOTE

This step is applicable only to the TN52TOM board.

Step 3 In the Port Working Mode pane, select the desired optical port. Click the Port WorkingMode field and select the corresponding mode from the drop-down list.

Step 4 Click Apply.


----End

12.2 Configuring the Service TypeThe services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interfaceof the board is the same as the actual service type.



497

Prerequisite

You must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher.



Precautions

CAUTIONl Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service types specified for the transmitterand receiver in one direction are the same.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface fromthe Function Tree.

Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 In the Basic Attributes tab, select the desired optical port. Double-click the Service Type fieldand select the required service type.

NOTEIf you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s).

Step 4 Click Apply. Click OK in the dialog box displayed.



498

Step 5 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The value ofService Type is the same as the one set previously.

----End

12.3 Configuring the Service ModeIf services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of theboard.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

This task is applicable to the following boards: TOM, TQM, ND2, NS2, NQ2, L4G, LQG,LQMD, LQMS, and LQM.


Precautions

CAUTIONModifying the service mode interrupts the existing services.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface fromthe Function Tree.

Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Select the Basic Attributes tab, and then select the desired optical port.

Step 4 Double-click the Service Mode field, and then choose the desired service mode from the drop-down list. For details, see A.23 Service Mode (WDM Interface).

NOTE

You do not need to set Service Mode for a line board that works in standard mode.

Step 5 Click Apply.


----End

12.4 Configuring Common Cross-ConnectionsThis section describes how to configure common electrical cross-connections.



499

12.4.1 Creating Cross-ConnectionsBy creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for asingle service.



Background Informationl For the OptiX OSN 6800, the available cross-connection capacity of a board is related to

the slot where the board is installed. For example, when the TQX or NQ2 board is installedin slots 1, 4, 11 or 14, the available cross-connection capacity of the board is 40 Gbit/s;when the TQX or NQ2 board is installed in any other slots, the available cross-connectioncapacity of the board is 20 Gbit/s. Different boards have different cross-connectioncapacities. Fore details, see the functions and features of each board as specified in theHardware Description.

l If the capacity of the configured services is greater than the available cross-connectioncapacity, the service configuration fails.


Step 1 When configuring the cross-connection services, first configure the service type of the WDMinterface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see 12.2 Configuring the ServiceType.


Step 3 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box. For parameter descriptions, see 2.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

Step 4 Select corresponding values for Level and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.1. The following figure shows the parameters to be set when the board where you want to

configure cross-connection services is in compatible mode.



500

2. The following figure shows the parameters to be set when the board where you want toconfigure cross-connection services is in standard mode.

3. If you set Level to ODUflex, you also need to set ODUFlex Timeslots.



501

NOTE

For details about the standard mode and ODUflex, see 2.1.3 Board Model (Standard Mode andCompatible Mode) and 2.1.4 ODUflex.

Step 5 Click OK. A Operation Result dialog box appears telling you that the operation was successful.

Step 6 Click Close.

----End

Procedure on the Web LCTStep 1 When configuring the cross-connection services, first configure the service type of the WDM

interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see 12.2 Configuring the ServiceType.

Step 2 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-ConnectionService Management from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New and the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed. For parameter descriptions, see 2.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

Step 4 Select corresponding values for Service Level and Service Type and set other parameters forthe service.

Step 5 Click OK and the created cross-connection is displayed in the user interface.

----End

12.4.2 Activating Cross-ConnectionsDo as follows to apply cross-connections to a board.




502

The cross-connections must be created and inactive.





Step 3 Optional: Click Query to query the services on the NE. The Working cross-connection listdisplays all the created cross-connections.

Step 4 Select one or more cross-connections in Inactive state (you can press Ctrl or Shift to selectmultiple cross-connections at the same time), right click and choose Activate. Then, theConfirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation wassuccessful.

Step 6 Click Close. In WDM Cross-Connection Configuration, Activation Status of the selectedcross-connection(s) changes from Inactive to Active.

----End

12.5 Configuring Service TimeslotsFor some boards the transmit and receive timeslots of the client-end services should beconfigured during service creation.


Applies to the TQM, TOM, LQM, LQMD, LOM, LQMS, LDMD, LDM, LDMS.



Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM ServiceConfiguration from the Function Tree.



503

Step 2 Click Query to query the status of configured services for each port on the board.

Step 3 Choose the port, double-click Timeslot Configuration Mode and select AutomaticallyAssign.

NOTE

When Timeslot Configuration Mode is set as Automatically Assign, Timeslot Configuration Mode ofthe receive end and transmit end in the same direction of the service must be set as AutomaticallyAssign, and Send Timeslots and Receive Timeslots do not need to be set.

When Timeslot Configuration Mode is set as Manual, you can set parameters, such as SendTimeslots and Receive Timeslots.

l The format of timeslots can be one of the following two:

l 1, 2, 3, 4: Indicates that four (1-4) timeslots are used.

l 1-4: Indicates that four (1-4) timeslots are used.

l Please obey the following rules during service configuration:

l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board.

l For each board, the same timeslot in the same direction cannot be shared by multiple services.

l In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of thetransmit end.

l Timeslots must be set again after the service type is changed.

For details, see A.22 Service Timeslot (WDM Services).

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Query. The configured timeslots of the board are displayed in the interface.

----End

12.6 Configuring SDH Cross-ConnectionsThis topic describes how to configure SDH cross-connections.

12.6.1 Querying the Lower Order Cross-Connection CapacityThe lower order cross-connection capacity of the OptiX OSN 8800 determines the lower orderaccess capability of the equipment. Therefore, when configuring an SDH service, considerwhether the lower order cross-connection capacity of the equipment is sufficient.

PrerequisiteYou are an NMS user with " Monitor Group" authority or higher.




504


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Query Low CrossingCapacity from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Click Query.

----End

12.6.2 Creating SDH Cross-ConnectionsTo groom SDH services, the SDH service cross-connections between line boards must becreated.

Prerequisite


The cross-connect board and the clock board must be configured.





Step 2 Click Query to query SDH services from the NE.


Step 4 Click Create and set the required parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box that isdisplayed. For the meaning of parameters, see 9.7.1 SDH Service Configuration.



505

NOTE

l If you activate the service immediately, the service configuration data is applied to NEs.

l If you do not activate the service, the service configuration data is only saved on the U2000.

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

----End

12.7 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH ServicesThe path overhead is configured for services, which helps network maintenance personnel tomaintain the network.

12.7.1 Configuring Trace ByteThe trace byte is used by the receive end to confirm if it has a continuous connection with thetransmit end. The trace byte can be set to any identical character for equipment of the samevendor but if the equipment is from different vendors, the trace byte must be set to the characterspreviously specified to ensure successful interconnection.

PrerequisiteYou are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher.

When the cross-connections of the VC12, VC3 or VC4 levels are created, you can query or setthe trace byte of the VC12, VC3 or VC4.


Background InformationTrace bytes are used to trace the connection status between the receive end and transmit end.For details, see 9.2.1 Trace Byte.

NOTEThe settings of J0 and J1 bytes must be consistent on the transmit and receive sides; otherwise, J0_MMand HP_TIM are generated at the receive equipment.


Step 1 Select the type of the trace byte.

If you need to configure Perform the following operations

J0 byte In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration >Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overheadfrom the Function Tree.



506

If you need to configure Perform the following operations

J1 byte In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration >Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from theFunction Tree. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab.

Step 2 Right-click the trace byte and choose the input mode.

If you choose Perform the following operations

Copy All Form Received Click Copy All Form Received.

Manual Input Click Manual Input and the Please input the overhead bytedialog box is displayed. Choose Byte Mode and Input Mode andenter the value of the trace byte. Click OK.

NOTE

l Choose Copy All Form Received and the contents of the trace byte received are automatically copiedto the table.

l Choose Manual Input to customize the contents of the trace byte.

Step 3 Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.

----End

12.7.2 Configuring C2 ByteThe C2 byte indicates the multiplexing structure of the VC frame and the service types containedin the VC frame.

Prerequisite

You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher.

The cross-connection must be created on the NE.



Background InformationNOTEThe C2 byte settings on the transmit and receive ends must be consistent. Otherwise, higher order pathsignal label mismatch (HP_SLM) alarm may occur on the receive-end equipment.



507


Step 1 Select the service level of the C2 byte.

If the service level of the C2 byte is Perform the following operations

VC4 In the NE Explorer, select a board and chooseConfiguration > Overhead Management > VC4Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Click theSignal Flag C2 tab.

VC3 In the NE Explorer, select a board and chooseConfiguration > Overhead Management > VC3Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Click theSignal Flag C2 tab.

Step 2 Set the values of C2 to be Sent and C2 to be Received.

Step 3 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click OK and a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.

----End

12.8 Configuring the Board ModeThe board supports different functions in different board modes. Set the board mode of the boardproperly according to the actual requirements. For example, when the ND2 board is used as aregeneration board, set the board mode of the ND2 board to the regeneration mode.


The necessary OTU boards must be created.



Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface fromthe Function Tree.

Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), Select Board from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Double-click Board Mode to choose the desired mode from the drop-down list. For details onthe values, see A.24 Board Mode (WDM Interface).

NOTEIf a cross-connection is configured on the board, delete the cross-connection on the board before settingBoard Mode.



508

Step 4 Click Apply.


----End

12.9 Creating a VLAN GroupThe VLAN group can extend the number of supported VLAN flows. You can follow theprocedure described in this section to create a VLAN group.

Prerequisite








The configuration principles are as follows:

l The VLAN group is of port attributes. It is valid only at the service input port. Both thePORT and VCTRUNK ports can be set as a VLAN group.

l The configuration of a VLAN group is based on the C-VLAN.

l When you create a VLAN group, if a service is configured for a member VLAN (a non-initial VLAN in the VLAN group), the VLAN group cannot be created. The servicementioned includes services that involve VLAN configuration, such as EPL service, flowconfiguration and ETH OAM configuration.

l When you create a VLAN group, if a service is configured for the initial VLAN, the VLANgroup can be created, but the service may be transiently interrupted.

l The maximum number of VLAN groups is consistent with the number of board Links.

l After you create the port VLAN group, if the VLAN ID of the services to be created iswithin the VLAN group, the services must be created based on the initial VLAN ID. If theVLAN ID is not within the port VLAN group, the services are unrestricted.

CAUTIONCreating a VLAN group may affect the services.



509


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > EthernetLine Service from the Function Tree.


Step 3 Click New. In the dialog box displayed, configure the VLAN group parameters.

NOTE

l The value of Initial VLAN is in the range of 1 to 4095. The formula is as follows: Initial VLAN = px 2n. n is an integer from 0 to 12. p is an integer from 1 to 2m. m + n <= 12.

l The formula of VLAN Group Member Count depends on the value of the Initial VLAN. If the valueof Initial VLAN is 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n - 1. If the value of Initial VLAN is aninteger other than 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n. The value of n is the same as that in theformula of the Initial VLAN.

l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.20.9 Parameters: VLAN Group.

Step 4 Click Apply. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click OK and the configuration iscomplete. The created port VLAN group is displayed in the user interface.

----End

12.10 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC AddressesYou can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to implement the dynamic address aging.The MAC addresses that do not appear again on a transport network during the aging time areregarded as having no route requirements. Then these MAC addresses are deleted from the MACaddress table to make space for more MAC addresses.



510


This task is applicable to the TBE and L4G boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN3800.

This task is applicable to the LEM24 and LEX4 boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN6800.


Background Informationl If the aging time is too long, the MAC address table may save many outdated MAC address

entries. This may use up the resources of the MAC address table. As a result, the MACaddress table may not be updated according to changes on the network.

l If the aging time is too short, effective MAC address entries may be deleted. As a result,packets that are broadcasted cannot find their destination MAC addresses and performanceof the network is affected.



Step 2 Double-click MAC Address Aging Time. The MAC Address Aging Time dialog box isdisplayed. Enter the value of the aging time.

NOTE



----End

12.11 Configuring MAC Address FilteringMAC address filtering is a broadband transmission solution intended to alleviate the load of thestandby router.

12.11.1 Adding the MAC Address of the Opposite RouterOn the Ethernet data board at the standby station, add the MAC address of the opposite router,to implement MAC address filtering at the standby station.



511


This task is applicable to the TBE and L4G boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN3800.

This task is applicable to the LEM24 and LEX4 boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 and the OptiXOSN 6800.


Background InformationNOTE

l For the Windows operating system:

To complete the operation, set the General tab of the Internet option of the browser as follows:

1. In Internet Temporary Files, click Settings. The Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. In Check for newer version of stored pages, select Every visit to the page.

l For the Solaris operating system:

1. Install the flash plug-in.

2. Navigate to Mozilla, and enter about:config in the address bar. In Filter, enter cache. Then, setthe Value of browser.cache.disk.enable to true.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet data board and choose Configuration > EthernetMaintenance > Port MAC Address Filtering from the function tree.

Step 2 Click New. The Create MAC Address Filter dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set the MAC Address and click OK. The added MAC address of the opposite router is displayedin the list.



512

----End

12.11.2 Deleting the MAC Address of the Opposite RouterYou can delete the MAC address of the opposite router when port MAC address filtering is notrequired.


This task is applicable to the TBE and L4G boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN3800.

This task is applicable to the LEM24 and LEX4 boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiXOSN 8800.



Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the Ethernet data board and choose Configuration > EthernetMaintenance > Port MAC Address Filtering from the function tree.

Step 2 Select the port from the Port List. Choose the MAC address from the Opposite Router MACAddress List.



513

Step 3 Click Delete to delete the MAC address.

----End

12.12 Configuring Port MirroringYou can configure port mirroring to analyze only packets for mirrored ports. In this way, youcan monitor all mirrored ports. This helps you to manage the ports.

Prerequisite


Applicable to the TBE and L4G boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.



The mirror listener port should contain no Ethernet service, and has not been aggregated.




A mirror listener port cannot be configured with any service.

The concatenation port mirroring function is not supported. For example, if VCTRUNK2 portis configured to listen to VCTRUNK1 port, you cannot configure any other ports to listen toVCTRUNK2 port.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet InterfaceManagement > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query the status of port mirroring that you configure.

Step 3 Click New and the Port Mirror Management window is displayed.

Step 4 Set Mirror Listener Port, Uplink Listened Port, and Downlink Listened Port.



514

NOTE

l For the EGSH, LEX4, LEM24 and TBE board, you can set Uplink Listened Port or DownlinkListened Port, and the two ports cannot be set at the same time.

l For the L4G boards, only Uplink Listened Port is supported.l Do not select a port where services exist from the Mirror Listener Port drop-down list. Otherwise,

creating port mirroring fails.

Step 5 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

----End

12.13 Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol FaultsWhen the Ethernet protocol operates abnormally, the U2000 diagnoses the protocol fault,displays the diagnosis contents, and restores the normal operation of the Ethernet protocol.


Applies to the TBE, L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 3800.

Applies to the LEX4, LEM24 board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 8800.


Background InformationThe protocol types that can be diagnosed include 802.1agOAM, 802.3ahOAM, LAG,DLAG, RSTP, IGMP Snooping and LCAS.

For the L4G board, the 802.1agOAM, 802.3ahOAM and DLAG protocols are not supported.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCTStep 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet

Maintenance > Protocol Fault Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Protocol Type tab and click Diagnosis. The user interface of the U2000 displays thediagnosis result.

Step 3 Select a protocol in the Protocol Type and click Diagnosis. The user interface of the U2000displays the diagnosis result.

----End

12.14 Configuring Non-Intrusive MonitoringNon-intrusive monitoring indicates that the board monitors the overhead, however, does nothandle it, thus the service is not affected. The non-intrusive monitoring is performed for theoverheads that are transmitted through the intermediate nodes between the nodes where theoverhead bytes are added or dropped.



515

PrerequisiteYou must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The board must be created.



Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required board and choose Configuration > OTN OverheadManagement > PM Overhead the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the required port on the board and double-click Non-Intrusive Monitoring. Then, choosethe required value from the drop-down list. For details on the values, see A.36 Non-IntrusiveMonitoring.

Step 3 Click Apply.


----End



516

A Parameters Description

This chapter describes the parameters of all the WDM products of Huawei. Each parameter isdescribed in terms of description, impact on the system, values, configuration guidelines, andrelationship with other parameters in detail.

A.1 Enabled/Disabled

A.2 Max. Frame Length

A.3 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

A.4 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

A.5 MAC Loopback

A.6 PHY Loopback

A.7 QinQ Type Area

A.8 Port (Ethernet Port Attribute)

A.9 Port Physical Parameters (Ethernet Port Attribute)

A.10 Working Mode

A.11 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

A.12 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression

A.13 Default VLAN ID

A.14 VLAN Priority

A.15 Entry Detection

A.16 Tag Identifier

A.17 Source Channel (WDM Cross-Connection)

A.18 Sink Channel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)

A.19 Activation Status (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)

A.20 Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)

A.21 Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide A Parameters Description


517

A.22 Service Timeslot (WDM Services)

A.23 Service Mode (WDM Interface)

A.24 Board Mode (WDM Interface)

A.25 Explicit Link

A.26 Explicit Node

A.27 Excluded Node

A.28 Auto-Calculation

A.29 Copy after Creation

A.30 Level (WDM Trail Creation)

A.31 Direction (WDM Trail Creation)

A.32 Rate (WDM Trail Creation)

A.33 Source (WDM Trail Creation)

A.34 Sink (WDM Trail Creation)

A.35 OVPN Customer (ASON Trail Management)

A.36 Non-Intrusive Monitoring



518

A.1 Enabled/Disabled

Description

The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receiveservices if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set toDisabled.

Impact on the System

The attributes of a port take effect only after the port is enabled. If a port is disabled, the attributesof the port will be invalid and the service at this port will be interrupted.

Values

Value Range Default Value

Enabled, Disabled Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Description

Enabled Enables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for theport take effect.

Disabled Disables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for theport becomes invalid and the service at the port is interrupted.

Configuration Guidelines

None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

A.2 Max. Frame Length

Description

Max. Frame Length (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the maximum transmissionunit (MTU).



519


This parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port. When the length ofa frame exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the frame will be discarded or the servicewill be interrupted.

Values

Board Name Value Range DefaultValue

Unit

TN11LEM24TN11LEX4

1518-9600 1522 Byte


Set this parameter based on the actual service configurations.

It is recommended to set this parameter to a value that is equal to or greater than the maximumlength of a frame that users want to transmit.


This parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.

A.3 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Description

Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in non-autonegotiation mode.


Non-autonegotiation flow control cannot take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.

Values

Board Value Range Default Value

TN11LEM24TN11LEX4

Disabled, Enable SymmetricFlow Control, Send Only,Receive Only

Disable




520

Value Description

Disabled Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receiveends.

Enable Symmetric FlowControl

Enables symmetric flow control frames (allows transmissionand receiving) in non-autonegotiation mode.

Send Only Enables only transmission of flow control frames in non-autonegotiation mode.

Receive Only Enables only receiving of flow control frames in non-autonegotiation mode.


Set this parameter properly according to actual service configurations.


This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Non-autonegotiation mode.

A.4 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Description

Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in auto-negotiation mode.


Auto-negotiation flow control cannot take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.

Values

Board Name Value Range Default Value

TN11LEM24TN11LEX4

l Disabledl Enable Dissymmetric Flow

Controll Enable Symmetric Flow

Controll Enable Symmetric/

Dissymmetric Flow

Disabled




521

Value Description

Disabled Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receiveends. (None)

Enable Dissymmetric FlowControl

Enables dissymmetric flow control. (Asymmetric > LinkPartner)

Enable Symmetric FlowControl

Enables symmetric flow control. (Symmetric)

Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow

Enables either symmetric or dissymmetric flow control,which is determined in the autonegotiation process.(Asymmetric->Local Device)


Set this parameter properly based on actual service configurations.


This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Auto-negotiation mode.

A.5 MAC Loopback

Description

The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With thisparameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAClayer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.


A MAC loopback is used for fault locating but can interrupt services. When this parameter isset to Inloop, the PHY Loopback parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When thePHY Loopback parameter is set to Inloop, this parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback.

Values

Board Value Range Default Value

TN11LEM24TN11LEX4

Non-Loopback, Inloop Non-Loopback




522

Value Description

Non-Loopback Indicates that no loopback is configured.

Inloop Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for a port. Inthis case, the port receives packets sent by itself.

Configuration Guidelinesl For a GE optical port, GE electrical port, FE optical port, and FE electrical port, an MAC

loopback can be set to only inloop.

l For a 10GE optical port, an MAC loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.

l An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port.

l By default a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for fiveminutes.



A.6 PHY Loopback

Description

The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With thisparameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHYlayer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.


A PHY loopback is used for fault locating but interrupts services. When this parameter is set toInloop, the MAC Loopback parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When the MACLoopback parameter is set to Inloop, this parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback.

Values


Non-Loopback, Inloop Non-Loopback


Value Description




523

Value Description

Inloop Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for aport. In this case, the port receives packets sent by itself.

Configuration Guidelinesl For a GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for a GE electrical port,

a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.

l For a 10GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.

l For an FE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for an FE electrical port,a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.

l An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port.

l By default, a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for fiveminutes.



A.7 QinQ Type Area

Description

The QinQ Type Area parameter specifies the QinQ type field.


None.

Values


TN11LEM24TN11LEX4

0x0600-0xFFFF 0x8100


Set this parameter based on actual service configurations.


None.



524

A.8 Port (Ethernet Port Attribute)

Description

The Port parameter specifies a port for which tag attributes needs to be set. Users need to setthe tag attributes of boards separately.


None.

Values


ip1-ipN, vctrunk1-vctrunkM None


Value Description

ip1-ipN Represent Ethernet ports.

vctrunk1-vctrunkM Represent VC-Trunk ports.


None.


None.

A.9 Port Physical Parameters (Ethernet Port Attribute)

Description

The Port Physical Parameters parameter displays the physical parameters of a port, includingport enable status, working mode, flow control enable status, MAC loopback, and PHYloopback.


This parameter is read only and does not affect the normal running of a system.



525

Values

Enable status




Value Description

Enabled Enables a port. The attributes configured for a porttake effect only after the port is enabled.

Disabled Disables a port. The attributes configured for a portbecomes invalid and the service at the port isinterrupted if the port is disabled.

Working mode


TN11LEM24TN11LEX4

l Auto-Negotiationl 10M Half_Duplexl 10M Full_Duplexl 100M Half_Duplexl 100M Full_Duplexl 1000M Half_Duplexl 1000M Full_Duplexl 10G Full_Duplex LANl 10G Full_Duplex WAN

Auto-Negotiation


Value Description

Auto-Negotiation Indicates autonegotiation.

10M Half_Duplex Indicates 10M half-duplex.

10M Full_Duplex Indicates 10M full-duplex.





526

Value Description



10G Full_Duplex_LAN Indicates 10G full-duplex for LAN services.

10G_Full_Duplex_WAN Indicates 10G full-duplex for WAN services.

Flow control enable status


TN11LEM24TN11LEX4

l Disabledl Receive Onlyl Send Onlyl Enable Symmetric Flow

Control

Disabled


Value Description

Disabled Disables port flow control at both the transmit andreceive ends.

Receive Only Enables only receiving of flow control frames.

Send Only Enables only transmission of flow control frames.

Enable Symmetric Flow Control Enables symmetric flow control frames.

MAC loopback, PHY loopback


TN11LEM24TN11LEX4

l Non-Loopbackl Inloopl Outloop

Non-Loopback




527

Value Description


Inloop Indicates that an internal loopback isconfigured for a port. In this case, the portreceives packets sent by itself.

Outloop Indicates that an external loopback isconfigured for a port. In this case, the porttransmits packets after receiving them.

Configuration GuidelinesNone.

Relationship with Other ParametersThis parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.

A.10 Working Mode

DescriptionThe Working Mode parameter specifies the working mode for an Ethernet port. Withautonegotiation, equipment can automatically determine the optimal combination of workingmodes of two connected ports. The autonegotiation mode is recommended because it makesmaintenance easy. During configuration, ensure that working modes of two connected ports arethe same. Services will be interrupted if the working modes of two connected ports are different.

Impact on the SystemServices will be interrupted if working modes of ports are set incorrectly.

ValuesBoard Name Value Range Default Value

TN11LEM24TN11LEX4

l Auto-Negotiationl 10M Half_Duplexl 10M Full_Duplexl 100M Half_Duplexl 100M Full_Duplexl 1000M Half_Duplexl 1000M Full_Duplexl 10G Full_Duplex LANl 10G Full_Duplex WAN

Auto-Negotiation



528


Value Description

Auto-Negotiation Indicates autonegotiation.







10G Full_Duplex LAN Indicates 10G full-duplex for LAN services.

10G Full_Duplex WAN Indicates 10G full-duplex for WAN services.

Configuration GuidelinesUsers need to set this parameter based on the actual physical port types and serviceconfigurations.

For FE electrical ports, this parameter can be set to Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half_Duplex, 10MFull_Duplex, 100M Half_Duplex, or 100M Full_Duplex.

For FE optical ports, this parameter must be set to 100M Full_Duplex.

For GE optical ports, this parameter can be set to 1000M Half_Duplex or 1000MFull_Duplex.

For 10GE optical ports, this parameter can be set to 10G Full_Duplex_LAN or10G_Full_Duplex_WAN.

Relationship with Other ParametersThis parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.

A.11 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

DescriptionThe Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of broadcasttraffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will be discarded.

Impact on the SystemAfter suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the flow of broadcast packets will be limitedaccording to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specifiedthreshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.



529

ValuesValue Range Default Value

10%-100% 30%

Configuration GuidelinesValue Description

10% Indicates that the broadcast packets canaccount for a maximum of 10% of thebandwidth of a port.












530

Relationship with Other ParametersThis parameter is available only when Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression is set toEnabled.

A.12 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression

DescriptionThe Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress thetraffic of broadcast packets.

Impact on the SystemAfter suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will be limitedaccording to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specifiedthreshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.


Disabled, Enabled Disabled


Value Description

Enabled Indicates that the traffic of broadcast packetsis not limited.

Disabled Indicates that excess broadcast packets willbe discarded if the traffic of broadcast packetsexceeds the specified threshold.

Configuration GuidelinesSet this parameter only when you need to limit the traffic of broadcast services.

Relationship with Other ParametersSuppression of broadcast packets is implemented only when this parameter is set to Enabled.



531

A.13 Default VLAN ID

Description

The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untaggedpackets.


The default VLAN ID of a packet will be stripped when it traverses a HYBRID port.

Values


1-4095 1


None.


None.

A.14 VLAN Priority

Description

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port.


None.

Values


0-7 0


None.



532


None.

A.15 Entry Detection

Description

The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.


None.

Values


Enabled, Disabled Enabled


Value Description

Enabled Enables a port to detect packets by tag identifier.

Disabled Disables a port to detect packets by tag identifier. In this case,all packets can traverse the port.


None.


The entry detection states at the ingress and egress ports of a service must be the same.

A.16 Tag Identifier

Description

The Tag Identifier parameter determines whether a port transmits packets with tags. Three typesof tag identifier are available: ACCESS, TAG, and HYBRID.



533

Impact on the SystemTag Identifier Impact on Ports

ACCESS Allows a port to transmit only untaggedpackets.

TAG Allows a port to transmit only tagged packets.

HYBRID Allows a port to transmit both untagged andtagged packets.


ACCESS, TAG, HYBRID TAG


Value Description

ACCESS Allows a port to transmit only untagged packets.

TAG Allows a port to transmit only tagged packets.

HYBRID Allows a port to transmit both untagged andtagged packets.


Relationship with Other ParametersA tag identifier is valid only for a UNI port.

A.17 Source Channel (WDM Cross-Connection)

DescriptionThe Source Channel parameter is used to query the transmit channel of a certain electrical cross-connect service (unidirectional service flow).

Impact on the SystemNone.



534


Slot ID-Board Name-OpticalInterface ID-Optical ChannelID

Null


Value Description

Slot ID-Board Name-OpticalInterface ID-Optical ChannelID

Slot ID: The ID of the slot on the local NE where the cross-connect board is located.Board Name: The name of the cross-connect board.Optical Interface ID: The ID of the optical interface where thecross-connect services are configured.Optical Channel ID: The ID of the optical channel where thecross-connect services are configured.


Relationship with Other ParametersNone.

A.18 Sink Channel (WDM Cross-ConnectionConfiguration)

DescriptionThe Sink Channel parameter is used to query the receive channel of a certain electrical cross-connect service (unidirectional service flow).




535


Slot ID - Board Name -Optical Interface ID - OpticalChannel ID

Null


Value Description

Slot ID-Board Name -Optical Interface ID - OpticalChannel ID

Slot ID: The ID of the slot on the local NE where the cross-connect board is located.Board Name: The name of the cross-connect board.Optical Interface ID: The ID of the optical interface where thecross-connect services are configured.Optical Channel ID: The ID of the optical channel where thecross-connect services are configured.



A.19 Activation Status (WDM Cross-ConnectionConfiguration)

DescriptionThe Activation Status parameter is used to display whether the service cross-connectionconfiguration is activated.

Only when the configuration is activated, can the U2000 deliver the service cross-connectionconfiguration to the NE software.

Impact on the SystemWhen Active is selected, the U2000 delivers the information of the service type, source/sinkservices and service direction that have been configured to the NE software; when Inactive isselected, the U2000 does not deliver the configuration to the NE software.

The configuration does not take effect when Inactive is selected during the cross-connectionconfiguration; the configuration takes effect only when Active is selected during the cross-connection configuration.



536

Values


Active, Inactive Active


Value Description

Active Indicates that the configuration is activated. The service cross-connection configuration will be delivered to the NE software.

Inactive Indicates that the configuration is not activated. The service cross-connection configuration will not be delivered to the NE software.


When creating service cross-connections, determine whether to deliver the configurationimmediately to the NE software.


When Active is displayed in the Activation Status column, the values of the SourceInterface, Sink Interface, Service Type, and Direction parameters will be delivered to theNE software.

A.20 Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)

Description

The Level parameter is used to differentiate the service types configured when electrical cross-connections are configured.

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports Any, GE, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, ODUflex, and OTU1services.

The OptiX OSN 6800 supports Any, GE, ODU1, ODU2, and OTU1 services.

The OptiX OSN 3800 supports Any, GE, ODU1, and OTU1 services.


When you configure an electrical cross-connection, if the level of the services to be cross-connected is set incorrectly, the configuration of the electrical cross-connection will fail and thecross-connect services cannot be configured successfully.



537


ANY, GE, ODU0, ODU1,ODU2, ODU5G, ODU3,OTU1, ODUflex

-


Value Description

ANY Includes the following services: 10GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4,STM-16, STM-64, STM-254, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192,OC-768, FC50, FC100, FC200, FC100(Slice), FC200(Slice),FICON(Slice), FICONEXPRESS(Slice), DVB-ASI, GE(Slice),FC400, FC1000, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, SDI, ESCON,FDDI, ISC 1G, ISC 2G, FICON4G, ETR, CLO

GE Indicates the data GE services.

ODU0 Indicates a 1.25 Gbit/s signal.


ODU2 Indicates a 10 Gbit/s signal.


ODU5G Indicates that one ODU5G service encapsulates four GE services.The ODU5G services can be accessed by the L4G board or the LQGboard.

ODUflex 1.25Gbit/s to 10Gbit/s (n x 1.25Gbit/s).

OTU1 Indicates a 2.5 Gbit/s signal.

NOTE

For the services listed in the table above, the ODU5G service is used only for intra-board fixed cross-connections. For new cross-connections, only GE, Any, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, ODUflex andOTU1 services can be used.

The LSX, LSXR, TMX, LOM, LSXL, and LSXLR boards do not support electrical cross-connections butfixed cross-connections.

Configuration GuidelinesThe value of the parameter varies according to boards. For details, see the HardwareDescription.



538


The cross-connect level must be configured before the Sink Port parameter and optical portsare configured.

When you configure electrical cross-connections by using the cross-connect board, the servicesat the source and sink nodes configured with cross-connections must be consistent.

The fixed cross-connection within a board does not need to be configured manually. It isconfigured automatically by the U2000.

A.21 Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)

Description

The Direction parameter indicates the service direction mode when the service cross-connectionis configured. It can be set to either Unidirectional or Bidirectional.


If the service cross-connection is configured in only one direction, only the services in thatdirection can be configured successfully. The services in the other direction, however, cannotbe configured successfully.

Values


Unidirectional, Bidirectional. Unidirectional

The following table provides a description of each value.

Value Description

Unidirectional When the received and transmitted services travel throughdifferent route, the services are unidirectional.

Bidirectional When the received and transmitted services travel through thesame route, the services are bidirectional.


The values of the parameter are different according to the boards. For details, see the HardwareDescription.


None.



539

A.22 Service Timeslot (WDM Services)

DescriptionThe Service Timeslot parameter is used to configure the number of timeslots of a service. Thenumber must be within the timeslot range of the service type.



1-16(If the number is 0, it indicatesthat the timeslot isunavailable.)

Select a value based on theservice type.

Configuration GuidelinesThe following table lists the required timeslots of each board for the OptiX OSN 6800, the OptiXOSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800.

Supported Board Service Type Required Timeslots

LDM/LDMD/LDMS/LQM/LQMD/LQMS/TOM/TQM

FE 1

GE 7

OTU-1 16

STM-1 1

STM-4 4

STM-16 16

OC-3 1

OC-12 4

OC-48 16

FC100 6

FC200 12

FICON 6

FICON Express 12



540

Supported Board Service Type Required Timeslots

HD-SDI 11

DVB-ASI 2

SDI 3

ESCON 2

FDDI 1

LOM GE 1

FC100 1

FC200 2

FC400 4

FICON 1

FICON4G 4

FICON Express 2

ISC 1G 1

ISC 2G 2

InfiniBand 2.5Ga 2

InfiniBand 5Ga 4

a: Only the TN12LOM board supports the InfiniBand 2.5G and InfiniBand 5G services.

l The number of timeslots required by a service is the number of unoccupied timeslotsrequired by the service type.

l For multiple timeslots, the timeslots with larger numbers are used with precedence. It isrecommended to use contiguous timeslots.

l Several configuration methods are provided for configuring multiple timeslots. Thefollowing description considers configuring four timeslots as an example.– "1-4" indicates configuration of four contiguous timeslots numbered 1, 2, 3, and 4.– "1, 3, 6, 9" indicates configuration of four noncontiguous timeslots.– "1-3, 6" indicates configuration of four timeslots where three are contiguous.

Relationship with Other ParametersThe timeslots in the above table are determined by the value range and the number of timeslotsrequired.



541

A.23 Service Mode (WDM Interface)

Description

The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.


None.

Values

For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG


OTN, SDH OTN

For the ND2, NQ2, NS2


ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Automatic Automatic

For the NS3


ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Mix, Automatic Automatic

For the LQM, TN12LQMD, TN12LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA and TQM


Client Mode, OTN Mode Client Mode

Configuration Guidelinesl In the case of the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards: The mode of line-side services

of boards on an NE at the local end should be the same as that at the opposite end. Whena local-end board need be connected to an SDH service board of another product, the modeof line-side services should be set to SDH.



542

l In the case of the LQM, LQMD, LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA and TQM boards: Whenthe client side accesses OTN services, set this parameter to OTN Mode. When the clientside accesses other services, set this parameter to Client Mode.


None.

A.24 Board Mode (WDM Interface)

Description

The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the serviceapplication scenario.


The signal flow, work mode, and functions of a board vary with the board mode. Therefore,switching between different board modes interrupts the active services.

Values

The following table lists the work modes of the ECOM board.


Service Mode, HUB Mode HUB Mode

The following table lists the description of each value of the ECOM board.

Parameter Value Remarks

Service Mode Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x GE service.

HUB Mode Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x FE service.

The following table lists the work modes of the TN12LQMS board.


NS1 Mode, LQM Mode LQM Mode

The following table lists the description of each value of the TN12LQMS board.



543


NS1 Mode As a line board, this board adds and drops OTU1 signals inconjunction with another tributary board.

LQM Mode As a tributary/line integrated board, this board converges fourchannels of Any signals into a channel of OTU1 signals.

NOTE

The NS1 Mode field is valid only when the TN12LQMS board is housed in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrackor OptiX OSN 3800 subrack.

The following table lists the work modes of the TN11TOM.


Cascading Mode, Non-cascading Mode Non-cascading Mode

The following table lists the description of each value of the TN11TOM.


Cascading Mode Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM sideoptical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to sixchannels of Any signals into one channel of OTU1 signals.

Non-cascading Mode RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical ports.The board supports multiplexing up to four channels of Anysignals into two channels of OTU1 signals.

The following table lists the work modes of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/TN12LSXLR.


Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Electrical Relay Mode

The following table lists the description of each value of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/TN12LSXLR.


Electrical Relay Mode In the case of an optical-layer system, however, theregeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.

Optical Relay Mode



544

The following table lists the work modes of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3.


Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, OpticalRelay Mode

Line Mode

The following table lists the description of each value of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3.


Line Mode The board works as a line board.

Electrical Relay Mode The board works as a wavelength conversion relay unit.In the case of an optical-layer system, however, theregeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.Optical Relay Mode

Configuration GuidelinesSelect the board mode according to the actual service application scenario.


A.25 Explicit Link

DescriptionThe Explicit Link parameter specifies a link that a service must traverse when a trail is created,optimized, or precalculated.

Impact on the SystemA service cannot be created successfully if a specified explicit link is incorrect or the explicitlinks are not specified sequentially.


Links on a network None




545

Value Description

Links on anetwork

Lists all links available at a node.

Configuration GuidelinesIn general, only one explicit link is available on an NE. In addition, the explicit link can be setonly at the egress port on the link that a service traverses.

Relationship with Other ParametersA link can be specified only after a node is specified.

A.26 Explicit Node

DescriptionThe Explicit Node parameter specifies a node that a service must traverse when a trail is created,optimized, or precalculated.

Impact on the SystemA service cannot be created successfully if a specified explicit node is incorrect or the explicitnodes are not specified sequentially.


Nodes on a network None


Value Parameter

Nodes on anetwork

Specifies a node that a service must traverse.

Configuration GuidelinesCheck whether the number of nodes that an ASON service traverses exceeds the maximumnumber of nodes. In the process of creating an ASON service, the ASON software by defaultconsiders that the maximum hops of the ASON service is 64. That is, the maximum number ofnodes that an ASON service travels is 65. In general, only one explicit node is available on anNE.



546


A.27 Excluded Node

DescriptionThe Excluded Node parameter specifies a node that a service cannot traverse when a trail iscreated, optimized, or precalculated.



Nodes on a network None


Value Parameter

Nodes on anetwork

Specifies a node that a service cannot traverse.

Configuration GuidelinesSet this parameter according to customer requirements.


A.28 Auto-Calculation

DescriptionThe Auto-Calculation parameter enables auto-calculation of the trails that comply with thespecified level, direction, rate, source, sink, and route constraints.

Impact on the SystemIf auto-calculation of trails fails, it indicates that a service that complies with the specified level,direction, rate, source, sink, and route constraints does not exist.



547

Values


None None


None.


After this parameter is selected, the system automatically calculates the trails that comply withthe level, direction, rate, source, sink, and route constraints specified for a service.

A.29 Copy after Creation

Description

The Copy after Creation parameter specifies the source and sink nodes for a service and the routeconstraints for creating a service.

Users can create services in batches if the services have the same source node and the same sinknode and comply with the same specified route constraints.


None.

Values


Source, Sink Null


Value Description

Source Lists all nodes that can function as the source of aservice complying with the specified constraints.

Sink Lists all nodes that can function as the sink of a servicecomplying with the specified constraints.



548


The services created in batches by using this parameter have the same level, direction, and rate.In addition, the services comply with the same route constraints.

A.30 Level (WDM Trail Creation)

Description

The Level parameter determines the type of a service configured during configuration of anelectrical cross-connection, OCh trail, or Client trail. ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, and OChlevels are supported.


An electrical cross-connection cannot be configured successfully if this parameter is setincorrectly and thus a service cannot be provisioned.

Values


ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, OCh,Client

Client


Value Description





OCh Indicates the optical-layer signal.

Client Indicates the client-side signal.


None.

Relationship with Other Parametersl Level must be set prior to Sink Port.



549

l When configuring an electrical cross-connection implemented by a cross-connect board,ensure that the service levels at the source and sink ends are the same.

l The fixed cross-connections on a board do not need to be configured manually; instead,they are configured automatically by the NMS.

A.31 Direction (WDM Trail Creation)

DescriptionThe Direction parameter indicates the direction of a trail.



Unidirectional, Bidirectional Bidirectional


Value Description

Unidirectional Indicates that the source can transmit services, and the sink canreceive services.

Bidirectional Indicates that the source and sink can receive and transmitservices.

Configuration GuidelinesEnsure that a created ASON service is bidirectional.


A.32 Rate (WDM Trail Creation)

DescriptionThe Rate parameter specifies the rate for a trail.

The rate for an OCh-level ASON trail cannot be specified.



550

Impact on the SystemIf the service rates for the boards that the service traverse are different, the service will beinterrupted.


GE, 10GE, 10GELAN, 10GEWAN,OTU1, OTU5G, OTU2, OTU3, ANY,FC25, FC50, FC100, FC200, OC-3,OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768,STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64...

The default rate varies according to servicelevels.

Configuration Guidelinesl Ensure that the service rates for upstream and downstream boards are the same.l Set this parameter according to the actual service mapping mode and signal rate. The

parameter value varies according to boards. For details, see the Hardware Description.

Relationship with Other ParametersThe value of this parameter depends on the service level.

A.33 Source (WDM Trail Creation)

DescriptionThe Source parameter specifies the source of a trail.

For an optical service, the parameter value is expressed as optical NE-NE-subrack-slot-board-port-wavelength number/wavelength/frequency.

For an electrical service, the parameter value is s expressed as optical NE-NE-subrack-slot-board-port.

Impact on the SystemDuring configuration of a service, the source, including NE, subrack, slot, board, and port, mustbe specified for the service. A source slot must be specified if a board-level optical cross-connection needs to be configured. If no source slot is specified, a board-level optical cross-connection cannot be created. In addition, a configured board-level optical cross-connection willbecome invalid if a source port is configured incorrectly.



551


Source NE, source subrack,source slot, source board,source port, null

Null


Value Description

Source NE Specifies a node where aservice is added.

Source subrack Specifies a subrack at the nodewhere a service is added.

Source board Specifies the type of a boardwhere the source edge port islocated.

Source port Specifies a source port for aboard-level optical cross-connection.

Null Indicates that no source isconfigured for an opticalcross-connection.

Configuration Guidelinesl Only one source port can be set for one board-level optical cross-connection.l A MON port cannot be used as the source port for a board-level optical cross-connection.

Relationship with Other ParametersThis parameter is available only when a source slot is specified.

A.34 Sink (WDM Trail Creation)

DescriptionThe Sink parameter specifies the sink of a trail.

For an optical service, the parameter value is expressed as optical NE-NE-subrack-slot-board-port-wavelength number/wavelength/frequency.

For an electrical service, the parameter value is s expressed as optical NE-NE-subrack-slot-board-port.



552

Impact on the SystemDuring configuration of a service, the sink, including NE, subrack, slot, board, and port, mustbe specified for the service. A sink slot must be specified if a board-level optical cross-connectionneeds to be configured. If no sink slot is specified, a board-level optical cross-connection cannotbe created. In addition, a configured board-level optical cross-connection will become invalidif a sink port is configured incorrectly.


Sink NE, sink subrack, sinkslot, sink board, sink port, null

Null


Value Description

Sink NE Indicates a node where aservice is dropped.

Sink subrack Specifies a subrack at a nodewhere a service is dropped.

Sink board Specifies the type of a boardwhere the sink edge port islocated.

Sink port Specifies a sink port for aboard-level optical cross-connection.

Null Indicates that no sink isconfigured for an opticalcross-connection.

Configuration Guidelinesl Only one sink port can be set for one board-level optical cross-connection.l A MON port cannot be used as a sink port for a board-level optical cross-connection.

Relationship with Other ParametersThis parameter is available only when a sink slot is specified.



553

A.35 OVPN Customer (ASON Trail Management)

DescriptionThe OVPN (Optical Virtual Private Network) parameter specifies a customer on an opticalvirtual private network (OVPN). The OVPN classifies different OVPN customers by resourcetype. The timeslot resources allocated to an OVPN customer can be used only by the servicesof this OVPN customer.



OVPN customer resources None

The following table lists the description of the value.

Value Description

OVPN customer resources The resources for TE links areclassified into three types:shared resources, exclusiveresources, and OVPNcustomer resources.

Configuration GuidelinesThis parameter is available on the NMS only when Level is set to OCh, Direction is set toBidirectional, and SPC First is selected.

Relationship with Other Parametersl The OVPN function is available only when OVPN is enabled for all ASON NEs in an

ASON domain and the OVPN license can be enabled on the NMS.l OVPN NMS user: This user can use the OVPN customer resources and shared resources

allocated by user admin.l User admin: This is the default super user of the NMS and is the only user that can manage

OVPN customers and allocate OVPN resources. This user can use all TE link resources.



554

A.36 Non-Intrusive Monitoring

DescriptionThe Non-Intrusive Monitoring parameter provides an option for enabling or disabling the non-intrusive monitoring. When the client side of a board receives OTN signals, the board does notneed to terminate and then regenerate PM or TCM overheads. In this case, the non-intrusivemonitoring function can be enabled to monitor the received OTN signals. The function does notaffect service signals.

Impact on the SystemWhen the non-intrusive monitoring function is enabled for an optical interface on a board, theboard detects the QoS of the service and reports alarms if the QoS is poor. Other modules performoperations according to the detected QoS, such as protection switching. If the non-intrusivemonitoring function is disabled, the services at the optical port are transmitted transparently.




Value Range Description

Disabled Indicates that the non-intrusive monitoring function isdisabled.

Enabled Indicates that the non-intrusive monitoring function isenabled.

Configuration GuidelinesSet this parameter according to the actual service requirements and the user requirement.

Relationship with Other ParametersNone



555

B Glossary

A

AC See alternating current

access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have accessto a resource.

ACK See acknowledgement

acknowledgement A response sent by a receiver to indicate successful reception of information.Acknowledgements may be implemented at any level including the physical level (usingvoltage on one or more wires to coordinate transfer), at the link level (to indicatesuccessful transmission across a single hardware link), or at higher levels.

ACL See access control list

add/drop multiplexer Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signalscontained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.

Add/drop wavelength Add/drop wavelength refers to the wavelength that carries the add/drop services in theOADM equipment.

Address ResolutionProtocol

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses toMAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses throughARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the hostconverts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipmentthrough its IP address.

ADM See add/drop multiplexer

administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layerand the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher orderVC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative tothe multiplex section frame start.

Administrator A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCoreproduct. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.

ADSL See asymmetric digital subscriber line

AGC See automatic gain control

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Configuration Guide B Glossary


556

AID access identifier

AIS See alarm indication signal

alarm A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network managementsystem during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recoveryalarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changesto cleared.

alarm cable The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.

alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.

alarm cause A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault causeis the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that isrepresentative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem.

alarm indication On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the currentstatus of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on.When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When theorange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellowindicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator onthe front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.

alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failurehas been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.

alarm mask On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions forthe system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meetingthe conditions.

alarm severity The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-Trecommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major,Minor, Warning.

alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be thenetworkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific functionmodule of a specific board.

alarm type Classification of alarms with different attributes. There are six alarm types as following:Communication: alarm indication related with information transfer. Processing: alarmindication related with software or information processing Equipment: alarm indicationrelated with equipment fault Service: alarm indication related with QoS of the equipmentEnvironment: alarm related with the environment where the equipment resides, usuallygenerated by a sensor Security: alarm indication related with security

ALC See automatic level control

ALC link A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (singlestation) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfils opticalpower control on the line that contains the link.

ALC node The ALC functional unit. It corresponds to the NE in a network. The power detect unit,variable optical attenuator unit, and supervisory channel unit at the ALC node worktogether to achieve the ALC function.

ALS See automatic laser shutdown

alternating current Electric current that reverses its direction of flow (polarity) periodically according to afrequency measured in hertz, or cycles per second.



557

American NationalStandard Institute

An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry.American National Standard Institute (ANSI) participates in defining network protocolstandards.

American StandardCode for InformationInterchange

American Standard Code for Information Interchange - the standard system forrepresenting letters and symbols. Each letter or symbol is assigned a unique numberbetween 0 and 127.

ANSI See American National Standard Institute

antistatic floor A floor that can quickly release the static electricity of the object contacting it to preventaccumulated static electricity

APD See avalanche photodiode

APE automatic power equilibrium

APID access point identifier

application-specificintegrated circuit

A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late inthe manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable formany needs.

APS See automatic protection switching

ARP See Address Resolution Protocol

arrayed waveguidegrating

A device, built with silicon planar lightwave circuits (PLC), that allows multiplewavelengths to be combined and separated in a dense wavelength-division multiplexing(DWDM) system.

ASCII See American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASE amplified spontaneous emission

ASIC See application-specific integrated circuit

ASON See automatically switched optical network

asymmetric digitalsubscriber line

A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phonelines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL providescontinuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses mostof the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receiveinformation from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice)information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps.

AsynchronousTransfer Mode

A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous inthe sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.

ATAG autonomously generated correlation tag

ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode

AU See administrative unit

auto-negotiation An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices toautomatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.



558

automatic gain control A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as afunction of a specified parameter, such as received signal level.

automatic lasershutdown

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmittersand optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.

automatic level control A well-known application in communication systems with a given input signalconditioned to produce an output signal as possible, while supporting a wide gain rangeand controlled gain-reduction and gain recovery characteristics.

automatic protectionswitching

Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switchto a standby facility to recover the traffic.

automatically switchedoptical network

A network which is based on technology enabling the automatic delivery of transportservices. Specifically, an ASON can deliver not only leased-line connections but alsoother transport services such as soft-permanent and switched optical connections.

avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free anavalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltagesthan other semiconductor electronics.

AWG See arrayed waveguide grating

B

background blockerror ratio

The ratio of background block errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during afixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.

backup A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes ofdatabase recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to datasynchronization between active and standby boards.

bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in anetwork. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies thetransmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

BAS See broadband access server

basic input/outputsystem

A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output controlprograms, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system settinginformation. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.

bayonet-neill-concelman

A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.

BBE background block error

BBER See background block error ratio

BC See boundary clock

BDI Backward Defect Indication

BEI backward error indication

BER See bit error rate

BIAE backward incoming alignment error



559

bill of material Listing of all the subassemblies, parts and raw materials that go into the parent assembly.It shows the quantity of each raw material required to make the assembly. There are avariety of display formats for BOMS, including single level, indented, modular/planning, transient, matrix and costed BOMs [APICs, CMSG].

BIOS See basic input/output system

BIP See bit-interleaved parity

BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity order 8

bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the correspondingbit in the received digital signal.

bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure thecommunications quality of a network.

bit interleaved parityorder 8

A frame is divided into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)in a parity unit. Then arrangethe blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" over each column. Then fill a 1 in thecorresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.

bit-interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by thetransmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that thefirst bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in thecovered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit ofall X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by settingthe BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of thesignal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position withinthe X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includesthe BIP-X.

BITS See building integrated timing supply

BMC best master clock

BNC See bayonet-neill-concelman

BOM See bill of material

boundary clock A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths.

BPDU See bridge protocol data unit

BPS board-level protection switching

bridge protocol dataunit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN thatuses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information onports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it wasintended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in anetwork topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridgesinterfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

bridging The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channelssimultaneously.

broadband accessserver

A server providing features as user access, connection management, address allocationand authentication, authorization and accounting. It also works as a router featuringeffective route management, high forwarding performance and abundant services.

broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range isdetermined by the broadcast address.



560

broadcast service The unidirectional services from one service source to multiple service sinks.

building integratedtiming supply

In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can usea device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect thesynchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals tothe building integrated device. This device is called BITS.

BWS Backbone WDM System

C

cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.

capex See capital expenditure

capital expenditure Capital expenditures (CAPEX or capex) are expenditures creating future benefits. Acapital expenditure is incurred when a business spends money either to buy fixed assetsor to add to the value of an existing fixed asset with a useful life that extends beyond thetaxable year. Capex are used by a company to acquire or upgrade physical assets suchas equipment, property, or industrial buildings.

CAR See committed access rate

CBS See committed burst size

CC See connectivity check

CCI connection control interface

CCM See continuity check message

CD chromatic dispersion

CDMA See Code Division Multiple Access

CE See customer edge

CENELEC See European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization

central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interpretsand executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and executeinstructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer'smain data-transfer path, the bus.

centralized alarmsystem

The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.

CF See compact flash

CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol

channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between twoor more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmittedper second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits persecond. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).

channel spacing The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channelsin a WDM device.

CIR See committed information rate



561

CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree

CLEI common language equipment identification

CLNP connectionless network protocol

CLNS connectionless network service

clock synchronization Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signalfrequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.

clock synchronizationcompliant withprecision time protocol

A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and controlsystem. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.

clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in anetwork.

CM See configuration management

CMEP connection monitoring end point

CMI coded mark inversion

coarse wavelengthdivision multiplexing

A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels intothe same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDMdoes not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.

Code Division MultipleAccess

A communication scheme that forms different code sequences by using the frequencyexpansion technology. In this case, subscribers of different addresses can use differentcode sequences for multi-address connection.

committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classifiedinto QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission ratecan be defined.

committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committedinformation rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that thisparameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might beforwarded.

committed informationrate

The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normalconditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred tothe leaky bucket.

Common ObjectRequest BrokerArchitecture

A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces ofprograms (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the twoprograms are written in different programming languages and are running on differentplatforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, orORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the objectcomes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP,object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented.

compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used inportable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory ina standardized enclosure.

concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can beused a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.



562

Configuration Data A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE cancollaborate with other Nes in an entire network. Thus, configuration data is the key factorfor normal running of an entire network.

configurationmanagement

1. A network management function defined by the International Standards Organization(ISO). It involves installing, reinitializing & modifying hardware & software.

2. Configuration Management (CM) is a system for collecting the configurationinformation of all nodes in the network.

configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.

congestion An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network serviceefficiency.

connecting plate A metallic plate which is used to combine two cabinets.

connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is boundto the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to theinput of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point ischaracterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection pointis formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.

connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved byeach MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.

continuity checkmessage

CCM is used to detect the link status.

convergence 1. A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one orseveral channels of required signals.

2. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specificrouting protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.

convergence service A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide forthe specific requirements of the convergence service user.

CORBA See Common Object Request Broker Architecture

corrugated pipe Used to protect optical fibers.

CPLD Complex Programmable Logical Device

CPU See central processing unit

CRC See cyclic redundancy check

CSA Canadian Standards Association

CSES consecutive severely errored second

CSMA carrier sense multiple access

CST Common Spanning Tree

current alarm An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled.

current performancedata

Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers,namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of aperformance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data onlyin the specified monitoring period.



563

customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to theService Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing

cyclic redundancycheck

A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking usesa complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sendingdevice performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that itsends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation aftertransmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmissionwas error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmissionincludes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D

DAPI destination access point identifiers

Data backup A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data lossin the case of the damage or failure in the original storage area.

data communicationnetwork

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the DataCommunication Function (DCF).

data communicationschannel

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal totransmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

DBPS distribute board protect system

DCC See data communications channel

DCF See dispersion compensation fiber

DCM See dispersion compensation module

DCM frame A frame which is used to hold the DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module).

DCN See data communication network

DDF See digital distribution frame

DDN See digital data network

demultiplexer A device that separates signals that have been combined by a multiplexer for transmissionover a communications channel as a single signal.

dense wavelengthdivision multiplexing

Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation ofsingle mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacingas carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.

device set A collection of multiple managed devices. By dividing managed devices into differentdevice sets, users can manage the devices by using the U2000 in an easier way. If anoperation authority over one device set is assigned to a user (user group), the authorityover all the devices in the device set is assigned to the user (user group), thus making itunnecessary to set the operation authority over all the devices in a device set separately.It is recommended to configure device set by geographical region, network level, devicetype, or another criterion.

DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol



564

diamond-shaped nut A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet.

digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiberchannel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplextechnology.

digital distributionframe

A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange withtransmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.

digital subscriber lineaccess multiplexer

A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company thatreceives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections andputs the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques.

dispersioncompensation fiber

A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersionof transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.

dispersioncompensation module

A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for thedispersion of transmitting fiber.

Distance VectorMulticast RoutingProtocol

An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typicaldense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routingdatagrams with its neighbors.

distributed linkaggregation group

The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protectiontechnology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end.In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the servicescan automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for theinter-board ports.

DLAG See distributed link aggregation group

DMUX; DEMUX See demultiplexer

DNI Dual Node Interconnection

domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.

DQPSK differential quadrature phase shift keying

DRDB dynamic random database

DRZ differential phase return to zero

DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point

DSCR dispersion slope compensation rate

DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer

DSP Digital Signal Processing

DTE Data Terminal Equipment

DTMF See dual tone multiple frequency

DTR data terminal ready

dual tone multiplefrequency

In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set combinations oftwo specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and theother from a group of four higher frequencies, are used.

dual-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protectedentity (e.g. "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure.



565

DVB Digital Video Broadcasting

DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing

Dynamic HostConfiguration Protocol

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol.A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client hostrequesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internetnetwork. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.

E

E2E End to End

EAPE enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium

EBS See excess burst size

ECC See embedded control channel

EDFA See erbium doped fiber amplifier

eDQPSK enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying

EFM See Ethernet in the first mile

ejector lever A lever for removing circuit boards from an electronic chassis.

electric supervisorychannel

A technology realizes the communication among all the nodes and transmits themonitoring data in the optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC isintroduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.

electromagneticcompatibility

Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunicationsequipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagneticenvironment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentionalelectromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.

electromagneticinterference

Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades orlimits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at differentelectrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.

element managementsystem

An element management system (EMS) manages one or more of a specific type ofnetwork elements (NEs). An EMS allows the user to manage all the features of each NEindividually, but not the communication between NEs - this is done by the networkmanagement system (NMS).

embedded controlchannel

A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)information between NEs.

EMC See electromagnetic compatibility

EMI See electromagnetic interference

EMS See element management system

enterprise systemconnection

A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system.It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.

EPL See Ethernet private line



566

EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service

erbium doped fiberamplifier

An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length ofoptical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump ofErbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external lightsource pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.

ESC See electric supervisory channel

ESCON See enterprise system connection

ESD See electrostatic discharge

ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf orcabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.

eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable

Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/CollisionDetection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..

Ethernet in the firstmile

Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes theadvantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFMprovides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. Inaddition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV)and Video On Demand (VOD).

Ethernet private LANservice

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over adedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, orMPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-pointconnections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.

Ethernet virtualprivate LAN service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a sharedbridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.

Ethernet virtualprivate line

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over sharedbandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.

ETS European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

ETSI 300mm cabinet A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standardsof the ETSI.

European Committeefor ElectrotechnicalStandardization

The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization was established in 1976in Brussels. It is the result of the incorporation of two former organizations. It aims toreduce internal frontiers and trade barriers for electrotechnical products, systems andservices.

EVOA electrical variable optical attenuator

EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line

EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service



567

excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, thetraffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameterused to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet sizewhen the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parametermust be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than themaximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Extended ID The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different networksegments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.

External cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces andoptical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals.

eye pattern An oscilloscope display of synchronized pseudo-random digital data (signal amplitudeversus time), showing the superposition of accumulated output waveforms.

F

F1 byte The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for networkproviders. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path forspecial maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte.

fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 timesfaster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and soon. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the followingthree types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core opticalfibers).

fault A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A faultdoes not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of externalresources and intentional settings.

FBG fiber Bragg grating

FC See fiber channel

FDB flash database

FDDI See fiber distributed data interface

FE See fast Ethernet

FEC See forward error correction

fiber channel A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiberchannel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used fortransporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-modeand multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted paircopper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented andconnectionless services.

fiber distributed datainterface

A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications fortransmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based onthe token ring network.

fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers.



568

fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and forconnections between subracks or inside a subrack.

fiber spool A device used in coiling up an extra length of optical fibers.

Fiber trough The trough that is used for routing fibers.

fiber/cable Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physicalentities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (userinformation and network management information) and perform transmission functionin the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cabletransmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiberconnection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEsrepresents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of opticalfiber type.

field programmablegate array

A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as thePAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but alsoovercomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of thelimited number of gate arrays.

FIFO See First in First out

File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computerson the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be anFTP client and the other an FTP server.

First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.

Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the networkmanagement system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards,it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present,two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port IDand port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexistin the same port.

FMT See fiber management tray

FOADM fixed optical add/drop multiplexer

FOAs fixed optical attenuator

Forced switch For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unlessan equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on theprotection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.

forward errorcorrection

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload atthe transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated duringtransmission are corrected at the receive end.

four-wave mixing Four-Wave Mixing (FWM), also called four-photon mixing, occurs when the interactionof two or three optical waves at different wavelengths generates new optical waves,called mixing products or sidebands, at other wavelengths.

FPGA See field programmable gate array



569

frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame lengthis represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-specified by the sending and receiving parties.

frame alignment signal A distinctive signal inserted in every frame or once in every n frames, always occupyingthe same relative position within the frame, and used to establish and maintain framealignment.

FTP See File Transfer Protocol

full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in bothdirections, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-linetelephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heardat the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road withone lane for each direction.

G

gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the opticalamplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,which expressed in dB.

gain flattening filter Gain Flattening Filter (GFFs), also known as gain equalizing filters, are used to flattenor smooth out unequal signal intensities over a specified wavelength range. This unequalsignal intensity usually occurs after an amplification stage (for example, EDFA and/orRaman). Typically, GFFs are used in conjunction with gain amplifiers to ensure that theamplified channels all have the same gain. A static spectral device that flattens the outputspectrum of an erbium-doped fiber amplifier.

Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be usedto enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is thegateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannotidentify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IPnetworks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of thenetwork and one IP address of the Ethernet port.

gateway networkelement

A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer andthe NM application layer

Gb See gigabit

GCC general communication channel

GCP See GMPLS control plan

GE See gigabit Ethernet

GE ADM The technology can optimize GE service transport over WDM for Metro network. Itowns the capability of GE service convergence and grooming and benefits to use thenetwork resource more effectively.

generic framingprocedure

A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has beenstandardized by ITU-T SG15.

GFF See gain flattening filter

GFP See generic framing procedure



570

gigabit In data communications, a gigabit is one billion bits, or 1,000,000,000 (that is, 10^9)bits. It's commonly used for measuring the amount of data that is transferred in a secondbetween two telecommunication points.

gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not supportcoaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. IfGigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causingthe length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.

Global PositioningSystem

A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, andtiming services to worldwide users.

GMPLS generalized multiprotocol label switching

GMPLS control plan The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei.The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, thetraditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product seriessupport the ASON features.

GNE See gateway network element

GPS See Global Positioning System

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options withgraphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.

grounding The connection of sections of an electrical circuit to a common conductor, called theground, which serves as the reference for the other voltages in the circuit.

GSSP General Snooping and Selection Protocol

GUI See graphical user interface

H

Hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interfaceto the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.

HCS See hierarchical cell structure

HDB high density bipolar code

HDLC See high level data link control

hierarchical cellstructure

This is a term typically used to describe the priority of cells within a mixed environment.That is when Macro, Micro, and Pico cells may be viewed as candidates for cellreselection the priority described by the HCS will be used in the associated calculations.

high level data linkcontrol

The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layerof the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame byadding a trailer and a header.

History alarm The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories.

History PerformanceData

The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reportedand stored in the NMS.



571

I

IAE incoming alignment error

IC See integrated circuit

ICC ITU carrier code

ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol

ID See identity

identity The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitivelyrecognizable or known.

Idle resource opticalNE

When the U2000 is started successfully, an NE icon called "Idle ONE" will be displayedon the topological view. In this NE, the subracks and boards that are not divided to otheroptical NEs (such as OTM, OADM and other NEs) are retained. In this NE, idle DWDMsubracks and boards are reserved, which can be distributed to other ONEs. Double-clickthe NE icon to view all the currently idle DWDM subracks or boards in the network.

IE See Internet Explorer

IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force

IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol

Input jitter tolerance The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, whenmodulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two erroredseconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30second measurement intervals.

Institute of Electricaland ElectronicsEngineers

A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States butboasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

integrated circuit A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place andinterconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.

integrated servicesdigital network

A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for thevoice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on asmall number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensivetransmission service.

intelligent poweradjustment

A technology that the system reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacentregeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss ofoptical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals may due to the fiber is broken, theperformance of equipments trend to be inferior or the connector is not plugged well.Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser being sent out from the sliceof broken fiber.

Internal cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces andoptical interfaces within the cabinet.

internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.



572

InternationalElectrotechnicalCommission

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.

InternationalOrganization forStandardization

An international association that works to establish global standards for communicationsand information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely acceptedISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computersconnected by communications networks.

InternationalTelecommunicationUnion

A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendationbodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) andradio networks (ITU-R).

InternationalTelecommunicationUnion-TelecommunicationStandardization Sector

An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunicationstechnologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with aletter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. Forexample, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and opensystem communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.

Internet ControlMessage Protocol

A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction andother information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP softwareon one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See alsocommunications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).

Internet EngineeringTask Force

A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged withstudying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the InternetArchitecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groupsthat concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisherof the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.

Internet Explorer Microsoft's Web browsing software. Introduced in October 1995, the latest versions ofInternet Explorer include many features that allow you to customize your experience onthe Web. Internet Explorer is also available for the Macintosh and UNIX platforms.

Internet GroupManagement Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups amongthe TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establishand maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sentacross an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet deliveryservice. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. Theentire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the twofundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

IP See Internet Protocol

IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected tothe Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets.An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal valuesof its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of theIP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifythe host itself.

IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remoteNEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overheadDCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.

IPA See intelligent power adjustment



573

IPG inter-packet gap

ISDN See integrated services digital network

ISO See International Organization for Standardization

IST See internal spanning tree

ITU See International Telecommunication Union

ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication StandardizationSector

J

Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control systeminstability.

Jitter transfer The physical relationship between jitter applied at the input port and the jitter appearingat the output port.

L

label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through labelswitching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based onnormal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.

LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG See link aggregation group

LAN See local area network

LAPD link access procedure on the D channel

LAPS link access protocol-SDH

Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laserlight has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductorlaser as the light source.

layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchicallyas successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transferof its characteristic information.

LB See loopback

LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme

LCD See liquid crystal display

LCN local communication network

LCT local craft terminal

LED See light emitting diode

LHP long hop



574

light emitting diode A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic producton the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights andperimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, opticalmice and laser-class printers.

Link AggregationControl Protocol

A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface toincrease bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE802.3ad.

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a linkaggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it werea single link.

link capacityadjustment scheme

LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides acontrol mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet thebandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member linksthat have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is theresponsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.

Link Control Protocol In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes,configures, and tests data-link Internet connections.

link stateadvertisement

The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is thecondition of the link.

linktrace message The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEPis called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MACaddress of the destination MEP2.

linktrace reply For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to thesource MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message iscalled Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of theTTL of LTM minus 1.

liquid crystal display A type of display that uses a liquid compound having a polar molecular structure,sandwiched between two transparent electrodes.

LLC See logical link control

LMP link management protocol

LOC loss of clock

local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from beingswitched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has beenswitched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel tothe working channel.

logical link control According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the uppersublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).

logical port A logical port is a logical number assigned to every application.



575

loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that thesignal or message can be analyzed for errors.

LOP See loss of pointer

LOS See Loss Of Signal

loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in thePHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start ofcell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the receivedsignal.

Lower subrack The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.

LP See logical port

LPT link-state pass through

LSA See link state advertisement

LSP See label switched path

LT linktrace

LTM See linktrace message

LTR See linktrace reply

M

MA Maintenance Associations

MAC See media access control

MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer

main distributionframe

A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.

main path interface atthe transmitter

A reference point on the optical fiber just after the OM/OA output optical connector.

main topology A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display).The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machineinteractive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarmsof different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basicnetwork operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.

maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. Thedevices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.

maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.

MAN See metropolitan area network

managed object The management view of a resource within the telecommunication environment that maybe managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects are: equipment, receiveport, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container, multiplex section, andregenerator section.



576

Managementinformation

The information that is used for network management in a transport network.

managementinformation base

A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. Itcomprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such asrouters and switches) in a network.

manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition existson other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switchcommand is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.

Mapping A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary ofan SDH network.

marking-off template A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installationholes for the cabinet.

MD See maintenance domain

MDB Memory Database

MDF See main distribution frame

MDP message dispatch process

MDS message distribution service software

ME maintenance entities

mean launched power The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fiber by thetransmitter.

Mean Time BetweenFailures

The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measureof the reliability of the system.

media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of thedata link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connectingthe physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocolchecks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain controlinformation is added to the data, and then the data and the control information aretransmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MACprotocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmittedcorrectly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the controlinformation is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

MEP maintenance end point

metropolitan areanetwork

A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computerresources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large localarea network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN).The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single largernetwork (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It isalso used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging themwith backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.

MFAS See multiframe alignment signal

MIB See management information base

MIP maintenance intermediate point

MLD See multicast listener discovery



577

MLM laser See multi-longitudinal mode laser

MO See managed object

mother board A printed board assembly that is used for interconnecting arrays of plug-in electronicmodules.

mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements orcomponents.

MP See maintenance point

MPI main path interface

MPI-R main path interface at the receiver

MPI-S See main path interface at the transmitter

MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching

MS Multiplex Section

MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation

MSI multi-frame structure identifier

MSOH See multiplex section overhead

MSP See multiplex section protection

MSPP multi-service provisioning platform

MST See multiplex section termination

MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance

MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTA Mail Transfer Agent

MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

multi-longitudinalmode laser

An injection laser diode which has a number of longitudinal modes.

multicast listenerdiscovery

The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directlyconnected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to whichthe hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and themulticast router can manage members on the local network.

multiframe alignmentsignal

A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, alwaysoccupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish andmaintain multiframe alignment.

multiple spanning treeinstance

Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTPwithin an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology forframes classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MSTConfiguration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.



578

Multiple SpanningTree Protocol

Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using analgorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmedas a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoidedin the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs andmultiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwardedin a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

multiplex sectionoverhead

The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOHdefinition.

multiplex sectionprotection

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between andincluding two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.

multiplex sectiontermination

The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH framesignal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.

multiplexer Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number ofaggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channelsbeing fixed.

Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higherorder path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplexsection.

Multiprotocol LabelSwitching

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different linklayers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis ofIP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability ofnetworks, and is beneficial to routing.

MUX See multiplexer

MVOA mechanical variable optical attenuator

N

NA No Acknowledgment

NCP See Network Control Protocol

NE See network element

NE database There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following:

(1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery;

(2) SDB: a static database in a power-down RAM;

(3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM.

In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the sametime. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDBto FDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database isrestored in the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, themain control restores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due tothe exhaustion of the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.



579

NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage thetelecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage andmaintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has aunique NE ID.

NE Panel A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks,boards, and ports on an NE. In the NE Panel, the user can complete most of theconfiguration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.

NE-side data The NE configuration data that is stored on the SCC board of the equipment. The NE-side data can be uploaded to the network management system(NMS) and thus is storedon the NMS side.

NEBS Network Equipment Building System

NEF See network element function

Network ControlProtocol

This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implementspath control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link.

network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. OneNE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board whichmanages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCCboard.

network elementfunction

A function block which represents the telecommunication functions and communicateswith the TMN OSF function block for the purpose of being monitored and/or controlled.

network management The process of controlling a network so as to maximize its efficiency and productivity.ISO's model divides network management into five categories: fault management,accounting management, configuration management, security management andperformance management.

Network ManagementSystem

A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.

network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.

network segment A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to allnodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.

network service accesspoint

A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer canaccess OSI network services.

Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. Itsynchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client.

NM See network management

NMS See Network Management System

NNI See network node interface

NOC network operation center

Noise figure An index that represents the degrade extent of optical signals after the signals passing asystem.

NSAP See network service access point

NTP See Network Time Protocol



580

O

OA See optical amplifier

OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer

OADM frame A frame which is used to hold the OADM boards.

OAM See operation, administration and maintenance

OC See optical coupler

OCI open connection indication

OCP See optical channel protection

OD optical demultiplexing

ODB optical duobinary

ODF See optical distribution frame

ODUk optical channel data unit-k

OEQ optical equalizer

OFC open fiber control

OLA See optical line amplifier

OLP See optical line protection

OM optical multiplexing

OMS optical multiplexing section

ONE See optical network element

Online Help The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructionsfor using their features when so requested by the user.

OOF See out of frame

OPA optical power adjust

open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra'salgorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. Alink state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routersin the area.

Open SystemsInterconnection

A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made bydifferent vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven differentcategories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message sourceand destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.

operation,administration andmaintenance

A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in anoperational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriberaccess network to users/subscribers.

OpEx; OPEX operation expenditure

OPS optical physical section



581

optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couplethe optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. Aconnector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source(or a detector).+

optical add/dropmultiplexer

A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channeland drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.

optical amplifier Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of thestimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.

optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that theoptical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It isavailable in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.

optical channel A signal transmitted at one wavelength in a fiber-optic system.

optical channelprotection

In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certainwavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the opticalchannel protection is configured.

optical coupler A coupler for coupling light in an optical system. Multiple discrete layers of alternatingoptical materials have respective first and second indexes of refraction. The thickness ofeach layer is a fraction of the light wavelength.

optical distributionframe

A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

optical line amplifier A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input opticalsignals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA isthe EDFA amplifier.

optical line protection A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and single-ended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibersforms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line isnormal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carriesline signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large.

optical networkelement

A transport entity that implements the NE functions (terminal multiplexing, add/dropmultiplexing, cross-connection and regeneration) in a DWDM layer network. The typesof ONEs include OTM, OADM, OLA, REG and OXC. The locating of an ONE isequivalent to that of a common NE. In a view, an ONE is displayed with an icon, like acommon NE and its alarm status can be displayed with colors. Logically, an ONE consistsof different subracks. Like a common NE, an ONE cannot be expanded or entered likea sub-network. Similar to a common NE, an ONE provides a list of the subracks thatform the NE to display the board layout.

optical signal-to-noiseratio

The most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. The ratioof signal power and noise power in a transmission link. That is, OSNR = signal power/noise power.

optical spectrumanalyzer

A device that allows the details of a region of an optical spectrum to be resolved.Commonly used to diagnose DWDM systems.

optical supervisorychannel

A technology that realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission networkand transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the workingchannel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm).

Optical switch A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects,or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.



582

optical time domainreflectometer

A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication systemand measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the lightloss and locate the fiber fault.

optical transmissionsection

Optical transmission section allows the network operator to perform monitoring andmaintenance tasks between NEs.

optical transponderunit

A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.

optical transportnetwork

A network that uses the optical signal to transmit data

optical wavelengthshared protection

In the optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP), the service protection betweendifferent stations can be achieved by using the same wavelength, realizing wavelengthsharing. This saves the wavelength resources and lowers the cost. The optical wavelengthshared protection is mainly applied to the ring network which is configured withdistributed services. It is achieved by using the OWSP board. In a ring network whereservices are distributed at adjacent stations, each station requires one OWSP board. Then,two wavelengths are enough for configuring the shared protection to protect one serviceamong stations.

OPU optical channel payload unit

OPUk optical channel payload unit-k

orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers ormaintenance engineers of different stations.

original equipmentmanufacturer

An original equipment manufacturer, or OEM is typically a company that uses acomponent made by a second company in its own product, or sells the product of thesecond company under its own brand.

OSA See optical spectrum analyzer

OSC See optical supervisory channel

OSI See Open Systems Interconnection

OSN optical switch node

OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio

OSPF See open shortest path first

OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer

OTM optical terminal multiplexer

OTN See optical transport network

OTS See optical transmission section

OTU See optical transponder unit

OTUk optical channel transport unit-k

out of frame An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specifiednumber of consecutive frame bit positions.

Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

overhead cabling Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.

OWSP See optical wavelength shared protection



583

P

PA pre-amplifier

packet over SDH/SONET

A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POSinterface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport ofpacket data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.

packet switchednetwork

A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.

Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.

Paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on thebackplane.

pass-through The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any givendirection of transmission.

PBS See peak burst size

PCB See printed circuit board

PCC protection communication channel

PCC See policy and charging control

PCS See physical coding sublayer

PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy

PDL See polarization dependent loss

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PE Provider Edge

peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burstIP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. Thisparameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be notless than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

peak information rate Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should benot less than the committed information rate.

Performance register Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min historyperformance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSESregister. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, soevery board functional module has a performance register. A performance register isused to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, soas to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.

PGND protection ground

phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency ofa voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-frequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with theincoming or reference frequency.

PHY See physical sublayer & physical layer



584

physical codingsublayer

The PCS further helps to define physical layer specifications for 10 gigabit Ethernet afterhaving been broken down into their Physical Media Dependent Sublayer or PMD. Eachsublayer places the 10GBASE standards into either LAN or WAN specifications.

physical sublayer &physical layer

1. physical sublayer: One of two sublayers of the FDDI physical layer. 2. physical layer:In ATM, the physical layer provides the transmission of cells over a physical mediumthat connects two ATM devices. The PHY is comprised of two sublayers: PMD and TC

PID photonics integrated device

PIM-DM protocol independent multicast-dense mode

PIM-SM See protocol independent multicast sparse mode

PIN See Positive Intrinsic Negative

PIR See peak information rate

plesiochronous digitalhierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimumrate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

PLL See phase-locked loop

PMD polarization mode dispersion

PMI payload missing indication

POH path overhead

point to multipoint A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations(from one to many).

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulatesdata packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.

Point-to-Point Protocolover Ethernet

PPPoE, point-to-point protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulatingPPP frames in Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with DSL services. It offers standardPPP features such as authentication, encryption, and compression.

Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect tothe frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.

polarization dependentloss

The maximum, peak-to-peak insertion loss (or gain) variation caused by a componentwhen stimulated by all possible polarization states. It is specified in dB units.

policy and chargingcontrol

Short for Policy and Charging Control, the PCC is defined in 3GPP R7. The PCCprovides the QoS control and service-based charging functions in the wireless bearernetwork.

POS See packet over SDH/SONET

Positive IntrinsicNegative

Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- andn-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers.

Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which suppliespower for the subracks in the cabinet.

power distribution box A power box through which the power enters the cabinet and is re-distributed to variouscomponents, at the mean time, the Power Distribution Box protects the electric devicesfrom current overload.

PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol

PPPoE See Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet



585

PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence

PRC primary reference clock

PRI See primary rate interface

primary rate interface An interface consisting of 23 channel Bs and a 64 kbit/s channel D that uses the T1 line,or consisting of 30 channel Bs and a channel D that uses the E1 line.

printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic componentsusing conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated ontoa non-conductive substrate.

protection groundcable

A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, onehalf of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.

Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

Protection policy In case the service route provides multiple service protections, different protectionpolicies can be selected as required. Protection policy refers to the protection mode giventhe priority in use for the trail: protection, no protection, and extra traffic. Of the above,the protection preference is divided into trail protection and subnet connectionprotection.

Protection service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

protocol independentmulticast sparse mode

It is applicable to large-scale multicast networks with scattered members.

pseudo random binarysequence

A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of thevalues of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.

PSI payload structure identifier

PSN See packet switched network

PSTN See public switched telephone network

PT payload type

PTMP See point to multipoint

PTN packet transport network

PTP Point-To-Point

public switchedtelephone network

A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the publicsubscribers. Sometimes called POTS.

Q

QA Q adaptation

QoS See quality of service

quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet lossratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of thetransmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of aservice provider to meet the demands of users.



586

R

radio networkcontroller

An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity ofthe radio resources.

RAI remote alarm indication

RAM See random access memory

random access memory Semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the central processing unit(CPU) or other hardware devices. The storage locations can be accessed in any order.Note that the various types of ROM memory are capable of random access but cannotbe written to. The term RAM, however, is generally understood to refer to volatilememory that can be written to as well as read.

Rapid Spanning TreeProtocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning treeconvergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible withthe STP protocol.

Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average receivedpower at point R to achieve a 10-12 (The FEC is open).

reconfiguration opticaladd/drop multiplexer

The WDM equipment supports the ROADM. It flexibly and dynamically adjusts add/drop wavelengths of sites on the network by adjusting the pass-through or block statusof any wavelength without affecting the service transmission in the main optical channel.This implements wavelength allocation among sites on the network. After the ROADMis used, the existing services are not affected during upgrade. The wavelength can bemodified quickly and efficiently during network maintenance, which reducesmaintenance cost. In addition, the ROADM supports the equalization for optical power,which equalizes the optical power at the channel level.

Reed Solomon Code A type of forward error correcting codes invented in 1960 by Irving Reed and GustaveSolomon, which has become commonplace in modern digital communications.

reference clock A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocksfor reference.

Reflectance The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.

REG A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.

Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.

REI Remote Error Indication

Resource ReservationProtocol

The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and isused to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transportlayer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network controlprotocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).

RF Radio Frequency

RFC Requirement for Comments

RFI remote failure indication

ring network A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes,forming a circular pathway for signals.

RIP See Routing Information Protocol



587

RMON remote network monitoring

RNC See radio network controller

ROADM See reconfiguration optical add/drop multiplexer

route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.

Routing InformationProtocol

A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a routebased on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vectorprotocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and isknown to waste bandwidth.

RS Code See Reed Solomon Code

RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It cancommunicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and thetransmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.

RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol

RZ return to zero code

S

S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock referencesource through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronizationof the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NEwill trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protectionswitching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock qualityinformation of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte totransmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of themultiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization qualitygrades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can beimplemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.

Safe control switch The IPA safe switch is set in consideration of the long-span networking requirement,which cannot allow too low output optical power. If the safe control switch is turned off,IPA restarting optical power is the specified output power of the OAU. Otherwise, theIPA restarting optical power is restricted to less than 10 dBm.

SAN See storage area network

SAP service access point

SAPI source access point identifiers

SBS stimulated Brillouin scattering

SC See square connector

SD See signal degrade

SD trigger flag SD stands for signal degrade. The SD trigger flag determines whether to perform aswitching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the networkmanagement system.

SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy



588

SDI See Serial Digital Interface

SDP serious disturbance period

Search domain Search field refers to the range of IP addresses being searched. In the TCP/IP, the IPaddresses include: Category A address (1.0.0.0---126.255.255.255). For example,10.*.*.*, whose search field is 10.255.255.255, all 10.*.*.* to be searched. Category Baddress (128.0.0.0---191. 255. 255. 255). For example, 129.9.*.*, whose search field is129.9.255.255, all 129.9.*.* to be searched. Category C address (192.0.0.0---223. 255.255. 255). For example, 192.224.9.*, whose search field is 192.224.9.255, all192.224.9.* to be searched. Category D address (224.0.0.0---230.255.255.255), whichis reserved. Category E address (240.0.0.0---247.255.255.255), which is reserved. Net-id 127.*.*.*, in which .*.*.* can be any number. This net-ID is a local address.

Secure File TransferProtocol

A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.

Self-healing Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without theNMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is foundby the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at thattime.

Serial Digital Interface An interface for transmitting digital signals.

Serial Line InterfaceProtocol

Serial Line Interface Protocol, defines the framing mode over the serial line to implementtransmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnectionfunction with a known IP address.

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies theforwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLAmay include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreementas a whole or partially.

Service protection A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.

SES See severely errored second

SETS See synchronous equipment timing source

settings Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.

severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio >= 10-3 or at least one defect. Timeinterval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratiogreater than 10-3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction) .

SF See signal fail

SFP See small form-factor pluggable

SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol

shock-proof reinforce A process by which the cabinet is fastened to the wiring frame or the top of the equipmentroom so that the cabinet stands stably.

shortcut menu A menu that is displayed when right-clicking an object's name or icon. This is alsoreferred to a context menu.

side door The side door of a cabinet is used to protect the equipment inside the cabinet againstunexpected touch and environment impact.



589

side mode suppressionratio

The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the totalsource spectrum to the second largest peak.

side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix thecabinet.

signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscribersignal cable.

signal degrade A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect(e.g., dDEG) condition is active.

signal fail A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defectcondition (non-degrade defect) is active.

signal to noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at agiven point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio andis usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

Simple NetworkManagement Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modifythe management information of a network element. This protocol ensures thetransmission of management information between any two points. The pollingmechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, whichcan be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on thenetwork and report these activities to the network console workstation. Controlinformation about each device is maintained by a management information block.

single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end ofthe protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectionalfailure.

single-mode fiber A type of fiber optic cable through which only one type of light signal with a fixed wavelength can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10microns. This type of fiber is used to transmit data in long distance.

SLA See service level agreement

SLIP See Serial Line Interface Protocol

SLM single longitudinal mode

SM section monitoring

small form-factorpluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.

SMF See single-mode fiber

SMSR See side mode suppression ratio

SNCP See subnetwork connection protection

SNCTP See subnetwork connection tunnel protection

SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR See signal to noise ratio

soft permanentconnections

An ASON connection which features flexible and dynamic adjustment of routes. SPCincludes different classes of services (CoS).

SONET See synchronous optical network



590

span The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spansdetermines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and variesaccording to transmission system type.

Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundantnetwork to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prunea loop network into a loop-free tree network.

SPC See soft permanent connections

SPM self phase modulation

SQL See structured query language

square connector Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style".

SRLG Shared Risk Link Group

SRS stimulated Raman scattering

SSM See Synchronization Status Message

SSMB synchronization status message byte

SSU synchronization supply unit

STM Synchronous Transfer Mode

STM-1 See synchronous transport mode 1

STM-4 Synchronous Transport Module of order 4

storage area network An architecture to attach remote computer storage devices such as disk array controllers,tape libraries and CD arrays to servers in such a way that to the operating system thedevices appear as locally attached devices.

STP See Spanning Tree Protocol

structured querylanguage

A database query and programming language widely used for accessing, querying,updating, and managing data in relational database systems.

sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group ofnetwork management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected orcorrelated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clocksubnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, asub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions andclosely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on atopological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-networkplanning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view spacecan be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus onthe equipments under their management.

sub-network number A number used to differentiate network sections in a sub-network conference. A sub-network ID consists of the first several digits (one or two) of a user phone number. Anoderwire phone number consists of the sub-network ID and the user number.

subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets aredestined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,server or router and is matched with the IP address.

subnetwork connectionprotection

A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protectionsubnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performancefalls below a required level.



591

subnetwork connectiontunnel protection

SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty,the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.

support A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor, it is made of welded steelplates and is used to block the cabinets up, thus facilitating floor paving and cabling.Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed underthe supports, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to satisfythe insulation requirements.

Suppression state An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppressionstatus, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will notoccur even when the alarm conditions are met.

Switching priority There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributaryboard switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set thesame, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higherpriority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.

Synchronization StatusMessage

A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clockinformation through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on theirclocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward thesynchronization information to downstream nodes.

synchronize NE time To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so asto synchronize all NEs with the server.

synchronous digitalhierarchy

A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines thetransmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speedcounterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH issuitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity sinceit uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

synchronousequipment timingsource

The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts ofmultiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock.

synchronous opticalnetwork

A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers toconnect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple datatypes (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiplesof this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second).

synchronous transportmode 1

Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.

T

TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring

TCP See Transmission Control Protocol

TDM See time division multiplexing

TE See traffic engineering



592

TelecommunicationManagement Network

A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communicationsnetwork. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networksand services.

terminal multiplexer A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signalsinto one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signalsinto multiple channels of low rate signals.

TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol

TIM trace identifier mismatch

time divisionmultiplexing

A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3 and so on), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engrosstime slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to betransmitted over one channel.

Time Slot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are ableto interconnect.

Time Synchronization Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that thesynchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signalskeeps consistent with the UTC time.

time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in thenetwork. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.

TL1 See Transaction Language 1

TLV Type/Length/Value

TM See terminal multiplexer

TMN See Telecommunication Management Network

TP traffic Policing

traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the loadof the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic managementparameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize theutilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused byunbalanced loads.

Transaction Language1

Transaction Language One is a widely used telecommunications management protocol.TL1 is a vendor-independent and technology-independent man-machine language. TL1facilities can be provided as part of an OSS for interacting with either underlyingmanagement systems or NEs. One popular application is for a management system (orNE) to package its trap/notification data in TL1 format and forward it to an OSScomponent. ...(from authors.phptr.com/morris/glossary.html) Transaction Language 1(TL1) is a widely used, "legacy", management protocol in telecommunications. It is across-vendor, cross-technology man-machine language, and is widely used to manageoptical (SONET) and broadband access infrastructure in North America. It is defined inGR-831 by Bellcore (now Telcordia). (from en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TL1)



593

Transmission ControlProtocol

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets tobe sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the completemessages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliablein the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer inthe ISO/OSI reference model.

tray A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.

tributary unit group One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way thatmixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructedto increase flexibility of the transport network

Trivial File TransferProtocol

A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended forapplications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTPrestricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP issmall enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines.

trTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker

TTI trail trace identifier

TTL See time to live

TU tributary unit

TUG See tributary unit group

U

UAS unavailable second

UAT See unavailable time event

UDP See User Datagram Protocol

unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severelyerrored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. Theevent will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than within 10 consecutiveseconds.

UNI See user network interface

universal timecoordinated

The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintainedatomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide.

Unprotected Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannotbe switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service isinterrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.

upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(NetworkManagement system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data storedat the NMS side.

Upper subrack The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.

User A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operationrights of a user in the NMS.



594

User DatagramProtocol

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send adatagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IPto deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliableconnectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet isreceived.

user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (forexample, ATM switches).

UTC See universal time coordinated

V

VB virtual bridge

VC See virtual container

VCG See virtual concatenation group

VCI See virtual channel identifier

virtual channelidentifier

A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used toidentify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches onits way to its destination.

virtual concatenationgroup

A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the samevirtual concatenation link

virtual container The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consistsof information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a blockframe structure which repeats every 125 μs or 500 μs.

virtual local areanetwork

A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physicalnetwork segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associatedwith switched Ethernet.

virtual path identifier The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to whichVP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.

virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network viaconnections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.

VLAN See virtual local area network

VOA Variable Optical Attenuator

voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voiceinformation over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital formin discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of thepublic switched telephone network (PSTN).

VoIP See voice over IP

VPI See virtual path identifier

VPN See virtual private network

VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol



595

W

WAN See wide area network

wavelength divisionmultiplexing

A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation ofsingle mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiplechannels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.

Wavelength protectiongroup

The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protectionstructure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. Thewavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of thewavelength protection group.

WDM See wavelength division multiplexing

WEEE waste electrical and electronic equipment

wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which arephysically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as aprovince, a state or even a country.

Working path The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.

Working service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.

WRR weighted round Robin

WSS wavelength selective switching

WTR Wait To Restore

WXCP wavelength cross-connection protection

WXCP service The WXCP service is also called the GE ADM protection service. The WXCP is a typeof channel protection based on ring network. It adopts the dual fed and selective receivingprinciple and uses the cross-connection function to achieve service switching betweenworking and protection channels.

X

XFP 10Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable

XPM cross-phase modulation



596

Documents

Configuration Guide(V100R006C001 02)